Home

CubeSuite Ver.1.40 Integrated Development Environment User`s

1. Repeat RESET B 6 4 Project file The following table shows the setting information of the Visual C project file of the Timer model Table B 6 Setting Information of Timer Model Project type Win32 Dynamic Link Library Path of include file Folder storing suo h R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 524 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 6 5 Details of program The following shows the sample programs of the timer model 1 Source file of timer model uo_timer c 2 Simulator configuration file Ssmplus cfg 3 Source file of target program lm_timer c 1 Source file of timer model uo_timer c include lt windows h gt include suo h Handle SuoHandle hTIM SuoHandle hPIN Wave Table define MAXWAVE 8 struct WaveTable unsigned longtime Wait Time usec int pinValue Pin Value SUO HIGH or SUO LOW waveTable MAXWAVE 1000 SUO HIGH 4000 SUO LOW 2000 SUO HICH 2000 SUO LOW 4000 SUO HIGH 1000 SUO LOW 2000 SUO HIGH 2000 SUO LOW E int wavelIndex Declare void Reset void void NotifyTimer SuoHandle handle void puterr int error MakeUserModel void SuoUserEntry MakeUserModel const char option int error Create interface if error SuoCreateTimer TIM amp hTIM SUO NOERROR puterr error return R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00
2. Argument s handle Location where the handle of the serial interface is to be stored Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to generate a serial interface UART type The generated serial interface is associated with the name specified for seria Name In addition pins specified as pinNameTXD and pinNameRXD are also generated If this function is successful the handle of the generated serial interface can be obtained The serial interface can then be controlled by specifying this handle The handle can also be obtained by using the SuoGetSerialHandle function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 485 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Example include suo h SuoHandle hUartl1 SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option SuoCreateSerialUART UART1 TXD1 RXD1 amp hbUart1 Create UARTI R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 486 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoCreateSerialCSI Generates serial interface CSI type Caution This function can only be called in the MakeUserModel function An error occurs if it is called at any other timing Syntax include suo h int SuoCreateSerialCSI const char serialName const char pinNameSO const char pinNameSI const char pinNam
3. Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select the items to configure from the following categories ooren General External Tools category Configure the startup of external tools General Build Debug category Configure building and debugging General Update category Configure updating Others User Information category Configure user information R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 344 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Setting area This area is used to configure the various options for the selected category For details about configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restore all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 345 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Font and Color category Use this category to configure general settings relating to fonts and colors on each panel Figure A 70 Option Dialog Box General Font and Color Category Option General Font and Color L Startup and E it Display Text Editor setting place Font and Color Detault _ Use default color External ools Warning m ty Update Reserved word EL
4. Changing the frequency division ratio here changes the number of clocks necessary to count up a counter value which is displayed in the time tag Accumulate trace time Simulator Rate of frequency division of trace time tag flECUBE Simulator Default IECUBE 1 1 20ns 1 4min Simulator 1 1 Modifying Select from the drop down list Available IECUBE values 1 1 20ns 1 4min 2 40ns 2 8min 1 4 80ns 5 7min 1 8 160ns 11 4min 1 16 320ns 22 8min 1 32 640ns 45 6min 1 64 1280ns 1 5h 1 128 2560ns 3 0h 1 256 5120ns 6 0h 1 512 10240ns 12 2h 1 1024 20480ns 24 4h 1 2048 40960ns 48 8h 1 4096 81920ns 97 6h Values in indicate the resolution and the maximum measurement time when using a time tag counter of 32 bit and a external clock of 50 MHz Simulator 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 82 1 64 1 128 1 256 1 512 1 1K 1 4K 1 8K 1 16K 1 64K 1 256K 1 1M R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 211 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note 2 Trace memory size frames Specify the memory size for storing the trace data by the trace frame numbers Default IECUBE IECUBE2 8K Simulator 4K Modifying Select from the drop down list Available IECUBE values 8K 32K 64K 128K 256K IECUBE2 8K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K Simulator 4K 8K 12K 16K 20K 24K 28K 32K 36K 40K 44K 48K 52K 56K
5. f Coverage You can configure the coverage function in this category See 2 13 Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator for details on the coverage function and this category configuration g Simulator GUI You can configure the Simulator GUI function in this category See 2 17 Use the Simulator GUI Simulator for details on the Simulator GUI function and this category configuration Download File Settings tab In the Download File Settings tab configuration on downloading file to the debug tool can be done See 2 5 1 Execute downloading for details on each category configuration Flash Options Settings tab V850E2M In the Flash Options Settings tab V850E2M configuration on options for the flash memory incorporated in the V850E2M microcontroller can be done To configure options specify the corresponding items on the Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M that is opened by clicking the button appears at the right of the field by selecting the Flash options property in the Flash Options category on this tab the button appears only while connecting to the debug tool Click the Write button on this dialog box after specifying each item See Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M for details on the configuration Figure 2 99 Opening the Flash Options Setting Dialog Box O Flash Options AEE F2sh option R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 64 of 538 Oct 01 2010 Cub
6. 206 U Unconditional Trace 301 Unconditional Trace event 133 157 Union 271 277 CENESAS Page 533 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C INDEX Upload 67 77 78 Use hook function 162 User model 446 User open interface 443 User defined functions 510 InitFunc 513 InputAnalogPinFunc 517 InoputDigitalPinFunc 516 InputHighImpedanceFunc MakeUserModel 511 NotifySentSerialFunc 521 NotifySentWaveFunc 523 NotifyTimerFunc 515 ReadExtbusFunc 519 ReceiveSerialFunc 522 ResetFunc 514 WriteExtbusFunc 520 v Verify 204 W Watch panel 275 Watch expression 119 275 Window reference 170 WriteExtbusFunc 520 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 tENESAS Page 534 of 538 Revision Record Description Rev Oct 01 2010 First Edition issued CubeSuite Ver 1 40 User s Manual V850 Debug Publication Date Rev 1 00 Oct1 2010 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe
7. Entry Bitmap 4ctive Bitmap Loammon bitmap iParts_on bmp icai Inactive Bitmap Loammon bitmap iParts_off bmp deal Delete button Deletes the currently selected bitmap from the selection list Note that only the bitmap that have been added by user can be deleted 2 Preview area This area displays the style of the LED currently being specified Function buttons Button Function Operation In the Simulation mode the output status active inactive of the connected pins is displayed in real time using two types of bitmaps or figures Figure A 102 Connected Parts Display Example LED wn I o lt 2 m gt R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 412 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Parts Segment LED Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of 7 segment LED and 14 segment LED which are one of the connection parts in the O Panel window A LED connected to pins displays the information output from the simulator in the Simulation mode The segment LED display styles can be changed on the Style tab Figure A 103 Parts Segment LED Properties Dialog Box SegmentLED Connection Tab Parts Seement LED Properties f seementLED Connection Style Grid type Digit Segment Signal Digit Signal Pin Hame Pin Hame 0 J v Active Level LOW G HIGH Active Leve
8. This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Remark When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 42 CPU Register Panel CPU Register Toolbar lt Ell Notation Heg Register Name Value af System Registers AH PC Ox00000 Fel EIPC Ox00000000 HH EPS 0x0 0000000 E FEPC Ox0 0000000 FERS 0x00 000000 mHE ECR Ox0 0000000 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu CPU Register panel dedicated items Edit menu CPU Register panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select CPU Register Description of each area 1 Register Name area The types of register are classified as categories folders and a list of the respective register names Is displayed Note that neither category names nor register names can be edited and deleted The meanings of the icons are as follows Indicates that the register name belonging to this category is displayed When you double click on the icon or click on the mark the category is closed and the register name is hidden Indicates that the register name belonging to this category is hidden When you double click on the icon or click on the mark the category is opened and the register name is displayed
9. You can change the color by clicking the pull down button Dotted Solid Line Specifies and changes the line shape dotted solid The desired line shape can be selected from the drop down list The line shape can be specified only when the line thickness is 1 in Thickness of Line Thickness of Line Specifies and changes the line thickness The desired line thickness can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the spin button A value in the range of 1 to 100 decimal can be specified R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 415 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Help Displays the help for this dialog box Operation In the Simulation mode as the results of 1 simulation the output information of the connection pins is received and dis play is performed accordingly When both the digit grid signals and segment signals are active output the segment LED of the corresponding digit grid light Figure A 105 Connected Parts Display Example 7 segment LED R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 416 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Parts Matrix Led Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of matrix LED which are one of the connection parts in the O Panel window A pin connected matrix LED displays the information output from the simu
10. 39 50 195 Open break function 207 Operating environment 18 Option dialog box 344 General Build Debug category 351 General Font and Color category 346 Output panel 307 P Parts Button Properties dialog box 393 Parts Buzzer Properties dialog box 421 Parts Key Properties dialog box 401 Parts Led Properties dialog box 410 Parts Level Gauge Properties dialog box 406 Parts List dialog box 431 Parts Matrix Led Properties dialog box 417 Parts Segment LED Properties dialog box 413 PE 2 179 Pin interface functions 468 SuoCreatePin 469 SuoGetPinHandle 470 SuoOutputAnalogPin 472 SuoOutputDigitalPin 471 SuoOutputHighImpedance 473 SuoSetInputAnalogPinCallback 475 SuoSetlnputDigitalPinCalloack 474 SuoSetinputHighImpedanceCallback 476 Point Trace 301 Point Trace event 134 Pointer type variable 277 Pointer variables 271 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 531 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C INDEX Pop up display of variables 234 Printf 300 301 Printf event 154 324 Processor element 179 Program register 113 256 Programmable I O area 23 40 51 61 198 Progress Status dialog box 343 Project Tree panel 181 Property panel 184 Flash Options Settings tab 227 Connect Settings tab 187 Data Flash Emulation Settings
11. 397 Array 271 277 Auto variables 271 B Basic interface functions 457 SuoGetMainClock 460 SuoSetlnitCallback 458 SuoSsetResetCallback 459 Binary data format 72 Boot block cluster 31 Boot swap 30 220 Break 43 54 63 Break cause 293 Breakpoint 95 Built in event 133 305 306 C Call stack information 287 Call Stack panel 287 Callback function 444 Clock 21 38 49 60 Code 250 Code coverage 149 Collect execution history of program 126 Collect Execution History of the Program 126 Clear the trace memory 138 Collect execution history from the start to stop of the execution 132 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section 133 INDEX Collect execution history when the condition is met 134 Configure the trace operation 126 Display collected execution history 136 Save the contents of execution history 143 Search the trace data 138 Configuration 61 Configure the trace operation 126 Connect to disconnect from debug tool 66 Control register 113 256 Coverage Measurement 149 Configure the coverage measurement 149 Display the coverage measurement result 151 CPU Register panel 256 Current PC mark 233 249 Current PC position 233 249 Customize dialog box 365 D Data coverage 149 Data flash emulation function 32 Data flash memory 239 Data Save dia
12. Dedicated probe USB interface cable D MINICUBE2 Host machine CubeSuite Target system R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 16 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 E1 Connect a host machine and E1 If required connect a target board too See E1 User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 5 Connection Example E1 i Dedicated probe USB interface cable Host machine CubeSuite Target system Remark You can make a choice between serial communications E1 Serial and JTAG communications E1 JTAG as the communication method to the target system see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use 6 Simulator A host machine is only needed for debugging emulators are not needed Figure 2 6 Connection Example Simulator Host machine CubeSuite R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 17 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Configuration of Operating Environment of the Debug Tool This section describes the configuration of the operating environment for each debug tool 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use You can configure the operating environment in the Property panel corresponding to the debug tool to use Therefore first select the debug tool to be used in a project the debug tool to be used can be specified in the individual projects To select or switch the debug tool use the context menu shown by right clic
13. Figure 2 152 Trace Category Simulator El Trace Use trace function Mo Clear trace memory before running Yes Operation after trace memory is Tull Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Gecumulate trace time Mo Trace memory size lframes AK Rate of frequency division of trace time tag 1 1 a Use trace function Specify whether to use trace function from the drop down list in this property Select Yes to use the trace function No is selected by default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 131 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Clear trace memory before running Specify from the drop down list whether to clear initialize the trace memory before tracing starts in this property Select Yes to clear the memory default Remark You can forcibly clear the trace memory when clicking the button in the toolbar in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator c Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation after the trace memory is full with the collected trace data from the following drop down list Non stop and overwrite to Continues overwriting the older trace data after the trace memory is full default trace memory When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to Yes at the time of a resumption the trace data is collected after clearing the trace memory Stop trace When the trace memory is full the trace data stops writing the progra
14. Function buttons How to open On the Memory panel select Find from the context menu Description of each area 1 Search Data area Specify data to search You can either type a value directly into the text box up to 256 bytes or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items If the search is performed in the Memory value area of the Memory panel the value must be entered in the same display format notation and size as that area If the search is performed in the Character string area then the target of the search must be a string The specified string is converted into the encoding format displayed in that area and searched for If a memory value was selected immediately prior to opening this dialog box then that value will appear as default 2 Search Range area Select the range to search from the following drop down list Specify address range Searches in the address range specified in the Address area Memory mapping Searches within the selected memory mapping range This list item displays the memory mappings set in the Memory Mapping dialog box except the non mapped area Display format lt memory type gt lt address range gt lt size gt R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 330 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Address area This item is only enabled if Specify address range is selected in the Search Range ar
15. Opens the Font dialog box below The font of the selected object can be changed to the selected font in this dialog box Font style Aharon a Cancel FP AngsanaUPC i F Arabic Transparent O Arial Aral Black ba Effects Strikeout Underline Color B Black Tipit Dotted Line Style p Selects the dotted line style from a cascade menu The lines of the selected object are changed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 388 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu In the Edit mode the following context menus are available Pastes the contents of the clipboard Deletes the selected objects Selects from a cascade menu Groups the selected objects Ungroups the selected objects Select rom a cascade menu Brings the selected object to the front Sends the selected object to the back Bring Forward Brings the selected object one panel forward Sends the selected object one panel backward Opens the property dialog box of the selected figure part object Operation How to create objects figure objects and part objects to construct a dummy target system and manipulate them is as follows 1 Edit mode 2 Creating figure objects 3 Creating part objects 4 Placing objects 5 Inputting text 6 List display of objects 7 The detailed setting for objects 8 Simulation mode 1 Edit m
16. Overflow detection included Depends on the clock frequency for timer trace Depends on the clock frequency for timer trace Table 2 18 Measurable Time Ranges V850E2M Debug Tool Run Break Timer Event Timer Result Event sco SD 3 Approx 24 hours time for 4K cycles Approx 24 hours time for 4K cycles Overflow detection included Elapsed cycles counter 16 bit Overflow detection included E 1 JTAG Approx 7 min time for TCK DCK 10 MHz Overflow detection included Depends on the clock frequency for timer trace Depends on the clock frequency for timer trace R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 148 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator This section describes the coverage measurement using the coverage function Although there are several types of coverage measurement CubeSuite measures code coverage CO coverage based on fetch size for a source line function and data coverage IECUBE2 Simulator based on access size for a variable The coverage measurement area is as follows Table 2 19 Coverage Measurement Area Debug Tool Code Coverage Measurement Area V850E1 IECUBE Both area below V850ES Simulator 1 MByte space of addresses 0x000000 to OxOFFFFF fixed measurement areas Any 1 MByte space other than the internal ROM area see 2 13 1 Configure the coverage measurement V850E2M IECUBE2 4 MBytes space of the int
17. System Operates with main clock default Operates with the clock that the program specified lt 5 gt TCK DCK clock MHz MINICUBE Specify a clock supplied from MINICUBE to the on chip debug unit DCU from the drop down list The drop down list displays the following frequency values 10MHz default 20MHz Cautions 1 Normally do not change the setting from 10MHz When 20MHZ is specified it may not be possible to connect to the debug tool 2 This property cannot be changed while connecting to MINICUBE d Connection with Target Board You can configure the connection to the target board in this category Figure 2 44 Connection with Target Board Category MINICUBE2 O Connection with Target Board Communication method UART AU lt 1 gt Communication method Specify the port from the drop down list to which to connect MINICUBE2 when performing serial communication between MINICUBE2 and the device in the target system The type of the port in the drop down list differs depending on the selected microcontroller Note however that if the port that can be used for serial communication is limited by the currently selected microcontroller it is not possible to change the communication method displayed by default the default communication method depends on the currently selected microcontroller Caution This property cannot be changed while connecting to MINICUBE2 e Flash You can configure the flash memory rewr
18. The address range is not valid Already being transmitted New transmission cannot be started because transmission is in progress R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 509 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 5 User Defined Functions This section describes the user defined functions that user creates The user defined functions are listed below Table B 5 List of User Defined Functions NotifySentWaveFunc Serial interface reception callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 510 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE MakeUserModel Creates the resources to be used as the entry function of the user model Caution Because MakeUserModel is a static entry function of the user model this function name must be used Syntax include suo h SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option Argumeni s option Option character string specified in the simulator configuration file Note that if no option is specified in the simulator configuration file NULL character is assumed Return value None Description This function must be used to generate the resources to be used with the user model Any function other than this function cannot generate the resources This function must be used to register a callback function as necessary In particular an initialization callback func tion mus
19. fuo Pointer to the user defined function that performs initialization processing see InitFunc Return value None Description This function registers the user defined function that performs initialization processing The function registered by this function is called only once when Simulator GUI is started If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include suo h void InitFunc void MakeUserModel SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option SuoSetInitCallback InitFunc Set initialize function Initialize function void InitFunc void R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 458 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetResetCallback Registers reset callback Syntax include suo h void SuoSetResetCallback SuoResetCallback func Argumeni s fune Pointer to the user defined function that performs reset processing see ResetFunc Return value None Description This function registers the user defined function that performs reset processing The registered function is called when the CPU is reset If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include suo h void ResetFunc void void funcl void SuoSetResetCallback ResetFunc Set reset function Reset function void ResetFunc void R20UT0264EJ0100
20. samples global a 10 Usa Stopped by user operation l EOF Output string Sample Variable expression global_a The result of the specification above All Messages 4 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 155 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 Manage Events An event represents a certain status of the target system when debugging such as Address 0x1000 is fetched and Data is written to address 0x2000 In CubeSuite these events are used as the action trigger of the debug function such as breakpoint start stop the tracing and start stop the timer This section describes how to manage those events Select the View menu gt gt Event Events are all managed in the Events panel In the Events panel you can confirm the details of the currently set events in a list and they can be deleted and changed enable disable status For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Events panel Figure 2 175 Manage Events Events Panel Events Tooter xojo Name Detail Information Comment Unconditional Trace a v Trace Start Ende Detail Information start Execution mamci id Oxet End Execution main c 113 0x01 Hame Detail Information Comment E H ES Timer Result Total 4500 ns Start End 2 Run Break Timer Total2244000 ne Name area Detail Information area Comment area 2 15 1 Change the state of set events valid inv
21. shape Click any location gt The corresponding part object is created and placed with the clicked location as the top left corner default size b Changing the part object style The style of the created part object can be changed via the Style tab of the corresponding property dialog box opened by double clicking the part object For details on the modifiable items see the section of the property dialog box which is corresponding to the part object the items differ depending on the part object 4 Placing objects a Grid display A grid is displayed by selecting the View menu gt gt Grid R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 390 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Selecting objects The selected types and methods are indicated below The selected object s is displayed surrounded by a tracker indicating its selected status Single selection Click the object to be selected Multiple selections Click the objects to be selected while pressing the Shift key Range selection Drag from the top left corner of the area including the object to be selected and drop at the lower right cor ner Select all Select Edit menu gt gt Select All c Moving objects After selecting the object to be moved multiple selections possible then drag and drop it at the move destina tion Remark Objects can be moved using the arrow keys on the keyboard If more than half
22. C OD D me o lt S C D CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual V850 Debug Target Device V850 Microcontroller All information contained in these materials including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics www renesas com Rev 1 00 Oct 2010 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted h
23. Download files property in the Download category Caution This dialog box cannot be opened during execution of a program Description of each area 1 Download file list area a List display Displays a list of files to download The names of files specified as build targets in a project main project or sub project are displayed by default they can be removed Files are downloaded in the order that they are displayed here To add a new file to be downloaded click the Add button in this area then in the Download file property area specify the download conditions of the file to add R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 316 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Button Up Moves the selected file up one row in the list Clicking this for the top file in the list has no effect Moves the selected file down one row in the list Clicking this for the bottom file in the list has no effect Adds an empty item to the list and selects it Specify the download conditions of the file to add in the Download file property area Note that this button will be disabled if 20 files have already been registered Delete Deletes the selected file from the list Note however that this button is disabled if the selected file is a project build target Remarks 1 By superimposing the mouse cursor on a file name the pass information of the file is pop up displayed 2 By dr
24. File menu Disassemble panel dedicated items Edit menu Disassemble panel dedicated items Context menu _ ygteminittix _THPO Start T ma into x6 ixi maint CLOCK Initt 0x2 ro WOTH 0x0 PLLOTL xl ril ril PARCHE Pll PEC 0x0 RCM 0x4 FRSMU _THPO Start T maint xh ixi _mainti x R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2 CENESAS Page 248 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open From the View menu select Disassemble gt gt Disassemble 1 4 Description of each area 1 Event area The lines for which events can be set are shown with the background color in white this mean that events cannot be set for those lines whose background color in gray In addition the Event mark corresponding to an event that has been currently set is displayed This area is provided with the following functions a b c Setting deleting breakpoints By clicking where you want to set a breakpoint with the mouse the breakpoint can be set easily The breakpoint is set to the instruction at the start address of the clicked line Once the breakpoint is set the Event mark is displayed at the line that is set In addition the detailed information about the set breakpoint is reflected in the Events panel When this operation is performed at a place where any one of the event marks is already being displayed that event is deleted and t
25. Memory gt gt Memory 7 4 The maximum of 4 Memory panels can be opened Each panel is identified by the names Memory1 Memory2 Memory3 and Memory4 on the title bar For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Memory panel Figure 2 130 Display the Memory Contents When the Microcontroller without Data Flash Memory Memory Toolbar al Notations Size Notations Encoding Demens Aha 3 4 h h 7 8 9 ta th c d te f OOO OOOO OOO OUT 0 QUO 0020 QUOO0OS0 OO 00 AA AAAA OO OO OOOO OO OO OOOO OO OO AA ee QUO 00040 QUO 00050 QUOUUOGO FR FF FF FF OO 00 OO AAJA OO OO A000 OO OO OO PRR eee OOO 000 Aer ene aoe OOO 00080 A T OOO 00030 OOO 000al O00 00060 Address area Memory value area Characters area Display position specification area Figure 2 131 Display the Memory Contents When the Microcontroller with Data Flash Memory Memory Toolbar el Notation Size Notations Encoding fC JAH H to H th th H 48 9 ta tbh tc td te H O01 f8000 aoe Se oases Sa Se Sees O01f8oid ae Pe Sei Saree Sal See ea ae ee Se OO1fs020 a S See ee ee 2s OO1f 8030 ee ee MOTORER OO1f 8040 Seco Sf as Soe a O01 f S050 ee ee Se ie OO1f S060 ee eee ones oe OO1fs0ro ee ao os ae OO1fs0so S24e2 eel Se eo ee oe ee ee lt GPU Memory N ID Tag f Address area Memory value area Display
26. Multi core Note E1 JTAG When E1 is used with JTAG communications 1 Serial When E1 is used with serial communications 1 IECUBE 2 IECUBE2 3 MINICUBE 4 MINICUBE2 5 E1 6 Simulator 1 IECUBE Connect a host machine and IECUBE If required connect a target board too See IECUBE User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 1 Connection Example IECUBE Dedicated adapter CO USB interface cable D Host machine _ Dedicated probe IECUBE CubeSuite Target system R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 15 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 IECUBE2 Connect a host machine and IECUBE2 If required connect a target board too See IECUBE2 User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 2 Connection Example IECUBE2 USB interface cable Host machine IECUBE2 CubeSuite Target system 3 MINICUBE Connect a host machine and MINICUBE If required connect a target board too See MINICUBE User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 3 Connection Example MINICUBE i S eo uy jie Dedicated probe USB interface cable mm MINICUBE Host machine CubeSuite Target system 4 MINICUBE2 Connect a host machine and MINICUBE2 If required connect a target board too See MINICUBE2 User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 4 Connection Example MINICUBE2
27. R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 256 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Indicates the name of the register When you double click on the icon or click on the or marks the name of the register part is displayed or hidden Indicates the name of the register part Category names and register names displayed are as follows number of marks before register names indicates the depth of the display level Table A 3 Register Names in General Registers Category V850E1 V850ES a a e fepe e e a md Table A 4 Register Names in General Registers Category V850E2M mere Pen rgron He dass arron peered a fe 131 LP Table A 5 Register Names in System Registers Category V850E1 V850ES R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 257 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Pee em a E Table A 6 Register Names in System Registers Category V850E2M reid Rrra e FO R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 258 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE DPA5U 32 32 FPU Function Group 32 FPU Status Bank 32 FPSR 32 FPEPC 32 E wer R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 259 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CTPSW CTBP Exception Handler Switch Function Bank 0 SW_CTL SW_CFG SW_BASE Excepti
28. Set event by stopping execution momentarily Specify whether to forcibly pause the execution for events that cannot be set while executing a program or operating the tracer timer For details on the event types that are affected by this property see Table 2 25 Event Types That Can be Set and Deleted during Execution V850E1 V850ES Select Yes to set events above while execution No is selected by default Break You can configure the break function in this category Figure 2 80 Break Category E1 Serial El Break First using type of breakpoint Software break Figure 2 81 Break Category E1 JTAG El Break First using type of breakpoint Software break otop emulation of peripherals when stopping No Use open break function NotCutput signal R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 54 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt First using type of breakpoint Specify from the following drop down list a breakpoint type to use with priority when setting it with a one click operation of the mouse in the Editor panel Disassemble panel See 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on breakpoints Software break Sets software breakpoint with priority default Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint with priority lt 2 gt Stop emulation of peripherals when stopping E1 JTAG Specify from the drop down list whether to terminate the peripheral
29. Table A 18 Data Clock Phase Settings Data Clock Phase Phase Data Clock Phase Setting Setting Normal Normal SO C07 X DEX DS X D4 XC D3 X D2 X D1 X Do sl input Timing Precede Normal ie D7 X DB X D5 X D4 XD XK D2 X DIX DO sl input Timing R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 440 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Data Clock Phase Phase Data Clock Phase Setting Setting Normal Reverse a0 COT X DEX DS XK D4 X03 X D2 X D1 D0 sl input Timing Precede Reverse ae 07 X DB X05 X D4 XD XK D2 X DIX DO Sl input Timing Function buttons Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Transmission reception when 3 wire serial interface CSI is selected The Serial window when CSI serial interface is selected always operates in the transmission reception mode regard less of whether Master or Slave is selected in this dialog box When Master is selected Data is transmitted or received immediately after clicking the Send button or the Auto Send button in the Serial editor area When Slave is selected Data becomes ready to be transmitted or received after clicking the Send button or the Auto Send button in the Serial editor area Data starts to be transmitted or received when the CSI clock signal is received in the data trans mission reception
30. The settable range is from 0 to 65535 The operation range of the level gauge displayed in the I O Panel window is determined by this specified value When CPU reset Specify the level gauge operation after CPU reset before CPU Reset Maintains the level gauge status of immediately before CPU reset after CPU reset Set default voltage The level gauge is set to the specified value after CPU reset default Specify the value in mV units Input a value from 0 to Maximum input default 0 mV Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used Style tab 1 Style information setting area Slide Select this option button to display the level gauge with the side type Select the slide direction vertical or horizontal from the drop down list Color This area is used to specify or change the slide color You can change the color by clicking the pull down button R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 407 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select this option button to display the level gauge with the dial type default Color of Mark This area is used to specify or change the color of the mark indicating the operating point You can change the color by clicking the pull down button Selection list Select a bitmap to be used from the selection list The selectable bitmaps appear in the selection list Add button O
31. This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed For details on the hook transaction see 2 16 Use Hook Function 1 Hook Transaction Settings Figure A 31 Property Panel Hook Transaction Settings Tab Property cee WEBO ASA Property El Hook Transaction Settings Before download Before dawnload 0 After download After download 0 After GPU reset under break ine Ofter GPU reset under break ine 0 Before running Before running 0 After breaking After break ine 0 Hook Transaction ettres Flash Self DataFlas Downloa Description of each category 1 Hook Transaction Settings The detailed information on the hook transaction is displayed and its configuration can be changed Before download Specify the process to proceed right before downloading Automatically rewrite the I O register CPU register specified in this field right before downloading the load module file to the specified numbers Default Before download 0 is the current number of specified processes Modifying Specify with the Text Edit dialog box The Text Edit dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting this property you cannot specify the process on this panel Available Format values I O register name CPU register name space specified value Maximum characters 64 for one process Maximum number of pro
32. Toolbar The buttons below become invalid during execution of a program aut Displays values on this panel in the default notation according to the type of variable default we Displays the call stack information with the module file name default Displays the call stack information with the parameters arguments of the function call default E i 5 T File menu Call Stack panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Call Stack panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Call Stack Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see b Saving the contents of call stack information Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Call Stack Data As Save Call Stack Data As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt CSV file csv see b Saving the contents of call stack information Edit menu Call Stack panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Call Stack panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the contents of the selected line to the clipboard Select All Selects all the items of this
33. tENESAS Page 525 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE it error SuoCreatePin PIN amp bAPIN SUO_NOERROR puterr error return Set callback SuoSetResetCallback Reset SuoSetNotifyTimerCallback hTIM NotifyTimer Reset callback void Reset void int error Initialize Wave Tabel index wave Index 0 Output LOW initial value to PIN if error SuoOutputDigitalPin hPIN SUO LOW SUO NOERROR puterr error return Set wait time if error SuoSetTimer hTIM SUO USEC waveTable waveIndex time puterr error return NotifyTimer callback void NotifyTimer SuoHandle handle int error Output value to PIN if error SuoOutputDigitalPin hPIN waveTable waveIndex pinValue puterr error return Set next Wave Tabel index wavelndex if waveIndex gt MAXWAVE wavelndex 0 SUO NOERROR SUO NOERROR R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 526 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Set wait time if error SuoSetTimer hTIM SUO USEC waveTable waveIndex time SUO_NOERROR puterr error return Report error void puterr int error char message 80 wsprintf message The user open interface error 0x 04x occurred error MessageBox NULL messag
34. values Does not stop even after writing Stop when accessed to Specify whether to stop the execution right after accessing to the non mapping area in the I O non mapping I O register area Register Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Stops right after accessing values Does not stop even after accessing Stop when wrote to Specify whether to stop the execution right after writing to the write protected external memory write protected External memory Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Stops right after writing values n Does not stop even after writing Specify whether to stop the execution right after accessing to the non mapping area of the non mapping External external memory Note CPU reset is generated automatically if you change the setting of the property Stop when accessed to values R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 208 of 538 Oct 01 2010 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Trace IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator The detailed information on trace functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed Cautions 1 IECUBE Some of the trace function the real time display update function RRM function and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis 2 IECUBE2 Some of the trace function the timer function except for the Run Break timer and the coverage function
35. 5 O1 Save the I O register contents 1 Organize I O registers The each I O register can be categorized by folders and displayed in the tree view Cautions 1 Categories cannot be created within categories 2 VO registers cannot be added or deleted a Create new category Move the caret to the I O register name to create a new category then click the button in the toolbar and directly enter the new category name b Edit category name Click the category name to edit and click it again then directly modify the category name from the keyboard c Delete categories Select categories to delete then click the x button in the toolbar However the categories that can be deleted are only the empty categories R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 115 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d Change the display order I O register name is categorized when I O register is dragged and dropped in the category Also the display order of the categories and the I O register names upper or lower position can be changed easily by drag and drop operation 2 Change display format of values The display format of the value area can be changed using buttons below on the toolbar Notation The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed Displays the value of the selected item in hexadecimal number default c Displays the value of the selected item in signed decimal number
36. Displays the value of the selected watch expression in the default notation see Table A 12 AutoSelect Display Format of Watch Expressions Default according the type of variable default Hexadecimal number Displays the value of the selected item in hexadecimal number Signed Decimal Displays the value of the selected item in signed decimal number Unsigned decimal Displays the value of the selected item in unsigned decimal number number Octal Displays the value of the selected item in octal number Binary Displays the value of the selected item in binary number ASCII Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code Include Hexadecimal Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value of the selected item except the item displayed in hexadecimal number Value Float Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the selected watch expression value is not 4 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation see Table A 12 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default Double Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that when the selected watch expression value is not 8 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation see Table A 12 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default Decimal Notation for Displays array indexes on this panel in decimal number default Array Inde
37. Figure A 45 Watch Panel Watchl a g Ba dai o Notation Value TypelByte Size Address Memo 269698 0x0004 d eee Ox 039ff010c fe POLH IOR Qx00 IORLRSW 1 8 013 Ux0Stf tO at Reg Set r3 REG Ox03ff08b4 General Registers 4 r4 REb Ox03ff810c General Rezisters 4 rh REG Ox00000548 General Registers 4 1 2 3 4 5 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Watch panel dedicated items Edit menu Watch panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Watch gt gt Watch 1 4 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 275 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Watch area All the registered watch expressions are displayed in a list Clicking the title of the list in this area sorts the watch expressions in the list in alphabetical order Categories folders can be created to categorize the watch expressions and display them in the tree view see a Tree editing The meanings of the icons are as follows Indicates that the watch expression belonging to this category is displayed When you double click on the icon or click on the mark the category is closed and the watch expression is hidden Indicates that the watch expression belonging to this category is hidden When you double click on the icon or
38. Motorola Hex format with ID Tag SO S3 S7 32bit address hex Hex format IECUBE IECUBE2 INICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Extended Tektronix Hex with ID Tag format hex Hex format IECUBE IECUBE2 INICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Binary data bin Binary data format Note Ifthe space specified via the Specify Save Range Address Symbol is greater than 1 MB then the Intel hex format file will be saved as Extended Linear 32 bit address if it is within 1 MB then it will be saved as Extended 20 bit address 3 Specify Save Range Address Symbol Specify the range of addresses to save via start address and end addresses Directly enter hexadecimal number address expression in each text box or select from the input history displayed in the drop down list up to 10 items 4 Click the Save button Save the contents of the memory in the specified file in specified format as upload data R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 78 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Display Change Programs This section describes how to display and change programs when a load module file with the debug information is downloaded to a debug tool Downloaded programs can be displayed in the following panels Editor panel The source file is displayed and can be edited Furthermore the source level debugging see 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps and the display of the code coverage measurement result see 2 13
39. Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Parts Key Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of a key matrix which is one of the connection parts in the O Panel window Input to the simulator can be done from pin connected keys in the Simulation mode A key matrix consisting of input pins and output pins of up to 16 x 16 can be set Either figure or bitmap can be selected as the key matrix display style These styles can be changed on the Style tab Caution When connecting a key matrix to pins also perform the Pull up Pull down settings for the connec tion pins When a key is pressed the output value of the output pin connected to that key is input to the input pin connected to that key The value when the key is not pressed is the value specified in the Pull up Pull down dialog box If the Pull up Pull down settings are not performed the input pin becomes he high impedance state Consequently the operation of the function that is connected to the input pin becomes undefined Figure A 94 Parts Key Properties Dialog Box Key Matrix Connection Tab Parts Key Properties Key Matrix Connection Style Fin Hame Outi Out Outz Outs 2 a lt i gt Hold Time meee default inactive v Function batons R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 401 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENC
40. Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to register a user defined function that performs processing when serial transmission is com pleted The registered function is called when one or more serial data specified to be transmitted have been completely transmitted If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 500 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Example include suo h void NotifySentSerialFunc SuoHandle handle SuoHandle hSeriall void Luncl void SuoSetNotifySentSerialCallback hSeriall NotifySentSerialFunc Set notify sent serial function Notify sent serial function void NotifySentSerialFunc SuoHandle handle R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 501 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetReceiveSerialCallback Registers serial reception callback Syntax include suo h int SuoSetReceiveSerialCallback SuoHandle handle SuoReceiveSerialCallback func Argumeni s Handle of the serial interface func Pointer to a user defined function that performs processing when serial data is received see ReceiveSerialFunc Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see
41. Set a Point Trace event by one of the following operation Caution Also see 2 15 6 Notes for setting events for details on Point trace events e g limits on the number of enabled events R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7 tENESAS Page 134 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark IECUBE2 a b Accesses via DMA can be traced When the access is to the variable I O register on the source text disassembled text Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembly text is displayed Follow the operation listed below from the context menu after selecting the variable I O register Note however that only global variables static variables inside functions and file internal static variables can be used By performing the following operation it is interpreted as if a Point Trace event has been set at the target variable I O register and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 15 Manage Events for details Read Write Select Trace Settings gt gt Record R W Value Remark Variables within the current scope can be specified When the access is to the registered watch expression Follow the steps below in the Watch panel Follow the operation listed below from the context menu after selecting the registered watch expression see 2 9 6 Display change watch expressions Note however that only global variables static variables inside funct
42. and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 149 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Therefore first specify Coverage with the Use for trace data property in the Trace category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel to use the coverage function with priority Note that settings described below are invalid when this property is set to other than Coverage Figure 2 166 Trace Category Setting for the Coverage Function El Trace Use for trace data Coverage clear trace memory before FUNAINE TES Operation at Mon stop and overwrite to trace memory Then configure the code coverage measurement function in the Coverage category in the Debug Too Settings tab of the Property panel as follows Figure 2 167 Coverage Category IECUBE El Coverage Reuse coverage result Ho Coverage area of measurement MBytes HEX SFOOOOO a Reuse coverage result Specify whether to restore the previous code coverage measurement result when connecting to the debug tool by automatically saving the acquired code coverage measurement result when disconnecting from the debug tool Select Yes to restore the previous code coverage measurement result No is selected by default b Coverage area of measurement 1MBytes Specify the code coverage measurement area see Table 2 19 Coverage Measurement Area Directly enter the s
43. default Displays memory values in signed decimal number Displays memory values in unsigned decimal number m g Displays memory values in octal number HE Displays memory values in binary number eA N Z otation The following buttons to change the notation of sizes of memory values are displayed Displays memory values in 4 bit width He Displays memory values in 8 bit width default Displays memory values in 16 bit width Displays memory values in 32 bit width Displays memory values in 64 bit width Encoding The following buttons to change the encoding of character strings are displayed Displays character strings in ASCII code default Displays character strings in Shift_JIS code A E Displays character strings in EUC JP code E nF Displays character strings in UTF 8 code R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 244 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Memory panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Memory panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Memory Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see g Saving the contents of memory values Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the sam
44. for details on each category configuration 6 Flash Options Settings tab IECUBE2 In the Flash Options Settings tab V850E2M configuration on options for the flash memory incorporated in the V850E2M microcontroller can be done To configure options specify the corresponding items on the Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M that is opened by clicking the button appears at the right of the field by selecting the Flash options property in the Flash Options category on this tab the button appears only while connecting to the debug tool Click the Write button on this dialog box after specifying each item See Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M for details on the configuration R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 33 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 34 Opening the Flash Options Setting Dialog Box O Flash Options A Fash options Figure 2 35 Flash Options Settings Flash Options Setting Dialog Box IECUBE2 Flash Options dSettine Flash option property El Option Bytes Setting OPBTO FFFFFFES OPBT1 FFFFFFFF OPBT2 FFFFFFFF OPBTS FFFFFFFF OPBT4 FFFFFFFF OPBTS FFFFFFFF OPBT6 FFFFFFFF OPBT FFFFFFFF OPBTS HEX FFFFFFFF El On chip Debug Security ID Setting Security ID Hex FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF El Security betting Disable read No Disable program Ho Disable chip erase Mo Disable block erase No Disable program boot block Wo El Boot Block Clus
45. in this window The connected parts for which settings have been performed can be moved to any location within the win dow and you can manipulate them during simulation to control signal processing Information about parts that are placed in the window can be saved to the I O panel file pnl by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Save As or by saving the project file The saved file contents can be restored by selecting the File menu gt gt Open or by loading the project file Cautions 1 If the saved I O panel file is opened while Simulator GUI is running with a microcontroller differ ent from the one used when the file was created information of the parts connected to the pins that are not provided in the microcontroller will not be restored the Pin Name item in the prop erty dialog boxes for parts remains blank 2 If inputting of signals is started by an event such as clicking a button during program break the signal level will change in actuality when the program is resumed from the break Remark On the titlebar of this window Project file name Serial number from 0 pnl is displayed when the project file has been loaded However after having loaded a project file of PM then if you save a file as the project file of CubeSuite Project file name CS Serial number from 0 pnl is displayed on the titlebar Figure A 87 1 O Panel Window cer 10 Panell 1430m This section describes the fo
46. menu gt gt Save Call Stack Data As the Save As dialog box can be opened and all the contents in the call stack information can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv When saving to files retrieve the latest information from the debug tool Figure 2 149 Output Example of Call Stack Information Call stack information Call stack information R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 125 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Collect Execution History of Programs IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator This section describes how to collect the execution history of the program A history of program execution is generally called a trace this term will be used in the remainder of this document It is nearly impossible to find the cause of runaway program execution from the memory contents stack information and the like after the runaway has occurred The collected trace data however can be used to trace program execution up to the runaway directly making this an effective tool for discovering hidden bugs Cautions 1 IECUBE Some of the trace function the real time display update function RRM function and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis 2 IECUBE2 Some of the trace function the timer function except for the Run Break timer and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis 3 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 The trace function is not suppor
47. the Memory Initialize dialog box is opened to change the memory contents collectively in the specified address range by selecting Fill from the context menu e Copying and pasting By selecting a range of memory values with the mouse the contents of the range can be copied to the clipboard as a character string and these contents can be pasted to the caret position These operations are performed by the selecting from the context menu or selecting from the Edit menu However the paste operation is possible only when the character string to be pasted and the display notation radix and size of the area match If the display notation does not match a message is displayed The character codes and character strings that can be handled by this area are as follows If character strings other than these are pasted a message is displayed Character code ASCII Character string 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f A B C D E F f Registering watch expression A memory value with underline indicates that a symbol has been defined in the address and its symbol can be registered as a watch expression After selecting the memory value or placing the caret on the memory value the symbol name of the address is registered in the Watch panel Watch1 as a watch expression by selecting Register to Watch1 from the context menu Caution A memory value without underline cannot be registered as a watch expression g Saving the c
48. txt or CSV file csv When saving to files retrieve the latest information from the debug tool If arrays pointer type variables structures unions and CPU registers only those with the part name are displayed expanded the value of each expanded element is also saved When they are not expanded mark is added on the top of the item and the value becomes blank Figure 2 143 Output Example of Local Variables scope Current scope V Variable P Parameter F Function Type Byte Size Address V Variable name 1 Value Type Address V Variable name 0 Value Type Address 2 9 6 Display change watch expressions By registering C language variables CPU register I O register and assembler symbols to the Watch panel as watch expressions you can always retrieve their values from debug tools and monitor the values in batch The values of the watch expressions can be updated during the program is in execution see 7 Display modify the contents of watch expressions during program execution Select the View menu gt gt Watch gt gt Watch 1 4 to open the Watch panel The Watch panel can be opened up to 4 panels Each panel is identified by the names Watch1 Watch2 Watch3 and Watch4 on the title bar and the watch expressions can be registered deleted moved individually and they are saved as the user information of the project For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for
49. 00 tENESAS Page 59 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Clock You can configure the clock in this category Figure 2 91 Clock Category Simulator El Glock Main clack frequency MHz 400 Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Select Timer Trace clock frequency CPU clock frequency lt 1 gt Main clock frequency MHz Specify the main clock frequency You can specify the frequency from the drop down list or by directly entering a frequency value between 0 001 and 999 999 unit MHz The drop down list displays the following frequencies unit MHz V850E1 V850ES 1 00 2 00 3 00 3 57 4 00 default 4 19 4 91 5 00 6 00 8 00 8 38 10 00 12 00 16 00 20 00 25 00 30 00 32 00 33 33 34 00 40 00 48 00 50 00 64 00 80 00 V850E2M 1 00 2 00 3 00 3 57 4 00 4 19 4 91 5 00 6 00 7 20 8 00 default 8 38 9 60 10 00 12 00 16 00 20 00 25 00 30 00 32 00 33 33 34 00 40 00 48 00 50 00 64 00 80 00 lt 2 gt Sub clock frequency kHz This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports a sub clock Specify the sub clock frequency You can specify the frequency from the drop down list or by directly entering a frequency value between 0 001 and 999 999 unit KHz The drop down list displays the following frequencies unit kHz 32 768 default lt 3 gt Select Timer Trace clock frequency Specify the clock frequency for using timer trace function
50. 05 Ox000009be ld OxOlep ria main c 205 I Ox000009c atw r7 Ox4 ep Address Data OxO000054e F 344 D03069 MITA OxOSHO0890 aS Ox0Stt0e90 R S445 Number area Time h min s ms us ns area Line Address area Source Disassemble area Address area Data area This section describes the following 1 Change display mode 2 Change display format of values 3 Link with other panels R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 136 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Change display mode Display mode can be changed to the purpose when clicking the buttons below in the toolbar These buttons become invalid during trace operation Table 2 15 Display Modes of the Trace Panel Display Mode Display Contents Mixed display mode Displays the instruction disassemble results labels source text corresponding source line point trace results and break causes default Disassemble display mode Displays the instruction disassemble results labels point trace results and break causes Source display mode Displays the source text corresponding source line and break causes However when a place where no debugging information is present is executed lt No Debug Information gt is displayed Figure 2 156 Example of Source Display Mode View Trace Panel El Se S Notation CT 5 4 fer Number Time thiminsmsyene Line Address Sourcer Disassemble Addres
51. 1 00 CENESAS Page 165 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 3 Perform serial communication To configure serial communication click the H on the Simulator GUI window s toolbar The following Serial window opens This window provides serial I O features for communicating with the CPU s built in serial interface This enables you to input data to the microcontroller s serial receiver pin and acquire output data from its serial transmitter pin See the section on the Serial window for details about controlling the window Figure 2 185 Performing Serial Communication Serial Window iz Serial enw Time send Data Receive Data Status 5 2083 079 1875 0x19 208 OxcO 2073 0x07 1771 Ox b 313 Oxde 2077 0x95 E 1667 Ox5a 4 Oxde OT Oxes Wait Data Format 080 Oxb1 apg 0x76 All C lear Load Save Send Auto Send 2 17 4 Use buttons LEDs level gauges and other components The Simulator GUI allows input manipulation and output display simulation by providing standard connected parts buttons LEDs level gauges etc in which the I O block for peripheral I O designed as a GUI interface To configure connected parts click the E on the Simulator GUI window s toolbar The following I O Panel window opens This window enables you to configure the various connected parts building a dummy target system See the section on the O Pane window for details about controlling th
52. 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE IOR panel This panel is used to display the contents of the I O register and change the I O register values see 2 9 3 Display change the I O register This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Caution The I O register that cause the microcontroller to operate when it is read is read protected and therefore cannot be read is displayed in the value To read the value of read protected I O register select Force Read Value from the context menu Remark When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 43 IOR Panel IOR Toolbar a Eh 0R del etete fice TOR R W 1 Uxlstfhroo4 IOR LR W 1 Uxlotrroos IOR CRSW 1 Uxlott tOoe IOR LR W 1 Oxlotttoos IOR R W 1 Uxlotttlda IOR RSW 1 Oxlatt tote IOR LR W 1 Oxlott tle txffff TORLRSW te oa Oxlott tae Oxff IOR RSW 1 8 013 Oxlott toed Qxff IORLR W 1 8 013 Oxlatt toes This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu IOR panel dedicated items Edit menu IOR panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select IOR R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 264 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 I
53. 16 1 82 1 64 1 128 1 256 1 512 1 1K 1 4K 1 8K 1 16K 1 64K 1 256K 1 1M 2 11 2 Collect execution history until stop of the execution In the debug tool there is a function to collect the execution history from the start of program execution to the stop Therefore the trace data collection is automatically started when the program starts executing and stopped when the program stops See 2 11 5 Display the collected execution history for how to check the collected trace data R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 132 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark This function is operated by the Unconditional Trace event which is one of the built in events set by default in the debug tool Consequently if the Unconditional Trace event is set to Invalid state by clearing the check box in the Evenis panel trace data linked to the start of program execution will not be collected the Unconditional Trace event is set to Valid state by default Note that the Unconditional Trace event and the Trace event see 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section below are events that are used on a mutually exclusive basis Therefore if the Trace event with Valid state is set the Unconditional Trace event is automatically set to Invalid state 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section The execution history is collected as trace data only for the arbitrary section while the program
54. 2 gt 8 Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution Update display during the execution Display update intervallme El Set Event hile Runnine net event by stopping execution momentarily Break Trace Timer Coverage El Mask for Input Signal Hibs Mask RESET signal Mask STOP signal 10 t External Flash Memory Download Memory Connect Set y Debug To Download F Flash Optio Hook Trans 7 Figure A 18 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab MINICUBE V850E1 V850ES Property es WASO MINISUBE Property Memory mappings Verify on writing to merory 2 gt E Access Memory While Runnine Access by stopping execution Update display during the execution Display update intervallme gt O Set Event While Runnine net event by stopping execution momentarily gt Break p El Mask for Input Signal Mask NMIO signal Mask NMI signal Mask NMI signal Mask HLORG signal Mask RESET signal Mask STOP signal Mask WAIT signal Mask DBINT signal 10 gt External Flash Memory Download Memory Connect Settings Debug Tool S Download File 5 Hook Transactio R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 200 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Figure A 19 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab MINICUBE V850E2M Property eo VEBOEZM MINIGUBE Property Memory mappings Verity on writing to memory El Access Memory hile Runnine A
55. 4 A Fy A 6 T F E J g This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Trace panel dedicated items Edit menu Trace panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Trace On the Editor panel Disassemble panel select Trace Settings gt gt Show Trace Result from the context menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 291 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Number area The trace number showing the position is displayed 2 Time h min s ms us ns area This area displays the time required from the execution start of the program to the execution start of an instruction of each frame or generation of memory access cause The time is displayed in units of hours minutes seconds milliseconds microseconds and nanoseconds If overflow occurs this area is displayed in invalid color gray Remarks 1 lIECUBE IECUBE2 The precision of the time depends on the setting of the Rate of frequency division of trace time tag property on the Trace category in the Debug Too Settings tab of the Property panel 2 Simulator The question of whether to set the time display as an integrated value or differential value depends on the setting of the Accumulate trace time property on the Trace category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of t
56. 5 Memo area The user can write comments for the watch expressions categories Each comment for a watch expression category written in this area is saved individually as the user information of the project Therefore when any of the watch expression category is deleted the comment corresponding to it is also deleted Note that when arrays or register are displayed expanded the comment cannot be input for each element To edit the comment input the character strings directly from the keyboard after double clicking on the item to be edited press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode Up to 256 character strings can be input line feed code is ignored After editing the character strings complete the editing by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 282 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Reacquires all the values of the registered watch expression and updates the display Note that read protected I O register values are not re read This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Resets highlighting of the selected watch expression whose value has been changed by executing a program This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Registers a new watch expression Directly input the watch expression in the text box see c Registering new watch expression Note that up to 128 watch ex
57. 999 999 unit MHz The drop down list displays the following frequencies unit MHz V850E1 V850ES 2 50 4 00 default 5 00 6 00 8 00 13 50 18 00 V850E2M 4 00 5 00 7 20 8 00 default 9 60 10 00 13 50 16 00 Main clock multiply rate Specify the main clock frequency multiplier Select a value from the drop down list or directly enter a value from 1 to 99 The drop down list displays the following multiplier values V850E1 V850ES 1 default 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 V850E2M 1 default 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 Sub clock frequency kHz This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports a sub clock Specify the sub clock frequency You can specify the frequency from the drop down list or by directly entering a frequency value number between 0 001 and 999 999 unit kHz The usable sub clock frequency values differ depending on the selected microcontroller The drop down list displays sub clock frequency values which can be used by the currently selected microcontroller The minimum usable sub clock frequency is specified by default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 38 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 4 gt Monitor clock This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports a sub clock Specify a clock for monitor programs to operate while the program is stopped Specify from the following drop down list
58. Argumeni s Handle of the timer interface Pointer to the user defined function that reports the time of the timer see Notify TimerFunc Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function registers a user defined function that performs processing when the time of the timer is reported The registered function is called in every timer cycle of the specified timer interface If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include suo hi void NotifyTimerFunc SuoHandle handle SuoHandle hTim1 void funcl void SuoSetNotifyTimerCallback hTiml NotifyTimerFunc Set notify timer function Notify timer function void NotifyTimerFunc SuoHandle handle R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 467 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 4 4 Pin interface functions The pin interface functions that are supplied by Simulator GUI are as follows SuoSetInputHighImpedanceCallback Registers pin high impedance state report callback R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 468 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoCreatePin Generates pin interface Caution This function can only be called in the MakeUserModel function An error occurs if it is called at any other timing Syntax include suo h i
59. Available Erases the flash ROM before downloading Does not erase the flash ROM before downloading Automatic change Specify how to perform the setting again if the file is downloaded again and the location method of event address set for the currently set event changes to midway in the instructionNe 2 setting position Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Move to the head of Sets the event to the top address of the instruction values instruction Suspend event Disables the event Suspended state Check reserved area Specify whether to output a message when overwriting to an area reserved for use by overwriting when MINICUBE2 E1 Serial is attempted at the time of downloading downloadin MINICUBE2 E1 Serial Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Outputs a message when overwriting to an area reserved is attempted values z No Does not output a message when overwriting to an area reserved is attempted Notes 1 Files specified as build targets in a main project or sub project cannot be deleted from the target files to download These files are automatically registered as download files by default See Table 2 3 Type of Files That Can be Downloaded for downloadable file format 2 This property setting works only for the location setting of events without the debug information The location setting of events with the debug information is always moved to the beginning of the source
60. B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to register a user defined function that performs processing when serial data is received The registered function is called when one serial data has been received If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include suo h void ReceiveSerialFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long data int status SuoHandle hSeriall void funcl void SuoSetReceiveSerialCallback hSeriall ReceiveSerialFunc Set receive serial function Receive serial function void ReceiveSerialFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long data int status R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 502 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 4 7 Signal output unit interface functions The signal output unit interface functions that are supplied by Simulator GUI are as follows SuoSetNotifySentWaveCallback Registers signal output unit transmission end notification callback R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 503 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoCreateWave Generates signal output unit interface Caution This function can only be called in the MakeUserModel function An error occurs if it is called at any other timing Syntax include suo h int SuoCreateWave const char waveName int count const char pinNameList SuoHandle handle Argumeni
61. Copy Copies the selected range and copies it to the clipboard Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the selected location Deletes the selected range Selects all display data Cannot be selected Select Pin Opens the Select Pin dialog box The pin s for which input signal data is to be created or edited is are selected in this dialog box Time unit Selects the wait time unit main clock Main clock default usec Microsecond msec Millisecond R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 369 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Pin Status Selects the input status of the selected pin Enables data input to the pin default Invalid Disables data input to the pin Sets a mark to the selected Mark area Loop Start Sets the loop start mark Sets the loop end mark Loop Dialog Opens the Loop dialog box Sets the details of loop information Signal Input Inputs signal data to the simulator Starts signal input Returns the current signal input line to the beginning 2 View menu Information Bar Selects whether the information bar is displayed or not 3 Option menu Customize Opens the Customize dialog box Signal Data Editor toolbar Opens the Select Pin dialog box The pin s for which input signal data is to be created or edited is are selected in this dialog box If this button is clicked while the program is running signal input starts If this bu
62. CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Style tab 1 Style information setting area Figure 2 Preview area Select this option button to display the matrix LED with the following specified figure Shape Select the figure shape Two shapes can be selected rectangle and ellipse shadow Cannot be selected Line Specify and change the figure line as follows You can change the color of figure line by clicking the pull down button Thickness Specifies the line thickness Specification is made either using a spin button or through direct input A value from 1 to 100 can be specified Specifies the color of the line during active display Specifies the color of the line during inactive display Specifiy and change the figure filling as follows You can change the color of figure filling by clicking the pull down button Specifies the fill color during active display Specifies the fill color during inactive display Select this option button to display the matrix LED with the following specified bitmap default Selection list Select a bitmap to be used from the selection list The selectable bitmaps appear in the selection list Add button Opens the Entry Bitmap dialog box below to add a new bitmap to the selection list The bitmap file to be added can be specified either through file selection using the button or through direct input Entry Bitmap ctive Bitmap Loommon bitmap Parts
63. Displays the value of the selected item in unsigned decimal number Oe Displays the value of the selected item in octal number Bin Displays the value of the selected item in binary number Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value of the selected item 3 Modify the I O register contents The I O register values can be edited Double click the value of the I O register to edit in the Value area to switch the value to edit mode press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode To write the edited value to the target memory directly enter the value from the keyboard then press the Enter key Cautions 1 This operation cannot be performed during program execution 2 The value of the read only I O register cannot be edited ASCII characters can be entered to the I O register value Examples 1 When the numeric 0x41 is written to the I O register PO gt gt 0x41 is written in the port PO 2 When the ASCII character A is written to the I O register PO gt gt 0x41 is written in the port PO 4 Display modify the I O register contents during program execution By registering an I O register to the Watch panel as a watch expression the value of the I O register can be displayed modified not only while the program is stopped but in execution See 2 9 6 Display change watch expressions for details on the watch expression 5
64. Edit menu gt gt Time unit The wait value is input by placing the cursor in the Wait field to be edited and double clicking One wait value can be written per operation Data This area is used to edit transmission data Data can be directly input by placing the cursor in the data field and double clicking Data suffixed by Ox is treated as hexadecimal data and data suffixed by Ob is treated as binary data The default code is the hexadecimal code If a bit length different from that specified in the Format UART dialog box or Format CS dialog box is specified data from the lower bit is valid One data can be written per operation Button Opens the Format UART dialog box or Format CSI dialog box All Clear Clears all Serial editor area Load Loads the contents of the previously saved serial transmission data file ser and restores them in the Serial editor area A file created for UART cannot be loaded as a file for CSI and vice versa Saves the contents of the Serial editor area to the specified serial transmission data file ser Send Sends one of the data selected in the Serial editor area The next data becomes selected upon completion of transmission If no data is selected the first data is sent Auto Send Makes the data selected in the Serial editor area the first data and automatically transfers from the data to the bottom of the area The data transmission time interval is the time speci fied fo
65. Event area Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Record R W Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register is read write accessed see 1 When an access to variables l O registers occurs Show Trace Result Opens the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator and displays the acquired trace data Trace Settings Opens the Property panel to set the trace function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 254 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the timer related event see 2 12 2 IECUBE IECUBE2 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Simulator Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 1 Event area Start timer Sets a Start Timer event to start measuring the execution time of the program when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use timer function property in the Timer IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator category on the Property panel is automatically set to
66. How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Memory panel dedicated items Edit menu Memory panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Memory gt gt Memory 7 4 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 240 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Display position specification area It is possible to specify the display start position of the memory contents by specifying an address expression The follow the steps below a Specify an address expression Directly input the address expression of the memory value address to display in the text box You can specify an input expression with up to 1024 characters The result of the expression is treated as the display start position address Note that an address value greater than the microcontroller address space cannot be specified In addition an address value greater than the value expressed within 32 bits cannot be specified b Specify automatic manual evaluation of the address expression The timing to change the display start position can be determined by specifying in the Move when Stop check box and the Move button Move when Stop The caret is moved to the address which is automatically calculated from the address expression after the program is stopped The address expression is not automatically evaluated after the progra
67. I O area HBUS peripheral I O area HBUS shared memory area Back up RAM area Target memory area Emulation ROM area Simulator Emulation RAM area Simulator Non map area I O protection area Address range Displays the address range as lt Start address gt lt End address gt Display is fixed as Ox prefixed hexadecimal numbers Displays size as a decimal number unit bytes Kbytes e 3 Access width Displays the access width unit bits Notes 1 This item does not appear when the selected microcontroller is a ROMless product In the case that internal emulation ROM area exists in the emulator however Internal ROM area will be displayed only when the Size of internal ROM KBytes property of the Internal ROM RAM category is set to a value greater than 0 in the Connect Settings tab of the Property panel 2 This item appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory 3 Only in the case of multiple of 1024 displays in kilobyte units R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 314 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Button Remove Deletes the memory mapping selected in this area The memory areas that can be deleted are the Target memory area I O protection area Emulation ROM area IECUBE Simulator or the Emulation RAM area IECUBE Simulator the microcontroller s internal memory mapping cannot be deleted In th
68. If the line information does not exist in the address at the current PC value the step execution is taken place in instruction units The following are types of step execution 1 Step in function Step in execution 2 Step over function Step over execution 3 Execute until return is completed Return out execution Cautions 1 Breakpoints break events and action events that are being set do not occur during step execution 2 IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Interrupts are not acknowledged and fail safe breaks do not occur during step execution Simulator You may jump to a interrupt handler during step execution 3 An error message will appear while processing a function prologue or epilogue if the return address cannot be acquired R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 93 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 2 3 Step in function Step in execution When the function is called the program is stopped at the top of the called function Click the button on the debug toolbar to perform Step in execution Caution If Step in execution is performed for the longjmp function execution processing may not complete and may wait for a time out Step over function Step over execution In the case of a function call by the jarl instruction all the source lines instructions in the function are treated as one step and executed until the position where execution returns from
69. InoutHighImpedanceFunc Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to register the user defined function that performs processing when all the pins connected to digital analog pins enter the high impedance state If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include suo h void InputHighImpedanceFunc SuoHandle handle SuoHandle hPinP00 void funci void SuoSetInputHighImpedanceCallback hPinP00 InputHighImpedanceFunc Set input high impedance function Input high impedance function void InputHighImpedanceFunc SuoHandle handle R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 476 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 4 5 External bus interface functions The external bus interface functions that are supplied by Simulator GUI are as follows SuoSetWriteExtbusCallback Registers external bus write access callback Caution When using the external bus interface function the external memory area to use must be set to Tar get memory area with the Memory Type area of the Memory Mapping dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 477 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoCreateExtbus Generates external bus interface Cautions 1 This function can only be called in the MakeUserMo
70. Instruction Level tab Source Level tab R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 332 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Search parameter setup area Use this area to configure detailed search parameters for details on the window elements and how to configure the parameters for a particular tab see the section for the tab in question Function buttons Search Backward Searches upward in the direction of larger to smaller numbers within the specified range Search matches are selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Note that if an illegal value is specified or while the program is being executed a message will be appear and the trace data search will not be performed If focus moves to this dialog box while the Trace panel is hidden or another panel has focus then this button will be disabled Search Forward Searches forward in the direction of smaller to larger numbers within the specified range Search matches are selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Note that if an illegal value is specified or while the program is being executed a message will be appear and the trace data search will not be performed If focus moves to this dialog box while the Trace panel is hidden or another panel has focus then this button will be disabled Cancels the trace data search and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0
71. Load module file out CA850 Load module format default Binary data file bin Binary format All files All file formats Function buttons Button Function Open Adds the specified file to the Download Files dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 354 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the contents of the panel into a specified file Figure A 75 Save As Dialog Box My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer le name Seve My Network ple name a Save Save as type G source file Gc we Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open With the Editor panel in focus select Save file name As from the File menu With the CPU Register panel in focus select Save CPU Register Data As from the File menu With the Watch panel in focus select Save Watch Data As from the File menu With the IOR panel in focus select Save IOR Data As from the File menu With the Call Stack panel in focus select Save Call Stack Data As from the File menu With the Local Variables panel in focus select Save Local Variable Data As from the File menu With the Output panel in focus select Save tab name As from the File men
72. Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFFE in hexadecimal number values R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 215 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Data width Specify the data width access size of the external flash memory This property appears only when the External flash memory download property is set to Yes Default Modifying Select from the drop down list Available 8 16 32 values Number of parallel Specify the number of external flash memories in parallel This property appears only when the External flash memory download property is set to Yes Modifying Select from the drop down list or directly enter from the keyboard Available Either one of the following from the drop down list values 1 2 4 Directly enter the numbers ranged below Integer number between 1 and 99 Number of serial Specify the number of external flash memories in serial This property appears only when the External flash memory download property is set to Yes Modifying Select from the drop down list or directly enter from the keyboard Available Either one of the following from the drop down list values 1 2 Directly enter the numbers ranged below Integer number between 1 and 99 11 Simulator GUI Simulator The detailed information on the Simulator GUI is displayed and its configuration can be changed Caution After connectin
73. No retry Specifies 0 as the number of times of retry The delay time is O the writing speed is fastest Typical number of times that is assumed by Specifies the typical number of times that is assumed by flash flash macro specifications macro specifications default Maximum number of times that is assumed Specifies the maximum number of times that is assumed by by flash macro specifications flash macro specifications Retries for the maximum number of times Specifies the maximum number of times of retry specified The delay time is maximum the writing speed is longest lt 2 gt Erasing time Specify the delay time when erasing the data flash memory from the following drop down list No retry Specifies 0 as the number of times of retry The delay time is O the erasing speed is fastest Typical number of times that is assumed by Specifies the typical number of times that is assumed by flash flash macro specifications macro specifications default Maximum number of times that is assumed Specifies the maximum number of times that is assumed by by flash macro specifications flash macro specifications Retries for the maximum number of times Specifies the maximum number of times of retry specified The delay time is maximum the erasing speed is longest 5 Download File Settings tab In the Download File Settings tab configuration on downloading file to the debug tool can be done See 2 5 1 Execute downloading
74. Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rate of frequency IECUBE division of timer Specify the frequency division ratio of the timer counter 32 bits 50 MHz used for timer IECUBE measurement IECUBE2 IECUBE2 Specify the frequency division ratio of the timer counter 32 bits 200 MHz used for timer measurement Default IECUBE 1 1 20ns 1 4min Resolution maximum measurement time are displayed in IECUBE2 1 1 5ns 21 4s Resolution maximum measurement time are displayed in Modifying Select from the drop down list Available IECUBE values 1 1 20ns 1 4min 1 2 40ns 2 8min 1 4 80ns 5 7min 1 8 160ns 11 4min 1 16 320ns 22 8min 1 32 640ns 45 6min 1 64 1280ns 1 5h 1 128 2560ns 3 0h 1 256 5120ns 6 0h 1 512 10240ns 12 2h 1 1024 20480ns 24 4h 1 2048 40960ns 48 8h 1 4096 81920ns 97 6h lIECUBE2 1 1 5ns 21 4s 1 2 10ns 42 9s 1 4 20ns 1 4min 1 8 40ns 2 8min 1 16 80ns 5 71 min 1 32 160ns 11 42min 1 64 320ns 22 8min 1 128 640ns 45 6min 1 256 1280ns 1 5h 1 512 2560ns 3 0 h 1 1024 5120ns 6 0h 1 2048 10240ns 12 2h 1 4096 20480ns 24 4h 8 Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator The detailed information on coverage functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed Cautions 1 IECUBE All of the properties in this category become invalid in any one of the following conditions When no coverage board is mounted on IECU
75. PC value when the current PC value is forcibly changed or the program stops executing R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 231 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Title bar The name of the opened text file source file is displayed Marks that are displayed at the end of the file name indicate as follows eT The contents of the editing file is changed Update time and date of the source file opened are later than the one of the downloaded load module file in the case the text file which is contained in the load module file downloaded in the connected debug tool as debug information is opened Uneditable The opened text file is write disabled The same text file is multiply opened 2 Event area This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened If the source text line can be converted to the corresponding address events can be set to the line with background color in white if the background color of the line is gray events cannot be set to the line In addition the Event mark corresponding to an event that has been currently set is displayed This area is provided with the following functions a Setting deleting breakpoints By clicking where you want to set a breakpoint with mouse the breakpoints can be set easily The breakpoint is set to the instruction at the start address corresponding to the c
76. REFERENCE Edit menu Output panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Select All Selects all the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Find Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting Quick Search tab Replace Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting Whole Replace tab Context menu Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Select All Selects all the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Clear Deletes all the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Tag Jump Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the number of the corresponding line in the corresponding file of the message at the caret position Stop Searching Cancels the search currently being executed This is invalid when a search is not being executed Help for Message Displays help for the massage on the current caret position This only applies to warning messages and error messages R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 309 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Mapping dialog box This dialog box is used to set the memory mapping for each type of memory If you are not connected to a debug tool then only memory mapping areas added
77. ROM RAM area are composed of 16 Mbytes b Address range Specify the start address and end address for the memory mapping to be added Directly input a hexadecimal number into the text box for each In the case of the following settings however new memory mappings cannot be added Clicking the Add button in this area causes an error message to be displayed If the specified address range duplicates a separate memory area when Target memory area is selected as the memory type If the specified address range cannot be put into a single target memory area when I O protection area is selected as the memory type c Chip select IECUBE V850E1 This item is only valid when using V850E1 Core and when Memory type is set to Emulation ROM or Emulation RAM Select from the drop down list the chip select corresponding to the address specified with Address range R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 312 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Access width IECUBE MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Select the access width of the memory mapping to be added from the following drop down list direct input is not possible In the case where I O protection area is selected as the memory type the access width must be set to the same value as the access width of the target memory area Sets the access width of the memory mapping to be added to 8 bits default Sets the access width of the memory
78. ROM area Adds the target ROM area IECUBE Areas specified as target ROM are subject to write protect for the fail safe break I O protection area Adds the I O protection area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 311 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note The I O protected area is an area protected from access by the debug function The address range set to I O protected area cannot be accessed from the Memory panel i e it can only be accessed via executing the load module I O protected area mapping is only possible within the target memory area Remark External memory area and guarded areas areas where access is prohibited are treated as non mapped areas For this reason if a mapping overlaps a guarded area then a message will inform the user that the mapping overlaps a non mapped area See the manual of our microcontroller for details onfor details onfor details on the mapping information of external memory areas and guarded areas Mapping attributes and their sizes that can be set are as follows Table A 16 Settable Mapping Attribute Attribute Debug Tool IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE es Simulator JTAG Serial Emulation Emulation ROM area Emulation ROM area Note t cema la ws fv ov vf vp Cr er eee eee ee a ea a LIAIS Valid Mapping unit 1 Mbyte for Emulator 64Kbytes for Simulator Invalid Note Valid only with the option board The emulation
79. Registering new watch expression There are three ways as follows to register new watch expressions lt 1 gt Register from other panels Do either one of the following to register watch expressions in other panels Drag and drop the target character string in this area in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 Select Register to Watch1 from the context menu after selecting the target character string or place the caret on either of the target character string the target is automatically determined Select the Edit menu gt gt Paste in this area in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 after selecting the Edit menu gt gt Copy for the target character string The relationship between panels that can use this operation and targets that can be registered as watch expressions is as follows Table A 7 Relationship between Panels and Targets That Can be Registered as Watch Expressions Targets That can be Registered as Watch Expressions Editor panel Variable names of C language CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols Disassemble panel Variable names of C language CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols CPU Register panel CPU registers e Local Variables panel Variable names of C language local variables IOR panel I O registersN t Note The scope specification is automatically added to the registered watch expression R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 277 of 538 Oct 01
80. Registration Scope Specification Name of I O register Remarks 1 Ifthe same name exists either in C language variables CPU registers or I O register and they are registered without specifying scopes the symbol is resolved in the following order and the value is displayed Variable of C language gt CPU registers gt I O register If is specified at the top of the watch expression the symbol is resolved in the following order and the value is displayed CPU registers gt I O register gt Variable of C language 2 Ifthe same name exists in the local variable and the global variable and their symbol names are only registered without specifying scopes the symbol is resolved and the value is displayed based on the scope of the current PC value 3 V850E2M System registers with the same name can be distinguished by the following scope specification Scope System Register Bank System Register Specification Name PSW SRBff00 CPU function group Oxff User 0 banks 0x00 PSW PSW SRBO000 User group 0x00 Main banks 0x00 PSW 4 When watch expressions are registered from the IOR panel or the CPU Register panel the scope specification is automatically added lt 3 gt Register from other application Select a character string of a variable of C language CPU register I O register or assembler symbol from a external editor then do either one of the following Drag and drop the target character string in this area in th
81. Remark The values are sorted in ascending order of the numerical values by clicking on the header part of this area This area is provided with the following functions a Changing I O register values To edit the I O register value change the value directly from the keyboard after double clicking on the value to be edited press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode After you edit the value of the I O register it is written to the register of the debug tool by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region Note that it is not possible to change the values of I O registers during program execution You can use ASCII characters also to the values of I O registers Examples 1 When the numeric 0x41 is written to the I O register PO gt gt 0x41 is written in the port PO 2 When the ASCII character A is written to the I O register PO gt gt 0x41 is written in the port PO Caution The value of the read only I O register cannot be edited b Saving the contents of the I O register The Save As dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save OR Data As and all the contents of the I O register can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 266 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE See 5 Save the I O register contents for details on the method for saving the contents of the I O regi
82. Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 459 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoGetMainClock Acquires the cycle of the main clock for simulation Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoGetMainClock unsigned long time Argumeni s Location where the main clock cycle value unit pS is to be stored Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completionNormal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to acquire the cycle of the main clock for the simulation environment currently being exe cuted Example include suo h unsigned long time void funcl void SuoGetMainClock amp time Get main clock R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 460 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 4 3 Time interface functions The time interface functions that are supplied by Simulator GUI are as follows SuoSetNotify TimerCallback Registers timer time notification callback R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 461 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoCreateTimer Generates timer interface Caution This function can only be called in the MakeUserModel function An error occurs if it is called at any othe
83. Save the I O register contents The Save As dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save IOR Data As and all the contents of the I O register can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv At this time the values of all I O registers become targets irrespective of the setting of display non display on this panel When saving the contents to the file the values of the I O register are reacquired and save the latest values acquired Note that the values of read protected I O register are not re read If you want to save the latest values of those select Force Read Value from the context menu then save the file R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 116 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 141 Output Example of I O register Type Byte Size Address Category name IOR name Value Type Byte Size Address 2 9 4 Display change global variables static variables Global variables or static variables are displayed and its values can be changed in the Watch panel Register the variables to display modify their values to the Watch panel as the watch expressions For details see 2 9 6 Display change watch expressions 2 9 5 Display change local variables Contents of local variables can be displayed and its values can be changed in the Loca Variables panel below Select the View menu gt gt Local Variable Specify the scope in the scope area to display the
84. Size Data size gt lt Transfer Count Transfer count number gt Toolbar Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Clears the trace memory and the display of this panel initialized This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Opens the Trace Search dialog box IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Notation The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed This item becomes invalid during execution of a program R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 295 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Sets to the Mixed display mode as the display mode default This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Sets to the Disassemble display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Sets to the Source display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during execution of a program File menu Trace panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Trace panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Trace Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see e Saving trace data Note that when the file has never been saved
85. Specify from the following drop down list whether to use the open break function Yes Hi Z The open break target pin becomes the Hi Z state after the CPU is stopped No Output signal The open break target pin outputs the signal even after the CPU is stopped R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 43 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS e Mask for Input Signal You can configure the input signal masking in this category Figure 2 56 Mask for Input Signal Category MINICUBE V850E1 V850ES O Mask for Input Sienal Mask HMD signal Mo Mask NMI signal No Mask NME signal No Mask HLORG signal No Mask RESET signal No Mask STOP signal No Mask WAIT signal No Mask DBINT stenal No Figure 2 57 Mask for Input Signal Category MINICUBE V850E2M O Mask for input Sienal Mask HLORG signal No Mask RESET signal No Mask STOP signal No Mask WAIT sternal No Figure 2 58 Mask for Input Signal Category MINICUBE2 O Mask for Input Sienal Mask RESET signal Mo With the properties shown below select Yes to mask the signal from the drop down list all properties below are set to No by default Mask NMIn signal MINICUBE V850E1 V850ES Mask HLDRQ signal MINICUBE Mask RESET signal Mask STOP signal MINICUBE Mask WAIT signal MINICUBE Mask DBINT signal MINICUBE V850E1 V850ES f External Flash Memory Download MINICUBE You can configure downloading to
86. Type default Specify the button status after CPU reset Not change at reset Maintains the button status after CPU reset Buttons are non depressed after CPU reset default Buttons are depressed after CPU reset Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 394 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Style tab 1 Style information setting area Figure 2 Preview area Select this option button to display the button with the following specified figure Shape Select the figure shape Two shapes can be selected rectangle and ellipse shadow Cannot be selected Line Specify and change the figure line as follows You can change the color of figure line by clicking the pull down button Thickness Specifies the line thickness Specification is made either using a spin button or through direct input A value from 1 to 100 can be specified Specifies the color of the line during active display Specifies the color of the line during inactive display Specify and change the figure filling as follows You can change the color of figure filling by clicking the pull down button Specifies the fill color during active display Specifies the fill color during inactive display Select this option button to display the button with the following specified bitmap default Selection
87. Whole Search tab Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting Whole Replace tab Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to the specified I O register R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 268 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Register to Watch1 Registers the selected I O register or category to the Watch pane Watch1 Refresh Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel Note that the values of read protected I O register are not re read This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Force Read Value Forcibly reads once the value of the read protected I O register Opens the Go to the Location dialog box Adds a new category folder Directly input the category name in the text box Create Category There are no restrictions on the number of categories that can be created anew however it is not possible to create a category inside a category Note that this item becomes invalid during execution of a program Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If the I O register s category s are selected copies them to the clipboard The copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Delete Deletes the selected character string s If an empty category is in a select state its category is deleted it is not possible to d
88. Yes Stop timer Sets a Stop Timer event to stop measuring the execution time of the program when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use timer function property in the Timer ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes View Result of Timer Opens the Events panel and displays only timer related events Clear Coverage Information Clears all the coverage measurement results currently being stored in the debug tool Note that this item appears only when the debug tool used supports the coverage function Edit Disassemble Changes to the edit mode to edit the instruction of the line at the caret position see 2 6 4 Perform line assembly This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Edit Code Changes to the edit mode to edit the code of the line at the caret position see 2 6 4 Perform line assembly This item becomes invalid during execution of a program View The following cascade menus to set the display contents in the disassemble area are displayed Show Offset Displays the offset value of the label The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address Show Symbol Displays the address value in the format symbol offset value default Note that when a symbol has been defined as the address value only the symbol is displayed Show Function Na
89. a a 4 5 Search the memory contents Values of memory can be searched in the Memory Search dialog box opened by selecting Find from the context menu The search is operated either in the memory value area or characters string area in which a caret Is In this dialog box follow the steps below Figure 2 134 Search the Memory Contents Memory Search Dialog Box Memory Search search Range Specity address range Ww Address Ox we Osxtttttttt we R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 109 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Cautions 1 Search for the contents of the memory cannot be performed while executing the program a b c d 2 Search for values of the ID tag for the data flash memory cannot be performed Specify Search Data Specify data to search You can either type a value directly into the text box up to 256 bytes or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items If the search is performed in the memory value area the value must be entered in the same display format notation and size as that area If the search is performed in the character string area then the target of the search must be a string The specified string is converted into the encoding format displayed in that area and searched for If a memory value was selected immediately prior to opening this dialog box then that value will appear as default S
90. an external flash memory in this category See 5 Download to external flash memory IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG for details on how to download to an external flash memory and this category configuration 3 Download File Settings tab In the Download File Settings tab configuration on downloading file to the debug tool can be done See 2 5 1 Execute downloading for details on each category configuration 4 Flash Options Settings tab MINICUBE V850E2M In the Flash Options Settings tab V850E2M configuration on options for the flash memory incorporated in the V850E2M microcontroller can be done To configure options specify the corresponding items on the Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M that is opened by clicking the button appears at the right of the field by R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 44 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS selecting the Flash options property in the Flash Options category on this tab the button appears only while connecting to the debug tool Click the Write button on this dialog box after specifying each item See Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M for details on the configuration Figure 2 59 Opening the Flash Options Setting Dialog Box E Flash Options A Fash options Figure 2 60 Flash Options Settings Flash Options Setting Dialog Box MINICUBE V850E2M Flash Options dSettine Flash option property El O
91. appears only when the DMA is traced property is set to Trace Specify a type of DMA trace data to be collected from the following drop down list Remark Meaning of the type of DMA trace data to be collected is as follows e Trace priority This property is valid only when the Use for trace data property is set to Yes Specify which item should be given priority when using the trace function from the following drop down list Speed priority Traces giving priority to the real time performance default Data priority Traces after stopping the execution pipeline of the CPU temporarily so that no data is missed f Clear trace memory before running Specify from the drop down list whether to clear initialize the trace memory before tracing starts in this property Select Yes to clear the memory default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 130 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can forcibly clear the trace memory when clicking the button in the toolbar in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator g Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation after the trace memory is full with the collected trace data from the following drop down list Non stop and overwrite to Continues overwriting the older trace data after the trace memory is full default trace memory When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to Yes at the time o
92. are described as symbols the address is operated as a value of symbols The basic input formats are as follows Table 2 30 Basic Input Format of Expressions Expression gt Member name Member of structures unions that pointer designates R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 167 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Name of CPU Register Value of the CPU register I O register I O register value Label EQU symbol and immediate Values of label EQU symbol and immediate address address Register name bit Register name bit value Label name bit EQU symbol bit Label name bit value EQU symbol bit value immediate addres bit value immediate address bit Bit symbol Bit symbol value Integer constant Integer constant value Floating constant Floating point constant value Character constant Character constant value From Table 2 30 Basic Input Format of Expressions the following expressions with operator can be constructed Table 2 31 Construction of Expressions with Operators Expression Description a a Expression Expression Difference Expression lt Expression When it is smaller 1 is set others 0 is set Expression lt Expression When it is smaller or equal 1 is set others 0 is set Expression gt Expression When it is bigger 1 is set others 0 is set Expression gt Expression When it is bigger or equal 1 is set others 0 is set R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tE
93. are used on a mutually exclusive basis Note however that only the trace function can be used in this version Use for trace data IECUBE IECUBE Some of the trace function the real time display update function RRM function and the IECUBE2 coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis Accordingly specify a function used preferentially lECUBE2 Some of the trace function the timer function except for the Run Break timer and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis Accordingly specify a function used preferentially See 2 11 1 Configure the trace operation for details on this property Default IECUBE RRM IECUBE2 Trace Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Uses the trace function preferentially values Uses the real time display update function RRM function preferentially IECUBE Uses the coverage function preferentially Available Uses the trace function preferentially values l Uses the timer function preferentially IECUBE2 Uses the coverage function preferentially Select trace data Select the type of the trace data to be acquired IECUBE This property appears only when the Use for trace data property is set to Trace IECUBE2 See 2 11 1 Configure the trace operation for details on this property Default Branch PC Access Data R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 209 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX
94. b C d e f Memory Access Memory While Running Set Event While Running Break Mask for Input Signal External Flash Memory Download MINICUBE a Memory You lt 1 gt can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 49 Memory Category O Memory E Memory mappings 4 0 Internal ROM area Hi Non map area 2 Internal RAM area 3 LO Register area Verity on writing to memory Ves Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed for each type of memory area The memory mapping status cannot be changed on this panel If it is necessary to add a memory mapping click on the Memory Mapping property and click on the button that appears on the right end of the setting field The Memory Mapping dialog box opens perform the setting from there See the section for the Memory Mapping dialog box for details on how to configure the parameters Figure 2 50 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box O Memory Bj Memory mappings 4 0 Internal ROM area H Non map area Caution If you are not connected to a debug tool then only memory mapping areas added by user is displayed Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type lt 2 gt Verify on writing to memory Specify whether to perform a verify check when data has been written to memory from the drop down list R20UT0264EJ
95. bitmaps appear in the selection list Add button Opens the Entry Bitmap dialog box below to add a new bitmap to the selection list The bitmap file to be added can be specified either through file selection using the button or through direct input Entry Bitmap ctive Bitmap Loommon bitmap Parts_on bimp Pm Inactive Bitmap Loommon bitmap Parts_off bmp Delete button Deletes the currently selected bitmap from the selection list Note that only the bitmap that have been added by user can be deleted This area displays the style of the buzzer currently being specified R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 423 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box Operation In the Simulation mode the active level output of the connected pins can be expressed as a bitmap The following bitmaps are displayed according to the pin s output value active inactive Figure A 111 Connected Parts Display Example Buzzer When active When inactive lt gt R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 424 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Pull up Pull down dialog box This dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of the pull up pull down resistors which are one of the con
96. box which is corresponding to the part object R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 392 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Parts Button Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of buttons which are one of the con nection parts in the O Panel window Input to the simulator can be done from pin connected buttons in the Simulation mode There are two types of button display styles figure and bitmap These styles can be changed on the Style tab Figure A 88 Parts Button Properties Dialog Box Button Connection Tab Farts Button Properties Button Connection Style Active Level Low HIGH 1 Type Push Toggle O Group Group Name o Functon button Ca Figure A 89 Parts Button Properties Dialog Box Style Tab Parts Button Properties Button Gonnection Style Figure Preview Shape Line Fill up Thickness zz Active Active 1 Inactive Tnactive Active Tnactive R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 393 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open Button Connection tab Style tab Function buttons Operation How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a part object Button Select Prope
97. by user is displayed Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type Caution Figure A 51 Memory Mapping Dialog Box IECUBE V850ES IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Memory Mapping Memory type Address range Emulation ROM area H Access width Memory mapped list Access width 32b1tC3 obits 32b13 obits Size LMByte b4445KRyte b0ERRByYte 4k Byte range OxOOQULLEee x z e x tet t OxOSffCfCLC Memory type Address Internal RUM area UxOOO00000 Non map area OxOOlooooo0 Internal RAM area UxOSECOO00 I O Register area OUxOSELECCooo Memory type Address range Chip select Emulation ROM area 7 Access width Memon mapped list Address Size Access width Mehory type Internal ROM Non Map area Internal RAM Non Map area Internal RAM I O Register Function buttons area area Ox 00000000 Ox 00040000 Ox 030 fb000 OxO3fCC000 OxOULEEHOOU OxXOLEELOOU range OxOUQOSfLf OxO3Cfatte OxO3Cfette OxOfffacce OxUfEferte OxULELELCC 256K Byte 6b 5260ERyte 15EByte l96592RRyte L6EREYte 4ERyte debits obits debits bits 3sbhits obits Remove x Coma te R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 310 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 53 Memory Mapping Dialog Box Simulator Memory Mappine Memory type Address r
98. can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes or select them from the input history via the drop down lists up to 10 items The fetch address can also be specified as a range In this case specify a range by specifying address expressions in both the left and right text boxes If the right hand text box is blank or contains the text Input value when range is specified then the fixed address specified in the left hand text box will be searched Note that if an address value greater than the microcontroller address space is specified the upper address value is masked In addition an address value greater than the value expressed within 32 bits cannot be specified Mnemonic Specify the mnemonic if it is a required search parameter The specified character strings in this area are searched within the Source Disassemble area of the Trace panel ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator You can either type a mnemonic directly into the text boxes or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed Access Address Specify the access address if it is a required search parameter You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes or select them from the input history via the drop down lists up to 10 items The access address can also be specified as a range In this case specify a range by specifying address ex
99. character string s while editing the property value Select All Selects all the character strings in the selected property while editing the property value R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 186 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Connect Settings tab This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Internal ROM RAM Clock NNN Nem an a or eA Sr ar Se i hl ss N NJ Flash MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Configuration Simulator Programmable I O V850E1 V850ES DataFlash V850E1 V850ES except Simulator Connection with Target Board IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE2 E1 Figure A 6 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab IECUBE Property es WASO IEGUBE Property Size of internal ROM K Bytes Size of internal RAM Bytes DataF lash El Glock Main clack frequency MHz Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz Monitor clock El Connection with Target Board Connecting with target board Programmabke I O Internal ROMZ RAH Connec Debug T Flash Self oo 16354 400 J ae r08 oy stem No DataFlas Downloa Hook Tra Figure A 7 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab IECUBE2 Property ee VEBOESM IECUBE Property E Internal ROM RAM El Glock Main clock frequency MHz Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz
100. click on the mark the category is opened and the watch expression is displayed mark is displayed Click the mark to Expand shrink display Indicates that the watch expression is a function Indicates that the watch expression is I O register Indicates that the watch expression is CPU register Indicates that the watch expression is a variable At the top of the watch expression represents arrays pointer type variables and structures unions At the top of the watch expression that has the lower level register part of the register mark is displayed Click the mark to Expand shrink display This area is provided with the following functions a Tree editing Watch expressions can be categorized by folders and displayed in the tree view To create a category click the button on the toolbar or select Create Category from the context menu after moving the caret to the position to create a category and then input a desired name from the keyboard To delete a category select the category then click the x button on the toolbar or select Delete from the context menu To rename the created category select the category then do either one of the following Click the name again then directly rename the category name Select the Edit menu gt gt Rename then directly rename the category name Press the F2 key then directly rename the category name By directly dragging and dropping the registe
101. contents of the target local variable In the Local Variables panel the name of local variables and functions are displayed The argument of the function is also displayed as the local variable For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Local Variables panel Caution Nothing is displayed on this panel during execution of a program When the program is stopped items in each area are displayed Figure 2 142 Display the Contents of Local Variables Local Variables Panel Local Var tables Toolbar J all Notation Hex Encoding Scope area Current TypelByte Size ddress intl 4 Reb REG local 6 intl 4 Re Ft REG local _c inti 4 R28 REG result inte R11 REG i unsigned lone 4 R29 REG Name area Value area Type Byte Size area Address area This section describes the following 1 Change display format of values 2 Modify the contents of local variables 3 Save the contents of local variables R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 117 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Change display format of values The display format of the value area can be changed using buttons below on the toolbar Notation The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed Displays values on this panel in the default notation according to the type of variable default ff Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal num
102. do not actually exist are Background Default pa f displayed in this color color color Note The Default text and background colors depends on the Windows settings of the host computer Here we use the Windows defaults which are black text and white background b Use default color Display items selected via the Setting place area using the standard text color Display items selected via the Setting place area with a user defined text color The Font color button is enabled c Use default background color Display items selected via the Setting place area using the standard background color Display items selected via the Setting place area with a user defined background color The Background Color button is enabled R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 348 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Buttons Font Color The Edit Colors Dialog Box opens Specify the text color of the item selected via the Setting place area Note however that this button will be disabled if the Use default color check box is selected Background Color The Edit Colors Dialog Box opens Specify the background color of the item selected via the Setting place area Note however that this button will be disabled if the Use default background color check box is selected Reset Selected Item Colors Reset the color information for the item s
103. etatic int result HE Unsiened long i 57 char a AG A Comment 2 BO i Comment 7 E 1 t Comment p BY 63 locala 0 E4 local b OQ 7 65 locale 1 Br BB a belobal_char_array By Gg iw Comment 7 69 iE Comment 7 t Comment He local att ta local btt id local ott lt ml gt Event area Line number area Characters area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 79 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This section describes the following 1 2 1 Display variables 2 Search characters 3 Move to the specified line 4 Jump to functions 5 Jump to a desired line tag jump Display variables By superimposing the mouse cursor on variables on the source text variable values are pop up displayed The display format of the variable value is same as Table A 12 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default depending on the type of the variable Figure 2 111 Pop up Display of Variables Editor Panel Patur resul Mouse cursor int subl2Cint arg_ 20197 x e25 int argc T I Search characters Character searching in the source text is taken place in the Search and Replace dialog box opens with selecting the E button on the toolbar If the search is taken place with the range selection in the Editor panel search is taken place in the selected range In this dialog box follow the steps below Figure 2 112 Character Search in Source Text Search a
104. expression Value 1 10 Value of variable corresponds to Variable expression 1 10 Displayed as a decimal number followed by the hexadecimal equivalent in parentheses Note that if the specified variable expression cannot be acquired is output If the variable is of type char then it is displayed as a character Function buttons Finishes configuring the Printf event and sets it at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Cancels the Printf event setup and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 325 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the encoding and the new line code of the file being edited in the Editor panel Figure A 60 Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settines Encode i m Unicode UTF 8 st New line code 2 2 keep current new line code we 3 gt Reload the file Function buttons Gancel This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Editor panel select File name Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode area Specify the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items in the drop down list appear in the following order Note that encodings tha
105. filling as follows You can change the color of figure filling by clicking the pull down button Specifies the fill color during active display Specifies the fill color during inactive display R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 403 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Bitmap Select this option button to display the key matrix with the following specified bitmap default Selection list Select a bitmap to be used from the selection list The selectable bitmaps appear in the selection list Add button Opens the Entry Bitmap dialog box below to add a new bitmap to the selection list The bitmap file to be added can be specified either through file selection using the button or through direct input Entry Bitmap 4ctive Bitmap Loammon bitmap iParts_on bmp icai Inactive Bitmap Loammon bitmap iParts_off bmp deal Delete button Deletes the currently selected bitmap from the selection list Note that only the bitmap that have been added by user can be deleted 2 Preview area This area displays the style of the key matrix currently being specified Function buttons Button Function Operation In the Simulation mode the following operation can be done 1 Inputting multiple keys simultaneously 2 Locking the key input value 1 Inputting multiple keys simultaneously To enter two keys simultaneously press the key to be input and right click the
106. h a6 Start user code f a Register Action Event 36 End user code Do a ifinclude CG_userdef Go to Here Jg Ae k Set PC to Here CUIRE EEEE E fee oe oe EEEE E E E 47 Global define T Move To Ctr l hl A RR R R E E E E E R E E E H Ag k Jump to Function File d4 fe Start de f 45 o WATT F 10 Back to Last Cursor Position 4g 7 47 UINT z_count_Ims 7 48 UINT _count_ tms s ale ad fin Shee dump a D Jumps are case insensitive The reference point of the path is the project folder in which the file is registered If the file is not registered in any project the reference point of the path will be the active folder Path specifications path file names including space characters must be enclosed in 2 6 2 Display the result of disassembling The result of disassembling the downloaded program disassembled text is displayed in the Disassemble panel below Select View menu gt gt Disassemble gt gt Disassemble 1 4 The maximum of 4 Disassemble panels can be opened Each panel is identified by the names Disassemble1 Disassemble2 Disassembles and Disassemble4 on the title bar For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Disassemble panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 83 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 116 Display the Result of Disassembling
107. having been called This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 174 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Step Over Executes the program step by step Note from the current PC position Step over execution In the case of a function call by the jarl instruction all the source lines instructions in the function are treated as one step and executed until the position where execution returns from the function step by step execution will continue until the same nest is formed as when the jarl instruction has been executed In the case of an instruction other than jarl operation is the same as when Step In is selected This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool Return Out Executes the program until execution returns from the current function or returns to the calling function N Return out execution This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool CPU Reset Resets the CPU does not execute a program This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool Restart Resets the CPU and then executes the program from the reset address This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool Note Step execution
108. in Shift_JIS code Displays character variables in EUC JP code UT Displays character variables in UTF 8 code File menu Local Variables panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Local Variables panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Local Variables Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see Data b Saving the contents of the local variable Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Local Variables Data As Save Local Variables Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file Data As txt CSV file csv see b Saving the contents of the local variable R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 273 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Local Variables panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Local Variables panel other items are all invalid Copies the contents of the selected line or the character string to the clipboard Select All Selects all the items of this panel Rename Changes to the edit mode to edit the selected local variable value see 2 Modify the contents of local variables Thi
109. is invalidated Caution This operation cannot be performed during program execution ASCII characters can be entered to values of local variables Examples 1 Remarks 1 Entering via an ASCII character In the Value area for the variable ch enter A gt gt 0x41 will be written to the memory area allocated to ch Entering via a numeric value In the Value area for the variable ch enter 0x41 gt gt 0x41 will be written to the memory area allocated to ch Entering via an ASCII string Set the display format of character array str to ASCII and in the Value area enter ABC gt gt 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x00 will be written to the memory area allocated to sir If a number with fewer digits than the size of the variable is entered the higher order digits will be padded with zeroes R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 118 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 If anumber with more digits than the size of the variable is entered the higher order digits will be masked 3 Ifthe display format of a character array type char or unsigned char is set to ASCII then the value can also be entered as a string ASCII Shift_JIS EUC JP Unicode UTF 8 3 Save the contents of local variables The Save As dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Local Variables Data As and all the contents in the local variables can be saved in a text file
110. is used to specify the pin name to be connected The connection pins can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list Analog Select this check box to use the specified pin as an analog pin Function Name This area is used to set a function name for the pin name When a character string is input in this area this character string is displayed as a function name in the pin name part If nothing is specified the pin name is dis played Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 375 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Validates the settings and closes this dialog box The pin name or display name is applied in the Pin field of the window from where this dialog box was called up R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 376 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Timing Chart window This window is used to display the output signals and input signals for pins in the form of a timing chart This window allows time measurement in main clock units The browsed signal data can be saved to the timing chart file wvo by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Save As Moreover the saved file contents can be restored by selecting File menu gt gt Open If the project file is save
111. it is moved with the E button The following buttons to set the display contents in the disassemble area are displayed Displays the offset value of the label The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address Displays the address value in the format symbol offset value default Note that when a symbol has been defined as the address value only the symbol is displayed Displays the name of the register by its function name default Displays the name of the register by its absolute name R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 252 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Disassemble panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Disassemble panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Disassemble Data Overwrites the contents of the disassembling to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see h Saving the contents of disassembled data Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Disassemble Data As Save Disassemble Data Opens the Data Save dialog box to newly save the contents of the disassembling to the As specified text file txt CSV file csv see h Saving the contents of disassemb
112. list Select No Specification if you do not wish to limit access types Specify Data This item is only enable if a value for Specify Access Address Is specified Specify the access data You can either type the data directly into the text boxes in hexadecimal number or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The data can also be specified as a range In this case specify a range by specifying data in both the left and right text boxes If the right hand text box is blank or contains the text Inout when range is specified then the fixed data specified in the left hand text box will be searched Specify Number Specify the range within the trace data to search via the number displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specify the starting number in the left text box and the ending number in the right text box 0 to last number are specified by default You can either type the numbers directly into the text boxes in base 10 format or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items If the left hand text box is left blank it is treated as if 0 were specified If the right hand text box is left blank it is treated as if the last number were specified Click the Search Backward Search Forward button When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the large number to small and
113. local btt id local ctt w im R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 230 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 33 Editor Panel When Code Coverage Measurement Result Is Displayed o Ef main c A lvoid maint gt be 53 A ef int local oa local b local oc on static int result AA unsigned long i ot char a Ad Ad iE Comment 4 BO iE Comment 7 E ik Comment tf a Ae Ba local a O3 Ef local Bb 0 BA local c 13 i BEJ O a E hglobal_charlarrays 0 Ay Ba ik Comment 6g Comment of fall ik Comment i te Ta 74 E 4 fi gt Oooo 0b O 2 3 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area File menu Editor panel dedicated items Edit menu Editor panel dedicated items Context menu How to open On the Project Tree panel double click the file Automatically opens after downloading the load module file with debug information On the Project Tree panel select the file and then select Open from the context menu On the Project Tree panel select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu and then create a text file source file On the Disassemble panel Call Stack panel Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Watch panel select Jump to Source from the context menu Automatically opens if there is a source text line correspond to the current
114. mapping to be added to 16 bitsNote 32bits Sets the access width of the memory mapping to be added to 32 bits Ye Note When being added to memory mapping fractions in the address value specified as the ending address are automatically rounded up to multiples of 2 if 16bits is selected or multiples of 4 if 32bits is specified e Button Add Adds the content specified in this area to memory mapping The added memory mapping is displayed in the Memory mapped list area The changes will not take effect until the OK button is clicked 2 Memory mapped list area a List display Information about the memory mapping added in the Added memory mapping specification area and the microcontroller s internal memory mapping is displayed This area cannot be edited R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 313 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory type Displays the following memory types V850E1 V850ES Internal ROM areaote 1 Internal RAM area DataFlash area e 1ECUBE MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 O register area Target memory area Target ROM area IECUBE Emulation ROM area IECUBE Simulator Emulation RAM area IECUBE Simulator Non map area I O protection area V850E2M Internal ROM areaNe 1 Internal RAM area DataFlash area te 1ECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG PBUS peripheral I O area CPU peripheral I O area Internal peripheral
115. memory area of the selected microcontroller is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 3 gt Chip select This property appears only when the Use DataFlash memory area property is set to Yes Select the chip select used for mapping of the data flash memory from the drop dawn list The selectable chip select values differ depending on the selected microcontroller Note that when the selected microcontroller is the V850ES core you cannot change the value of the property Clock You can configure the clock in this category c Sasae Figure 2 13 Clock Category IECUBE E Glock Main clock frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock oy ste rt R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 21 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt Figure 2 14 Clock Category IECUBE2 E Glock Main clack frequency MHz 6 00 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock freguency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock system TORY DGE clock MHz TUMHz Trace clock frequency MHz 80 00 Main clock frequency MHz Specify the main clock frequency before multiplication You can specify the frequency from the drop down list or by directly entering a frequency value between 0 001 and 999 999 unit MHz The drop down list displays the following frequencies unit MHz V850E1
116. memory to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions When a range is selected in the panel that range is specified by default When there is no selection then the range currently visible in the panel is specified Trace panel Specifying a range to save IECUBE IECUBE2 Simula Specify the trace range to save via the start and end trace numbers te tor Ranges can only be entered as base 10 numbers Saving all trace data From the drop down list to the left select All Trace Data The text box to the right is disabled All currently acquired trace data will be saved The range currently visible in the panel is specified by default Upload data Specify the range of memory to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions Note These are the numbers shown in the Number area of the Trace panel Function buttons Button Function Save Saves the data to a file with the specified filename in the specified format Cancel Cancels the save and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 342 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to display the progress of long processes This dialog box closes automatically when the currently executing process completes
117. not used In this case the target variable will not be displayed Remark When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 44 Local Variables Panel Local Var tables Toolbar Notation Heg Encoding Type Byte Size inti4 eB REG local inte 4 Ae fF REG local oc intl 4 R28 REG inti 4 R11 REG unsigned lonetl4 R29 REG This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Local Variables panel dedicated items Edit menu Local Variables panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Local Variable Description of each area 1 Scope area Select the scope of the local variable to be displayed from the following drop down list Displays local variables in the scope of the current PC value R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 270 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE lt Depth gt lt Function name file name line Displays local variables in the scope of the calling function Not l a number gt After the program is executed the scope that is selected is maintained as long as the selected scope exists Note The calling functions displayed in the Call Stack panel are displayed 2 Name area The local variabl
118. of disassembling by another instruction its byte number is automatically compensated with nop instruction as follows Examples 1 Overwriting the prepare instruction 8 byte instruction with the jarl instruction 4 byte instruction Before editing 0432 mov r6 1d38 mov r7 8fo071b0effff0000 prepare POL r22 0xlc O0Ox0000ffff 0132 mov r6 After editing 0432 r6 1d38 r29 r7 bfffe265 0x100 lp 0000 0000 0132 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 88 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution 2 Overwriting the mov instruction 2 byte instruction with the jarl instruction 4 byte instruction Before editing 0432 mov r6 1qd38 mov r7 8f071b0effff0000 prepare rel r22 0xlc O0Ox0000ffff 0132 mov r6 After editing 0432 mov 0x4 r6 bfffe265 jarl 0x100 lp 0000 nop 0000 nop 0000 nop 0132 mov 0x1 r6 Handling the prepare instruction and dispose instruction The following table shows the instruction formats of the prepare instruction and dispose instruction The operand list12 comprises 12 bit value where a different register is assigned to each bit list12 Instruction format of the prepare instruction prepare imm5 prepare list12 imm5 sp imm Instruction format of the list12 dispose instruction dispose imm5 dispose imm5 list12 reg1 When displaying the results of disassembling the prepare instruction and dispose instruction in the Disassemble panel the
119. of each area 1 Output string area Type in the string to add to the Output pane directly via the keyboard up to 1024 characters Note that the output string can only be one line spaces allowed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 324 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Variable expression area Specify the variable expression s for the Printf event Type a variable expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters You can specify up to 10 variable expressions for a single Printf event by separating them with commas If this dialog box is opens with a variable expression selected in the Editor panel Disassemble panel the selected variable expression appears as the default The basic input format that can be specified as variable expressions and the values output by Printf event are as follows Table A 17 Relationship between Variable Expressions and Output Value Printf Event Caution A variable expression including an arithmetic expression e g cannot be specified Remark The output result format by the Printf event in the Output panel are as follows Figure A 59 Output Result Format of Printf Event Specified characters Variable expression 1 Value 1 Variable expression 2 Value 2 Variable expression 3 Value 3 Specified characters Characters specified with Output string Variable expression 1 10 Characters specified with Variable
120. of the lower valid line if the corresponding address does not exist an error message will appear Remark The action event that is currently set does not occur while the program with this operation is in execution 3 Execute after changing PC value The program is executed after forcibly changing the current PC value to an arbitrary position To start this operation move the caret to the line instruction to start the program in the Editor panel Disassemble panel then select Set PC to Here from the context menu the current PC value is set to the address of the line instruction where the caret currently exists Then execute either one of the execution method described in 2 Execute from the current address 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps When either of the following operation is taken place the program is automatically stopped after step execution in source level units for one line source text in instruction level units for one instruction As contents in each panel are automatically updated by the minute after the program is stopped the step debugging is effective to debug the transition execution in source level units instruction units An execution unit for step execution is determined automatically by the panel in which the current focus is as follows When the focus is not in the Disassemble panel Step executionN in source level units When the focus is in the Disassemble panel Step execution in instruction units Note
121. on or off 7 Segment LED A product that consists of 7 LEDs configured to represent a numeric figure D g e g When the output from the pin assigned to the digit signal is active the corresponding HAA 7 segment LED switches on or off g 14 Segment LED A product that consists of 14 LEDs configured to represent an alphabetic character When the output from the pin assigned to the digit signal is active the corresponding 14 segment LED switches on or off A product that consists of multiple LEDs arranged in a matrix array When the output from an assigned pin is active the corresponding 14 segment LED switches on or off e g A buzzer connected to a pin indicates the output information from the connected pin with a bitmap Opens the Pull up Pull down dialog box Whether a pin is connected to a pull up down resistor can be specified via this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 386 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Figure menu Figure toolbar This menu and toolbar are used to set the operation mode of this window and select connected parts figure objects when newly creating or placing parts see 2 Creating figure objects In this menus similar operations can be performed using the buttons on the Figure toolbar Select Changes this window s operation mode to the Edit mode The cursor shape changes into an arrow enabling the edit of objects
122. on the Serial win dow Note that if seria File is specified by a relative path it is treated as relative to the path of the user model UserModel dll Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to start transmitting serial data described in a serial transmission data file ser that has been saved after being edited on the Serial window It takes time to complete transmission of the serial data If you want to know the timing of transmission completion set the transmission end notification function by using the SuoSeiNotifySentSerialCalloack function If this function is called for a serial interface that is currently transmitting data an error occurs Example include suo h SuoHandle hSeriall void funcl void SuoSendSerialFile hSeriall foo ser Send serial data on foo ser R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 499 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetNotifySentSerialCallback Registers serial transmission end notification callback Syntax include suo h int SuoSetNotifySentSerialCallback SuoHandle handle SuoNotifySentSerialCallback func Argument s Handle of the serial interface Pointer to a user defined function that performs processing when serial transmission is completed see NotifySentSerialFunc
123. panel is displayed 2 Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the debug tool that is selected in Project Tree panel is displayed by category in the list Also you can directly change its settings The E mark is indicates all the items in the category are expanded The mark indicates all the items are shrink You can expand shrink the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 184 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 4 Note that only the hexadecimal number is allowed in the text box if the mark is displayed in the property configuration area For details on the information how to setup in the category and property items contained in it see the section explaining the corresponding tab Property description area In this area brief description of the categories and properties selected in the detailed information display change area Is displayed Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed when each tab is selected In this panel following tabs are contained see the section explaining each tab for details on the display setting on the tab Connect Settings tab Debug Tool Settings tab Flash Self Emulation Settings tab IECUBE DataFlash Emulation Settings tab IECUBE Download File Settings tab Flash Options
124. position specification area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 103 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 In the Memory panel the value of the ID tag for the data flash memory can also be displayed changed when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory For details on the ID tag see the section for the Memory panel This section describes the following 1 2 1 Specify the display position 2 Change display format of values 3 Modify the memory contents 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution 5 Search the memory contents 6 Modify the memory contents in batch initialize 7 Save the memory contents Specify the display position lt is possible to specify the display start position of the memory contents by specifying an address expression in the display position specification area starting with address 0 by default Figure 2 132 Display Position Specification Area Memory Panel CIMoenbense Me a Specify an address expression Directly enter the address expression of the memory value address to display in the text box You can specify an input expression with up to 1024 characters The result of the expression is treated as the display start position address Note that address values greater than the microcontroller address space cannot be specified b Specify automatic ma
125. previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see c Saving the contents of watch expressions Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Watch Data As Save Watch Data As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt CSV file csv see c Saving the contents of watch expressions R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 283 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Watch panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Watch panel other items are all invalid Cut Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard If the watch expression s category s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If the watch expression s category s are selected copies them to the clipboard except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Paste If texts are in editing pastes the contents of the clipboard to the caret position If texts are not in editing and the watch expression s are copied in the clipboard registers them to the caret position Delete Deletes the selected character string s If the watch expr
126. products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for V850 microcontrollers and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for V850 microcontrollers integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the Cubesuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices Organization This manual can be broadly divided into the following units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE APPENDIX C INDEX How to R
127. range within the trace data to search via the number displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specify the starting number in the left text box and the ending number in the right text box 0 to last number are specified by default You can either type the numbers directly into the text boxes in base 10 format or select them from the input history via the drop down lists up to 10 items If the left hand text box is left blank it is treated as if 0 were specified If the right hand text box is left blank it is treated as if the last number were specified Function buttons Search Backward Searches upward in the direction of larger to smaller numbers within the specified range Search matches are selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Note that if an illegal value is specified a message will be appear and the trace data search will not be performed If focus moves to this dialog box while the Trace panel is hidden or another panel has focus then this button will be disabled Search Forward Searches forward in the direction of smaller to larger numbers within the specified range Search matches are selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Note that if an illegal value is specified a message will be appear and the trace data search will not be performed If focus moves to this dialog box while the Trace panel is hidden or another panel has focus then
128. ready status This ready status is released when data transmission or recep tion is completed Even if the CSI clock is received data is not transmitted or received in other than the data transmission reception ready status Accordingly when only wanting to reception data in the Serial window when Slave is selected execute as follows Reception setting when CSI serial slave is selected 1 Set Repeat Set the Repeat check box in the Format CSI dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 441 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Format CSD Master Slave Transter Glock o He Transter Direction MSB first OLSE first Data bit leneth Data Phase Normal Precede Clock Phase Normal Reverse 2 Set Wait time Set the Wait time to 0 as a dummy setting in the Serial window 3 Click the Auto Send button jz Seriall UARTO HER send Data Receive Data Status 0x00 Oxe 0x00 Oxic 0x00 0x28 0x00 0x45 0x00 0x80 0x00 xac Format All C lear Load Save Send C Auto Send D R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 442 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Appendix B provides detailed explanations of the user open interface that is one of the functions provided by Simulator GUI B 1 Overview Simulator GUI provides two ways of c
129. red b Displaying the code coverage ratio for each function The code coverage ratio for each function can be checked by the Code Coverage l item in the Function List panel of the analyze tool For details on the code coverage ratio of the function see CubeSuite Analysis 2 Data coverage IECUBE2 Simulator The data coverage ratio for each variable can be checked by the Data Coverage item in the Variable List panel of the analyze tool For details on the data coverage ratio of the variable see CubeSuite Analysis R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 153 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 14 Setan Action into Programs This section describes how to set the specified action into the program 2 14 1 Inset printf By setting the Printf event that is one of action events the value of the specified variable expression can be output the Output panel by executing a printf command after temporary stopping the program in execution at an arbitrary position To use this function follow the steps below Cautions 1 Also see 2 15 6 Notes for setting events for details on Printf events e g limits on the number of enabled events 2 Once a Printf event has been set its variable expressions cannot be edited If you need to edit a variable expression first delete the Printf event and then create a new one 3 Simulator When Yes is specified with the Execute instruction at break
130. simulations is selected Control the Simulator GUI via the Simulator GU window below This window appears automatically by default after connecting to the debug tool when a microcontroller whose Simulator supports peripheral function simulations is selected and Simulator is selected as the debug tool to use Remark The Simulator GU window and windows opened from it cannot be docked to the CubeSuite Main window Figure 2 181 Using the Simulator GUI Simulator GUI Window W W Simulator GUL Swe 2c 4 Bee A in 23 e GF th Hy sy mia H gt 8 8 bwl Ona lA 2 The setting of the display of the Simulator GUI window can be configured in the Simulator GUI category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel as follows Configure the appropriate settings Caution After connecting to the debug tool all the properties in this category will become invalid when a microcontroller whose Simulator does not support peripheral function simulations instruction simulation version is selected Figure 2 182 Simulator GUI Category Simulator GUI Display Simulator GUI Yes Display Simulator GUI on top of other windows Yes 1 Display Simulator GUI Specify whether to display the Simulator GU window from the drop down list Select Yes to use the function of the Simulator GUI default When you do not need to use the Simulator GUI select No to close the Simulator GU window R20UT0264EJ01
131. start measuring the execution time of the program when the line at caret is executedN Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use timer function property in the Timer IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Stop timer Sets a Stop Timer event to stop measuring the execution time of the program when the line at caret is executed te Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use timer function property in the Timer IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes View Result of Timer Opens the Events panel and displays only timer related events Clear Coverage Information Clears all the coverage measurement results currently being stored in the debug tool Note that this item appears only when the debug tool used supports the coverage function Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel and jumps to the address corresponding to the line at the caretote Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the caret position Open in New Panel Opens a new Editor panel with the same contents as the current Editor panel the title bar of the newly opened Editor panel displays the fi
132. sub clock frequency You can specify the frequency from the drop down list or by directly entering a frequency value number between 0 001 and 999 999 unit kHz The usable sub clock frequency values differ depending on the selected microcontroller The drop down list displays sub clock frequency values which can be used by the currently selected microcontroller The minimum usable sub clock frequency is specified by default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 49 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 4 gt Monitor clock This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports a sub clock Specify a clock for monitor programs to operate while the program is stopped Specify from the following drop down list System Operates with main clock default Operates with the clock that the program specified lt 5 gt TCK DCK clock MHz E1 JTAG Specify a clock supplied from E1 JTAG to the on chip debug unit DCU from the drop down list The drop down list displays the following frequency values 10MHz default 20MHz Cautions 1 Normally do not change the setting from 10MHz When 20MHZ is specified it may not be possible to connect to the debug tool 2 This property cannot be changed while connecting to E1 JTAG d Connection with Target Board You can configure the connection between E1 and the target board in this category Caution Properties in this categ
133. tab 221 Debug Tool Settings tab 199 Download File Settings tab 224 Flash Self Emulation Eettings tab 217 Hook Transaction Settings tab 228 Pull up Pull down dialog box 425 R Rapid build function 87 ReadExtbusFunc 519 Read protected object 266 Real time display update function 106 ReceiveSerialFunc 522 Register variables 271 Registering a watch expression 275 Registering watch expression 120 Reset 91 Reset vector 220 30 ResetFunc 514 Return out execution 94 175 176 Run Break time 145 Run Break Timer 300 301 Run Break Timer event 145 S Sample program 524 Save As dialog box 355 Save Settings dialog box 326 Scope specification 117 Search Data dialog box 382 Security flag emulation 30 219 Security ID 197 Select Data Save File dialog box 357 Select Download File dialog box 353 Select Pin dialog box 375 Select Simulator Configuration File dialog box 359 Serial interface functions 484 SSuoCreateSerialCS 487 SuoCreateSerialUART 485 SuoGetSerialHandle 489 SuoGetSerialParameterCSI 496 SuoGetSerialParameterUART 495 SuoSendSerialData 497 SuoSendSerialDataList 498 SuoSendSerialFile 499 SuoSetNotifySentSerialCallback 500 SuoSetReceiveSerialCallback 502 SuoSetSerialParameterCSI 492 SuoSetSerialParameterUART 490 Serial transmis
134. the Note execution of a program Background color Cream prog The highlighting is rest by executing again the program Character color When the value of the local variable cannot be acquired Background color Standard color Note Variables that the name stays same from the start point where the program started executing to the breakpoint and their values are changed are the target This area is provided with the following functions a Changing the local variable argument value To edit the local variable value or the argument value select the value to edit then change the value directly from the keyboard after clicking again on it press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode After you edit the value of the local variable or the argument it is written to the target memory of the debug tool by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region See 2 Modify the contents of local variables for details on the method for changing the local variable argument value b Saving the contents of the local variable The Save As dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Local Variables Data As and all the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 3 Save the contents of local variables for details on the method for saving the contents of the local variable 4 Type Byte Size area The type name of the local variable is displayed The nota
135. the Aero function of Windows Vista If you wish to close this window perform the configuration of the Property panel see 2 17 Use the Simulator GUI Simulator In addition do not use the Alt F4 key to close this window Remark The language of titlebar menubar of this window and windows opened from it depends on the setting of Regional and Language Options in Control Panel of the host machine used if this setting is set to Japan Japanese their titlebar menubar are displayed in Japanese Figure A 78 Simulator GUI Window Simulator GUL Sie Menubar 4 _ File Option Simulator Window Help asue rB Toolbar Window display area This section describes the following Menubar Toolbar Window display area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 361 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Menubar 1 File menu 2 Edit menu 3 View menu 4 Parts menu 5 Figure menu 6 Option menu 7 Simulator menu 8 Window menu 9 Help menu 1 File menu 2 3 4 5 New File Opens a new window for the Simulator GUI window Same operation as the l button Open Opens the files handled in the Simulator GUI window Same operation as the Ed button Closes the window currently having the focus Save Overwrites the contents of the window currently having the focus to the file handled in the Simulator GUI window Sa
136. the Watch panel Figure 2 144 Display the Contents of Watch Expression Watch Panel Watch Toolbar 2 2 Notation Value TypelByte Size fddress Memo 269698 COx00041082 ae 0x03 ff010c S PDLH IOR 0x00 IORCRAN 1 8 01 Oxlotr rood aP Reg _Set r3 REG Oxf 3ff08b4 General Registers 4 r4 REG Ox03 f810c General Rezisters 4 rh REG O0x00000548 General Registerad Watch area Value area Type Byte Size area Address area Memo area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 119 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This section describes the following o_o Register a watch expression 1 2 Organize the registered watch expressions 3 Edit the registered watch expressions 4 Delete a watch expression 5 Change display format of values 6 Modify the contents of watch expressions 7 Display modify the contents of watch expressions during program execution 8 Save the contents of watch expressions 1 Register a watch expression There are three ways as follows to register watch expressions watch expressions are not registered as default Cautions 1 Watch expressions can be registered up to 128 in one watch panel if this restriction is violated a message appears 2 Due to compiler optimization the data for the target variable may not be on the stack or ina register in blocks where that variable is not used In such cases if the variable is regist
137. the debug tool and sets them to the Property panel and the project Then closes this dialog box Note at this time that CPU reset may be generated automatically depending on the selected microcontroller Sets the currently set values to the project and closes this dialog box Closes this dialog box without setting Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 322 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input modify character strings Figure A 57 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Function buttons GK This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Hook Transaction Settings tab of the Property panel click the button displayed by selecting one of the property in the Hook Transaction Settings category Description of each area 1 Text area Input modify character strings in this area Function buttons Sets the input character strings to the caller panel dialog box and closes this dialog box Closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 323 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Action Events dialog box This dialog box is used to configure Printf events as action events See 2 14 Set an Action i
138. the keyboard Available 1 kHz to 999 999 MHz values Unit is depending on the specification with the Unit of Timer Trace clock frequency property Note The usable sub clock frequency values differ depending on the selected microcontroller If the frequency value which can be use is fixed the drop down list does not appear 4 Connection with Target Board IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE2 E1 The detailed information on the connection to the target board is displayed and its configuration can be changed Connecting with target Specify if the target board is connected to IECUBE IECUBE2 or not board IECUBE IECUBE2 Modifying Select from the drop down list Note that changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool Available Target board is connected values l Target board is not connected Communication Specify the port to which to connect MINICUBE2 E1 Serial when performing serial method communication between MINICUBE2 E1 Serial and the device in the target system MINICUBE2 Default Depends on the selected microcontroller E1 Serial Modifying Select from the drop down list Note that changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool Available Depends on the selected microcontrollerN values Power target from the Specify whether to supply power to the target system from E1 emulator MAX 200mA T AEAN Defaut E1 Modifying Select from the drop down list Note t
139. the real time display update function is limited to the internal RAM area and the HBUS shared memory area Update display during the execution Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel while executing a program Select Yes to update the display default Display update interval ms This property is valid only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms 500 is specified by default Access by release HALT mode MINICUBE This property appears only when the Access by stopping execution property is set to Yes Specify whether to allow access to the memory area CPU registers I O registers by releasing the HALT mode from the drop down list Select Yes to allow access to the memory area CPU registers I O registers by releasing the HALT mode default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 42 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Set Event While Running You can configure the setting of events while executing a program in this category Figure 2 53 Set Event While Running Category O Set Event While Runnin net event by stopping execution momentarily Mo lt 1 gt Set event by stopping execution momentar
140. the search results are shown selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the small number to large and the search results are shown selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 140 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Search in the source level Search the trace data in the source level Select the Source Level tab Figure 2 159 Search the Trace Data in the Source Level Trace Search search object The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line The execution part is retrieved specifying the function The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable search condition Source and Line search range a Search with specifying the source line default Select the The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line item in the Search object area and then follow the operation below lt 1 gt Specify Source and Line The specified character strings in this area is searched within the Line Address area of the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator You can either type the character strings of the source line to be find directly into the text box or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allo
141. this button will be disabled Cancels the trace data search and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 339 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to the Location dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to a specified position Figure A 66 Go to the Location Dialog Box for Editor Panel Go to the Location This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Move to On the Editor panel select Move to from the context menu On the Disassemble panel select Move to from the context menu On the IOR panel select Move to from the context menu Description of each area 1 Line number Address Symbol or IOR area Specify the location to which the caret is jump You can either type a location directly into the text box or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The data to specify various depending on the target panel as follows Target Panel Data Specified Editor panel Line number base 10 Disassemble panel Address expression IOR panel I O register name Function buttons Moves the caret to the specified location from the beginning of the area displayed in the target panel Cancels the jump and closes this dialog box Displ
142. to be input release the operating point As a result the displayed analog value is input The operating point can also be moved by clicking the desired location on the dial Slide type level gauge The displayed analog value changes as the slider button is moved by dragging it with the mouse When this analog value has become the value that is to be input release the button As a result the displayed analog value is input The button can also be moved by clicking the desired location on the slider Caution If you drag and drop the dial s operation point red circle or the slider s knob away from the level gauge then the voltage displayed in the level gauge will change but the voltage actually output by the level gauge will not change Make sure to always drag and drop over the level gauge R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 409 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Parts Led Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of LED which are one of the connec tion parts in the O Panel window A pin connected LED displays the information output from the simulator through lit unlit display in the Simulation mode There are two types of LED display styles figure and bitmap These styles can be changed on the Style tab Figure A 100 Parts Led Properties Dialog Box LED Connection Tab Farts Led Properties LED Connection Style
143. types Modifying Specify with the Memory Mapping dialog box The Memory Mapping dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting the mapping value you cannot change the mapping value on this panel Display Displays the memory mapping status by the types of memory area Contents The following detailed information is displayed by clicking the mark of each memory type Memory type Start address End address Access width bits Verify on writing to Specify whether to perform a verify check when data has been written to memory memory The timing to execute the verify check is as follows IECUBE At when the program is downloaded IECUBE2 At when variables and data are changed in the Watch panel Memory panel MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Modifying Select from the drop down list Default Yes Available Yes Executes the verify check values Does not execute the verify check Note The type is of the memory mapping area registered in the device file R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 204 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Access Memory While Running The detailed information on memory accesses while executing a program real time display update function see 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution is displayed and its configuration can be changed Access by stopping execution
144. using the debug tool s resources CubeSuite starts by using before execution break resource to set hardware breakpoints and as soon as that resource becomes unavailable uses after execution break resource see 1 Maximum number of enabled events For this reason the user cannot select between before and after execution b Simulator Figure 2 125 Break Category Simulator E Break Execute instruction at breakpoint when break gt No You can specify the timing to stop the program execution by breakpoints whether after or before the execution of the instruction at the breakpoint Specify in the Execution instruction at breakpoint when break property whether to break after executing the instruction Select Yes to break after execution of the instruction No is selected by default All set breakpoints are handled as Hardware Break events Caution When Yes is selected all of action events currently being set are handled as Hardware Break events see 2 14 Set an Action into Programs 2 Set a breakpoint Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembly text is displayed In the panel s event area click on the location where you want to set a breakpoint A breakpoint is set to the instruction at the start address corresponding to the clicked line When a breakpoint is set the following event mark appears at the breakpoint location and the source text line disa
145. values ms Set update display during the execution automatically IECUBE Update the contents of the display while executing the program by setting the area shown in the Watch panel Memory panel automatically as much as possible to the target range for the real time display update function This property appears only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Default Yes Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Yes Automatically sets the real time display update function values No Does not set the real time display update function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 205 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Access by release HALT mode IECUBE lIECUBE2 Specify whether to allow access to the memory area CPU registers I O registers by releasing the HALT mode This property appears only when the Access by stopping execution property is set to Yes Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Releases the HALT mode to access them values Does not release the HALT mode to access them 3 Set Event While Running IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 The detailed information on the function of the event setting during program execution is displayed and its MINICUBE E1 JTAG configuration can be changed Set event by stopping Specify whether to forcibly pause the execution for events that c
146. when stopping Mo Use open break function NotOutput signal Figure 2 124 Break Category MINICUBE2 E1 Serial E Break First using type of breakpoint software break Specify the types of the breakpoint to use with priority breakpoint that can be set with one click operation of the mouse in the First using type of breakpoint property Note however that if the number of the set breakpoints of the specified type exceeds the limit settable see 1 Maximum number of enabled evenis a breakpoint of another type will be used Select from the drop down list below for each use of the breakpoint Software break Temporary insert the instruction for the break right before after the code at the specified address and stop the program default This breakpoint is handled as a Software Break event R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 95 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Hardware break The debug tool checks the execution of the code at the address specified while the program in execution by the minute and stop the program when it is executed This breakpoint is handled as a Hardware Break event execution Note There are two types of Hardware Break event before execution break which breaks before the instruction at the specified address is executed and after execution break which breaks after the instruction at the specified address is executed Both of these break types are implemented
147. within the trace data to search via the number displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specify the starting number in the left text box and the ending number in the right text box 0 to last number are specified by default You can either type the numbers directly into the text boxes in base 10 format or select them from the input history via the drop down lists up to 10 items If the left hand text box is left blank it is treated as if 0 were specified If the right hand text box is left blank it is treated as if the last number were specified Function buttons Search Backward Searches upward in the direction of larger to smaller numbers within the specified range Search matches are selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Note that if an illegal value is specified a message will be appear and the trace data search will not be performed If focus moves to this dialog box while the Trace panel is hidden or another panel has focus then this button will be disabled Search Forward Searches forward in the direction of smaller to larger numbers within the specified range Search matches are selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Note that if an illegal value is specified a message will be appear and the trace data search will not be performed If focus moves to this dialog box while the Trace panel is hidden or another panel has focus then this bu
148. writing to memory Ves lt 1 gt Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed for each type of memory area The memory mapping status cannot be changed on this panel If it is necessary to add a memory mapping click on the Memory Mapping property and click on the button that appears on the right end of the setting field The Memory Mapping dialog box opens perform the setting from there See the section for the Memory Mapping dialog box for details on how to configure the parameters Figure 2 18 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box O Memory Memory mappings 4 0 Internal ROM area H Non map area Caution If you are not connected to a debug tool then only memory mapping areas added by user is displayed Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type lt 2 gt Verify on writing to memory Specify whether to perform a verify check when data has been written to memory from the drop down list Select Yes to perform verification default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 24 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark The verification is performed at when the download is performed or when the values that have been modified on the Watch panel Memory pane are written to the memory b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this categ
149. 0 OF SUO_LSBFIRST 8 slave 1MHz normal LSB First databit 8bit Set parameter of CSI1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 494 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoGetSerialParameterUART Acquires serial parameter UART type Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoGetSerialParameterUART SuoHandle handle SuoSerialParameterUART param Argumeni s Handle of the serial interface param Location where the parameters of the serial interface UART type are to be stored Specify a pointer to SuoSerialParameterUART structureNe Note For details on SuoSerialParameterUART structure see the SuoSetSerialParameterUART function Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to obtain the parameters UART type related to serial operation of the specified serial interface Example include suo h SuoHandle hUarti void funcl void SuoSerialParameterUART param SuoGetSerialParameterUART hUartl amp param Get parameter of UARTI1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 495 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoGetSerialParameterCSI Acquires serial
150. 0 During reception no parity check SUO_ODDPARITY Odd parity R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 490 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to set parameters UART type related to the serial operation of the specified serial interface The default values of the parameters are as follows Baud rate 9600 bps Transfer direction LSB first Data bit length 7 bits Stop bit length 1 bit Parity None Example include suo h SuoHandle hUarti void funci1 void SuoSerialParameterUART param baudrate 19200 19200 bps param direction SUO LSBFIRST LSB First param dataLength 8 databit 8 bit param stopLength L stopbit 1 bit param parity SUO_EVENPARITY even parity SuoSetSerialParameterUART hUartl amp param Set parameter of UART1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 491 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetSerialParameterCSIl Sets serial parameter CSI type Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include eno int SuoSetSerialParameterCSI SuoHandle handle const SuoSerialParameterCSI param Argumenit s Handle of t
151. 0 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Data area The accessed data value and the access type at that time are displayed However CPU register access is not displayed The notation of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item The display format of the data value and the access type are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Display Example Default Memory Access Type RData value Character color Standard color Read access Background color Character color Standard color Write access Background color RW Data value Character color Standard color Read and write access Background color Paleturquoise VECT Data value Character color Standard color Vector read access Background color Remarks 1 IECUBE If an I O register access or a memory access is generated via DMA DMA will be shown immediately after the data value of the frame where the access started ended 2 IECUBE2 To display the data value accessed via DMA select Yes with the DMA is traced property in the Trace category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel In this case the DMA trace data specified with the Select DMA trace data property in the category same as above is displayed in the following format lt Access type gt lt Data value gt lt DMA Channel number DMA Channel number gt lt
152. 0 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE 2 Pin connection wirel Wire l1 wirel cpu Port PinNamel wirel UserModell1 Port UserPinNamel a Generation of a wire Generate a wire line that connects pins by using the Wire function Be sure to specify 1 for the argument of the Wire function wire is a variable that indicates the generated wire The variable name can be determined freely b Connection of the wire and CPU Connect one end of the wire to a pin of the CPU Specify the name of the external CPU pin to be connected by using uppercase characters as PinName 1 note that lowercase characters cannot be used Enclose the pin name between double quotation marks c Connection of the wire and user model Connect the other end of the wire to a pin of the user model Specify the name of the user model pin to be connected as UserPinName 1 pin name generated in the MakeUserModel function Enclose the pin name between double quotation marks Add this line to connect two or more user model pins to the same wire 3 External bus connection extbusi1 BUS n extbusl1 cpu BusMasterlIF EXTBUS extbusl1 UserModel1 BusSlavelF UserExtbusNamel a Generation of a bus Generate a bus by using the BUS function Argument n of the BUS function is the data bus bit width This may be 8 16 or 32 extbus1 is a variable that indicates the generated bus The variable name can be determine
153. 00 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 164 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Display Simulator GUI on top of other windows This property appears only when the Display Simulator GUI property is set to Yes Specify whether to display the Simulator GU window in the forefront when program execution starts Select Yes to display it in the forefront default 2 17 1 Check the I O waveform of the microcontroller It is possible to check the I O waveform of the microcontroller by clicking the E button on the Simulator GUI window s toolbar and opening the Timing Chart window shown below This window displays a timing chart of the input and output signals of the microcontroller s pins See the section on the Timing Chart window for details about controlling the window Figure 2 183 Checking the I O Waveform of the Microcontroller Timing Chart Window Timing Ghartl T e A a Go iw bs Fin Name 2 17 2 Input signals to the pins To configure the input signal to a pin click the A on the Simulator GUI window s toolbar The following Signal Data Editor window opens You can use this window to set the input signal data for the input pin to a numerical value to be input at an arbitrary time See the section on the Signal Data Editor window for details about controlling the window Figure 2 184 Configuring the Input Signal to a Pin Signal Data Editor Window T AELE Editorl Ble M at as R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev
154. 010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note that this function is available only when the following conditions are satisfied depending on the build tool used a CA850 The target function 1 has been defined in an active project The type of the project specified as the active project is Application A fileN t 2 with the symbol information has been specified with Download files For while disconnecting from the debug tool the file has been specified at the top in Download files b CX The target is a function variable or label in C language The focus is in the Editor panel c An External build tool The target function 1 has been defined in an active project The focus is in the Editor panel A fileN 2 with the symbol information has been specified with Download files For while disconnecting from the debug tool the file has been specified at the top in Download files Notes 1 A jump to a static function cannot be made while disconnecting from the debug tool 2 When the file is the hex format the specification of downloading the symbol information is required see 4 Perform source level debugging with a hex or binary data format file Caution When multiple statements are described in a line a jump to an illegal location may be made Remark The word determination depends on the current build tool 5 Jump to a desired line tag jump If the information of a file name
155. 0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 41 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Select Yes to perform verification default Remark The verification is performed at when the download is performed or when the values that have been modified on the Watch panel Memory pane are written to the memory b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt Figure 2 51 Access Memory While Running Category MINICUBE El Access Memory While Runnre Seocess by stopping execution Yes Update display during the execution Yes Display update intervallme BOO Gocess by release HOLT mode Yes Figure 2 52 Access Memory While Running Category MINICUBE2 O Access Memory While Runnin Acocess by stopping execution No Update display during the execution Tes Display update intervallme 500 Access by stopping execution Specify whether to allow access to the memory area while executing a program Select Yes to allow access No is selected by default Caution V850E2M This property is not displayed when the selected microcontroller version supports multi core Also note that the target range for
156. 0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 479 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoGetExtbusHandle Acquires external bus interface handle Syntax include suo h SuoHandle SuoGetExtbusHandle const char extbusName Argumeni s Name ofthe extemal bus Return value p Macro Pp Beseription a of the specified Normal completion external bus interface NULL Exit with error abend Description This function is used to obtain the handle of the specified external bus interface Specify the name specified by the SuoCreateExtbus function as extbusName if a different name is specified NULL is returned Example include suo h SuoHandle hExtbus1 void funcl void hExtbusl SuoGetExtbusHandle EXTBUS1 Get handle of EXTBUS1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 480 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetReadExtbusCallback Registers external bus read access callback Syntax include suo h int SuoSetReadExtbusCallback SuoHandle handle SuoReadExtbusCallback func Argumeni s Handle of the external bus interface func Pointer to a user defined function that performs read access processing of an external bus see ReadExtbusFunc Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is u
157. 083 4054 4064 4085 4085 4056 4056 4087 Example of the result of the Pint Trace LineAddress Sourcer Disassemble Sddress 24 Elobal a gUbO9 gt gt gt Data Ox0stt 1c R 30599 464 _elobal_a s0600 gt gt event with read access to the variable lt lt lt global az30600 gt r gt global_a 0x0Sff 10c R s000 0x0sff710c R s0600 x global _a 30600 gt gt 0x03tt710c R 30600 264 _elobal_a s0601 gt 2 11 5 Display the collected execution history The collected trace data is displayed in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator below Select the View menu gt gt Trace The trace data displays by mixing the disassembled text and source text by default but it is also possible to display either one of these by selecting the Display mode For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Toolbar Figure 2 155 Display the Trace Data Trace Panel fel Y SA Notation T 3 Eeke El Di Mi co 4 A A p 6 S E J J Humber Time hmin s mapana 00h00 mindOs000 m00 ps0O0ns 00h00 mm00s000 me000ue500ns OOOO minQOs000 m s fbOns 00KO mintOs000 me000ue500ns OOOO minQOsU00 ms000uee5Ons OOhOO mintOs000 me000us250ns Line Address Source Disassemble Os O00006a0 prepare Ip Use O 000006a4 ctret mainc e 1 3 O000009ec br 9 _sub0 0x main c 205 Ox000009ba stim r OxO ep main c
158. 0UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 159 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS p ebug TooltoUse Tool to p ebug TooltoUse a papain Event Type a Serial IECUBE Simulator Nx85ET Other than With Debug Without Debug Core Nx85ET Core Function Function Hardware Break access Software Break A Trace Start Tracing Stop Tracing Point Trace Timer Result Start Timer Stop Timer Action Printtf Table 2 26 Event Types That Can be Set and Deleted during Execution V850E2M Debug Tool to Use a Event Type IECUBE2 a Simulator Nx85ET Core Other than Nx85ET Core Hardware Break before execution Hardware Break after execution Hardware Break access Timer Result Start Timer Stop Timer Action Printtf C Yes A Yes if the program execution is allowed to pause for events ote g Yes if the operation of tracer timer is allowed to pause for eventsote A Not while tracer or timer is executing Cannot be set or not supported R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 160 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note To enable this specify Yes with the Set event by stopping execution momentarily property in the Set Event While Running category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel 3 Other notes No events can be set to local variables Events do not occur during step execution including retu
159. 1 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Performs the reset processing as a callback function Caution MResetFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void ResetFunc void Argument s None Return value None Description ResetFunc describes the reset processing Use the SuoSetResetCallback function to register ResetFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 514 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE NotifyTimerFunc Performs the processing when the timer time is reported as a callback function Caution NotifyTimerFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void NotifyTimerFunc SuoHandle handle Argumeni s handle Handle of the timer interface Return value None Description NotifyTimerFunc describes the processing when the timer time is reported Use the SuoSetNotify TimerCallback function to register Notify TimerFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 515 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE InputDigitalPinFunc Performs the digital pin input processing as a callback function Caution InputDigitalPinFunc is a place holder for a user defin
160. 10 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Watch panel This panel is used to display the contents of the registered watch expressions and change their values see 2 9 6 Display change watch expressions Up to a maximum of four of these panels can be opened Each panel is identified by the names Watchi Watch2 Watch3 and Watch4 on the title bar and the watch expressions can be registered deleted moved individually Watch expressions can be registered in this panel as well as in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel or IOR panel When the panel is closed with registered watch expressions the panel closes but the information on the registered watch expressions is retained Therefore if the same panel is opened again it is opened with the watch expressions registered The display contents are automatically updated when the value of the watch expression changes after a program is executed when the execution is done in steps the display is updated after each step In addition by enabling the Real time display update function it is also possible to update the display contents in real time even while a program is being executed This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Remark When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area
161. 2 Macro Service Error The detailed information on flash macro service is displayed and its configuration can be changed Generate Specify whether to return error values in FlashBlockErase functions to emulate FlashBlockErase error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values Generate Specify whether to return error values in FlashBlocklVerify functions to emulate FlashBlockl Verify error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values Generate Specify whether to return error values in FlashWordWrite functions to emulate FlashWordWrite error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values Generate Specify whether to return error values in FlashBlockBlankCheck functions to emulate FlashBlockBlankCheck error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values Generate FlashSetInfo Specify whether to return error values in FlashSetlnfo functions to emulate error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 218 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Generate Specify whether to return err
162. 2 Display the coverage measurement result can be performed in this panel Disassemble panel The result of disassembling the downloaded program the memory contents is displayed and can be edited line assemble Furthermore the instruction level debugging see 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps and the display of the code coverage measurement result see 2 13 2 Display the coverage measurement result can be performed in this panel In this panel the disassemble results can be displayed with the corresponding source text default Remark Itis normally necessary to download a load module file with debugging information in order to perform the source level debugging but it is also possible to do so by downloading a hex format hex or binary data format bin file see 4 Perform source level debugging with a hex or binary data format file 2 6 1 Display source files The source file is displayed in the Editor panel below The Editor panel automatically opens with displaying source text of the specified position see 2 5 1 Execute downloading when a load module file is successfully downloaded If you want to open the Editor panel manually double click on the source file in the Project Tree panel For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Editor panel Figure 2 110 Display Source File Editor Panel main c GF lvoid maint A EREI a A ef int local_a local ob local_c oo
163. 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE lt 2 gt Directly register in the Watch panel Click the button on the toolbar or select Add New Watch from the context menu in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 to display an entry box for a new watch expression in the bottom of this area Directly input a watch expression from the keyboard in the Watch area in the entry box then press the Enter key The input format of the watch expression is as follows Table A 8 Input Format of Watch Expression Watch expression gt Member name Member of structures unions that pointer designates Watch Expression Value of pointer variable CPU register name Value of the CPU register I O register name I O register value Label EQU symbol and immediate Values of label EQU symbol and immediate address address Bit symbol Bit symbol value Watch expressions can be registered with specifying the scope The scope specifications with watch expression registration are as follows Table A 9 Scope Specification of C language Used with Watch Expression Registration File Name Name Name Table A 10 Scope Specification of CPU Register with Watch Expression Registration Scope Specification Register Bank Name of CPU Register r10 REG R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 278 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Table A 11 Scope Specification of I O register with Watch Expression
164. 20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 444 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE 3 Event driven method The user open interface uses an event driven method in which processing is described in accordance with occur rence of evenis Therefore a callback function prepared on the user model side is called if an event such as initialization of simula tion resetting the CPU signal output to a pin or access to the external bus occurs on the Simulator GUI side In addition a time interface timer function provided to perform time series processing of a user model also calls a callback function prepared on the user model side when the specified time has elapsed B 1 3 Development environment Use the following development tools to perform programming with the Simulator GUI s user open interface and create a DLL file Microsoft Visual C Ver 6 00 or later R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 445 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 2 Creating User Model This section describes how to create a user model B 2 1 Program configuration The following figure shows the program configuration when the Simulator GUI s user open interface is used to expand a system Figure B 2 Program Configuration Expanded simulation block other user models Pin connection CPU simulation block User open interface User model CPU core Pin connection process
165. 264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 333 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Instruction Level tab Use this tab to search the acquired trace data at the instruction level Caution Ifthe Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator is set to Source display mode then performing an instruction level search via this tab will not perform the target search correctly In order to perform an instruction level search set the mode to Mixed display mode or Disassemble display mode Figure A 64 Trace Search Dialog Box Instruction Level Tab Trace Search Source Level a annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Search condition Fetch Address Mrne monic 1 Access Address Aocess Status Data Search range 2 Number Function buttons search Backward Search Forward This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator select button on the toolbar On the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator select Find from the context menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 334 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Search condition area a b c d Fetch Address Specify the fetch address if it is a required search parameter You
166. 60K 64K 128K 192K 256K 320K 384K 448K 512K 576K 640K 704K 768K 832K 896K 960K 1M 2M 3M Enable trace data Specify whether to perform complementary display when displaying the collected trace dataNote 3 complement P Default Yes IECUBE IECUBE2 Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Performs complementary display of trace data values Does not perform complementary display of trace data Notes 1 This property is automatically set to Yes when selecting Start Tracing Stop Tracing from the context menu in the Editor panel Disassemble panel 2 The trace frame is a unit for the trace data Each fetch write read uses one trace frame 3 Complement display of instructions between branch instructions that cannot be traced by hardware can be performed The trace memory is cleared automatically if you change the setting of this property 7 Timer IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator The detailed information on timer functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed Caution IECUBE2 All of the properties in this category become invalid when the Use for trace data property in the Trace category is set to other than Timer Use timer function Specify whether to use the timer function Simulator Default Modifying Select from the drop down list values Available Uses timer functions Does not use timer functions R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 212 of 538
167. 8 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C INDEX L Move to the specified address 85 Label 293 Move to the symbol defined location 86 Label name 250 Line assembly 88 251 Load module file 67 Local variable 117 Local Variables panel 270 Loop dialog box 374 M Macro service error 29 Main window 172 MakeUserModel 511 Manage events 156 Change the setting state of the event 156 Delete the set events 157 158 Display only particular event types 157 Event types that can be set and deleted during execution 159 Jump to the event address 157 Maximum number of enabled events 158 Mask for input signal 28 44 55 56 75 Maximum number of enabled events 158 Measure Execution Time of the Program 145 Measurable time ranges 148 Measure execution time from the start to stop of the execution 145 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section 146 Measurement of the execution time of the program 145 Memory access 25 42 53 63 Memory Initialize dialog box 328 Memory mapping 24 41 52 62 311 Memory Mapping dialog box 310 Memory Search dialog box 330 Memory settings 24 62 Memory type 311 Menubar 173 Mixed display mode 137 294 Move to 81 N NotifySentSerialFunc 521 NotifySentWaveFunc 523 NotifyTimerFunc 515 O Offset value 250 293 On chip debug security ID 320 On chip debug unit
168. A WINDOW REFERENCE DMA is traced Specify whether to perform the DMA trace Direct Memory Access Trace lIECUBE2 Default No Modifying Select from the drop down list values Does not perform the DMA trace Available Performs the DMA trace Select DMA trace data IECUBE2 Select the type of the DMA trace data to be acquired This property appears only when the DMA is traced property is set to Yes See 2 11 1 Configure the trace operation for details on this property Default Access Type Access Address Data Size Access Data Modifying Select from the drop down list Available values Access Type Access Address Data Size Access Data Access Type Access Address Data Size Access Type Channel Number Access Type Channel Number Transfer Count Access Type Access Data Channel Number Transfer Count Trace priority IECUBE IECUBE2 Select which item should be given priority when collecting the trace data This property appears only when the Use for trace data property is set to Trace Default Speed priority Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Speed priority Traces giving priority to the real time performance values Data priority Traces after stopping the execution pipeline of the CPU temporarily so that no data is missed Note 1 Use trace function Specify whether to use the trace function Simulator No Modifying Sele
169. AK Pow Off E 0x000009ae 22 Y850 IECUBE BE The result of the measurement 2 Check on the Events panel After the program is stopped the result of the measurement is displayed in the Events panel opened by selecting the View menu gt gt Event in event type as Run Break Timer Figure 2 163 Example of the Result of the Run Break Timer Event Events Panel Events Em ME ra Name Detail Information Comment R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 145 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 2 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator In the program execution process the execution time in the arbitrary section can be measured by setting the Timer result event Start Timer event Stop Timer event To use this function follow the steps below Cautions 1 Also see 2 15 6 Notes for setting events for details on Timer Result events e g limits on the number of enabled events 2 IECUBE2 Some of the trace function the timer function except for the Run Break timer and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis Therefore to use the timer function Timer must be specified with the Use for trace data property in the Trace category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel 3 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 The Timer result event is not supported 4 Simulator To use this function Yes must be specified w
170. AM size to emulate unit bytes To perform debugging using IECUBE memory resources after changing the memory mapping make a selection form the drop down list ECUBE2 The internal RAM size to emulate is displayed unit bytes You cannot change the value of this property R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 20 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt Size of DataFlash memory KBytes IECUBE2 The size of the data flash memory area of the selected microcontroller is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property Caution IECUBE You should be careful not to overlap the area with other memory mapping area mark in the setting column indicates that if you change the setting of this property value CPU reset is generated automatically b DataFlash IECUBE You can configure the data flash function in this category Note that this category appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory Sesa Figure 2 12 DataFlash Category E DataF lash Use DataFlash memory area Yes Chip select Cal lt 1 gt Use DataFlash memory area Specify whether to use the data flash memory from the drop down list Select Yes to use the data flash memory No is selected by default lt 2 gt Size of DataFlash memory KBytes This property appears only when the Use DataFlash memory area property is set to Yes The size of the data flash
171. Active Level Low HIGH Figure A 101 Parts Led Properties Dialog Box Style Tab Parts Led Properties LED Connection Style Figure Shape Line Fill up Thickness zz Active Active 1 Tnactive Tnactive 2 Tnactive Function buttons Apply R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 410 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open LED Connection tab Style tab Function buttons Operation How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a part object LED Select Properties form the context menu on a part object LED Select a part object LED and then select Properties form the View menu LED Connection tab 1 Pin connection information setting area Label This area is used to specify the part name The part name input here is also displayed in the Parts List dialog box as the label Pin Name This area is used to specify the pin name to be connected output pin The connection pins can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list Active Level The active state is selected with a option button as follows Sets the active level to LOW HIGH Sets the active level to HIGH default Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcont
172. Address range gt lt Comparison condition gt lt Comparison value gt Example Read main c func1 variable1 0x100 0x101 0x10 Format3 lt Condition to occur gt lt Variable name gt lt Address range gt lt Comparison condition gt lt Comparison value gt Example Write variable 0x100 0x101 0x10 Formati lt Condition to occur gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt Example Before Execution main c 40 0x102 Software Break IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Before Execution sub c 101 0x204 Format2 lt Condition to occur gt lt Symbol Offset gt lt Address gt Example Before Execution funcA 0x12 0x102 Unconditional Trace Format IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Example Run Break Timer Format Total lt Total execution time gt Example Total 1000ms Total OVERFLOW R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 302 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Event Type Display Contents 1 Trace Format Total of Start End lt Total number of Start tracing Stop tracing events gt IECUBE ae IECUBE2 lt Start End gt lt Detailed information of Start tracing Stop tracing gt Simulator Example Total of Start End 4 ePOnaIOn eee Mon Start After Execution main c 1000x300 Start After Execution funcA 0x1000x300 End After Execution main c 2000x100 End After Execution funcA 0x100x100 Timer Result Format Total lt Total execution t
173. BE used When the Use for trace data property in the Trace category is set to other than Coverage 2 IECUBE2 All of the properties in this category become invalid when the Use for trace data property in the Trace category is set to other than Coverage Use coverage function Specify whether to use the coverage function Modifying Select from the drop down list values Available Use coverage functions Does not use coverage functions R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 213 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Reuse coverage result Specify whether to load save the coverage measurement result when connecting to or disconnecting from the debug tool IECUBE IECUBE2 This property appears only when the Use for trace data property is set to Coverage Simulator This property appears only when the Use coverage function property is set to Yes values Does not load save the coverage measurement result Coverage area of Specify the area that performs coverage measurement measurement 1MBytes Specify the start address of any 1 Mbyte space other than the internal ROM area IECUBE IECUBE Simulator This property appears only when the Use for trace data property is set to Coverage Simulator This property appears only when the Use coverage function property is set to Yes Default The start address of internal RAM area Modifying Directly enter f
174. Category El Flash Self Emulation Flash self program ming Mo Flash Macro service specification Flash self programming Wer 2 00 or earlier lt 1 gt Flash self programming Specify whether to use the flash self programming emulation function from the drop down list Select Yes to use the flash self programming emulation function No is selected by default lt 2 gt Flash Macro service specification This property appears only when the flash memory process is Type Select a specification of the flash macro service from the following drop down list 4 Note Flash self programming Ver 2 00 or earlier default Flash self programming Ver 3 00 or later Note The determination of the flash memory process is made when connected to the debug tool Consequently this will not be hidden when disconnected from the debug tool b Macro Service Error You can configure the operation of flash functions of the self programing library for the flash macro service in this category For details on the flash functions see V850 Microcontrollers Flash Memory Self Programming Library Type0x Figure 2 28 Macro Service Error Category O Macro Service Error Generate FlashBlockErase error Mo Generate FlashBlock Verity error Mo Generate Flash Word write error No Generate FlashBlock Blank Check error No Generate Flashsethhto error Mo Generate FlashFLMDGheck error No With the following properties specify whether to return the error value
175. Change display format The display format of the disassemble area can be changed using buttons below on the toolbar The following buttons to change the display format are displayed Displays the offset value of the label The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address Displays the address value as the result of disassembling in the format symbol offset value default Note that when a symbol has been defined as the address value only the symbol is displayed Displays the name of the register by its function name default Displays the name of the register by its absolute name 3 Move to the specified address You can move to the specified address in the disassembled text in the Go to the Location dialog box opens when selecting Move to from the context menu In this dialog box follow the steps below Figure 2 118 Move to the Specified Address in Disassembled Text Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location a Specify Address Symbol Specify the address you want to move the caret to You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 85 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Click the OK button Caret is moved to the specified address 4 Move to the symbol defined location You can
176. Data Save File dialog box b Specify File Type Select the format in which to save the file from the following drop down list The following file formats can be selected Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formatNote R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 86 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting c Specify Save Range Address Symbol Specify the range of addresses to save via start address and end addresses Directly enter hexadecimal number address expression in each text box or select from the input history displayed in the drop down list up to 10 items If a range is selected in the panel that range is specified as the default If there is no selection then the range currently visible in the panel is specified d Click the Save button Disassembling data is saved in the specified file with the specified format Figure 2 120 Output Example of Disassembling Data Label symbol name q Label symbol line Address Offset Code Result of Disassembling Disassembling line File name Line number C language source text lt Source text line Remark When the contents of the panel are overwritten and saved by selecting File menu gt gt Save Disassem
177. Default V850E1 V850ES 4 00 V850E2M 8 00 Modifying Select from the drop down list or directly enter from the keyboard Available Either one of the following from the drop down list values V850E1 V850ES IECUBE MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 2 50 4 00 5 00 6 00 8 00 13 50 18 00 unit MHz Simulator 1 00 2 00 3 00 3 57 4 00 4 19 4 91 5 00 6 00 8 00 8 38 10 00 12 00 16 00 20 00 25 00 30 00 32 00 33 33 34 00 40 00 48 00 50 00 64 00 80 00 unit MHz V850E2M IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG 4 00 5 00 7 20 8 00 9 60 10 00 13 50 16 00 unit MHz Simulator 1 00 2 00 3 00 3 57 4 00 4 19 4 91 5 00 6 00 7 20 8 00 8 38 9 60 10 00 12 00 16 00 20 00 25 00 30 00 32 00 33 33 34 00 40 00 48 00 50 00 64 00 80 00 unit MHz Directly enter the numbers ranged below 0 001 to 999 999 unit MHz Main clock multiply rate IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Specify the main clock frequency multiplier Modifying Select from the drop down list or directly enter from the keyboard Available Either one of the following from the drop down list values V850E1 V850ES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 V850E2M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 Directly enter the numbers ranged below Integer number between 1 and 99 Sub clock Specify the sub clock frequency in kHz unit frequency kHz This property appears only when the selected microcont
178. Disassemble Panel Disassemble iE Start user code Do not edit comment generated F bttf46f f jarl TMPU tart IF THRO Starti EN KiU nogog08se S505 oF Ec t End user code Do not edit comment generated her OOO0006S 4 QOO0U008S6 O00 cal lt ixi AIEEE bhfd br _m intix Nog00088a 0000 nop UL Address area Disassemble area Event area This section describes the following 1 Change display mode 2 Change display format 3 Move to the specified address 4 Move to the symbol defined location 5 Save the disassembled text contents O1 1 Change display mode The result of disassembling is displayed in the mixed display mode both the disassembled text and the source text by default When you click the iia button toggle function on the toolbar the source text is displayed or hidden R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 84 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 117 Display Example of Source Text Hidden Disassemble TEE OOO00082c UO0000d26 bffT4btt _THPO Start OOO000eS bold mainti x UOOU00eS 4 el callt Jsle OOO0008S6 0002 ipa ALINE RE bofd _taintll x MINNIE EE odoi ER Init LINIE ET chii CLOCK _Init ix OO0U0083e 400 d0t6 r WOTH2 INLINE F clofects 0x0 PLLOTL OOO000846 015a Oxi rll ALINEE iy 40ottctl ril PRCMD ALINI fs 40otzota ril POC OOO000850 ci icf 0x0 RCH AEE ciar bif 0x4 FRSMO 2
179. Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in signed decimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in unsigned decimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in octal number Displays the value of the selected item including Sub items in binary number Displays the character string of the selected item including sub items in ASCII code If the character size is 2 bytes and above it is displayed with the characters for each 1 byte arranged side by side Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data displays it in the default notation Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that when the value is not 8 byte data displays it in the default notation Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 261 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu CPU Register panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the CPU Register panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save CPU Register Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see b Saving the contents of the CPU register Note that when the file h
180. E Figure A 95 Parts Key Properties Dialog Box Style Tab Parts Key Properties Key Matrix Connection Style Fieure Preview shape had Line Fill up Thickness zz Active Active K 1 Tnactive Tnactive Active 2 Tnactive Function buttons Apply This section describes the following How to open Key Matrix Connection tab Style tab Function buttons Operation How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a part object Key matrix Select Properties form the context menu on a part object Key matrix Select a part object Key matrix and then select Properties form the View menu Key Matrix Connection tab 1 Pin connection information setting area Label This area is used to specify the part name The part name input here is also displayed in the Parts List dialog box as the label R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 402 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Pin Name This area is used to specify the pin name to be connected input pins and output pins The connection pins can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list This area can be used to set 16 x 16 pins using the scrollbar Ind In15 Specify input pins OutO Out15 Specify output pins NOO Nff This area is where the t
181. E Break 9 gt E Mask for Input Sinal Mask RESET signal Mo Memory Connect Settings h Debug Tool Download File 5 Hook Transactio Figure A 22 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E1 JTAG V850E1 V850ES Property es WASO ETIJTAG Property Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory El Access Memory While Runnine Access by stopping execution Update display during the execution Display update intervallme El Set Event While Runnine net event by stopping execution momentarily Break El Mask for Input Signal Mask NMIO signal Mask NMO signal Mask NMI signal Mask HLORG signal Mask RESET signal Mask STOP signal Mask WAIT signal Mask DBINT signal External Flash Memory Download Memory y Connect Settings k Debug Tool S Download File 5 Hook Transactio R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 202 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 23 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E1 JTAG V850E2M Property cee WEBO E1CITAG Property Memory mappings Verity on writing to memory El Access Memory hile Runnine Access by stopping execution Update display during the execution Display update intervallme El Set Event hile Runnine net event by stopping execution momentarily Break El Mask for Input Signal Mask HLORG signal Mask RESET signal Mask STOP signal Mask WATT sienal External Flash Memory Download Memory Con
182. EDs level gauges and other components 166 2 18 About Input Value 167 2 18 1 Input rule 167 2 18 2 Icons for invalid input 169 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 170 A 1 Description 170 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE 443 B 1 Overview 443 B 1 1 Types of interface functions 444 B 1 2 Interface methods 444 B 1 3 Development environment 445 B 2 Creating User Model 446 B 2 1 Program configuration 446 B 2 2 Outline of programming 447 B 2 3 Example of program file UserModel c 449 B 2 4 Compilation and linking 450 B 3 Embedding User Model 451 B 3 1 Description in simulator configuration file 451 B 3 2 Example of simulator configuration file 453 B 4 Supplied Interface Functions 455 B 4 1 Overview 455 B 4 2 Basic interface functions 457 B 4 3 Time interface functions 461 B 4 4 Pin interface functions 468 B 4 5 External bus interface functions 477 B 4 6 Serial interface functions 484 B 4 7 Signal output unit interface functions 503 B 4 8 Error numbers 509 B 5 User Defined Functions 510 B 6 Sample Program Timer Model 524 B 6 1 Overview 524 B 6 2 Configuration 524 B 6 3 Operation 524 B 6 4 Project file 524 B 6 5 Details of program 525 APPENDIX C INDEX 529 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CubeSuite is a platform of an integrated developing environment for the 78KO microc
183. EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 427 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open Object Connection tab Style tab Function buttons How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a figure object Select Properties form the context menu on a figure object Select a figure object and then select Properties form the View menu Object Connection tab 1 Pin connection information setting area Pin Connect Select the method for connecting objects and output pins by clicking the corresponding option buttons and specify the output pin name As a result of the connection figure display is switched by the ON OFF status of the con nected output pin No Connection The object and pin are not connected default Objects not connected to pins are always in the displayed status Static Connection Connects the figure to 1 output pin The connection pin can be specified in Pin Name either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list During simulation the object is displayed when the specified output signal data is active Dynamic Connec Connects the figure to 2 output pins tion The connection pin can be specified in Pin Name1 and Pin Name2 either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list During simulation the object is displayed when the sp
184. FFFFF Option bytes setting 6 gt L Chip erase when writing Function butors T This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Flash Options Settings tab V850E2M tab of the Property panel click the button displayed by selecting the Flash options property in the Flash Options category Description of each area 1 Option Bytes Setting a OPBTO OPBT8 Specify the option bytes Directly enter the value in hexadecimal number from 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF the value before shipment of the microcontroller is specified by default 2 On chip Debug Security ID Setting IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG a Security ID Specify the on chip debug security ID Directly enter 24 digits hexadecimal number 12 bytes FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF is specified by default For details on the on chip debug security ID see User s Manual of the debug tool used R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 320 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Security Setting ECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG Configure the security functions via each item below 4 5 All items are set to No by default a b c d e Disable read Specify whether to prohibit read command reading Select Yes to prohibit read command Disable program Specify whether to prohibit prog
185. FH OO7FFH RESV OSFFFH R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 31 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 DataFlash Emulation Settings tab IECUBE In the DataFlash Emulation Settings tab IECUBE general configurations on the data flash emulation function can be done Note that this tab appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory a DataFlash Emulation b EEPROM Library Error c Writing Time Erasing Time DataFlash Emulation You can configure the data flash emulation function in this category a Sea Figure 2 31 DataFlash Emulation Category El DataFlash Emulation DataF lash emulation Mo lt 1 gt DataFlash emulation Specify whether to use the data flash emulation function from the drop down list Select Yes to use the data flash emulation function No is selected by default b EEPROM Library Error You can configure the EEPROM emulation library in this category Specify the operation for the EEPROM emulation library function For details on the self programing library functions see V850 Microcontrollers Flash Memory Self Programming Library TypeOx Figure 2 32 EEPROM Library Error Category El EEPROM Library Error Generate Word ite error Yes Gddress generated Word write error 0 Generate Block Erase error Yes Address generated Block Erase error 0 Generate Block Verify error Yes Address generated Block Verify e
186. Figure A 68 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open This dialog box appears automatically when a message is displayed during a long process Description of each area 1 Message display area Displays messages during processing cannot be edited 2 Progress bar The amount of progress mad toward completing the current progress is indicated by the length of the bar The dialog box will automatically close when the progress reaches 100 the length of the bar reaches the right end Function buttons Cancel Cancels the currently executing process and closes this dialog box Note that this button will be disabled if the currently executing process cannot be interrupted R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 343 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 69 Option Dialog Box Option a Font and Color a External Tools a Build Debug Function buttons Initialize All Settings Apply This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option
187. Func as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 519 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE WriteExtbusFunc Performs the write access processing of an external bus as a callback function Caution WriteExtbusFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void WriteExtbusFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr int accessSize const unsigned char data Argument s Handle of the external bus interface accessSize Access size data Data storage area As many data as the access size must be stored Return value None Description WriteExtbusFunc describes the write access processing of an external bus Use the SuoSetWriteExtbusCalloack function to register WriteExtousFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 520 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE NotifySentSerialFunc Performs the processing when transmission by a serial interface has been completed as a callback function Caution NotifySentSerialFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void NotifySentSerialFunc SuoHandle handle Argumeni s handle Handle of the serial interface Return value None Description Noti
188. HEX FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Programmable FO Internal ROMZ RAH Connect Setti A Debug Tool Setti Download File S Hook Transactio Figure A 13 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E1 JTAG V850E2M Property es VE5O0E2M E1TiJTAG Property Main clock frequency MHz 8 00 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock ovate Mm TOKDCK clack MHz 1OMHz El Connection with Target Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200mAa No El Flash security ID HEX FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Internal ROMZ RAM Connect S 4 Debug Tool Download Fi Flash Option Hook Trans R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 190 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 14 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab Simulator V850E1 V850ES Property es WASO Simulator Property Size of internal ROM K Bytes 256 Size of internal RAM Bytes 16384 Main clock frequency MHz 400 Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Select Timer Trace clock frequency GPU clock frequency 6 gt E Configuration Use simulator contieuration tile 7 gt Programmabk I O Internal ROMZ RAM Connect Setti Debug ToolSett Download File 5 Hook Transactio Figure A 15 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab Simulator V850E2M Property eo WASOEZM Simulator Property 1 gt E Internal ROM RAM 3 gt E Glock Main
189. Hardware Break access Event Type Software Break 8 when TRAN is not incorporated 40 200 when TRAN is incorporated Trace 4 3 3Note 5 3oNote 5 Start Tracing Stop Tracing Timer Result 44 3 4 gNote 5 Start Timer Stop Timer Notes 1 1 when the flash emulation function is specified to valid Yes is specified with the Flash self programing property in the Flash self Emulation category in the Flash Self Emulation Settings tab IECUBE of the Property panel 2 Hardware Break events before execution and Hardware Break events access are combined use The number of settable break events that can be set in the flash memory area depends on the ROM collection function of the selected microcontroller The before break after break can be specified in the Property panel Only one group can be set however two or more Start Stop events can be set Combination with Software Break events Sol a Combination with Hardware Break events 2 Event types that can be set and deleted during execution The following types of events can be set or deleted during program execution or during tracer timer execution Table 2 25 Event Types That Can be Set and Deleted during Execution V850E1 V850ES Debug Tool to Use pe poate Event Type pe Serial IECUBE Simulator Nx85ET Other than With Debug Without Debug Core Nx85ET Core Function Function Hardware Break before execution Hardware Break after execution R2
190. ID number for each event no renumbering of the ID number is done even in the event that an event that has been set once is deleted Event types that are displayed are as follows Table A 14 Event Type Hardware Break BreakNote 1 Software Break BreakNote 1 IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer Trace IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Timer Result IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Point Trace IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Printf Notes 1 breakpoint A breakpoint that is set by a one click operation of the mouse is displayed Break see 2 Breaks the program when the condition is met while the debug tool monitors the break condition all the time during program execution gt See 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint gt See 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers Breaks the program when the instruction which an address code to break is rewritten for the break instruction is executed gt See 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Automatically collects the trace data with start of a program execution and stops collecting the trace data with stop of the program execution This event cannot be deleted because of the built in event 2 this event is set to a Valid state by default gt See 2 11 2 Collect execution history until stop of the execution Automaticall
191. IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 lECUBE IECUBE2 Specify whether to allow access to the memory area where cannot be accessed while executing a program target memory area O register area MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Specify whether to allow access to the memory area while executing a program Note that this property does not appear when the selected microcontroller version supports multi core Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Yes Temporary stops execution and read write values Does not access to the memory during program execution Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel during a program execution IECUBE This property becomes invalid when the Use for trace data property in the Trace category is set to Trace Update display during the execution Default Yes Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Yes Updates the display during program execution values Does not update the display during program execution Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Display update interval ms This property appears only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Default 500 Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100
192. IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Remark A breakpoint can be set or deleted easily in the Event area as well see a Seitting deleting breakpoints Registering watch expression Variable names of C language CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions See 1 Register a watch expression for details on how to operate it Moving to symbol definition place By clicking the button on the toolbar or selecting Move to Symbol from the context menu in a state where the caret has been moved to a instruction that has referenced a symbol the caret position is moved to the address where the symbol at the caret position has been defined In addition when following on this operation you click on the button on the toolbar or select Back to Address from the context menu the caret position is returned to the instruction that has referenced a symbol before the caret was moved the address value of the instruction that has referenced a symbol is displayed in Address R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 251 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE f Jump to source line and memory By selecting Jump to Source from the context menu the Editor panel is opened with moving the caret to the source line corresponding to the address at the current caret position if the Editor panel is already opened jump to the panel In addition by similarly selecti
193. IECUBE2 Simulator 126 2 11 1 Configure the trace operation 126 2 11 2 Collect execution history until stop of the execution 132 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section 133 2 11 4 Collect execution history when the condition is met 134 2 11 5 Display the collected execution history 136 2 11 6 Clear the trace memory 138 2 11 7 Search the trace data 138 2 11 8 Save the contents of execution history 143 2 12 Measure Execution Time of Programs 145 2 12 1 Measure execution time until stop of the execution 145 2 12 2 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator 146 2 12 3 Measurable time ranges 148 2 13 Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator 149 2 13 1 Configure the coverage measurement 149 2 13 2 Display the coverage measurement result 151 2 14 Set an Action into Programs 154 2 14 1 Inset printf 154 2 15 Manage Events 156 2 15 1 Change the state of set events valid invalid 156 2 15 2 Display only particular event types 157 2 15 3 Jump to the event address 157 2 15 4 Delete events 157 2 15 5 Write comment to events 158 2 15 6 Notes for setting events 158 2 16 Use Hook Function 162 2 17 Use the Simulator GUI Simulator 164 2 17 1 Check the I O waveform of the microcontroller 165 2 17 2 Input signals to the pins 165 2 17 3 Perform serial communication 166 2 17 4 Use buttons L
194. IX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files source files Furthermore the source level debugging see 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps and the code coverage measurement result display IECUBE Simulator see 2 13 Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator can be performed when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened in this panel The file is opened by automatically distinguishing the encoding Shift_JIS EUC JP UTF 8 and the new line code LF CR of the file and when it is saved the format are retained The encoding and the new line code however can be changed via the Save Settings dialog box This panel can be multiply opened up to 100 panels Remarks 1 When a project is closed all of the Editor panels displaying a file being registered in the project are closed 2 When a file is excluded from a project the Editor panel displaying the file is closed 3 A message is displayed when the downloaded lode module file is older than the source file to open Figure A 32 Editor Panel 1 Ef man fZivold maint J A oe 53 E Bi ef int local_a local_b local_c3 oe static int result HE unsigned long i ap char ta AB k Comment 4 60 Comment E T je Comment p Bp o o O O O OO Ba local a Q3 bf local b 65 local c 1 ar BE a telobal char_array BY Ba ik Comment 63 Yt Comment 7 h Comment Pe local att ia
195. If other than ASCII is selected a message is displayed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 243 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Tab selection area IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 This area appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory Select the tab that indicates the memory type The following tabs are displayed CPU Memory Displays the value of the memory mapped to the microcontroller ID Tag Displays the value of the ID tag for the data flash memory 6 ID Tag area IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 This area appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory The value of the ID tag for the data flash memory is displayed The ID tag is a bit assigned to the data flash memory and is used to detect power failure When it is 0 it means that the data has been written normally The setting for this area can be changed only between 0 and 1 Toolbar The buttons below become invalid during execution of a program Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel Resets highlighting of values that have been changed by executing a program Notation The following buttons to change the notation of memory values are displayed The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the notation of memory values Displays memory values in hexadecimal number
196. J0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 35 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 38 Property Panel MINICUBE2 Property es V850 MINICUBES Serial Property Main clock frequency MHz 4 00 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock oy Ste mt El Connection with Target Board Communication method UART AU El Flash security ID FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Chip erase when starting Mo Programmable IO Internal ROM RAH Download File 5 Hook Transactio Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 1 Connect Settings tab 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 Download File Settings tab 4 Flash Options Settings tab MINICUBE V850E2M 5 Hook Transaction Settings tab 1 Connect Settings tab In the Connect Seitings tab configuration with regard to the connection to the debug tool can be done a Internal ROM RAM b DataFlash V850E1 V850ES c Clock d Connection with Target Board e Flash f Programmable I O V850E1 V850ES a Internal ROM RAM The configuration of internal ROM RAM is displayed in this category Figure 2 39 Internal ROM RAN Category MINICUBE V850E1 V850ES MINICUBE2 E Internal ROK RAM R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 36 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Figure 2 40 Internal ROM RAM Cat
197. Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 7F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 1 harbourFront Avenue 06 10 keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6278 8001 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 JIn Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 h
198. Monitor clock TGKYDGE clack MHz Trace clock frequency MHz E Connection with Target Board Connecting with target board Internal ROM RAH R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Download Fi Flash Optio Hook Trans Page 187 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 8 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab MINICUBE V850E1 V850ES Property es WASO MINISUBE Property Main clack frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock oy stem DGK clack MHz 1OMHz El Flash security ID Hex FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Programmabke FO Internal ROK RAM Connect Setti Debug ToolSett Download File 5 Hook Transactio Figure A 9 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab MINICUBE V850E2M Property es VEROESM MINISGUBE Property 1 gt E Internal ROM RAM 3 gt 8 Clock Main clack frequency MHz 8 00 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock System DGK clack MHz 1OMHz 59 gt El Flash Security ID FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Internal ROM RAM Flash Option Hook Trans Peer rrretiirretritiiriitiiriiiiiri iis R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 188 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 10 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab MINICUBE2 Property es V850 MINICUBES Serial Pro
199. NESAS Page 168 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Expression Expression When it is equal 1 is set others 0 is set Expression Expression When it is not equal 1 others 0 Expression amp Expression Logical multiplication by bits 2 18 2 Icons for invalid input In some of the dialogs in CubeSuite the icons that represent that the input value is invalid when some invalid characters are input are shown at the relevant location and warns by changing the character color to red Remark When the mouse cursor is hover over the g icon information on the valid characters to input is pops up R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 169 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Appendix A provides detailed explanations of windows panels dialog boxes used for debugging with CubeSuite A b Description Windows panels dialog boxes for debugging are listed below Table A 1 Window Panel Dialog Box List Main window Controls program execution Various windows panels and dialogs can be opened from this window Debug Manager panel V850E2M Selects a core PEn to be debugged and displays the core status Project Tree panel Selects the debug tool to use Property panel Displays detailed information on the debug tool currently selected in the Project Tree panel and enables the settings of the tool to be changed Editor panel Enab
200. Note however that this property setting only applies to the location setting of events without debugging information The location setting of events with debug information is always moved to the beginning of the source text line Check reserved area overwriting when downloading MINICUBE2 E1 Serial Specify whether to output a message when overwriting to an area reserved for use by MINICUBE2 E1 Serial is attempted at the time of downloading Select Yes to output a message default 2 Debug Information category setting a Figure 2 105 Debug information Category E Debug Infor mation Execute to the specified symbol after GPL Reset ves specified symbol main startup start y mbal _ start startup end symbol _startend Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Specify from the drop down list whether to execute the program to the specified symbol position after CPU reset or downloading for only when the CPU Reset after download property is set to Yes Select Yes to execute the program to the specified symbol position after CPU reset default Remark When the CPU Reset after download property is set to Yes the operation after downloading is as follows If Yes is selected for this property the Editor pane will open automatically with displaying source text of the position specified with the Specified symbol property after downloading If No is selected for this property the Editor panel wi
201. O register contents Save the contents of local variables Save the contents of watch expressions Save the contents of call stack information Save the contents of execution history 13 Execute uploading Save the program the memory contents to a file in the arbitrary format e g Intel hex format binary data format and etc as required R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 13 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 14 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite to terminate communication 15 Save the project file Save the setting information of the project to the project file Remark For details on Save the project file see CubeSuite Start R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 14 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 2 Preparation before Debugging This section describes the preparation to start debugging the created program 2 2 1 Confirm the connection to a host machine Connection examples for each debug tool are shown Note that the relationship between types of the microcontroller selected in the project and the connectable debug tools is as follows Table 2 1 Relationship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Type of Debug Tool Microcontroller E a IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Simulator E1 JTAG Note Serial Note ae ee A a V850E2M Single core V850E2M
202. ONS 2 3 2 IECUBE IECUBE2 Configure the operating environment on the Property pane below when using IECUBE IECUBE2 Figure 2 8 Property Panel IECUBE Property es VERO IEGUBE Property Size of internal ROM K Bytes 756 size of internal RAM Bytes 16384 DataF lash E Glock Main clock frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock system El Connection with Target Board Connecting with target board No Programmabke I O Internal ROMZ RAH Connec A Debug T Flash Self DataFlas Downloa Hook Tra Figure 2 9 Property Panel IECUBE2 Property em VEEOEZM IEGUBE Property E Internal ROM RAM E Glock Main clack frequency MHz Main clock multiply rate sub clock frequency kHz Monitor clock TOK OGK clack MHz Trace clock frequency MHz El Connection with Target Board Connecting with target board Internal ROM RAH A Download Fi Flash Optio Hook Trans Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel Connect Settings tab 1 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 Flash Self Emulation Settings tab IECUBE 4 DataFlash Emulation Settings tab IECUBE 5 Download File Settings tab 6 Flash Options Settings tab IECUBE2 7 Hook Transaction Settings tab R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 19 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Conn
203. ONS This item appears only when the file to download is in hex format hex Specify the offset from the address at which the file s download is to start ww pooo Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFFFF in hexadecimal number values Start address This item appears only when the file to download is in binary format bin Specify the address at which to start the file s download C Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFFFF in hexadecimal number values Remark The settings of whether to download the object information or symbol information can be made only when the type of the file to download is load module files c Check the order of download The order of the download is the display order of the files displayed in the Download file list area If you want to change the order use the Up Down button d Click the OK button Enable all the configuration in this dialog box and add a download file the file name is displayed in the Download category in the Download File Settings tab of the Property panel 3 Download multiple load module files Follow the steps below on the Download Files dialog box to download multiple load module files Caution When debugging a program consisting of multiple load module files care should be taken to avoid overlapping of location addresses a Click the Add button When the Add button is clicked a blank lis
204. OR area The types of I O register are classified as categories folders and a list of the respective I O register name is displayed The meanings of the icons are as follows Indicates that the I O register name belonging to this category is displayed When you double click on the icon or click on the mark the category is closed and the I O register name is hidden Note that no categories exist by default Perform Tree editing if you need a category Indicates that the I O register name belonging to this category is hidden When you double click on the icon or click on the mark the category is opened and the I O register name is displayed Note that no categories exist by default Perform Tree editing if you need a category ay Indicates the name of the I O register Remark The category names are sorted in character code order by clicking on the header part of this area the I O register names in the category are also similarly sorted This area is provided with the following functions a b Tree editing The each I O register can be categorized by folders and displayed in the tree view To create a category Click the button on the toolbar or select Create Category from the context menu after moving the caret to a I O register name to create a category and then input a desired name from the keyboard up to 1024 characters To delete a category select the category then click the button on the toolbar or
205. Options Settings tab V850E2M This tab is used to configure options for the flash memory incorporated in the V850E2M microcontroller To configure options specify with the corresponding items on the Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M that is opened by clicking the button appears at the right of the field by selecting the Flash options property in the Flash Options category on this tab you cannot directly specify options on this tab Cautions 1 You can configure options only while connecting to the debug tool CPU reset may be generated automatically depending on the selected microcontroller when 2 you change the configuration on this tab Figure A 30 Property Panel Flash Options Settings Tab Property es VESOESM ASSMAN Property 1 E Flash Options Flash options Flash options Flash options specifies the Flash options The Flash options writing dialog box is opened by pressing the button Connect Se A Debug Tool A Description of each category 1 Flash Options The detailed information on the flash options is displayed and its configuration can be changed Flash options Click the button appears at the right of the field by selecting this property to open the Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M Page 227 of 538 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Hook Transaction Settings tab
206. Others Comment User Information Control code Background Color Highlight Changed value Display example Edit value Font settings tor text editor gt Font initialize settings hitialize All Settines Apply Use default background color The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Color options area Use this area to configure the colors a Setting place area Select a location from the list for which the color will be specified The relationships between the list items and default color settings are as follows R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 346 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE DefaultNe abbr The standard display color in all windows and panels Background White Warning Aahbtec Warning messages are displayed in this color in the Output anel and file names with warnings are displayed in this Background Default ais l g p ay aor color in the Project Tree panel Error AaBbEet Fontoolor Red Error messages are displayed in this color in the Output panel and file names with errors are displayed in this color Background Whitesmoke l in the Project Tree panel Reserved Aabber The reserved words of your compiler assembler are word displayed in this color in
207. Oxff Oxff Oxff 0x7f will be generated as a result of line assembly prepare r20 r22 r24 r26 r28 r31 0x20 Ox7fffffff prepare 0x555 0x20 Ox7fffffff 3 In both of the cases 1 and 2 below the same set of values 0x51 0x06 Oxe0 Oxff will be generated as a result of line assembly dispose 0x20 r20 r21 r22 r23 r24 r25 r26 r27 r28 r29 r30 r31 dispose 0x20 Oxfff 4 In both of the cases 1 and 2 below the same set of values 0x50 0x06 Oxaa Oxaa will be generated as a result of line assembly dispose 0x20 r20 r22 r24 r26 r28 r10 dispose 0x20 0x555 r10 2 Edit code Follow the steps below to edit code a Switch to edit mode Double click the code to edit or select Edit Code from the context menu after moving the caret to the code to edit b Edit code Use keyboard to directly edit the code c Write to memory Press the Enter key to write the code to the memory after editing If the edited instruction is invalid the instruction is shown in red and will not be written to the memory When the code is written to the memory the result of disassembling is also updated R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 90 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Execute Programs This section describes how to execute programs Main operations in this section are taken place from the debug toolbar or the Debug menu in the Main window where command
208. PU Reset after download Tes Erase flash ROM before download No Sutomatic change method of event setting position Suspend event Check reserved area overwriting when downloading Yes 2 gt E Debug Infor mation Execute to the specified symbol after GPU Reset Yes specified symbol iain Startup start symbol _ start Startup end symbol startend Download Connect settings Hook Transactio R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 224 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Download The detailed information on download is displayed and its configuration can be changed Download files Specify the file to downloadNe 1 The names of files to be downloaded and the download conditions are listed in the lower area Default Number of files to download Modifying Specify with the Download Files dialog box The Download Files dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting this property you cannot specify the file to download on this panel CPU Reset after Specify whether to reset the CPU after downloading download Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Resets the CPU after downloading values Does not reset the CPU after downloading Erase flash ROM Specify whether to erase the flash ROM before downloading before download Modifying Select from the drop down list values
209. Self Emulation Connect Debug T A Flash 5 Description of each category 1 Flash Self Emulation The detailed information on flash self programming emulation functions is displayed and its configuration can be Specify whether to use the flash self programming emulation function changed Flash self programming Default values Mo Flash self programmine Wer 2 00 or earlier No Mo Mo Mo No No Mo No No Mo No Hex O 0 DataFlas Downloa Hook Tra Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Uses the flash self programming emulation function Does not use the flash self programming emulation function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 217 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Flash Macro service Select the specification type of the flash macro service specification This property appears only when the flash memory process is Type1N Default Flash self programming Ver 2 00 or earlier Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Flash self programming Specifies Ver 2 00 or earlier for the specification type values Ver 2 00 or earlier Flash self programming Specifies Ver 3 00 or later for the specification type Ver 3 00 or later Note The determination of the flash memory process is made when connected to the debug tool Consequently this will not be hidden when disconnected from the debug tool
210. Settings tab V850E2M Hook Transaction Settings tab Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Undo Undoes the latest property value editing being done Cut Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard while editing the property value Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the property value while editing the property value Delete Deletes the selected character string s while editing the property value Select All Selects all the character strings in the selected property while editing the property value Context menu While not editing the property value Reset to Default Restores the selected setting of the property item to default value Reset All to Default Restores all the selected settings of the property items on the tab to default value R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 185 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE While editing the property value Undoes the latest property value editing being done Cut Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard while editing the property value Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the property value while editing the property value Delete Deletes the selected
211. Simulation Mode Changes this window s operation mode to the Simulation mode The cursor shape changes into a hand enabling simulation of input to connected parts part objects fling Changes the cursor shape into a cross enabling the drawing of lines Rectangle Bl Changes the cursor shape into a cross enabling the drawing of rectangles Rounded Rectan Ol Changes the cursor shape into a cross enabling the drawing of rectangles with gle rounded corners Ellipse Changes the cursor shape into a cross enabling the drawing of ellipses Polygon Changes the cursor shape into a cross enabling the drawing of polygons Fan shaped Changes the cursor shape into a cross enabling the drawing of fan shapes Changes the cursor shape into a cross enabling the drawing of text Paste Bitmap Pastes the selected bitmap file in this window of E Color of Line Opens the Color dialog box below The color of the lines of the selected object can be changed to the selected color in this dialog box Basic colors 2 See SEE on fF OU Ue oon fee EF atta Custom colors BEE EEE Hf BEER EEE HE Define Custom Colors gt gt Color of Fill Opens the Color dialog box The color used for the selected object can be changed to the selected color in this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 387 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Font
212. Specify from the following drop down list CPU clock frequency Uses the CPU clock frequency default Specify clock frequency Specifies an arbitrary frequency property items to specify become valid in the lower area lt 4 gt Unit of Timer Trace clock frequency This property appears only when the Select Timer Trace clock frequency property is set to Specify clock frequency Specify from the following drop down list the unit of the clock frequency for timer trace The unit of the frequency is in MHz default The unit of the frequency is in kHz R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 60 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 5 gt Timer Trace clock frequency The operation of this property differs depending on the specification with the Select Timer Trace clock frequency property When Specify clock frequency is specified Specify the clock frequency for timer trace Directly enter the value between 1 kHz and 999 999 MHz 4 00 is specified by default Unit is depending on the specification with the Unit of Timer Trace clock frequency property When CPU clock frequency is specified While disconnecting from the debug tool _ is displayed While connecting to the debug tool CPU clock frequency is displayed c Configuration You can configure the customization of the simulator in this category Figure 2 92 Configuration Category E Configuration Use s
213. SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const unsigned long addr Example of program file UserModel c int pinValue int accessSize unsigned char data int accessSize const unsigned char datal char option SuoCreatePin POO amp p00 SuoCreatePin PO1 amp p01 SuoCreateExtbus BUS1 0x200000 0x100 amp busl1 SuoSetInitCallback Init SuoSetInputDigitalPinCallback p00 InputP00 SuoSetReadExtbusCallback bus1l ReadBUS1 SuoSetWriteExtbusCallback bus1 WriteBUS1 callbacks void Init void memset mem 0 0x100 void InputP00 SuoHandle handle SuoOutputDigitalPin p01 void ReadBUS1 SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr memcpy data amp mem addr 0x200000 void WriteBUS1 SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr int pinValue pinValue int accessSize unsigned char data accessSize int accessSize const unsigned char data memcpy amp mem laddr 0x200000 data accessSize R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 449 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 2 4 Compilation and linking Create a UserModel dll by compiling and linking the created UserModel c and suolink cpp Figure B 4 Flow of Compilation and Linking UserModel c Include Compile amp Link UserModel dll Created by user suo h This is a system header file for the user open interface This file is included
214. V850 Simulator ED Unmeasurement gl 75 The information of the debug tool appears at this area Remarks 1 When the button on the Debug toolbar is clicked the specified file is downloaded automatically after connecting to the debug tool see 2 5 1 Execute downloading When the m button on this toolbar is clicked the project is built automatically and then the built file is downloaded after connecting to the debug tool 2 Simulator When a microcontroller whose Simulator supports peripheral function simulations is selected the Simulator GUI window is automatically opened after connecting to the debug tool default 2 4 2 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite Click the FA button on the Debug toolbar to disconnect from the currently connected debug tool After disconnecting from the debug tool the Statusbar of the Main window changes as follows Figure 2 102 The Statusbar during Disconnecting From Debug Tool 0x0 m BREAK gt Ox00000 S5 V850 Simulator CH Unmeasurement Ta Y of DISCONNECT The information of the debug tool disappears at this area DISCONNECT is displayed Remark When the debug tool is disconnected all panels and dialog boxes that are displayed only when the debug tool is connected are closed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 66 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Download Upload Programs This section describes how to download programs such as loa
215. V850ES 2 50 4 00 default 5 00 6 00 8 00 13 50 18 00 V850E2M 4 00 5 00 7 20 8 00 default 9 60 10 00 13 50 16 00 Main clock multiply rate Specify the main clock frequency multiplier Select a value from the drop down list or directly enter an integer value from 1 to 99 The drop down list displays the following multiplier values V850E1 V850ES 1 default 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 V850E2M 1 default 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 Sub clock frequency kHz This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports a sub clock Specify the sub clock frequency You can specify the frequency from the drop down list or by directly entering a frequency value between 0 001 and 999 999 unit KHz The drop down list displays sub clock frequency values which can be used by the currently selected microcontroller if the frequency value which can be use is fixed the drop down list does not appear The minimum usable sub clock frequency is specified by default Monitor clock This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports a sub clock Specify from the following drop down list a clock on which the monitor program operates while the program is stopped Operates with main clock default Operates with the clock that the program specified TCK DCK clock MHz IECUBE2 Specify a clock supplied from IECUBE2 to the on chip debug unit DCU from the drop down list The d
216. Watch Registers a new watch expression Directly input the watch expression in the text box see c Registering new watch expression Note that up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one watch panel Create Category Adds a new category folder Directly input the category name in the text box Note that up to 64 categories can be created in one watch panel categories cannot be created in categories Delete Deletes the selected character string s If the watch expression s category s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Cut Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard If the watch expression s category s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If the watch expression s category s are selected copies them to the clipboard except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Paste If texts are in editing pastes the contents of the clipboard to the caret position If texts are not in editing and the watch expression s are copied in the clipboard registers them to the caret position R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 285 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notation The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the notation
217. Window seriall Time send Data Receive Data status 2083 0x79 1875 0x19 U8 Osc 2073 0x07 Tir Os 7b ala Uxde 207r 0x95 166 Osa 417 Dxde Uy a 1562 0xb1 Mo Wait Data Format O80 Oxb1 a080 0x76 All G lear Load Save send Muto send R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 433 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Dedicated menu Serial window Context menu How to open Click the I button Select Serial from the Simulator menu Description of each area 1 Serial selection area Select the serial interface to be used UARTOO Select the serial interface to be used from the list of provided serial interfaces drop down list Note o usec r Select from the drop down list the time information unit applied to Wait in the Serial editor area The time information unit can be changed by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Time unit Note Once selected the serial interface cannot be changed If you wish to change the serial interface open the another Serial window newly 2 Log display area Displays the transmission reception data The display timing is when all the bits constituting the data have been received or sent Only data from which the start bit stop bit and parity bit have been deleted is displayed in this area The notation of data
218. You can configure internal ROM RAM in this category The size of internal ROM RAM of the selected microcontroller is specified by default when the selected microcontroller is the V850E1 core and incorporates VSB Flash ROM VSB RAM the value including its size is specified There is no need to change the settings in this category if you wish to debug with the same memory mapping of the selected microcontroller Figure 2 89 Internal ROM RAM Category Simulator V850E1 V850ES E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM K Bytes etal Size of internal RAM Bytes 16384 Figure 2 90 Internal ROM RAM Category Simulator V850E2M E Internal ROM RAM lt 1 gt Size of internal ROM KBytes V850E1 V850ES Specify the internal ROM size to simulate unit Kbytes To perform debugging after changing the memory mapping make a selection form the drop down list Note that when the selected microcontroller is a ROMless product the property value cannot be changed V850E2M The internal ROM size to simulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 2 gt Size of internal RAM Bytes V850E1 V850ES Specify the internal RAM size to simulate unit bytes To perform debugging after changing the memory mapping make a selection form the drop down list V850E2M The internal RAM size to simulate is displayed unit bytes You cannot change the value of this property R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1
219. _on bimp Pm Inactive Bitmap Loommon bitmap Parts_off bmp Delete button Deletes the currently selected bitmap from the selection list Note that only the bitmap that have been added by user can be deleted This area displays the style of the matrix LED currently being specified R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 419 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Help Displays the help for this dialog box Operation In the Simulation mode as the results of 1 simulation the output information of the connection pins is received and dis play is performed accordingly When the matrix intersection of a row pin and column pin is active the corresponding LED lights Figure A 108 Connected Parts Display Example Matrix LED 1 E I i i t i j i 1 i i J L T eal P a m r Lt i a Ll LS ii r Tr R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 420 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Parts Buzzer Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of a buzzer which is one of the con nection parts in the O Panel window The pin connected buzzer displays the information output from the connected pins as a bitmap in the Simulation mode The buzzer output can be checked as display There are two ty
220. a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position you can open the file in the another Editor panel and jump to the corresponding line and the corresponding column if the Editor panel is already opened jump to the panel Select Tag Jump from the context menu after moving the caret to the line on the source text The tag jump is operated as follows Table 2 6 Operation of Tag Jump C work src c Jumps to the top line of the file C work src c Tmp src c Jumps to the top line of the file Tmp src c The reference point of the path is the project folder C work src c 10 Jumps to the tenth line from the top of the file C work src c C work sub src c 10 Jumps to the tenth line from the top of the file C work sub src c Path specification path file name including space characters must be enclosed in ae C work src c 10 5 Jumps to the fifth column of the tenth line from the top of the file C work src c R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 82 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 2 Figure 2 115 Tag Jump AE E E EE E i E t dat t t b d dt i t d h d b t datb t tt i d e i h bt h ab t h db t 20t Include files e Uc E E R E R R E R HE H E HE E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E R R HE R HE E E H R E a0 af Si finclude CG macrodriver h 32 finclude CG system p 33 finclude Co_ad h G Register to Watch 34tinclude CG_tau
221. ack El Connection with Target Board Communication method 400 J oe fog System UARTAO Power target from the emulator MAX 200m Mo El Flash security ID Chip erase when starting Programmable IO Internal ROM RAH DataFlash E Glock Main clock frequency MHz Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz Monitor clock TCE DGE clock MHz El Connection with Taget Board Hex FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Ho 400 1 oe fog System 10 MHz Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 Mo El Flash security ID Programmabk O Internal ROMZ RAH q Connect Setti Debug Tool Setti ex FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Download File 5 4 Hook Transactio R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 46 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 63 Property Panel E1 JTAG V850E2M Property es VE50E2M E1CITAG Property Main clock frequency MHz 8 00 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock freguency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock System TCK DGE clock MHz 1OMHz El Connection with Target Board Power target fram the emulator MAX 200mAa No El Flash mecurity ID HEX FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Internal ROM RAM Connect 5 4 Debug Tool Download Fi Flash Option Hook Trans Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 1 Connect Settings tab 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 Download File Sett
222. acter strings in this area is searched within the Source Disassemble area of the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator You can either type a mnemonic directly into the text boxes or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 139 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c d e f 9 Specify Access Address Specify the access address if it is a required search parameter You can either type the address value directly into the text boxes in hexadecimal number or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The access address can also be specified as a range In this case specify a range by specifying address expressions in both the left and right text boxes If the right hand text box is blank or contains the text Input when range is specified then the fixed address specified in the left hand text box will be searched Note that if an address value greater than the microcontroller address space is specified the upper address value is masked An address value greater than the value expressed within 32 bits cannot be specified Specify Access Status This item is only enable if a value for Specify Access Address is specified Select the access type Read Write Read Write Vector Read and DMA from drop down
223. addresses respectively Note that address values greater than the microcontroller address space cannot be specified b eat Specify Initialize data Specify the initializing data to write to the memory You can either type the initial value into the text box directly in hexadecimal number or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to10 items You can specify more than one initial value Specify up to 16 values of up to 4 bytes 8 characters each separated by spaces Each initial data value is parsed from the end of the string with each two characters interpreted as a byte If the string has an odd number of characters then the first character is interpreted as one byte Example Endianness specified by debug tool is little endian Input Character String Initialization Data How Data is Overwritten in Bytes 00 012 345 00 12 00 45 03 000 12 000345 00 00 12 45 03 00 c Click the OK button Click the OK button The memory area in the specified address range is repeatedly overwritten with the specified initial data pattern If the end address is reached in the middle of the pattern then writing ends at that point Note that if an illegal value is specified a message will be appear and the memory value will not be initialized 7 Save the memory contents Contents of the memory can be saved with range selection in text files txt CSV files csv When saving to the file the latest informati
224. afe Break Category O Faitsate Break stop when wrote to Internal ROM Yes stop when accessed to non mapping Internal ROM Yes stop when accessed to non mapping Internal RAM Yes Verify when wrote to Read only Internal RAM Yes Stop when read fram read protected VO Register Yes Stop when wrote to write protected LO Register Yes Stop when accessed to non mappine IO Register TES stop when wrote to write protected External Memory YES otop when accessed to non mapping External Memory Yes In the following property setting select Yes to enable and No to disable the function from the drop down list All the properties are set to Yes by default mark in the setting column indicates that if you change the setting of this property value CPU reset is generated automatically Stop when wrote to Internal ROM N e 1 Stop when accessed to non mapping Internal ROM 1 Stop when accessed to non mapping Internal RAM Verify when wrote to Read only Internal RAM N e 2 Stop when read from read protected I O Register Stop when wrote to write protected I O Register Stop when accessed to non mapping I O Register Stop when wrote to write protected External memory Stop when accessed to non mapping External Memory Notes 1 This property is invalid when the selected microcontroller is a ROMless product 2 Specify whether to perform a verify check that detects a write operation to the write protected area in the internal RAM whe
225. agging a file name with the mouse the display order in the list can be changed Note however that the order of a project build target cannot be changed 2 Download file property area a Download file information This area is used to display or edit the download conditions of the file selected in the Download file list area It can also be used to specify the download conditions of new download files added via the Add button File Specify the name of the file to download up to 259 characters Default File name but it will be blank for newly added files Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard or specify with the Select Download File dialog box opened by clicking the buttonN t 1 appears at right by selecting this item Available values See Table 2 3 Type of Files That Can be Downloaded File type Specify the type of the file to download Load module fle Modifying Select from the drop down list Available values Either of the following Load module file Hex file Binary data file Offset This item appears only when the file to download is in hex format Specify the offset from the address at which the file s download is to start Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF in hexadecimal number R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 317 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Start address This item appears only when t
226. al E1 JTAG Mask WAIT signal E1 JTAG Mask DBINT signal E1 JTAG V850E1 V850ES f External Flash Memory Download E1 JTAG You can configure downloading to an external flash memory in this category See 5 Download to external flash memory IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG for details on how to download to an external flash memory and this category configuration Download File Settings tab In the Download File Settings tab configuration on downloading file to the debug tool can be done See 2 5 1 Execute downloading for details on each category configuration Flash Options Settings tab E1 JTAG V850E2M In the Flash Options Settings tab V850E2M configuration on options for the flash memory incorporated in the V850E2M microcontroller can be done To configure options specify the corresponding items via the Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M that is opened by clicking the button appears at the right of the field by selecting the Flash options property in the Flash Options category on this tab the button appears only while connecting to the debug tool Click the Write button on this dialog box after specifying each item See Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M for details on the configuration Figure 2 85 Opening the Flash Options Setting Dialog Box E Flash Options PERE FIesh options R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 56 of 538 Oct 01 2010 Cub
227. al bus master EXTBUS2 External bus slave 2 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 453 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Generate SampleModel dll model Device USEROPEN SampleModel dll a b Connect PIN CPU POO MODEL POO wire POO Wire 1 wire POO cpu Port POO INTPO wire_P00 model Port P00 Connect PIN CPU TXD1 MODEL RXD wire RXD Wire 1 wire RXD cpu Port P30 TXD1 wire RXD model Port RXD Connect PIN CPU RXD1 MODEL TXD wire TXD Wire 1 wire TXD cpu Port P31 RXD1 wire TXD model Port TXD Connect BUS CPU EXTBUS MODEL EXTBUS1 extbus BUS 32 extbus cpu BusMasterIF EXTBUS extbus model BusSlavelIF EXTBUS1 extbus model BusSlavelF EXTBUS2 Connect Pseudo PIN wire clock Wire l1 wire clock cpu DebuggerPseudoPort debugger pseudo pin main _clkout wire clock model Port gui _pseudo pin clock notice wire reset Wire l1 wire reset cpu DebuggerPseudoPort debugger pseudo pin reset notice wire reset model Port gui_pseudo pin reset _notice R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 454 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 4 Supplied Interface Functions This section describes the interface functions supplied by Simulator GUI as the user open interface B 4 1 Overview The supplied
228. al format for the 3 wire serial interface CSI Figure A 118 Format CSI Dialog Box Format CSD CO Master Transter Glock o kH Transter Direction MSB first OLSE first 1 Data bit leneth Data Phase Nor mal Precede Clock Phase Normal Reverse Function buttons L Repeat This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons Transmission reception when 3 wire serial interface CSI is selected How to open On the Serial window with the CSI serial interface any one of the following Click the Format button Select Format from the Edit menu Description of each area 1 Serial format setting area Master Slave Select the transfer mode Master Operates this window as a master Setting of Transfer Clock is required for generating the clock during com munication Slave Operates this window as a slave default Communication is performed using the clock of the serial interface provided in the CPU Transfer Clock Directly input the transfer clock value unit KHZ Values with decimals can also be set This item must be set when master is selected R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 439 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Transfer Direction Select the transfer direction MSB first Sets MSB first as the transfer direction default LSB first Sets LSB first as the tran
229. alid By changing the check on the check box of the event name the setting state of the event can be changed the Eveni mark is changed depending on the setting state of the event The following are types of the setting state of the event Figure 2 176 Check Box of the Event i Hardware BreakO001 A Check box Event mark Event name Table 2 22 Setting State of the Event Valid state Event occurs when the specified condition is met It is possible to set the event to an invalid state by removing the check Invalid state Event does not occur when the specified condition is met It is possible to set the event to a valid state by removing the check Suspended State The conditions that have been specified cannot be set with the program of the debugging target It is not possible to operate the check box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 156 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 Both of the Start Timer event and the Stop Timer event is must be set for the Timer Result event Therefore it is not possible to set a particular event to a valid state by only the setting of one of these at the same time as both events are set they are treated as grouped events as a Timer Result 2 Itis not possible to set the Run Break Timer event to an invalid suspended state 3 The setting state of the event can be changed from the menu displayed by right clicking on the Event mark in the Editor panel Di
230. ally started when the program starts executing and is stopped when the program stops 1 Code coverage a Displaying the code coverage ratio for each source text line disassembled text line The code coverage ratio for each source text line disassembled text line can be checked in the Editor panel Disassemble panel that is displaying the target program In each panel background colors of the target source text lines disassembled text lines are shown as Table 2 21 based on the coverage ratio obtained by using the expressions indicated in Table 2 20 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 151 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note that the displaying of the code coverage ratio is not performed while executing a program or disconnecting from the debug tool All the code coverage measurement result can be cleared by selecting Clear Coverage Information from the context menu in the Editor panel Disassemble panel the color distinctions on the panels are also reset Table 2 20 Expressions of Code Coverage Ratio Panel Expressions Editor panel Number of bytes of code executed in the address range corresponding to the source text line Total number of bytes of code in the address range corresponding to the source text line Disassemble panel Number of bytes of code executed in the address range corresponding to the disassembled text line Total number of bytes of code in the address ra
231. alog box Initializes memory Memory Search dialog box Searches memory Trace Search dialog box Searches trace data IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 170 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to the Location dialog box Moves the caret to the specified position Data Save dialog box Saves the settings and other data displayed in the respective windows pan els dialogs or saves upload data Progress Status dialog box Displays the progress of the processing being executed Option dialog box Makes settings for various environments Select Download File dialog box Selects files to be downloaded Save As dialog box Saves files or the contents of various windows panels dialogs Select Data Save File dialog box Data Save File Select Data Save File dialog box box Selects the file to save data the file to Selects the file to save data data Select Simulator Configuration File dialog box Selects simulator configuration file Simulator Table A 2 Simulator GUI Block Dedicated Window Dialog Box List Select Pin dialog box Selection of display pins in the Signal Data Editor window and Timing Chart window Parts List dialog box List display of object pin connection status in the O Panel window R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 171 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This window is automatically opened w
232. alue SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to set parameters CSI type related to the serial operation of the specified serial interface The default values of the parameters are as follows Operation mode Slave Frequency of transfer clock 0 Phase Normal phase Transfer direction MSB first Data bit length 8 bits When operating as the master for CSI communication transmission of dummy data is required for reception because the CSI is the communication mode that performs transmission reception in response to the clock output from the master R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 493 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Remark Ifthe CSI pin waveform is checked in the Timing Chart window while CSI communication is not performed an unexpected level will be monitored The expected level will be output after communication starts so this issue does not affect the actual opera tion SCK pin in slave mode High level is output which should be high impedance SO pin Example include suo h SuoHandle hCsil void Euncl void SuoSerialParameterCSI param param frequency param phase param direction param dataLength SuoSetSerialParameterCSI hCsil amp param High level is output which should be low level param SUO SLAVE 100000
233. alue of the address whose symbol has been defined i Registering watch expression can be performed Under line Background color Standard color Reg i p P R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 241 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory value for which the Real time display update function is Memory value that has been changed because of the execution of Note Background color Cream a program To reset the highlighting select the button on the toolbar Character color Area that are non mapped rewrite is restricted such as I O register area I O protection area or memory which was not able to Background color Standard color 9 p y acquire a value Character color Standard color A case where a area other than a real time display update area is displayed and specified during execution of a program or memory Background color Standard color which was not able to acquire a value Note Just before execution of a program only the memory value in the address range for which the Memory panel had been displayed becomes the target In addition the value is not highlighted if it is same for before and after the execution of the program This area is provided with the following functions a Pop up display The following contents are pop up displayed based on the nearest existing symbol forward from the address the mouse is designating when hovering the mouse cursor over th
234. ams in steps 93 Reset microcontroller CPU 91 External bus interface functions 477 SuoCreateExtbus 478 SuoGetExtbusHandle 480 SuoSetReadExtbusCallback 481 SuoSetWriteExtbusCallback 482 External flash memory 75 F Fail safe break function 27 100 Features 11 File monitor 234 Flash 39 51 Flash macro service 218 Flash Options Setting dialog box 319 Flash self programming emulation function 29 217 Font 346 Format CSI dialog box 439 Format UART dialog box 437 G Global variable 117 Go to Here 92 Go to the Location dialog box 340 H HALT mode 206 Hardware Break 96 300 301 Hex format 72 Hook transaction 228 How to connect to debug tool 66 How to disconnect from debug tool 66 I O Panel window 384 I O protection area 311 InitFunc 513 Initial value 328 Input format of watch expression 278 InputAnalogPinFunc 517 InoputDigitalPinFunc 516 InputHighImpedanceFunc 518 Instruction level debugging 79 Interface functions 455 Basic interface functions 457 External bus interface functions 477 Pin interface functions 468 Serial interface functions 484 Signal output unit interface functions 503 Time interface functions 461 Internal Static variables 271 IOR panel 264 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 530 of 53
235. and a Printf event see 2 14 1 Inset printf The messages are classified by the message origination tool and displayed on the individual tabs Figure A 50 Output Panel Output Start build all Thursday Auqust 5 008 1 12 28 FH Build tart sample DefaultBuild BuildEnded Error 0 Warning 0 Build endedt Success l Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday agast 25 008 1 12 26 PM EOF Debug Tool Search And Replace This section describes the following How to open Description of each area File menu Output panel dedicated items Edit menu Output panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area The output messages of each tool search results and results by a Printf event are displayed In the case of search results batch search every time a search is performed a new message will be displayed after the previous message is cleared except for the All Messages tab The colors of message display differ with the type of message as shown below character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Message Type Display Example Default Description Normal message Aahbtec Character color Black Displayed with information notices Background color White Warning message AsaAtbtec Character color Blue Displayed with w
236. anel Gall Stack Toolbar 2 Notations Encoding Depth Gall stack 0 main Ovobdest lt 3 outh mainc 71 Depth area Call Stack area This section describes the following Change display format of values 1 2 Jump to the source line 3 Display local variables 4 Save the contents of call stack information 1 Change display format of values The display format of this panel can be changed using buttons below on the toolbar This item becomes invalid during execution of a program R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 124 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS z emee 2 Jump to the source line The Editor panel is opened with moving the caret to the function call source line which the selected line designates when the line is double clicked if the panel is already opened jump to the Editor panel Remark The Disassemble panel Disassemble1 is opened with moving the caret to the function call source address which the currently selected line designates when selecting Jump to Disassemble from the context menu if the panel is already opened jump to the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 3 Display local variables The Local Variables panel that displays the local variables which the currently selected line designates is opened when selecting Jump to Local Variable at This Time from the context menu 4 Save the contents of call stack information By selecting the File
237. anel of the build tool on the Common Options tab in the Device category set the value in Programmable I O area start address property Figure 2 16 Programmable I O Category E Programmabk FO Use Programmable IO area Yes Programmable I O area start address 0 lt 1 gt Use Programmable I O area Specify whether to use the programmable I O area Select Yes to use the programmable I O area No is selected by default lt 2 gt Programmable I O area start address This property appears only when the Use Programmable O area property is set to Yes Specify the start address of the programmable I O area Specify the address expression within the programmable I O area 0 is specified by default The address is aligned to 16 Kbytes R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 23 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Too Settings tab general configurations on the debug tool can be done Memory Access Memory While Running a b c Set Event While Running d Break e Fail safe Break IECUBE f Trace g Timer h Coverage i Mask for Input Signal j External Flash Memory Download IECUBE2 a Memory You can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 17 Memory Category EO Memory E Memory mappings 4 0 Internal ROM area Hi Hon map area 2 Internal RAM area 3 LO Register area Verity on
238. ange Emulation ROM area Aecess width Memory mapped list Memory type Address range SAE Access width Internal RUM area OxOOUD00000 x Q EEEEE LMByte abita Hon map area OxOOLOO000 OxOsfetttt s4d45RRyte shite 2 Internal RAM area OxO3ffC0000 OxO03ffeftcCfoe SORByYte zbita ITfO Register area UxOSECCOON x JEEEE 4KEyte obits Function buttons J Cancel This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel click the button displayed by selecting one of the values of the Memory mappings property in the Memory category Caution This dialog box cannot be opened during execution of a program Description of each area 1 Added memory mapping specification area Specify the information for a newly added memory mapping a Memory type Select the memory type for the memory mapping to be added from the following drop down list The item selected by default differs depending on the debug tool to use Emulation ROM area Adds the Emulation ROM area IECUBE Simulator IECUBE The IECUBE alternate ROM is used Simulator The simulator alternate ROM is used Emulation RAM area Adds the Emulation RAM area IECUBE Simulator IECUBE The IECUBE alternate RAM is used Simulator The simulator alternate RAM is used Target memory area Adds the target memory area Target
239. ange the value of this property Size of DataFlash memory KBytes E1 JTAG V850E2M The data flash memory size is displayed unit Kbytes If the currently selected microcontroller does not incorporate the data flash 0 is displayed You cannot change the value of this property b DataFlash V850E1 V850ES You can configure the data flash function in this category Note that this category appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Figure 2 66 DataFlash Category E DataF lash Use DataF lash memory area Tes Chip select Cal Use DataFlash memory area Specify whether to use the data flash memory from the drop down list Select Yes to use the data flash memory No is selected by default Size of DataFlash memory KBytes This property appears only when the Use DataFlash memory area property is set to Yes The size of the data flash memory area of the selected microcontroller is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property Chip select This property appears only when the Use DataFlash memory area property is set to Yes Select the chip select used for mapping of the data flash memory from the drop dawn list The selectable chip select values differ depending on the selected microcontroller Note that when the selected microcontroller is other than the V850ES core you cannot change the value of the pro
240. annot be set while executing the execution momentarily program or operating the tracer timer For details on the event types that are affected by this property see 2 Event types that can be set and deleted during execution Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Yes Sets these events by stopping the program execution or the tracer timer values operation momentarily No Does not allow to set these events during program execution or the tracer timer operation 4 Break The detailed information on break functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed First using type of breakpoint IECUBE lIECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Stop emulation of peripherals when stopping IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 Specify the type of the breakpoint to use with priority when setting it at the source line or the execution address with a one click operation of the mouse in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Default Software break Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Software break Sets software breakpoint with priority values a Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint with priority Specify whether to terminate the peripheral emulation while stopping the program execution Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Terminates the peripheral emulation values l Does not terminate the peripheral emulat
241. ariable panel of the analyze tool Program Analyzer 3 When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 49 Events Panel Events Toolbar gt 4 WRI ele l Mame Comment Unconditional Trace 5 g We Trace Start End 2 Detail Information Start Execution mainc 104 Oxf End Execution main c 113 0x30 Hame Detail Information Comment E H ES Timer Result Total 4500 ne Start End 2 o Run Break Timer Total2244000 ns This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Edit menu Events panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Event ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator On the Editor panel Disassemble panel select Timer Settings gt gt View Result of Timer from the context menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 298 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Name area A list of the event names that have currently been set is displayed in the following format Wa Hardware BreakOO01 a b c Remark Itis possible to limit the event to be displayed by clicking the button on the toolbar see Toolbar a Check box The setting state of the event is displayed changed Note that the Event
242. arnings about operations Background color Standard color Error message AaBbEge Character color Displayed when there is a critical error or when execution is not possible due to a Background color Light gray operational mistake R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 307 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This area is provided with the following functions a Tag jump By double clicking on the output message the Editor pane is opened and the number of the corresponding line in the corresponding file is displayed This allows you to jump from error messages that are output when building etc to the corresponding error line in the source file b Help display If there is a caret on the line where a warning message or error message is being displayed you can select Help for Message from the context menu You can also display help for that line s message by pressing the F1 key c Saving alog The Save As dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Output tab name As and the contents that are displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt messages on deselected tabs will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select the tab that indicates the origin of message The following tabs are available for the debug tool Tab Name Description All Messages Displays operation logs for all components debug tool design tool build to
243. as never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save CPU Register Data As Save CPU Register Data Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt AS CSV file csv see b Saving the contents of the CPU register Edit menu CPU Register panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the CPU Register panel other items are all invalid Cut Deletes the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard This item becomes valid only when the character string is being edited Copy Copies the selected character string to the clipboard during editing If a line is selected copies the register or the category to the clipboard The copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Paste Pasts the character string copied in the clipboard to the caret position This item becomes valid only when the character string is being edited Select All Selects all the items of this panel Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Search tab Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Replace tab Context menu Register to Watch1 Registers the selected register or category to the Watch panel Watch1 Copy Copies the selected character string to the clipboard during editing If a line is selected copies the register or the category to the clipb
244. ase of the Mixed Display Mode Label line CLOCK Init PC line Source text line UGHAR pawal OU ae fe Set WOT stop 7 oO Breakpoint line p o 4A007d0fB sth r WOTH WOTM2 _00_WDT2_OPERMODE_STOP fe Se PELETI Instruction disassemble results Label line The label is displayed when a label is defined for the address and its corresponding line is shown highlighted in lightgreen Offset value The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address te 1 Code The code that is the target of disassembly is displayed in hexadecimal number Instruction Instruction is displayed as the result of disassembling The mnemonics are shown highlighted in blue Source text line The source text corresponding to the code data is displayed PC line A line corresponding to an address of the current PC PC register value is shown highlighted e 3 Breakpoint line A line at which a breakpoint is set is shown highlighted 3 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 250 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notes 1 Offset values are not displayed by default Offset values can be displayed by clicking the button on the toolbar or selecting Show Offset from the context menu 2 The source text can be set to non display by clicking the button toggle on the toolbar or removing the check for Mixed Display from the context menu this opt
245. ase the chip No is selected by default Caution This property cannot be changed while connecting to MINICUBE2 f Programmable I O V850E1 V850ES You can configure the programmable I O area in this category Note that this category is only valid when the selected microcontroller supports the programmable I O area Remark Change this setting to temporarily change variables while debugging To set a common value for the project in the Property panel of the build tool on the Common Options tab in the Device category set the value in Programmable I O area start address property Figure 2 48 Programmable I O Category E Programmabk I O Use Programmable IO area Yes Programmable LO area start address 0 lt 1 gt Use Programmable I O area Specify whether to use the programmable I O area Select Yes to use the programmable I O are No is selected by default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 40 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt Programmable I O area start address This property appears only when the Use Programmable O area property is set to Yes Specify the start address of the programmable I O area Specify the address expression within the programmable I O area 0 is specified by default The address is aligned to 16 Kbytes 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Tool Settings tab general configurations on the debug tool can be done a
246. ash self programming is Ver 2 00 or earlier Specify whether to emulate to disable reading from the drop down list Select Yes to emulate to disable reading No is selected by default Note The determination of the flash memory process is made when connected to the debug tool Consequently this will not be hidden when disconnected from the debug tool lt 4 gt Disable program Specify whether to emulate to disable writing from the drop down list Select Yes to emulate to disable writing No is selected by default lt 5 gt Disable boot block cluster reprogram This property appears only when the flash memory process is Type2 or TypegNote Specify whether to emulate to disable rewrite boot area from the drop down list Select Yes to emulate to disable rewrite boot area No is selected by default Note The determination of the flash memory process is made when connected to the debug tool Consequently this will not be hidden when disconnected from the debug tool d Reset Vector Boot Swap You can configure the reset vector and boot swap function in this category Figure 2 30 Reset Vector Boot Swap Category El Reset Vector Boot Swap Reset vector address HEH Boot swap cluster 0 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 30 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt Reset vector address This property appears only when the flash memory process is Type1 and the s
247. at the items are not being sorted into their name order default Indicates that the items are being sorted in descending order Indicates that the items are being sorted in ascending order Sorts the category nodes and the file names into their time stamp order Clicking repeatedly toggles the sort order between ascending and descending Indicates that the items are not being sorted into their time stamp order default Indicates that the items are being sorted in descending order Indicates that the items are being sorted in ascending order Sorts the category nodes and the file names into the order specified by user Indicates that the items are not being sorted by user Indicates that the items are being sorted by user default You can arbitrarily customize the order of the items by dragging and dropping them R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 182 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Using Debug Tool The following cascade menus are displayed to select the debug tool to use Note that the debug tools displayed in this menu differ depending on the microcontroller selected in the project see Table 2 1 Relationship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Property R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 183 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel This panel is used to display and
248. atch Data Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Category name Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Remark When the contents of the panel are overwritten with selecting the File menu gt gt Save Watch Data each watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 is treated as a different panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 123 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Display Information on Function Call from Stack This section describes how to show the information on function call from the stack The CubeSuite compiler CA850 CX pushes function call information onto the stack in accordance with the ANSI standard It is thus possible to learn the function call depth the location of the caller parameters and other information by analyzing the function call information This function call information is called the call stack information this term will be used in the rest of this document 2 10 1 Display call stack information Call stack information is displayed in the Call Stack panel below Select the View menu gt gt Call Stack For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Call Stack panel Caution Nothing is displayed on this panel during execution of a program When the program is stopped items in each area are displayed Figure 2 148 Display Call Stack Information Call Stack P
249. atedly overwritten with the specified initial data pattern Caution Initialization of memory cannot be performed for values of the ID tag for the data flash memory Figure A 61 Memory Initialize Dialog Box Memory Initialize Start address sy mbal po Initialize data This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Memory panel select Fill from the context menu Description of each area 1 2 Range specification area Specify the range of memory address to initialize via the Start address symbol and End address symbol You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes up to 1024 characters or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The results of calculating the address expressions you have entered are treated as start and end addresses respectively Note that address values greater than the microcontroller address space cannot be specified Initialize data area Specify the initial value s with which to overwrite the memory You can either type the initial value into the text box directly in hexadecimal number the value need not start with 0Ox or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items You can specify more than one initial value Specify up to 16 values of up to 4 bytes 8 characters each separated by spaces Each
250. ation is not required for the module in this case however the source level debugging can not be performed for the file c Check the order of download The order of the download is the display order of the files displayed in the Download file list area If you want to change the order use the Up Down button d w Click the OK button Enable all the configuration in this dialog and add the specified load module file the specified file name is displayed in the Download category in the Download File Settings tab of the Property panel 4 Perform source level debugging with a hex or binary data format file You can also perform source level debugging when a hex format hex or a binary data format bin file is specified for download by also downloading the symbol information for the load module file to be used for creation To do so follow the steps below on the Download Files dialog box a Click the Add button When the Add button is clicked a blank list item is displayed in the last line of the Download file list area b Property configuration of the load module file to add Configure each item displayed with the following condition in the Download file property area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 74 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS File Specify the load module file that was the source for creating the hex format hex or binary data format bin file t
251. ays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 340 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Data Save dialog box This dialog box is used to save data displayed in the Disassemble panel Memory panel or Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator and save uploaded data see 2 5 38 Execute uploading This dialog box appears only when connected to the debug tool Figure A 67 Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Disassemble Data Ed 1 File Name C OubeSurte Sample_projects Disaszemblel Ww a 2 File Type Text files txt we Save Range Address Symball 3 A OxQ00002de OxQ00002 ed w Function buttons Cancel This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open With the Disassemble panel in focus select Save Disassemble Data As form the File menu With the Memory panel in focus select Save Memory Data As form the File menu With the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator in focus select Save Trace Data As form the File menu From the Debug menu select Upload Description of each area 1 File Name area Specify the name of the file to save You can either type a filename directly into the text box up to 259 characters or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items You can also specify the file
252. be Uploaded Function buttons Specifies the specified file in the Data Save dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 358 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Simulator Configuration File dialog box Simulator This dialog box is used to select the simulator configuration file to perform use customization adding of user models of the simulator Figure A 77 Select Simulator Configuration File Dialog Box select Simulator Gonfieuration File My Recent Documents E emplus cte zas E Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network File name emolus cte Open Files of type Simulator Gonfiguration FileG ctes Ww Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Connect Settings tab of the Property panel click the button displayed by selecting the Simulator configuration file property in the Configuration category Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder in which the simulator configuration file is located from the drop down list 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in the Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of the simulator configuration file to be use 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file from the dr
253. bel Farts key Matrix key Button Buzzer buzzer Buzzere buzzer Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open With the O Panel window in focus select Parts List form the View menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 431 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Pin connection status display area Label Displays the label name attached to the object Nothing is displayed for objects that do not have a label Parts Displays the part category Displays the part category part category Straight line rectangle ellipse rounded rectangle fan shape Push button pull button group button Analog button pkey Key matrix Level gauge 7segment led 7 segment LED 14 segment LED Matrix LED Grouped part Pin Name Displays the pins connected to parts is displayed for parts that are connected to multiple pins and a blank is displayed for parts that are unconnected Active Level Displays the active value set for the part is displayed for parts that are connected to multiple pins and a blank is displayed for parts that are unconnected Function buttons Closes the this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 432 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Serial window This win
254. ber eo Displays values on this panel in decimal number Oc Displays values on this panel in octal number Displays values on this panel in binary number Displays array indexes on this panel in decimal number default fe Displays array indexes on this panel in hexadecimal number Fla Encoding Displays values on this panel in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation Displays values on this panel in Double Note that when the value is not 4 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value The following buttons to change the encoding of character variables are displayed Displays character variables in ASCII code default Displays character variables in Shift_JIS code Displays character variables in EUC JP code Displays character variables in UTF 8 code 2 Modify the contents of local variables Values and arguments of local variables can be edited Select the value of the local variables arguments to edit in the Value area then click on it again to switch the value to edit mode press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode To write the edited value to the target memory directly enter the value from the keyboard then press the Enter key At this time the edited value is checked and if it is incompatible with the type the editing
255. ble Data the Disassemble panels Disassemble1 4 are handled individually for these respectively In addition saving range is same as the previously specified address range 2 6 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations CubeSuite has a function that a build is started automatically when one of the following events occurs rapid build function 1 When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project When aC source file assembler source file header file link directive file symbol information file object module file or library file that is being added to the project has been updated When a build target file has been added to or removed from the project When the link order of object module files and library files has changed When any one of properties in the Property panel of the build tool or build target files has been changed 2 When the target project type is a debug dedicated project When aC source file assembler source file or header file that is being added to the debug dedicated project has been saved after editing When aC source file assembler source file or header file has been added to or removed from the debug dedicated project When any one of properties in the Property panel of the debug dedicated project has been changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Bui
256. built in event Unconditional Trace event Run Break Timer event JPE D on o o A o 32 o Oo m m lt 6 Oo 5 3 gt Timer Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to do the settings related to the timer However this item is valid only when a timer related event has been selected Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 and jumps to the memory corresponding to the address where the selected evente is being set Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 and jumps to the disassemble results corresponding to the address where the selected event is being set Jump to Source Opens the Editor pane and jumps to the source line corresponding to the address where the tNote selected even is being set Edit Comment Sets to the edit mode to input comments for the selected event When comments are already present all of that character string is set to a select state Note Events other than Trace events Timer Result events and built in events Unconditional Trace events Run Break Timer events can be objects of this button R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 306 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel This panel is used to display operation logs for various components debug tool design tool build tool etc provided by CubeSuite in addition to results of batch searches by the Search and Replace dialog box
257. by clicking the button and selecting a file via the Select Data Save File dialog box 2 File Type area Select the format in which to save the file from the following drop down list The available file formats will differ as follows depending on the type of data being saved a Saving the data displayed in a panel Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formatNote R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 341 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting b Saving upload data See Table 2 5 Type of Files That Can be Uploaded 3 Save Range xxx area Specify the range of data to save You can either type ranges directly into the text boxes or select them from the input history via the drop down lists up to 10 items The method of specifying the ranges will differ as follows depending on the type of data to be saved TE Disassemble panel Specify the range of addresses to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions When a range is selected in the panel that range is specified by default When there is no selection then the range currently visible in the panel is specified Memory panel Specify the range of
258. by the program UserModel c but is not compiled Note that suo h is stored in the following folder by default Install folder CubeSuite Debug Tools Debug Tool V850Simulator useropen sys suolink cpp This is a file that performs dynamic link processing with the user open interface processing module of the system Note that suolink cpp is stored in the following folder by default Install folder CubeSuite Debug Tools Debug ToolV850Simulator useropen sys UserModel c This is the source file of the user model to be created The file name can be determined freely UserModel dll This is a binary file of the user model DLL file The file name can be determined freely Caution To execute a DLL file in an environment in which Microsoft Visual C is not installed the DLL file must be created using the release version R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 450 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 3 Embedding User Model This section describes how to embed the created user model UserModel dll in Simulator GUI To embed the user model in Simulator GUI use a simulator configuration file cfg Therefore when using Simulator GUI embedding the created user model you need to specify Yes with the Use sim ulator configuration file property in the Configuration category on the Connect Settings tab of the Property panel and then specify the configuration file to be used with the Simulator
259. bytes Chip erase when Specify whether to erase the chip when connecting to the debug tool starting MINICUBE2 Default No Note that changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool Available Erases the chip when connecting to the debug tool values Note that after connecting to the debug tool this property automatically selects No Does not erase the chip when connecting to the debug tool Note When you change the setting of the property a message appears prompting you to select whether or not to change the security ID of the build tool except for the V850E2M core For details on the on chip debug security ID see MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 User s Manual R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 197 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Configuration Simulator The detailed information when customizing the simulator is displayed and its configuration can be changed Use simulator configuration file Simulator configuration file Specify whether to use the simulator configuration file to perform user customization adding of user models of the simulator values Does not use the simulator configuration file Specify the simulator configuration file to be use This property appears only when the Use simulator configuration file property is set to Yes Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard or specify with the Select Simulator Configurat
260. can be carried out either in units of source lines or in units of instructions For details see 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps 2 Debug toolbar The debug toolbar includes the buttons that control the execution of programs The debug toolbar provides the following buttons and functions default Remarks 1 The buttons on the toolbar can be customized using the User Setting dialog box Furthermore a new toolbar can be created using the same dialog box 2 A Group of toolbar displayed can be selected with the context menu that is displayed by right clicking on the toolbar Executes the build of a project and downloads the file into the debug tool for an active project While disconnecting from the debug tool the download is executed after connecting to the debug tool However when the build has failed download will not be executed The function of this item is the same as that of Build amp Download in the Debug menu Downloads the specified file s into the debug tool for an active project While disconnecting from the debug tool the download is executed after connecting to the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Download in the Debug menu Resets the CPU does not execute a program This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of CPU Reset in the Debug menu Forcibly stops the program cur
261. can be changed by selecting the View menu gt gt Numeric Representation gt gt Binary Hexa decimal Log display is cleared upon debugger or simulator reset Time Displays the time from the completion of reception transmission of the previous data until completion of reception transmission of the current data The time information unit is specified by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Time unit Send Data Displays the data sent by this window data received by the CPU Displays the data received by this window data sent by the CPU Status Displays the status during data reception When an error occurs one of the following marks is displayed When everything is normal a is displayed Coe error mismatching parity bit F Framing error stop bit not detected R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 434 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Serial editor area This area is where the transmission data is created This area can be shown or hidden by selecting the View menu gt gt Serial Editor No This is a number assigned sequentially from the beginning It cannot be directly written The maximum number is 9 999 lines Wait Specifies the time from the completion of transmission of the immediately previous data until the start of transmission of next data Valid during transmission using the Auto send button The time information unit is the unit selected by selecting the
262. ccess by stopping execution Update display during the execution Display update intervallme El Set Event hile Runnine net event by stopping execution momentarily Break El Mask for Input Signal Mask HLORG signal Mask RESET signal Mask STOP signal Mask WATT signal External Flash Memory Download Memory APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Connect Set j Debug To Download F lt Flash Optio Hook Trans Figure A 20 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab MINICUBE2 Property em WASO MINICUBES Serial Property Memory mappings Verity on writing to memory El Access Memory hile Runnin Sccess by stopping execution Update display during the execution Display update intervall ms El Set Event While Punnine net event by stopping execution momentarily Break El Mask for Input Sienal Mask RESET signal Memory Connect Settings Debug Tool 5 Download File 5 Hook Transactio R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 201 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 21 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E1 Serial Property ee WASO E1tSerial Property Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory 2 gt E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update display during the execution Yeg Display update intervallme 500 3 gt E Set Event While Running net event by stopping execution momentarily Mo 4 gt
263. ce Functions The necessary resources will be also generated b Registering callback function Callback functions can be registered as necessary Caution When describing a callback function for initialization be sure to register it at this time oth erwise callback will not function This is because initialization notification is reported immediately after the iakeUserModell function is called 4 Callback function Indicates a callback function Two or more callback functions such as those for initialization notification reset notification time notification pin input and external bus access can be created Describe processing in accordance with the callback contents in the callback function see B 5 User Defined Functions A callback function that has been created must be registered in advance so that it can be called from the system see B 4 Supplied Interface Functions The name of a callback function can be determined freely and the for mat of the function differs depending on the type of callback R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 448 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 2 3 include suo ih include lt memory h gt void Init void void InputP00 SuoHandle handle void ReadBUS1 SuoHandle handle void WriteBUS1 SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr SuoHandle p00 SuoHandle p01 SuoHandle bus1 unsigned char mem 0x100 MakeUserModel
264. cess 128 After download Specify the process to proceed right after downloading Automatically rewrite the I O register CPU register specified in this field right after downloading the load module file to the specified numbers Default After download 0 is the current number of specified processes Modifying Specify with the Text Edit dialog box The Text Edit dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting this property you cannot specify the process on this panel Available Format values VO register name CPU register name space specified value Maximum characters 64 for one process Maximum number of process 128 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 228 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE After CPU reset under Specify the process to proceed right after CPU reset during break breaking Automatically rewrite the I O register CPU register specified in this field right after CPU reset to the specified numbers Default After CPU reset under breaking 0 is the current number of specified processes Modifying Specify with the Text Edit dialog box The Text Edit dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting this property you cannot specify the process on this panel Available Format values O register name CPU register name space specified value Maximum characters 64 for one proces
265. ch a caret is This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Opens the Memory Initialize dialog box Refresh Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Paste Pasts the character string s copied in the clipboard to the caret position This item becomes invalid during execution of a program To the memory value area See e Copying and pasting To the character string area See b Copying and pasting R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 245 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notation The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the notation of memory values The items below become invalid during execution of a program Displays memory values in hexadecimal number default Size Notation The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the notation of sizes of memory values The items below become invalid during execution of a program Encoding The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the character code in the character string area The items below become invalid during execution of a program ASCII Displays character strings in ASCII code default Shift_JIS Displays character strings in Shi
266. ch panel Watch 1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 120 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b c Directly register in the Watch panel Click the button in the toolbar in any the Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 to display the following entry box in the Watch area Figure 2 146 Entry Box of the Watch Expression na P Ba aai sel Notation Watch Value TypelByte Size Address Memo w zlobal a 2696938 COx00041d82 intl xdc SE PDLH IOR 0x00 IOR RSW 1 8 ci Ox03ffT O05 HeT Ree Set Directly enter a watch expression in this area Directly input a watch expression from the keyboard in the entry box then press the Enter key The input format of the watch expression is the following tables Table A 8 Input Format of Watch Expression Table A 9 Scope Specification of C language Used with Watch Expression Registration Table A 10 Scope Specification of CPU Register with Watch Expression Registration Table A 11 Scope Specification of I O register with Watch Expression Registration Register from other application Select the character strings of C language variables CPU registers l O register assembler symbols from an external editor and drag and drop it in the Watch panel Watch 1 to Watch 4 The dropped character strings are registered as a watch expression 2 Organize the registered watch expressions Registered watch expressions can be organized in categori
267. cking the alel button on the toolbar or selecting Window Connecting gt gt Connect Source Window Connect Disassemble Window from the context menu it is possible to link and display the corresponding places on the Editor pane l Disassemble panel with the address of the caret position on this panel used as the pointer no movement of the focus Is done d Pop up display By superimposing the mouse cursor on a line all the area item data corresponding to that line is displayed as a pop up in tandem shape e Saving trace data The Data Save dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Trace Data As and the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 2 11 8 Save the contents of execution history for details on the method for saving trace data 5 Address area The target address of memory access is displayed However in the event of access to I O register the I O register name is displayed instead of the address when a plurality is accessed these are displayed in the following lines The radix of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item Remark IECUBE2 To display the target address of memory access via DMA select Yes with the DMA is traced property in the Trace category on the Debug Tool Seitings tab of the Property panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 294 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 4
268. clock frequency MHz 8 00 Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Select Timer Trace clock frequency GFU clock frequency 6 gt E Configuration Use simulator configuration tile Internal ROM RAH A Download Fi Flash Optio Hook Trans R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 191 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Internal ROM RAM The detailed information on internal ROM RAM is displayed and its configuration can be changed Cautions 1 You should be careful not to overlap the area with other memory mapping area 2 IECUBE CPU reset is generated automatically if you change the setting of the property in this category Size of internal Display and change the internal ROM size to emulate simulate PGE Default When the selected microcontroller is not a ROMIess product Internal ROM size of the selected microcontrollerN 1 When the selected microcontroller is a ROMless product 0 Modifying IECUBE Simulator V850E1 V850ES Select from the drop down liste 2 IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Simulator V850E2M Changes not allowed Available IECUBE values 0 8 32 64 128 256 512 1024 1024 VSB Flash ROM size only when the selected microcontroller incorporates VSB Flash ROM unit Kbytes Simulator V850E1 V850ES 0 8 32 64 128 256 512 1024 unit Kbytes Size of internal Display and change the interna
269. comments and this is saved as the settings of the user during use 2 15 6 Notes for setting events This section describes notes for setting each type of event 1 Maximum number of enabled events 2 Event types that can be set and deleted during execution 3 Other notes 1 Maximum number of enabled events The number of events that can be set to Valid state simultaneously is limited as follows Consequently if enabling a new event would exceed the limit you must first set some other event to Invalid state Table 2 23 Maximum Number of Enabled Events V850E1 V850ES Debug Tool to Use ae phon Event Type JTAG Serial IECUBE Simulator Nx85ET Other than With Debug Without Debug Core Nx85ET Core Function Function Hardware Break oNote 1 2 oNote 2 oNote 2 before execution Hardware Break g4Note 4 after execution Hardware Break oNote 2 Note 2 access Software Break Break 2000 2000 For flash 0 to 8N te 3 Cacai 4 gNote 5 goNote 5 Start Tracing Stop Tracing Point Trace Trace a Result 4 gNote 5 1 Start Timer Stop Timer aan goNote 6 64Note 7 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 158 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Table 2 24 Maximum Number of Enabled Events V850E2M Debug Tool to Use MINICUBE IECUBE E1 JTAG Simulator Nx85ET Core Other than Nx85ET Core Hardware Break i i 4 4 4 before execution Hardware Break g4Note 4 after execution
270. configuration file property in the category same as above B 3 1 Description in simulator configuration file Describe the user model generation processing processing to connect pins and an external buses and so on in the simulator configuration file User model generation processing Pin connection External bus connection Other processing 1 User model generation processing UserModell Device USEROPEN UserModell1 dll UserOptionl1 a b c d e UserModel1 UserModel 1 is a variable that indicates the generated user model The variable name can be determined freely by user Device function The Device function is used to create a user model USEROPEN USEROPEN is a user open interface processing module system module UserMode 1 dll UserModel 1 dll is the binary file DLL format of the user model to be created in B 2 Creating User Model The file name can be determined freely by user Specify a relative path or absolute path from the folder where the simulator configuration file exists as the file path Caution Do not use single byte spaces for specifying the path name otherwise the user model will not be created UserOption1 UserOption1 is an option character string for UserModel1 dll This character string is passed to the option parameter of the MakeUserModel function as is R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 451 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 4
271. corresponding register names for the operand list12 are displayed instead of its values as shown in the following examples Examples 1 When the code is Oxbf 0x07 Oxe1 Oxff 4 byte prepare instruction Syntax prepare r20 r21 r22 r23 r24 r25 r26 r27 r28 r29 r30 r31 0x20 Oxfff 0x20 2 When the code is 0x90 0x07 Oxbb Oxaa Oxff Oxff Oxff Oxff 8 byte prepare instruction prepare r20 r22 r24 r26 r28 r31 0x20 Ox7fffffff prepare 0x555 0x20 Ox7fffffff 3 When the code is 0x51 0x06 Oxe0 Oxff 4 byte dispose instruction dispose 0x20 r20 r21 r22 r23 r24 r25 r26 r27 r28 r29 r30 r31 dispose 0x20 Oxfff 4 When the code is 0x50 0x06 Oxaa Oxaa 4 byte dispose instruction 0x20 r20 r22 r24 r26 r28 r31 r10 Syntax dispose 0x20 0x555 r10 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 sQENESAS Page 89 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note however that it is possible to specify both the value and the register name for the operand list12 when line assembling the prepare instruction and dispose instruction Examples 1 In both of the cases 1 and 2 below the same set of values 0x91 0x07 Oxe1 Oxff will be generated as a result of line assembly prepare r20 r21 r22 23 r24 r25 r26 r27 r28 r29 r30 r31 0x20 prepare Oxfff 0x20 2 In both of the cases 1 and 2 below the same set of values Oxbe 0x07 Oxbb Oxaa
272. ct from the drop down list Available Yes Uses trace functions values No Does not use trace functions Clear trace memory Specify whether to clear the trace memory before executing before running Yes Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Yes Clears the trace memory values No Does not clear the trace memory R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 210 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Operation after trace Specify the operation after the trace memory is full with the collected trace data memory is full y Default Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Non stop and overwrite Continues overwriting the older trace data after the values trace memory is full to trace memory Stop trace Stops writing the trace data after the trace memory is full the program execution will not be stopped Stop Stops writing the trace data after the trace memory is full and the program execution will be stopped Specify whether to display the accumulated tracing time in the Trace panel ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Displays the accumulated tracing time values i P Displays the trace time with differential value Specify the frequency division ratio of the counter to be used for time tag display the Time item in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator
273. cution of a program R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 296 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notation The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the notation This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Displays values on this panel in octal number Window Connecting The following cascade menus are displayed to link with other panels see Linking with other panels Connect Source Links with the Editor panel Window Connect Disassemble Links with the Disassemble panel Window Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 and jumps to the fetch address corresponding to the selected line in this panel Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the selected line in this panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 297 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Events panel This panel is used to display the detailed information about the events that are set on the Editor panel Disassemble panel Watch panel On this panel you can change the setting state of the event between valid invalid and delete the event see 2 15 Manage Events This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Remarks 1 See 2 15 6 Notes for setting events for more information about the setting of events 2 This panel also manage the events that are set on the Function panel or V
274. d NULL is returned Example include suo h SuoHandle hTim1 void funcl void hTim1l SuoGetTimerHandle TIM1 Get handle of TIMI R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 463 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetTimer Sets cyclic timer Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoSetTimer SuoHandle handle int timeUnit unsigned long timeValue Argumeni s Handle of the timer interface time Unit Time unit specify any of the following SUO_MAINCLK Main clock cycle units SUO_USEC Microsecond units Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function sets a cyclic timer for the specified timer interface The cycle time is specified by the value of timeValue in units of timeUnit 0 cannot be specified for time Value The timer starts operating immediately after this function is called The timer continues operating until it is stopped by the SuokillTimer function If a timer notification function has been registered by the SuoSeiNotify TimerCalloback function the timer notification function is called in each cycle If this function is called for the timer that is currently operating the timer is reset and starts operating with the sp
275. d signal data is not saved but information of the set pins is saved Solely saving the project file is sufficient if saving of the measurement result is unnecessary Cautions 1 If the saved timing chart file is opened or the project file is opened while Simulator GUI is run ning with a microcontroller different from the one used when the timing chart file was created the settings of pins that are not provided in the microcontroller will not be restored 2 The main clock and sub clock waveforms cannot be displayed in this window In addition when using the external bus interface function the waveforms of pins used for the external bus inter face function cannot be displayed Figure A 84 Timing Chart Window Timing harti Y ooy ow o0 Rman vi Fin Name Y This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Dedicated menu Timing Chart window Timing Chart toolbar Context menu Operation How to open Click the E button Select Timing Chart from the Simulator menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 377 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Information bar It can be specified whether this area is displayed or not by selecting the View menu gt gt Information Bar 7 nbos364 00 Clock time count from simulation start until marker A location 7 poo4aa0 00 Clock time count from
276. d 0 fter download After download 0 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 162 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 179 Use Hook Function Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit In this dialog box directly enter the desired process from the key board The format for specifying processes is as follows The value of the specified O register CPU register will be overwritten with the specified value automatically at the corresponding time I O register name CPU register name space specified value Up to 64 characters for one process and up to 128 processes for each property can be set one line in the Text area in the Text Edit dialog box is equivalent to one processing After the specification of the process is complete click the OK button to set the process to the Property panel Figure 2 180 Example of Hook Transaction Text Edit Text wTM 0x00 Remarks 1 When specifying hook processes lines starting with a hash mark will be treated as comments 2 A tab character can be used instead of the space character R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 163 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 Use the Simulator GUI Simulator This section describes how to use the Simulator GUI Note that the function of the Simulator GUI described in this section is only supported when a microcontroller whose Simulator supports peripheral function
277. d as a string ASCII Shift_JIS EUC JP Unicode UTF 8 Display modify the contents of watch expressions during program execution The Memory panel Watch panel has the real time display update function that can update modify the display contents of the memory watch expression in real time while executing the program Using the real time display update function enables to display modify the value of memory watch expression not only while the program is stopped but also in execution See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on how to operate it Save the contents of watch expressions By selecting the File menu gt gt Save Watch Data As the Save As dialog box can be opened and all the contents of the watch expression and its value can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv When saving the contents to the file all the values of the watch expression are reacquired and save the latest values acquired If arrays pointer type variables structures unions and CPU registers only those with the part name are displayed expanded the value of each expanded element is also saved When they are not expanded mark is added on the top of the item and the value becomes blank Note that the values of read protected I O register are not re read If you want to save the latest values of those select Force Read Value from the context menu then save the file Figure 2 147 Output Example of W
278. d freely b Connection of the bus and CPU Connect one end of the bus to the external bus master of the CPU Specify the external bus master EXTBUS for the argument c Connection of the bus and user model Connect the other end of the bus to the external bus of the user model Specify the name of the external bus of the user model to be connected as UserExtbusName 1 the external bus name generated in the MakeUserModel function Enclose the external bus name between double quota tion marks Add this line to connect two or more user model external buses 4 Other processing In addition to the above the formulaic connections for the main clock notification pin and the reset notification pin shown below is required to operate the user open interface R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 452 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Cclocki Wire 1 a clock1 cpu DebuggerPseudoPort debugger pseudo pin main_clkout b Clock1 UserModeli Port gui pseudo pin clock notice c resetl Wire 1 d resetl cpu DebuggerPseudoPort debugger pseudo pin reset notice e reset1 UserModell1 Port gui pseudo pin reset notice f a Generation of a wire Generate a wire line that connects pins by using the Wire function Be sure to specify 1 for the argument of the Wire function clock7 is a variable that indicates the generated wire The var
279. d module files to debug to CubeSuite and how to upload the debugging memory contents from CubeSuite to files 2 5 1 Execute downloading Download the lode module file to debug to the debug tool that is currently connected Follow the steps below on the Download File Settings tab in the Property panel for the downloading and then execute the downloading 1 Download category setting Figure 2 103 Download Category IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG Simulator El Download Al Download files O Debug Build v8iQestx3 out Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM betore download No utomatic change method of event setting position Suspend ewent Figure 2 104 Download Category MINICUBE2 E1 Serial E Download E Download files i Debug BuildS50est3 out Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM before download No Sutomatic change method of event setting position suspend event Check reserved area overwriting when downloading Yes a Download files The names of files to be downloaded and the download conditions are displayed the number enclosed with indicates the number of files to be download A file to be downloaded is automatically determined to a file that have been specified as the build target file in main project or subproject However you can manually change the download files and t
280. decimal number constantly can also be selected as well The default display format of the values is automatically decided depending on the type of the watch expression Table A 12 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default Type of Watch Expression Display Format char signed char unsigned char ASCII code with hexadecimal number short signed short short int signed short int int signed Signed decimal number with hexadecimal number signed int long signed long long int signed long int unsigned short unsigned short int unsigned unsigned Unsigned decimal number with hexadecimal number int unsigned long unsigned long int oat wen the size is amp bye wih hexadecimal number double long double Double when the size is 8 byte with hexadecimal number Pointers to char signed char unsigned char Characters Encoding ASCII Pointers to other than char signed char unsigned char Hexadecimal number Arrays of char signed char unsigned char types Characters Encoding ASCII bit boolean _boolean Unsigned decimal number with hexadecimal number Enumeration type Enumeration constant value with hexadecimal number R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 280 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Type of Watch Expression Display Format Label address of immediate value EQU symbol Signed decimal number with hexadecimal number Others Hexadecimal number bit symbol Unsigned decimal nu
281. del function An error occurs if it is called at any other timing 2 When using the external bus interface function the external memory area to use must be set to Target memory area with the Memory Type area of the Memory Mapping dialog box Syntax include suo h int SuoCreateExtbus const char extbusName unsigned long addr unsigned long size SuoHandle handle Argument s Name of the external bus The first address of the external memory area Size of the external memory area Location where the handle of the external bus interface is to be stored Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to generate an external bus interface The generated external bus interface is associated with the name specified for extbusName If this function is successful the handle of the generated external bus interface can be obtained The external bus interface can then be controlled by specifying this handle The handle can also be obtained by using the SuoGetExtbusHandle function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 478 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Example include suo h SuoHandle hExtbus1 SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option SuoCreateExtbus EXTBUS1 0x200000 0x1000 amp hExtbus1 Create EXTBUS1 R20UT0264EJ
282. describes the following How to open Analog Button Connection tab Style tab Function buttons Operation How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a part object Analog Button Select Properties form the context menu on a part object Analog Button Select a part object Analog Button and then select Properties form the View menu Analog Button Connection tab 1 Pin connection information setting area Label This area is used to specify the part name The part name input here is displayed on the but ton Moreover it is also displayed in the Parts List dialog box as the label Pin Name This area is used to specify the pin name to be connected The connection pins can be spec ified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list Active Specify the active state Check box Analog buttons are created by the number of selected check boxes Directly input the name to be displayed on each analog button Voltage mV Directly input the voltage to be input when each analog button is clicked in mV units Arrange Specify the button arrangement using the option button This setting is available if two or more analog buttons have been created in the Active area This setting is ignored if there is only one analog button or no analog buttons have been cre ated Analog buttons will be arranged horizontally default Analog buttons will be arran
283. detailed information of the selected event R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 232 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 4 c Pop up display By superimposing the mouse cursor on the Event mark the name of the event the detailed information for the event and the comments added to the event are pop up displayed When multiple events have been set in the applicable place information for each event up to a maximum of three events is listed and displayed Remark If the updated time and date of the downloaded load module file are older than the source file opened this whole area is warned in blue the color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Figure A 34 Event Area Warned in Blue Line number area The line number of the opened text file source file is displayed In addition when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened the current PC mark gt that corresponds to the current PC position PC register value is displayed Note that the current PC mark is only displayed if the current PC value corresponds to the source text line when the current PC position is modified or the state of the debug tool is changed from execution to stop Characters area The character strings of text files source files are displayed and edited This area is provided with the following functions Remark The fol
284. dialog box as the label 2 Row direction signals setting area Row Signal This area is used to specify the output pins connected to the matrix LED row direction signals and their active level Pin Name A maximum of 16 pins can be connected Connection to all the row direc tion signals can be done by using the scrollbar located on the right side of the pin name input area Active Level The active status can be selected with a option button as follows Sets the active level to LOW HIGH Sets the active level to HIGH default Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used 3 Column direction signals setting area Column Signal This area is used to specify the output pins connected to the matrix LED column direction sig nals and their active level Pin Name The connection pins can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list A maximum of 16 pins can be connected Connection to all the column direction signals can be done by using the scrollbar located on the right side of the pin name input area Active Level The active status can be selected with a option button as follows Sets the active level to LOW HIGH Sets the active level to HIGH default Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 418 of 538 Oct 01 2010
285. dition to display in this window 7 The detailed setting for objects Each created object requires the detailed setting pin connection information etc in accordance with the target system to be used a Figure objects The detailed setting can be performed via the Object Connection tab of the Object Properties dialog box opened by double clicking the target figure object By connecting a object to an output pin show hide of the object can be switched depending on the output sta tus of the connected pin b Part objects The detailed setting can be performed via the xxx Connection tab of the property dialog box opened by dou ble clicking the target part object For details on the setable items see the section of the property dialog box which is corresponding to the part object the items differ depending on the part object 8 Simulation mode The part objects whose settings have been completed can be manipulated during simulation input values can be fed to the simulator Accordingly you can check the I O results from these displayed part objects in this window Change the operation mode of this window to simulation mode to manipulate part objects The simulation mode can be set by any one of the following methods the mouse cursor changes to a hand shape Select the Figure menu gt gt Simulation Mode Click the a button on the toolbar Remark For details on input operation see the section of the property dialog
286. dow is used to communicate with the serial interface provided in the CPU Since this window operates as the serial interface of the remote node of the CPU transmission data from CPU turns into reception data in this window and transmission data from this window turns into reception data in the CPU The following two types of files can be handled in this window The transmission reception data displayed in the top area in this window can be saved to the serial log data file log CSV format by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Save As Moreover the transmission data created in the lower part of this window can be saved to the serial transmission data file ser CSV format by clicking the Save button the contents can be restored by clicking the Load button Saving restoring the created data can also be performed by saving loading the project file In this case however data is not saved as a CSV format text file but saved into the project file Cautions 1 If the saved serial transmission data file is opened or the project file is opened while Simulator GUI is running with a microcontroller different from the one used when the file was created the settings of the serial interface that are not provided in the microcontroller will not be restored 2 Multiple instances of this window can be opened After opening this window select the serial interface to be verified in the Serial selection area Figure A 116 Serial
287. dress generated BlockErase error This property appears only when the Generate BlockErase error property is set to Yes Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFFE in hexadecimal number values Generate BlockIVerify Specify whether to return error values in BlocklVerify functions to emulate error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values Specify an address in the data flash memory at which a BlocklVerify function error is to be generated Address generated Blockl Verify error This property appears only when the Generate Block Verify error property is set to Yes Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFF in hexadecimal number values Generate Specify whether to return error values in BlockBlankCheck functions to emulate BlockBlankCheck error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 222 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Address generated Specify an address in the data flash memory at which a BlockBlankCheck function error is to be BlockBlankCheck error generated This property appears only when the Generate BlockBlankCheck error property is set to Yes Modifying Directly enter from the
288. e 506 SuokillTimer 466 SuoOutputAnalogPin 472 SuoOutputDigitalPin 471 SuoOutputHighImpedance 473 SuoSendSerialData 497 SuoSendSerialDataList 498 SuoSendSerialFile 499 SuoSendWaveFile 507 SuoSetlnitCallback 458 SuoSetInputAnalogPinCallback 475 SuoSetlnputDigitalPinCallback 474 SuoSetInputHighImpedanceCallback 476 SuoSetNotifySentSerialCallback 500 SuoSetNotifySentWaveCallback 508 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 APPENDIX C INDEX SuoSetNotifyTimerCallback 467 SuoSetReadExtbusCallback 481 SuoSetReceiveSerialCallback 502 SuosetResetCallback 459 SuosetSerialParameterCSI 492 SuoSetSerialParameterUART 490 SuoSetTimer 464 SuoSetWriteExtbusCallback 482 System register 113 T Tag jump 82 233 308 Target board 23 Target range for the RRM function 107 Targets that can be registered as watch expressions 120 Text Edit dialog box 323 Time interface functions 461 SuoCreateTimer 462 SuoGetTimerHandle 463 SuokillTimer 466 SuoSetNotifyTimerCallback 467 SuoSetTimer 464 Timer 63 Timer Result 300 301 Timer Result event 146 Timing chart file 377 Timing Chart window 377 Trace event 133 Trace frame 132 Trace memory 210 128 131 Trace number 292 Trace panel 291 Trace Search dialog box 332 Trace time tag 211 Type of breakpoint
289. e 1 Seta break event to a variable I O register Set Write Break to Sets a break event with write access condition to the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register see 1 Seta break event to a variable I O register Set R W Break to Sets a break event with read write access condition to the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable l O register see 1 Seta break event to a variable I O register Break Option Opens the Property panel to set the break function Trace Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the trace related event IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Start Tracing Sets a Start Tracing event to start collecting the trace data when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Stop Tracing Sets a Stop Tracing event to stop collecting the trace data when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 1
290. e ERROR MB OK MB ICONERROR 2 Simulator configuration file smplus cfg UO TIMER description CPU uPD70F3261Y Create UserOpen uo timer Device USEROPEN Release uo timer d1l1 Pseudo Pin connection Wire clock Wire 1 wire clock cpu DebuggerPseudoPort debugger pseudo pin main _clkout wire clock vo timer Port gui pseudo pin clock notice wire reset Wire 1 7 wire reset cpu DebuggerPseudoPort debugger pseudo pin reset notice wire reset uo timer Port gui_pseudo pin reser Notice PIN connection UO TIMER PIN lt gt CPU PDHO wire PIN Wire 1 wire PIN uo timer Port PIN wire PIN pu Port PDHO R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 527 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE 3 Source file of target program Im_timer c Target Program for UO TIMER pragma ioreg void main unsigned char value set port input mode set port output mode while 1 value PDH 0 input signal from PDHO PDH 1 value output signal to PDH1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 528 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C INDEX APPENDIX C A Access to variables 97 Access width 313 Action event 154 301 305 306 Action Events dialog box 324 Address range 312 Analog Button Properties dialog box
291. e 2 16 Event Marks of the Start Timer Event Stop Timer Event Event Type R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 146 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 164 Start Timer Event Stop Timer Event Setting Example Event area TE Set PLL stor lp 000000842 6 cO872cf8 i PLLON OU ft Set f XX and Indicates that the Stop Timer arama Paya 00 Ch ta a sind 000000848 c 405 f fc Indicates that the Start Timer event has been set Remark Event marks differ depending on the event state see 2 15 1 Change the state of set events valid invalid When an event is set at the point which other event is already set the event mark FS is displayed meaning more than one event is set at the point 2 Execute the program Execute the program see 2 7 Execute Programs If the instruction with the Start Timer event Stop Timer event executes the timer starts stops After the program is stopped the result of the measurement is displayed in the Events panel opened by selecting the View menu gt gt Event in event type as Timer Result This Timer Result is the even type that is registered in the Events panel bundled in one event when both the Start Timer event and the Stop Timer event setting is completed Figure 2 165 Timer Result Event Start Timer Event Stop Timer Event Setting Example Events Comment Unconditional Trace A ES Timer Result Total 1500
292. e SuoCreatePin function as pinName if a different name is specified NULL is returned Example include suo h SuoHandle hPinP0O0 void funcl void hPinP00 SuoGetPinHandle P00 Get handle of POO R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 470 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoOutputDigitalPin Outputs digital pin value Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoOutputDigitalPin SuoHandle handle int pinValue Argumeni s Handle of the pin interface pinValue Digital output value specify any of the following SUO_HIGH 1 HIGH value SUO_LOW 0 LOW value Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function outputs a digital data signal specified with pinValue to the specified pin interface To output an analog data signal use the SuoOutputAnalogPin function Example include suo h SuoHandle hPinP0OO void funcl void SuoOutputDigitalPin hPinP00 SUO HIGH Output HIGH R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 471 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoOutputAnalogPin Outputs analog pin value Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can on
293. e after resetting microcontroller CPU Click the button on the debug toolbar Reset CPU and start execution of the program from the reset address When this operation is performed the program continues executing until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 8 1 Stop the program manually The PC has reached a breakpoint see 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint A break event condition has been met see 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables l O registers A fail safe break has occurred see 2 8 4 Stop the program when an invalid execution is detected IECUBE The Other break causes have occurred Remark This operation is the same as when the button is clicked after clicking the button 2 Execute from the current address Perform any of the following operations to start executing the program from the address at the current PC value a Normal execution Click the button on the debug toolbar When this operation is performed the program continues executing until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 8 1 Stop the program manually The PC has reached a breakpoint see 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint A break event condition has been met see 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables l O registers A fail safe break has occurred see 2 8 4 Stop the program when an i
294. e caret position see b Tag jump Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the caret position Open in New Panel Opens a new Editor panel with the same contents as the current Editor panel the title bar of the newly opened Editor panel displays the file name and ID number The Editor panel can be opened up to 100 panels Characters area Line number area while connecting to the debug tool Register to Watch1 Registers a selected character string or a word at the caret position to the Watch panel Watch1 as a watch expression the judgment of the word depends on current build tool Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret Register Action Event Opens the Action Events dialog box to set an action event to the corresponding address of the line at the caret position Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret Go to Here Executes the program from the address indicated by the current PC value to the address corresponding to the line at the caret position If the corresponding address of the line at the caret position does not exist the program is executed to the corresponding address of the lower valid line This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Se
295. e caret position see 2 8 2 Stop the Note IECUBE IECUBE2 program at the arbitrary position breakpoint MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Set Read Break to Sets a break event with read access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable l O register see 1 Set a break event to a variable I O register Set Write Break to Sets a break event with write access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable l O register see 1 Set a break event to a variable I O register Set R W Break to Sets a break event with read write access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register see 1 Seta break event to a variable l O register Break Option Opens the Property panel to set the break function Trace Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the trace related event IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Start Tracing Sets a Start Tracing event to start collecting the trace data when the line at the caret is executed see 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator category on the Property pan
296. e case where you have attempted to delete a target memory area that is specified as an I O protection area however a message will be displayed The selected target memory area and the I O protection area mapped to that area will both be deleted only if you click the OK button Function buttons Sets the currently specified memory mapping to the debug tool and closes this dialog box Cancels memory mapping changes and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 315 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download Files dialog box This dialog box is used to select files for downloading and configure download conditions see 2 5 Download Upload Programs Note that files specified as build targets in a project main project or sub project are automatically registered as download targets they can be unregistered Figure A 54 Download Files Dialog Box Download Files Download file list Download file property wooQes 3 out E Download file information Download object es Download symbol information res File type Specify the type of file to be downloaded Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Download File Settings tab of the Property panel click the button displayed by selecting the
297. e clip board into the caret position Delete Deletes one character at the caret position When there is a selection area all the characters in the area are deleted Select All Selects all the characters from beginning to the end in the currently editing text file Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting Quick Search tab When there is a selection area search is only taken place in the selection area Replace Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting Quick Replace tab When there is a selection area replace is only taken place in the selection area Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to the specified line R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 235 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Characters area Line number area while disconnecting from the debug tool Jump to Function Jumps to the function that is selected or at the caret position regarding the selected characters and the words at the caret position as functions see 4 Jump to functions Back To Last Cursor Goes back to the position before operating Jump to Function Position Forward To Next Cursor Forwards to the position before operating Back To Last Cursor Position Position Tag Jump Jumps to the corresponding line and column in the corresponding file if the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at th
298. e desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 Select the Edit menu gt gt Paste in this area in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 after copying the target character string Cautions 1 Up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one watch panel if this restriction is violated a message appears 2 Due to compiler optimization the data for the target variable may not be on the stack or in a register in blocks where that variable is not used In this case the target watch expression value is displayed as Remarks 1 Each watch expression registered in each watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 is managed in each panel and saved as the user information of the project 2 More than one watch expression with the same name can be registered d Editing watch expression To edit the registered watch expression double click the watch expression to be edited to change the watch expression to edit mode then directly edit from the keyboard press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode After editing the watch expression press the Enter key to complete the editing R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 279 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE e Deleting watch expression To delete the registered watch expression select the watch expression s to be deleted then click the button on the toolbar or select Delete from the context menu f Setting of various events Various events can be se
299. e memory of the debug tool currently connected can be saved uploaded in an arbitrary file You can upload the data in the Data Save dialog box opened by selecting the Debug menu gt gt Upload In this dialog box follow the steps below Figure 2 109 Execute Uploading Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Upload tee Sentero SIG File Type Intel Hex format amp hex Save Range ddress Symbol Qhput the start of saving range ir w Qhput the end of saving range pe w i Cancel 1 Specify File Name Specify the name of the file to save You can either type a filename directly into the text box up to 259 characters or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items You can also specify the file by clicking the button and selecting a file via the Select Data Save File dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 77 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Specify File Type Select the format in which to save the file from the following drop down list The following file formats can be selected Note however that the format with ID tag below appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory and supports the ID tag function Select these items to save the ID tag information Table 2 5 Type of Files That Can be Uploaded Intel Hex format with ID Tag hex Hex format IECUBE IECUBE2 INICUBE MINICUBE2 E1
300. e memory value Note that if there is no symbol information the underlining is non display no pop up display is done variable 0x14 Symbol name Offset value Symbol name Indicates the name of the symbol Offset value When a symbol has not been defined for the addresses the offset value from the nearest symbol exists forward is displayed hexadecimal number notation fixing b Real time display update function Using the real time display update function enables to display modify the value of the memory contents not only while the program is stopped but also in execution See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function c Changing memory values Directly edit from the keyboard after moving the caret to the memory value to be edited The color of the memory value changes when it is in editing Press the Enter key to write the edited value to the target memory if the Esc key is pressed before the Enter key is pressed the editing is cancelled See 3 Modify the memory contents for details on the method for changing the memory value d Searching initializing memory value The Memory Search dialog box is opened to search the memory contents in the specified address range by selecting Find from the context menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 242 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE In addition
301. e name or function name is displayed The argument of the function is also displayed as the local variable In addition the hierarchical structure is displayed in tree format for arrays pointer variables and structures or unions This area cannot be edited The meanings of the icons are as follows Pointer variables Variables that the pointer designates If the pointer designates a pointer add mark and expand it by clicking the mark Note that if the pointer designates an unknown mark is displayed Structures Unions All the member of structures unions Indicates the argument Indicates the function Indicates the variable Auto Internal Static and Register variables are also displayed In addition the hierarchical structure is displayed in tree format for arrays pointer variables and structures or unions lf mark exist at the top of the name the next structure is expanded by clicking it the mark changes to after the expansion Me v Note When Auto variables are used to display local variables accurate values cannot be displayed at a prologue or epilogue of a function The Auto variable addresses are the relative addresses from the address pointed to by the stack pointer SP so their addresses are not determined until the SP value is determined in the function The SP is manipulated via prologues or epilogues so the accurate value cannot be displayed This area is provided with the followin
302. e operation is applied as the selection in Save Memory Data As Save Memory Data As Opens the Data Save dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt CSV file csv see g Saving the contents of memory values Edit menu Memory panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Memory panel other items are all invalid Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Paste Pastes the character string s copied in the clipboard to the caret position To the memory value area See e Copying and pasting To the character string area See b Copying and pasting Find Opens the Memory Search dialog box The search is operated either in the Memory value area or the Character string area in which a caret is Context menu Register to Watch1 Registers the symbol at the caret to the Watch panel Watch1 At this time since it is registered as a variable name the symbol name that is displayed changes depending on the scope Note that this item becomes invalid when no symbol has been defined in the address corresponding to the memory value at the caret position see f Registering watch expression Opens the Memory Search dialog box The search is operated either in the Memory value area or the Character string area in whi
303. e panel of the analyze tool Program Analyzer R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 301 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE In the case of a breakpoint at a function Break at start of function In the case of a break event to a variable Access break to variable 2 Detail Information area Detailed information about each event is displayed The contents of the information that is displayed differ depending on the event type as follows Table A 15 Detailed Information with Event Type Event Type Display ContentsN e 1 Hardware Break Formati lt Condition to occur gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt Condition execution Example Before Execution main c 39 0x100 After Execution sub c 100 0x200 Before Execution 0x300 Execution main c 39 0x300 Simulator Format2 lt Condition to occur gt lt Symbol Offset gt lt Address gt Example Before Execution funcA 0x10 0x100 After Execution funcB 0x20 0x200 Before Execution 0x300 Hardware Break Formati lt Condition to occur gt lt File name Variable name gt lt Address range gt Condition access lt Comparison condition gt lt Comparison value gt Example Read main c variable1 0x100 0x101 0x5 Write sub c variable2 0x200 0x200 0x7 Read Write sub2 c variable3 0x300 0x303 0x8 lt Condition to occur gt lt File name Function name Variable name gt Format2 lt
304. e that no change is allowed Ti PROHD psval Settable line__p OON00084c j 405f2ots No settable line__ 7 PEG psval Remarks 1 Event marks differ depending on the event state see 2 15 1 Change the state of set events valid invalid When an event is set at the point which other event is already set the event mark FS S displayed meaning more than one event is set at the point 2 Simulator The type of breakpoint that can be set is locked to hardware breakpoints 3 IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 You can set hardware breakpoints software breakpoints without depending on the specification of 1 Configure types movements of breakpoints to use by following the step below Hardware breakpoint Ctrl mouse click Select Break Settings gt gt Set Hardware Break from the context menu Software breakpoint Shift mouse click Select Break Settings gt gt Set Software Break from the context menu 3 Delete a breakpoint Click event marks displayed in the Editor panel Disassemble panel to delete set breakpoints the event mark will be erased 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers By setting a break event with the access the program can be stopped when an arbitrary variable or I O register is accessed with the specified type R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 97 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS You can also l
305. e to be debugged with the Debug Manager panel V850E2M d Running state This area displays the state of the program with the following icons and character strings Note that nothing is displayed here when the debug tool is not connected State of Program Display Contents Stopped m BREAK In step execution M STEP e CPU status This area displays CPU statuses of the debug tool When there is the possibility that the CPU is in two or more statuses the corresponding display contents are displayed separated by amp Note that nothing is displayed here when the debug tool is not connected Debug Tool Display Contents CPU Status IECUBE In HALT mode EGUEES Stpldle Hardware STOP Software STOP IDLE mode MINICUBE Hold In bus hold egra Mf meeshoa f Current PC position This area displays the current PC position with a hexadecimal value When this area is clicked the caret moves to the current PC position on the Editor panel In addition when the mouse pointer is placed over this area a pop up window appears to display the following information Current PC 0x current PC value source name line count Note that nothing is displayed here when the debug tool is not connected R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 177 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note symbol name offset value is displayed when acquisition of information is impossible g Connection state This a
306. e window Figure 2 186 Configuring Connected Parts I O Panel Window cer 10 Panell R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 Page 166 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 18 About Input Value this section describes consideration to take when inputting values in each 2 18 1 Input rule Following is the rules for input to each panel dialog box 1 Character set Character sets that are allowed to input are as follows Table 2 28 List of Character Set ASCII 1 byte alohabets numbers symbols Shift JIS 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji and 1 byte Katakana EUC JP 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji and 1 byte Katakana 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji include Chinese characters and 1 byte Katakana 2 Number Notations allowed when entering numbers are as follows Table 2 29 Notation List Octal number Start with 0 and continues with the numbers from 0 to 7 Start without 0 and continues with the numbers from 0 to 9 Hexadecimal number Start with Ox and continues with the numbers from 0 to 9 and alphabets a to f Case insensitive for alphabets In the input area with the HEX mark prefix Ox is not needed 3 Expression and operator Expression represents constants register name I O register name and symbols and those connected with operators When I O register name label name function name and variable name
307. eSCK SuoHandle handle Argumeni s handle Location where the handle of the serial interface is to be stored Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to generate a serial interface CSI type The generated serial interface is associated with the name specified for serialName In addition the pins specified as pinNameSO pinNameSI and pinNameSCkK are also generated If this function is successful the handle of the generated serial interface can be obtained The serial interface can then be controlled by specifying this handle The handle can also be obtained by using the SuoGetSerialHandle function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 487 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Example include suo h SuoHandle hCsil SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option SuoCreateSerialcCsI CSI1 SO1 SI1 SCK1 amp hbCsil Create CSI1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 488 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoGetSerialHandle Acquires serial interface handle Syntax include suo h SuoHandle SuoGetSerialHandle const char serialName Argumeni s Return value p Macro o Beseription of the specified Normal completion serial interface NULL Exit with e
308. eSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 100 Flash Options Settings Flash Options Setting Dialog Box Simulator Flash Options Setting Flash option property El Option Bytes Setting OPBTO HEX FFFFFFES CPBT1 HEX FFFFFFFF OPBT2 HEX FFFFFFFF OPBTS Hex FFFFFFFF OPBT4 HEX FFFFFFFF OPBTS HEX FFFFFFFF OPBTE HEX FFFFFFFF CPBT HEX FFFFFFFF OPBTS Hex FFFFFFFF Option bytes setting Chip erase when writing Cie tie eee Cee eee 5 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab configuration on the hook transaction can be done See 2 16 Use Hook Function for details on each category configuration and the function of the hook transaction R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 65 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Connect to Disconnect from the Debug Tool This section describes how to connect to disconnect from the debug tool 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite Select the Debug menu gt gt Connect to Debug Tool to connect to the debug tool selected in the currently active project After succeeding in the connection to the debug tool the Statusbar of the Main window changes as follows For details on each item displayed on the Statusbar see the section of the Main window Figure 2 101 The Statusbar during Connecting to Debug Tool Example for Using Simulator DISCONNECT 0x0 m BREAK gt Ox00000 GG
309. eSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 86 Flash Options Settings Flash Options Setting Dialog Box E1 JTAG V850E2M Flash Options Setting Flash option property El Option Bytes Setting OPBTO OPBT1 OPBT2 OPBT3 OPBT4 OPBTS OPBT6 FFFFFFES FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF OPBT FFFFFFFF OPBTE FFFFFFFF On chip Debug Security ID Setting security ID Hex FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Security Setting Disable read Mo Disable program No Disable chip erase Ho Disable block erase Ho Disable program boot block No Boot Block Cluster Setting Boot block last number HEX 0 Flash Shield Window Function Setting Start black number HEX O End block number HEX 2FF FEEEEEEEE Option bytes setting Chip erase when writing 5 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab configuration on the hook transaction can be done See 2 16 Use Hook Function for details on each category configuration and the function of the hook transaction R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 57 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 5 Simulator Configure the operating environment on the Property pane below when using Simulator Figure 2 87 Property Panel Simulator V850E1 V850ES Property ee V850 Simulator Property Size of internal ROM K Bytes 756 Size of internal RAM Bytes 16384 H Glock Main clock frequency MHz 400 Sub c
310. ea Specify the range of memory address to search via the start and end addresses You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes up to 1024 characters or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The results of calculating the address expressions you have entered are treated as start and end addresses respectively Note however that the largest address that can be searched is the maximum address of the program space OxOSFFFFFF the mirror area cannot be searched In addition an address value greater than the value expressed within 32 bits cannot be specified Remarks 1 Ifthe start address field is left blank it is treated as if 0x0 were specified 2 Ifthe end address field is left blank then it is treated as if the maximum value in the microcontroller s address space were specified Function buttons Search Backward Searches upward within the range specified in the Address area or the Search Range area The location found by the search is selected in the Memory panel Note that if an illegal value is specified or while the program is being executed a message will be appear and the memory search will not be performed If focus moves to this dialog box while the memory panel is hidden or another panel has focus then this button will be disabled Search Forward Searches downward within the range specified in the Address area or the Search Range area The location fou
311. ea with the background color in gray showing to the corresponding address of the line that no change is allowed iQ PFRCWD psyval Settable line qn00084c 10 af 8 ii No settable line___ FCC psval Once a Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event is set the following event mark is displayed in the event area of the line address that an event is set Start Tracing events Stop Tracing events are managed as a single event the Trace event in the Events panel details about set Start Tracing events Stop Tracing events can be checked by clicking the plus mark next to the Trace event item R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 133 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Table 2 14 Event Marks of the Start Tracing Event Stop Tracing Event Event Type Event mark Figure 2 153 Start Tracing Event Stop Tracing Event Setting Example Event area BG Yk Set PLL stop mi gt ie UOU000 842 6 cQevects Indicates that a Start tracing event has been set Indicates that a Stop Tracing pava 000000846 a Tiie event has been set ogn0n84s e ieri Remarks 1 When either of the Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event is set as Valid state the check box of the Unconditional Trace event in the Events panel is automatically cleared therefore the trace data collection does not automatically start with the start of the program execution the tracer will not move until the condition of
312. ead This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Conventions Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OXXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Integrated Development Environment R20UTO267E v850 Debug Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners MEMO MEMO MEMO TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 11 1 1 Summary 11 1 2 Features 11 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 12 2 1 Overview 12 2 2 Preparation before Debugging 15 2 2 1 Confirm the connection to a host machine 15 2 3 Configuration of Operating Environment of the Debug Tool 18 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use 18 2 3 2 IECUBE IECUBE2 19 2 3 3 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 35 2 3 4 E1 46 2 3 5 Simulator 58 2 4 C
313. earch In the case of detailed search search using a combination of data of multiple pins can be executed The search data is set in theSearch Data dialog box displayed by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Find The selected marker moves to the data position that was hit similarly to simple search results 6 Operation at reset If CPU reset or Simulator GUI reset occurs the displayed waveforms of the timing chart are all cleared R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 381 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Search Data dialog box This dialog box is used to search the signal data displayed in the Timing Chart window in detail Cautions 1 Analog I O signals cannot be searched 2 This dialog box cannot be opened during program execution Figure A 86 Search Data Dialog Box Search Data Pin Name Search Data Direction O Backward 1 1 P207 TADADSOB4 Rising REA w ising Ede Olean yt 1 ee fF a Function buttons oOo O M saa This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Timing Chart window any one of the following Click the 4 button Select Find from the Edit menu Description of each area 1 Search pin setting area When multiple search conditions have been specified the signal data that meets all these search conditions is searched Up to 48 search cond
314. ec ified cycle time R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 464 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Example include suo h SuoHandle hTim1 void funcl void SuoSetTimer hTim1l SUO USEC 20 Invoke 20us cyclic timer R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 465 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuokillTimer Stops cyclic timer Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoKillTimer SuoHandle handle Argumeni s Handle ofthe timer interface Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function stops the cyclic timer of the specified timer interface If the timer is operating the timer is stopped If the timer is stopped nothing is done in this case an error does not occur Example include suo h SuoHandle hTim1 void funcl void SuokillTimer hTim1 Stop timer R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 466 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetNotify TimerCallback Registers timer time notification callback Syntax include suo h int SuoSetNotifyTimerCallback SuoHandle handle SuoNotifyTimerCallback func
315. ecified output signal 1 data and the specified output signal 2 data are both active Sets the active level to LOW HIGH Sets the active level to HIGH default Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used Active Level The common active status of each output signal can be selected from the option buttons R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 428 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Style tab 1 Style information setting area Note as follows Specifies and changes settings related to each object filling The area to be filled differs according to the object Line Not applicable Rectangle Ellipse Rounded Rectangle Inside area enclosed by contour lines Polygon Inside area enclosed by lines linking apexes Text Inside text box Bitmap Inside figure drawing area Specifies and changes settings of color You can change the color by clicking the pull down button This area is used to perform settings and changes related to the lines of objects The definition of line for each type of object is provided below Line All areas of the object Rectangle Ellipse Rounded Rectangle Contour line of the figure Polygon Lines that link the apexes of the polygon Text Contour lines of the text box Bitmap Contour lines of figure drawing area Specifies and changes the line color You can change the co
316. ecify from the following drop down list whether to use the open break function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 26 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Yes Hi Z The open break target pin becomes the Hi Z state after the CPU is stopped No Output signal The open break target pin outputs the signal even after the CPU is stopped default e Fail safe Break IECUBE You can configure the fail safe break function in this category See 2 8 4 Stop the program when an invalid execution is detected IECUBE for details on the fail safe break function and this category configuration f Trace You can configure the trace function in this category See 2 11 Collect Execution History of Programs IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator for details on the trace function and this category configuration g Timer You can configure the timer function in this category See 2 12 Measure Execution Time of Programs for details on the timer function Caution IECUBE2 This category become invalid when the Use for trace data property in the Trace category is set to other than Timer Figure 2 23 Timer Category IECUBE El Timer Rate of frequency division of timer 9 1 1 0ns 1 4min Figure 2 24 Timer Category IECUBE2 El Timer Rate of frequency division of timer 1 1 5ne 21 42 lt 1 gt Rate of frequency division of timer Specify the frequency division ratio of the timer counter 32 bi
317. ect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab configuration with regard to the connection to the debug tool can be done a a Internal ROM RAM b DataFlash IECUBE c Clock d Connection with Target Board e Programmable I O IECUBE Internal ROM RAM You can configure internal ROM RAM in this category The size of internal ROM RAM of the selected microcontroller is specified by default when the selected microcontroller is the V850E1 core and incorporates VSB Flash ROM VSB RAM the value including its size is specified Remark There is no need to change the settings in this category if you wish to debug with the same memory mapping of the selected microcontroller Figure 2 10 Internal ROM RAM Category IECUBE O Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM K Bytes 256 Size of internal RAM Bytes 16384 Figure 2 11 Internal ROM RAM Category IECUBE2 E Internal ROM RAM lt 1 gt Size of internal ROM KBytes IECUBE Specify the internal ROM size to emulate unit Kbytes To perform debugging using IECUBE memory resources after changing the memory mapping make a selection form the drop down list Note that when the selected microcontroller is a ROMIess product the property value cannot be changed ECUBE2 The internal ROM size to emulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 2 gt Size of internal RAM Bytes IECUBE Specify the internal R
318. ected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory the contents of data flash memory includ ing ID tag can be displayed and modified by the same access method as an ordinary memory operation Real time display update function The contents of memory registers and variables are automatically updated not only when the program execution is stopped but also in execution Save restore the debugging environment The debugging environment such as breakpoints event configuration information file download information dis play condition position of the panel etc can be saved R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 11 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes a debugging process of CubeSuite and main functions for debugging 2 1 Overview The basic debugging sequence for programs using CubeSuite is as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Start CubeSuite Launch CubeSuite from the Start menu of Windows Remark For details on Start CubeSuite see CubeSuite Start Set a project Create a new project or load an existing one Remark For details on Set a project see CubeSuite Start Create a load module Create a load module by running a build after setting of the active project and the build tool to be used Remark For details on Create a load module with CA850 CX see CubeSuite Build Confirm the con
319. ected microcontroller version supports multi core select a core PEn to be debugged on the Debug Manager panel V850E2M before executing the program 11 Stop the program manually Stop the program currently being executed Note that if a breakpoint obreak event has been set in steps 10 the program execution will be stopped automatically when the condition of the breakpoint break event is met 12 Check the result of the program execution Check the following information that the debug tool acquired by the program execution Display Change the Memory Register and Variable Display Information on Function Call from Stack Collect Execution History of Programs IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Measure Execution Time of Programs Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Note These functions are implemented by setting events to the debug tool used See 2 15 6 Notes for setting events when you use events Debug the program repeating steps 9 to 12 as required Note that if the program is modified during debugging steps 3 and 8 also should be repeated Remarks 1 Other than the above you can also check the result of the program execution by using the following functions Set an Action into Programs Use Hook Function Use the Simulator GUI Simulator 2 The acquired information can be saved to a file Save the disassembled text contents Save the memory contents Save the CPU register contents Save the I
320. ects in this window is displayed Shows hides the window grid Opens the property dialog box of the selected figure part object R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 385 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Parts menu Parts toolbar This menu and toolbar are used to select connected parts part objects provided by Simulator GUI when newly creating or placing parts see 3 Creating part objects In this menus similar operations can be performed using the buttons on the Parts toolbar e g A button can be connected to any pin A digital input value can be given to the con nected pin by clicking the displayed button Analog Button E Analog input switches e g A button can be connected to any pin An analog input value can be given to the con av fav av jav jiw nected pin by clicking the displayed button Key Matrix EN A key matrix consists of multiple pins connected in a matrix array wherein each con tact represents a key and clicking a key results in a specific state A key matrix can be connected to any pin and data can be input using multiple keys Used for inputting analog data such as power supply voltage Any data within a given range can be set Any value within a specified range can be assigned to a pin connected to an A D con verter pe An LED can be connected to any pin and the output from the pin can be indicated by C J LJ switching the LED
321. ed function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void InputDigitalPinFunc SuoHandle handle int pinValue Argumeni s handle Handle of the pin interface pinValue Digital input value specify any of the following SUO_HIGH 1 HIGH value SUO_LOW 0 LOW value Return value None Description InputDigitalPinFunc describes the digital pin input processing Use the SuoSet inputDigitalPinCalloack function to register InputDigitalPinFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 516 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE InputAnalogPinFunc Performs the analog pin input processing as a callback function Caution InputAnalogPinFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo ih void InputAnalogPinFunc SuoHandle handle double pinValue Argumeni s handle Handle of the pin interface pinValue Value analog value input to the pin unit V Return value None Description InputAnalogPinFunc describes the analog pin input processing Use the SuoSetinputAnalogPinCalloack function to register InoutAnalogPinFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 517 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE InputHighImpedanceFunc Performs the proc
322. eds Downloading to the external RAM is also facilitated by using this function Figure 2 177 Hook Transaction Settings Category El Hook Transaction Settings Before download Before download 0 After download After download 0 Otter GPU reset under breaking After GFU reset under break ing 0 Before running Before running 0 After breaking After break ing 0 Table 2 27 Properties in the Hook Transaction Settings Category Before download Perform the specified process immediately before downloading the load module file After download Perform the specified process immediately after downloading the load module file After CPU reset under breaking Perform the specified process immediately after resetting the CPU Perform the specified process immediately before starting program execution After breaking Perform the specified process immediately after breaking program execution The properties in the Hook Transaction Settings category indicate the timing with which the hook process will be performed indicates the current number of specified processes no hook processes are configured by default Specify the target process in the property for which you want the hook process to be performed To specify a process select the target property then open the Text Edit dialog box by clicking the button appears on the right edge of the field Figure 2 178 Opening the Text Edit Dialog Box Before download Before downloa
323. eeded if the source is assembly language Cautions 1 To automatically display the source text right after downloading the file the startup symbol must be correctly specified 2 By default CPU reset automatically occurs after downloading the file and then the program is executed to the specified symbol position If this operation above is not needed specify No with both of the CPU Reset after download and Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property Execute download Click the button on the Debug toolbar If this operation is performed while disconnecting from the debug tool the application automatically connects to the debug tool and then performs the download Remark When a program that has been modified during debugging is re downloaded you can easily build and download it by selecting Build amp Download from the Debug menu on the Main window If the load module file is successfully downloaded the Editor panel opens automatically and the contents of the downloaded file s source text are displayed Remarks 1 IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 You can specify whether to verify memory writing when downloading the file by configuring the Verify on writing to memory property in the Memory category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel 2 You can automatically overwrite the value of I O register CPU register with the specified values before and after performing the download
324. egistered more than once 3 When a hexadecimal value is also given then values in the specified notation and hexadecimal values are read separately For this reason the values with the specified notion and the hexadecimal values may differ due to the time lag between being read This area is provided with the following functions a Real time display update function Using the real time display update function enables to display modify the value of the watch expression not only while the program is stopped but also in execution See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function b Changing values of watch expressions To edit the value of the watch expression change the value directly from the keyboard after double clicking on the value to be edited press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode After you edit the value of the watch expression it is written to the target memory of the debug tool by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region See 6 Modify the contents of watch expressions for detail on how to change values of watch expressions R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 281 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Saving the contents of watch expressions By selecting the File menu gt gt Save Watch Data As the Save As dialog box can be opened and all the contents of this
325. egisters occurs The corresponding Event mark is displayed at the top of the watch expression when an event is set Record Reading Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the values in the trace memory when the selected watch expression is accessed for read Record Writing Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the values in the trace memory when the selected watch expression is accessed for write Record R W Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the values in the trace memory when the selected watch expression is accessed for read write Trace Opens the Trace panel ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator and displays the acquired trace data R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 284 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Periodic Updating The following cascade menus are displayed to set for the real time display update function see a Real time display update function This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Periodic Updating Opens the Property panel to set for the real time display update function Options Refresh Reacquires all the values of the registered watch expression and updates the display Note that the values of read protected I O register are not re read This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Force Read Value Forcibly reads once the values of the read protected I O register This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Add New
326. egment LED 14 segment LED digits grid signal connection pins output pins and their active level The connection method changes as follows accord ing to what is specified for Grid type When Digit selected Perform digit signal setting The maximum number of digit pins that can be connected is 16 Connection to all the digit pins can be done by using the scroll bar on the right side of the area When Customize selected Cannot be selected Pin Name The connection pins can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list As the setting signal specify the connec tion pins in a series from the lowermost digit Active Level The active status can be selected with a option button as follows Sets the active level to LOW HIGH Sets the active level to HIGH default Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used Style tab 1 Style information setting area Full up LED This area is used to set and change related to the filling of each cell of the object are per formed You can change the color by clicking the pull down button Active Color Specifies the fill color during active display Inactive Color Specifies the fill color during inactive display Frame Line of LED This area is used to set and change related to the frame of each cell of the object are per formed Color of Line Specifies and changes the line color
327. egory MINICUBE V850E2M E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes The internal ROM size to emulate is displayed unit Kbytes If the selected microcontroller is the V850E1 core and incorporates VSB Flash ROM it displays the value including the size of VSB Flash ROM You cannot change the value of this property Size of internal RAM Bytes The internal RAM size to emulate is displayed unit bytes If the selected microcontroller is the V850E1 core and incorporates VSB RAM it displays the value including the size of VSB RAM If the selected microcontroller version supports multi core it displays the total size of the internal RAMs of all PE You cannot change the value of this property Size of DataFlash memory KBytes MINICUBE V850E2M The data flash memory size is displayed unit Kbytes If the currently selected microcontroller does not incorporate the data flash 0 is displayed You cannot change the value of this property b DataFlash V850E1 V850ES You can configure the data flash function in this category Note that this category appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Figure 2 41 DataFlash Category E DataF lash Use DataF lash memory area Tes Chip select Cal Use DataFlash memory area Specify whether to use the data flash memory from the drop down list Select Yes to use the data flash memory No is
328. egory appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory Use DataFlash Specify whether to use the data flash memory memory area Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Yes Uses the data flash memory values No Does not use the data flash memory Size of DataFlash Display the size of the data flash memory area of the selected microcontroller memory KBytes This property appears only when the Use DataFlash memory area property is set to Yes Default Data flash memory size of the selected microcontroller Modifying Changes not allowed Chip select Select the chip select used for mapping of the data flash memory This property appears only when the Use DataFlash memory area property is set to Yes Default Chip select of the selected microcontroller Modifying IECUBE V850ES Select from the drop down list V850E1 Changes not allowed MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Changes not allowed Available Chip select values that can be used by the selected microcontroller values Note The selectable chip select values differ depending on the selected microcontroller R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 193 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Clock The detailed information on clocks is displayed and its configuration can be changed Main clock Specify the main clock frequency before multiplication in MHz unit frequency MHz
329. el display area This area displays the various panels For details on the display content see the sections describing the individual panels 4 Statusbar Statusbar displays the following items of information Figure A 2 Statusbar oo ama S5 V850 IEGCUBE e m BREAK Pow Off C 0x000009ae Menu about debug 5750 HE i a b c d e f g h i a Status message This area displays the following messages and other information A brief explanation of the selected menu item A message reporting that an invalid value has been input in the panel dialog A message reporting that the specified character string has not been found as a result of a search using the Search and Replace dialog box A statement of the cause of the break when a break has occurred see 2 8 Stop Programs Break R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 176 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Focus panel status information This area displays status information on the panel currently having the focus Note that nothing is displayed here for a panel that has no status information c Selection of debug target core V850E2M This area is used to select a core PEn to be debugged Note that nothing is displayed here when the selected microcontroller version does not support multi core or while disconnecting from the debug tool Remark You can also select a cor
330. el is automatically set to Yes Stop Tracing Sets a Stop Tracing event to stop collecting the trace data when the line at the caret is executed Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set See 2 Event area see 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section Nole Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Record R W Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register is read write accessed see 1 When an access to variables l O registers occurs Show Trace Result Opens the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator and displays the acquired trace data Trace Settings Opens the Property panel to set the trace function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 237 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the timer related event see 2 12 2 IECUBE IECUBE2 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Simulator Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 2 Event area Start timer Sets a Start Timer event to
331. elected via the Setting place area to the defaults Figure A 71 Edit Colors Dialog Box Edit Colors Basic colors E m isin S ee US E se gE ee gee FG EERE eee m 8 e Ue Custom colors it i i i op go BEE EEE ee Define Custom Colors gt gt 2 Display example area Display sample text using the color and font settings from the Color options area and the Font settings for text edi tor area By default the string AaBbCc is shown but you can type an arbitrary string directly into the text box 3 Font settings for text editor area Click the Font button to open the Font Dialog Box and configure the fonts for your text editor R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 349 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 72 Font Dialog Box Font style Microgott Sans Serif Regular Microsott Sans Serf Italic F Miriam Fired Bold Miriam Transparent Bold Italic O MY Boli T O Myriad Web Pro O Myriad Web Pro Conch Effects Sample Strikeout Underline AaB yz Script Western w 4 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restore all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Apply all setting and closes this dialog bo
332. elete I O registers The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the notation Hexadecimal number Displays the value of the selected item in hexadecimal number default Signed Decimal Displays the value of the selected item in signed decimal number Unsigned decimal Displays the value of the selected item in unsigned decimal number number Octal Displays the value of the selected item in octal number Displays the value of the selected item in binary number ASCII Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code Include Hexadecimal Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value of the selected item Value Reset Color Resets highlighting of the selected I O register whose value has been changed by executing a program R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 269 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Local Variables panel This panel is used to display the contents of the local variable and change the local variable values see 2 9 5 Display change local variables This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Cautions 1 Nothing is displayed on this panel during execution of a program When the execution of a program is stopped items in each area are displayed 2 Due to compiler optimization the data for the target variable may not be on the stack or ina register in blocks where that variable is
333. emble display mode is selected 1 The mnemonics are shown highlighted Source text The corresponding source text is displayed when the Mixed display mode or Source display mode is selected In addition when the value of a variableN 2 or an I O register that is accessed during execution of a source line can be analyzed that value is displayed in the following format at the end of the source line lt lt lt Variable name Variable value gt gt gt lt lt lt O register name I O register value gt gt gt Example a b lt lt lt a 5 gt gt gt The results of the Point Trace are displayed as same as format above However when a place where no debugging information is present is executed lt No Debug Information gt is displayed Break cause The reason why the program has broken down is displayed Simulator Notes 1 Ata frame for which not all the trace data was fetched LOST is displayed In this case the corresponding line is shown in error color the error color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box 2 When there is a memory access a symbol will be interpreted as a variable and displayed only if a symbol is assigned to the accessed address Note however that only variables of up to 4 bytes are supported If multiplication or other code is processed by the standard libraries the label of the SADDR area used by the standard library may be s
334. emulation while stopping the program execution Select Yes to terminate No is selected by default lt 3 gt Use open break function E1 JTAG Specify from the following drop down list whether to use the open break function Yes Hi Z The open break target pin becomes the Hi Z state after the CPU is stopped No Output signal The open break target pin outputs the signal even after the CPU is stopped e Mask for Input Signal You can configure the input signal masking in this category Figure 2 82 Mask for Input Signal Category E1 Serial El Mask for Input Sienal Mask RESET signal Mo Figure 2 83 Mask for Input Signal Category E1 JTAG V850E1 V850ES O Mask for Input Sienal Mask HMO signal Ho Mask NMO signal No Mask NME signal No Mask HLORG signal No Mask RESET signal No Mask STOP signal No Mask WAIT sienal No Mask DBINT signal No Figure 2 84 Mask for Input Signal Category E1 JTAG V850E2M O Mask for input Sienal Mask HLDRG signal Ho Mask RESET signal Ho Mask STOP signal Ho Mask WAIT signal Ho With the properties shown below select Yes to mask the signal from the drop down list all properties below are set to No by default Mask NMIn signal E1 JTAG V850E1 V850ES R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 55 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 4 Mask HLDRQ signal E1 JTAG Mask RESET signal Mask STOP sign
335. en a write request is issued to the specified external bus in the registered address range If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 482 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Example include suo h void WriteExtbusFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr int accessSize const unsigned char data SuoHandle hExtbus1 void Luncl void SuoSetWriteExtbusCallback hExtbusl1 WriteExtbusFunc Set write external bus function Write external bus function void WriteExtbusFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr int accessSize const unsigned char data R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 483 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 4 6 Serial interface functions The serial interface functions that are supplied by Simulator GUI are as follows SuoSetReceiveSerialCallback Registers serial reception callback R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 484 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoCreateSerialUART Generates serial interface UART type Caution This function can only be called in the MakeUserModel function An error occurs if it is called at any other timing Syntax include suo h int SuoCreateSerialUART const char serialName const char pinNameTXD const char pinNameRXD SuoHandle handle
336. ent scope select a watch expression with a specified scope Figure 2 128 Example of Setting a Break Event on a Watch Expression al g P dai Seo Notation Value TypelByte Size Mddress Memo Periodic Updating Set RAW Break wt From the context menu above the watch Refresh Force Read Value expression global_a enter a value in Access Break gt gt Set Writ Break to then press the Add New Watch Enter key vreate Category Here the program will break when the value Oxb Delete Del is written to the watch expression global_a Cut tr Copy Ctr l 0 D y K KX ee 2 Bl 2 Delete a break event To delete break events select the event name to delete in the Events panel opened when selecting the View menu gt gt Event then press the button in the toolbar in the same panel see 2 15 Manage Events 2 8 4 Stop the program when an invalid execution is detected IECUBE The system forcibly breaks the program execution when unexpected program behavior such as invalid access to internal ROM internal RAM I O register external memory is detected fail safe break function This function has various break conditions Enable disable each break condition in the Fail safe Break category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 100 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 129 Fail s
337. eplace operation can be done with selecting either Whole Search Quick Replace Whole Replace tab Move to the specified line You can move to the specified line in the source text in the Go to the Location dialog box opens when selecting Move to from the context menu In this dialog box follow the steps below Figure 2 113 Move to the Specified Line in Source Text Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location a Specify Line number Specify the number of the line you want to move the caret to You can either type a location directly into the text box only in decimal number or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items b Click the OK button Caret is moved to the specified line Jump to functions You can jump to the function variable CX determined from the selected characters or the word at the caret position jumps to the first executable line in the target function Select Jump to Function from the context menu after moving the caret to the function on the source text Figure 2 114 Jump to Functions Register to Watch Register Gction Event I Start user code for void funclt3 Go ta Here met PC to Here UINT i wy Move To Gtr To Ctrl fi rtis Oe Sr wn to Function Fl 12 gt uncia gt Bice o e a e to Last Cursor Position eg R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 81 of 538 Oct 01 2
338. er program register system register can be shown and the value can be changed in the CPU Register panel below Select the View menu gt gt CPU Register For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the CPU Register panel Figure 2 138 Display the Contents of the CPU Register CPU Register Panel CPU Register Register Name Value Eifel System Registers A Pc OxO0000 Fc EIPC Ox0 0000000 ELIPSY 0x0 0000000 E FEPC Ox0 0000000 FERS 000000000 ECR 0x00 000000 Register Name area Value area This section describes the following 1 Change display format of values 2 Modify the CPU register contents 3 Display modify the CPU register contents during program execution 4 Save the CPU register contents R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 113 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Change display format of values The display format of the value area can be changed using buttons below on the toolbar Notation The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in the default notation default ff Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in hexadecimal number Bo Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in signed decimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in unsigned decimal n
339. ereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Rene
340. ered as a watch expression then the value will be displayed as a question mark Remarks 1 Each watch expression registered in each watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 is managed in each panel and saved as the user information of the project 2 More than one watch expression with the same name can be registered a Register from other panels Watch expressions can be registered from other panel in CubeSuite In other panel drag and drop the watch expression to register in any watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 For the relationship between panels that can use this operation and targets that can be registered as watch expressions see Table A 7 Relationship between Panels and Targets That Can be Registered as Watch Expressions Figure 2 145 Registering the Watch Expression from Other Panels B main c 153 result subl3tlocal_a local Here the variable global_b in the Editor panel will 154 155 z ah be registered as a watch expression drag and drop on the Watch panel after selecting the 158 variable global_b in the Editor panel 159 160 161 ini Value TypelByte Sizes BEZ6i4 OxO00alcd2 inti4 Remark You can also add a watch expression by doing the following First select the target for which you wish to register a watch expression or move the caret to one of the target strings the target is determined automatically Next from the context menu select Register Watch1 but this is limited to the Wat
341. erface Number of data to be transmitted 1 to 32767 dataList Transmit data Specify an array consisting of the number of data to be transmitted Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to start transmitting two or more serial data It takes time to complete transmission of the serial data If you want to know the timing of transmission completion set the transmission end notification function by using the SuoSeiNotifySentSerialCalloack function If this function is called for a serial interface that is currently transmitting data an error occurs Example include suo h SuoHandle hSeriall void funcl void unsigned long dataList 6 0x73 0x65 0x72 0x69 0x61 0x6c SuoSendSerialDataList hSeriall 6 dataList Send dataList R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 498 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSendSerialFile Performs serial transmission serial transmission data file Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoSendSerialFile SuoHandle handle const char serialFile Argumeni s Handle of the serial interface serialFile Name of the serial transmission data file that has been saved after being edited
342. ernal ROM Single core only simulator Both area below 1 MByte space of addresses 0x000000 to OxOFFFFF fixed measurement areas Any 1 MByte space other than the internal ROM area see 2 13 1 Configure the coverage measurement Cautions 1 IECUBE The coverage function can be used only when the coverage board is mounted on IECUBE Some of the trace function the real time display update function RRM function and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis 2 IECUBE2 Some of the trace function the timer function except for the Run Break timer and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis 3 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 The coverage function is not supported Remark CO coverage Instruction coverage statement coverage For example when all statements in a code have been executed at least once the CO coverage is 100 2 13 1 Configure the coverage measurement You need to configure the code coverage measurement before using the coverage function The setting method differs depending on the debug tool used 1 IECUBE 2 IECUBE2 3 Simulator 1 IECUBE Caution The coverage function can be used only when the coverage board is mounted on IECUBE Therefore when no coverage boards are mounted on IECUBE used the following configurations become invalid after connecting to the debug tool Some of the trace function the real time display update function RRM function
343. es folders and displayed in tree view there is no category as default Cautions 1 Categories cannot be created within categories 2 Up to 64 categories can be created in one watch panel if this restriction is violated a message appears a Create new category Move the caret to the position to create a new category then click the button in the toolbar and directly enter the new category name b Edit category name Click the category name to edit and click it again then directly modify the category name from the keyboard c Delete categories Select categories to delete then click the button in the toolbar d Change the display order Registered watch expressions are categorized when they are dragged and dropped in the category R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 121 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 4 5 Also the display order of the categories and the watch expressions upper or lower position can be changed easily by drag and drop operation Remark Drag and drop the watch expressions categories in other watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 to copy them Edit the registered watch expressions Registered watch expressions can be edited Double click the watch expression to edit to switch the watch expression to edit mode press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode Directly edit from the keyboard and then press the Enter key Delete a watch expression To delete watch express
344. essing when all the pins connected to digital analog pins enter the high impedance state as a call back function Caution InputHighlmpedanceFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void InputHighImpedanceFunc SuoHandle handle Argument s handle Handle of the pin interface Return value None Description InoutHighImpedanceFunc is used to describe the processing when all the pins connected to digital analog pins enter the high impedance state Use the SuoSet nputHighImpedanceCallback function to register InoutHighImpedanceFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 518 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE ReadExtbusFunc Performs the read access processing of an external bus as a callback function Caution ReadExtbusFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void ReadExtbusFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr int accessSize unsigned char data Argumeni s data Data storage area As many data as the access size must be stored Return value None Description ReadExtbusFunc describes the read access processing of an external bus Data must be stored in data Use the SuoSetReadExtbusCallback function to register ReadExtbus
345. ession s category s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Select All If texts are in editing selects all the character strings If texts are not in editing selects all the watch expressions categories Renames the selected watch expression category Find Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Search tab Replace Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Replace tab Context menu Access Break This item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression is the global variable the static variable inside functions the file internal static variable or I O register The following cascade menus are displayed to set the access break event see 1 Seta break event to a variable I O register Set Read Break to Sets a break event with read access condition to the selected watch expression Set Write Break to Sets a break event with write access condition to the selected watch expression Set R W Break to Sets a break event with read write access condition to the selected watch expression Trace Output This item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression is the global variable the static IECUBE IECUBE2 variable inside functions the file internal static variable or I O register Simulator The following cascade menus are displayed to set the trace related event see 1 When an access to variables I O r
346. ext strings displayed on the keys of the key matrix are specified Text strings of any length can be specified The default description string N number is not displayed on the keys Hold Time Specify the time hold time for which the input value is to be held default 0 5msec The settable range is from 0 001 to 999 msec Moreover when multiple keys for input to the same input pin are pressed during the hold time only the key that was clicked last is valid default Specify the key matrix operation after CPU reset Not change at reset The key matrix status does not change after CPU reset No key matrix buttons are depressed after CPU reset default Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used Style tab 1 Style information setting area Figure Select this option button to display the key matrix with the following specified figure Select the figure shape Two shapes can be selected rectangle and ellipse shadow Cannot be selected Line Specify and change the figure line as follows You can change the color of figure line by clicking the pull down button Thickness Specifies the line thickness Specification is made either using a spin button or through direct input A value from 1 to 100 can be specified Specifies the color of the line during active display Specifies the color of the line during inactive display Fill up Specify and change the figure
347. f a resumption the trace data is collected after clearing the trace memory Stop trace When the trace memory is full the trace data stops writing the program does not stop execution When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to No the trace data is not collected even if the program is executed again When the trace memory is full the trace data stops writing and the program stops execution When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to No the program cannot be executed again even if it is executed h Trace memory size frames Specify from the drop down list the trace memory size trace frame number in this property The trace frame is a unit of the trace data One trace frame is used for each operation in fetch write read The drop down list displays the following trace frame numbers 8K default 32K 64K 128K 256K i Enable trace data complement Specify whether to perform complementary display when displaying the collected trace data in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Complement display of instructions between branch instructions that cannot be traced by hardware can be performed Select Yes to perform complementary display default Note that the trace memory is cleared automatically if you change the setting of this property 3 Simulator This trace operation can be configured in the Trace category in the Debug Tool Settings tab in the Property panel
348. f each area 1 Information bar It can be specified whether this area is displayed or not by selecting the View menu gt gt Information Bar D MainGk Select the unit of the wait time from the drop down list The wait time unit can be changed by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Time unit If this button is clicked while the program is running signal input starts If this button is clicked while the program is stopped signal input starts automatically the next time the program execution is started If this button is clicked while the program is running signal input is stopped If this button is clicked while the program is stopped signal input does not start auto matically even if the program execution is started The current signal input line line highlighted with yellow is returned to the beginning 2 Client area Pin area Api ffon Poi RxDO ANIO Data area D oe YS SS B m B m Wait area Mark area Line number area Pin area Displays the input pin names The input pin to be used is selected via the Select Pin dialog box opened by clicking the fid button on the toolbar or selecting the Edit menu gt gt Select Pin Data input to pins can be enabled disabled by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Pin Status R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 368 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Line number a
349. formation of variables This item applies to cases where a variable is optimized and deleted or a value is temporarily assigned to a register Floating point rounding accuracy differs between the compiler and debugger Only a current function is displayed in the Call Stack panel because the call stack information cannot be acquired Step execution in include statement and setjmp longjmp function is not possible Areturn out execution from a variable length argument function may fail IECUBE When the flash library is ROMized the flash self programing emulation function cannot be used You can change the download files or the download condition in the following Download Files dialog box The Download Files dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting the Download files property in the Download category in the Download File Settings tab of the Property panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 70 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 106 Opening the Download Files Dialog Box oona l CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM betore download No Gutomatic change method of event setting position Suspend event Figure 2 107 Advanced Downloading Download Files Dialog Box Download Files Download file list Download file property vones Out El Download file information Download object Yes Download symbol information Wes Fi
350. formatting c Specify Save Range Address Symbol Specify the range of addresses to save via start address and end addresses Directly enter hexadecimal number address expression in each text box or select from the input history displayed in the drop down list up to 10 items If a range is selected in the panel that range is specified as the default If there is no selection then the range currently visible in the panel is specified R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 112 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d Click the Save button Saves the memory data to a file with the specified filename in the specified format Figure 2 137 Output Example of the Memory Data Text files txt Hexadecimal notation 8 bit width ASCII code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f 00000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000010 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 CSV files csv Hexadecimal notation 8 bit width ASCII code 00000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000010 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 Remark When the contents of the panel are overwritten with selecting the File menu gt gt Save Memory Data each Memory panel Memory1 4 is treated as a different panel In addition saving range is same as the previously specified address range 2 9 2 Display change the CPU register The contents of the CPU regist
351. formed in a memory bank function the program may be executed in free run mode R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 94 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Stop Programs Break This section describes how to stop the program in execution Remark When the program in execution is stopped a statement of the cause of the break appears on the Statusbar in the Main window 2 8 1 Stop the program manually The program in execution is forcibly stopped by clicking the button on the debug toolbar 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint The program in execution can be stopped at the arbitrary position by setting a breakpoint A breakpoint can be set by one clicking with the mouse You need to configure the type of breakpoints to use before setting a breakpoint This section describes the following 1 Configure types movements of breakpoints to use 2 Seta breakpoint 3 Delete a breakpoint 1 Configure types movements of breakpoints to use Breakpoints to use are set in the Break category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of theProperty panel The setting method differs depending on the debug tool used a IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 b Simulator a IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Figure 2 123 Break Category IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG El Break First using type of breakpoint software break stop emulation of peripherals
352. ft_JIS code EUC JP Displays character strings in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays character strings in UTF 8 code Highlight Accessed Highlights memory values that have changed by execution of a program if this item is checked default This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Periodic Updating The following cascade menus are displayed to set for the real time display update function see b Real time display update function This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Periodic Updating Opens the Property panel to set for the real time display update function Options R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 246 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Disassemble panel This panel is used to display the results of disassembling the contents of the memory disassembled text and execute line assembly see 2 6 4 Perform line assembly Furthermore the instruction level debugging see 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps and the code coverage measurement result display IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator see 2 13 Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator can be performed in this panel Up to a maximum of four of these panels can be opened Each panel is identified by the names Disassemble1 Disassemble2 Disassemble3 and Disassemble4 on the title bar The source text in the source file corresponding to the code data can also be displayed by setting to the mixed di
353. fy on writing to memory Specify whether to perform a verify check when data has been written to memory from the drop down list Select Yes to perform verification default Remark The verification is performed at when the download is performed or when the values that have been modified on the Watch panel Memory panel are written to the memory b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function Figure 2 77 Access Memory While Running Category E1 Serial E Access Memory hile Runnine Access by stopping execution No Update display during the execution Yes Display update intervallme FOO Figure 2 78 Access Memory While Running Category E1 JTAG El Access Memory While Runnne Geocess by stopping execution Yes Update display during the execution Yes Display update intervallme B00 Geocess by release HOLT mode Yes lt 1 gt Access by stopping execution Specify whether to allow access to the memory area while executing a program Select Yes to allow access No is selected by default Caution V850E2M This property is not displayed when the selected microcontroller version supports multi core Also note that the target range for the real
354. fy the name of the file to save You can either type a filename directly into the text box up to 259 characters or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items You can also specify the file by clicking the button and selecting a file via the Select Data Save File dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 143 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Specify File Type Select the format in which to save the file from the following drop down list The following file formats can be selected Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formatote Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes formatting in order to avoid illegal 3 Specify Save Range Number Specify the range of the number to save via start number and end number Directly enter decimal number in each text box or select from the input history displayed in the drop down list up to 10 items When saving all the trace data select the All Trace Data item in the drop down list at the left the right text box becomes invalid If a range is selected in the panel that range is specified as the default If there is no selection then the range currently visible in the panel is specified 4 Click the Save button Trace data is saved in the specified file with the
355. fySentSerialFunc describes the processing when transmission by a serial interface has been completed Use the SuoSetNotifySentSerialCalloack function to register NotifySentSerialFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 521 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE ReceiveSerialFunc Performs the processing during reception by a serial interface as a callback function Caution ReceiveSerialFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void ReceiveSerialFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long data int status Argumeni s handle Handle of the serial interface data Received serial data status Receive status specify any of the following a0 Normal reception SUO_PARITYERR Parity error if parity bit does not match SUO_FRAMINGERR Framing error if stop bit is not detected Return value None Description ReceiveSerialFunc describes the processing during reception by a serial interface Use the SuoSetReceiveSerialCalloack function to register ReceiveSerialFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 522 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE NotifySentWaveFunc Performs the processing to be performed when transmission by a signal output unit has been completed as a callback funct
356. g functions a Registering watch expression Variable names of C language can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions See 1 Register a watch expression for details on how to operate it Remark A scope specification is automatically added to a registered watch expression b Jump to memory By selecting Jump to Memory from the context menu the Memory pane Memory1 opens with moving the caret to the source line corresponding to the address where the selected local variable is disposed if the Memory panel Memory1 is already opened jump to the panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 271 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Value area The value of the local variable is displayed and changed The notation of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item In addition a display format adding the value in hexadecimal number constantly can also be selected as well The meanings of the marks and colors displayed as the values of the local variables are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Character color The value of the local variable that the user is changing Press the Enter key to write to the target memory Background color Standard color Character color The value of the local variable that have been changed because of
357. g to the debug tool all the properties in this category will become invalid when a microcontroller whose Simulator does not support peripheral function simulations instruction simulation version is selected Display Simulator GUI Specify whether to display the Simulator GU window in the forefront when program execution on top of other starts windows This property appears only when the Display Simulator GUI property is set to Yes R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 216 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Flash Self Emulation Settings tab IECUBE This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 2 3 4 i N Flash Self Emulation Macro Service Error Security Flag Emulation Reset Vector Boot Swap Figure A 26 Property Panel Flash Self Emulation Settings Tab Property ee WASO JECUBE Property Flash self program ming Flash Macro service specification Macro Service Error Generate FlashBlock Erase error Generate FlashBlock Verity error Generate FlashwWord rite error Generate FlashBlock BlankGheck error Generate Flashsethito error Generate FlashFLMOGheck error Security Flag Emulation Disable chip erase Disable block erase Disable read Disable program Disable boot block cluster reprogram Reset Vector Boot Swap Reset vector address Boot swap cluster Flash
358. ged vertically default Maintains the analog button operation after CPU reset Not change at reset Maintains the analog button status immediately before CPU reset after CPU reset inactive All of the analog buttons are non depressed after CPU reset default Active is xxx yyy mV The analog button specified with xxx yyymV is depressed after CPU reset Specify the input level when no analog buttons are depressed Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 398 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Style tab 1 Style information setting area Figure 2 Preview area Select this option button to display the analog button with the following specified figure Shape Select the figure shape Two shapes can be selected rectangle and ellipse shadow Cannot be selected Line Specify and change the figure line as follows You can change the color of figure line by clicking the pull down button Thickness Specifies the line thickness Specification is made either using a spin button or through direct input A value from 1 to 100 can be specified Specifies the color of the line during active display Specifies the color of the line during inactive display Specify and change the figure filling as follows You can change the color of figure filling by clicking the pul
359. get memory if the Esc key is pressed before the Enter key is pressed the editing is cancelled However the character string that can be inputted during the editing is limited to that character string that can be handled by the display notation that has been currently specified In the characters string area modification can only be made with ASCII character code Remark This operation can be taken place while the program is in execution See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on how to operate it When you modify the values be aware of the following examples Examples 1 The value exceeds the upper limit of the display bit wide If you edit the display value 105 as 1 to 3 in the decimal 8 bit display the value will be changed to the upper limit of 127 2 The symbol is entered between numbers If you edit the display value 32768 as 32 68 with signed decimal 16 bit display 3 and 2 are changed to the blank and the value is changed to 68 3 The blank symbol space is entered between numbers If you edit the display value 32767 as 32 67 3 and 2 are changed to the blank and the value is changed to 67 4 The same value is entered Even if the same value as the current memory value is specified the specified value is written to the memory R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 105 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 D
360. gister can be used By performing the following operation it is interpreted as if a Hardware Break event access has been set at the target watch expression and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 15 Manage Events for details Read Select Access Break gt gt Set Read Break to and then press the Enter key Break occurs when the watch expression is read with the specified value while a value is specified in the text box in the menu If values are not specified break occurs when the selected watch expression is read regardless of its value Select Access Break gt gt Set Writ Break to and then press the Enter key Break occurs when the watch expression is written with the specified value while a value is specified in the text box in the menu If values are not specified break occurs when the selected watch expression is written regardless of its value R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 99 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Read Write Select Access Break gt gt Set R W Break to and then press the Enter key Break occurs when the watch expression is read written with the specified value while a value is specified in the text box in the menu If values are not specified break occurs when the selected watch expression is read written regardless of its value Remark A watch expression within the current scope can be specified To target a watch expression outside the curr
361. h int SuoSetInputAnalogPinCallback SuoHandle handle SuoInputAnalogPinCallback func Argumeni s Handle of the pin interface Pointer to a user defined function that performs analog pin input processing see InoutAnalogPin Func Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to register a user defined function that performs analog pin input processing The registered function is called when a signal is input to the specified pin If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include suo h void InputAnalogPinFunc SuoHandle handle double pinValue SuoHandle hPinP00 void funcl void SuoSetInputAnalogPinCallback hPinP00O InputAnalogPinFunc Set input analog pin function Input analog pin function void InputAnalogPinFunc SuoHandle handle double pinValue R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 475 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetinputHighImpedanceCallback Registers pin high impedance state report callback Syntax include suo h int SuoSetInputHighImpedanceCallback SuoHandle handle SuoInputHighImpedanceCallback func Argumeni s Handle of the pin interface func Pointer to a user defined function that performs processing when all the connected pins enter the high impedance state see
362. h object from the following option buttons The execution part is retrieved specifying Finds the execution location in the specified source line default the source line Only Source and Line will be enabled as a search parameter The execution part is retrieved specifying Finds the execution location in the specified function the function Only Function Name will be enabled as a search parameter The execution part is retrieved specifying Finds the location at which the specified global variable was accessed the global variable Only Variable Name Kind and Value will be enabled as a search parameters 2 Search condition area a b Source and Line This item is only enabled if The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line is selected The specified character strings in this area are searched within the Line Address area of the Trace pane IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator You can either type the character strings of the source line to be find directly into the text box or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Searches are case insensitive and only complete matches are retrieved Examples 1 main c 40 2 main c 3 main Function Name This item is only enabled if The execution part is retrieved specifying the function is selected You can either type the function name to be find directly into the text box or select it from the input history via the drop d
363. h panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms 500 is selected by default Break You can configure the break function in this category Figure 2 97 Break Category Simulator E Break Execute instruction at breakpoint when break Mo lt 1 gt Execute instruction at breakpoint when break Specify the timing to stop the program execution by breakpoints either after or before the execution of the instruction at the breakpoint Select Yes to stop after the execution of the instruction No is selected by default See 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on breakpoints Trace You can configure the trace function in this category See 2 11 Collect Execution History of Programs IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator for details on the trace function and this category configuration Timer You can configure the timer function in this category See 2 12 Measure Execution Time of Programs for details on the timer function Figure 2 98 Timer Category Simulator El Timer Use timer function Mo R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 63 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 4 lt 1 gt Use timer function Specify whether to use the timer function from the drop down list Select Yes to use the timer function No is selected by default
364. hat changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool Available Supplies power to the target system values Does not supply power to the target system R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 196 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Supply voltage Specify the power voltage supplied to the target system E1 This property appears only when the Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA property is set to Yes Modifying Select from the drop down list Note that changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool Available 3 3V 5 0V values Note The type of the port in the drop down list differs depending on the selected microcontroller 5 Flash MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 The detailed information on the flash memory writing is displayed and its configuration can be changed Security ID Specify a security ID for reading codes in the internal ROM or internal flash memory This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports the ROM security function on chip debug security ID for flash memory Default V850E1 V850ES FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF V850E2M FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Note that changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool Available V850E1 V850ES values 20 digits hexadecimal number 10 bytes V850E2M 24 digits hexadecimal number 12
365. he Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the large address number to small and the search results are displayed selected in the Memory panel When the Search Forward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the small address number to small and the search results are displayed selected in the Memory panel 6 Modify the memory contents in batch initialize Contents of the memory can be modified in batch initialize When Fill from the context menu is selected the Memory Initialize dialog box opens to modify the memory value of the specified address range in batch In this dialog box follow the steps below R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7 tENESAS Page 110 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 135 Modify the Memory Contents in Batch Memory Initialize Dialog Box Memory Initialize Start address symbol po Caution This operation cannot be performed for values of the ID tag for the data flash memory a Specify Start address symbol and End address symbol Specify the range of memory address to initialize via the Start address symbol and End address symbol You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes up to 1024 characters or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The results of calculating the address expressions you have entered are treated as start and end
366. he Property panel 3 Line Address area The address of the assemble code or the line number of a source file is displayed The notation of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item The display formats are as follows Type of Display Line Display Format ja Break cause IECUBE2 Simulator Remark Since the following execution histories are not displayed the line numbers displayed are not consecutive numbers CPU register access Operand access Invalid fetch 4 Source Disassemble area The collected trace data is displayed as follows The items displayed in this area differ depending on the selection of the display mode see a Display mode R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 292 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 48 Display Contents of the Source Disassemble Area Default Source Disassemble Source text add Ox1 r29 cmp Us1 r29 547 Instruction disassemble results elobal_ att Variable value including point trace results stopped by user operation Break cause Label The label is displayed when a label is defined for the address Offset value The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address Instruction disassemble results The corresponding instructions are displayed as the result of disassembling when the Mixed display mode or Disass
367. he condition In this case see 2 5 2 Advanced downloading Note To download a load module file created by an external build tool i e a compiler or assembler other than the build tool provided by CubeSuite you must create a debug dedicated project In the case of debugging for a debug dedicated project you must add a file to be downloaded to Download files node in the project tree in order to be reflected to this property See CubeSuite Start for details on the using an external build tool and a debug dedicated project R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 67 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b c d e CPU Reset after download Specify whether to reset the CPU after downloading Select Yes to reset the CPU default Erase flash ROM before download Specify whether to erase the flash ROM before downloading Select Yes to erase the flash ROM No is selected by default Automatic change method of event setting position If the file is downloaded again during debugging then the location address set for the currently configured event may change to midway in the instruction Specify with this property how to handle the target event in this circumstance Select one of the options from the following drop down list Move to the head of Sets the event to the top address of the instruction instruction Suspend event Disables the event Suspended state default
368. he file to download is in binary format Specify the address at which to start the file s download Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF in hexadecimal number Download object This item appears only when the file to download is in load module format Specify whether to download the object information from the specified file Modifying Select from the drop down list Available values Downloads object information Does not download object information Download symbol This item appears only when the file to download is in load module format information Specify whether to download the symbol information from the specified filete 2 Notes 1 When a file specified as build target in the project is selected in the Download file list area or when the program is executing the button does not appear 2 Ifthe symbol information have not been downloaded the source level debugging cannot be performed Function buttons Finishes the download file setup and closes this dialog box Cancels any changes to the download files and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 318 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M This dialog box is used to configure options for the flash memory incorporated in the V850E2M microcontroller This dialog box appears
369. he pin name to be connected output pin The connection pins can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 422 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Style tab 1 Style information setting area Figure 2 Preview area Select this option button to display the buzzer with the following specified figure Shape Select the figure shape Two shapes can be selected rectangle and ellipse shadow Cannot be selected Line Specify and change the figure line as follows You can change the color of figure line by clicking the pull down button Thickness Specifies the line thickness Specification is made either using a spin button or through direct input A value from 1 to 100 can be specified Specifies the color of the line during active display Specifies the color of the line during inactive display Specify and change the figure filling as follows You can change the color of figure filling by clicking the pull down button Specifies the fill color during active display Specifies the fill color during inactive display Select this option button to display the buzzer with the following specified bitmap default Selection list Select a bitmap to be used from the selection list The selectable
370. he serial interface param Location where the parameters of the serial interface CSI type are to be stored Note Specify a pointer to SuoSerialParameterCSI structure Note The configuration of SuoSerialParameterCSI structure is as follows typedef struct int mode Operation mode unsigned long frequency Frequency of transfer clock int phase Phase int direction Transfer direction int datalength Data bit length SuoSerialParameterCSI Frequency of transfer clock Frequency Unit Hz Note that 0 cannot be specified if master operation o imapas See Table B3 SUO_PRECEDEDATA Data output first SUO_REVERSECLOCK Clock reversal SUO_PRECEDEDATA Specifies both data output first and SUO_REVERSECLOCK clock reversal Transfer direction SUO_MSBFIRS MSB first SUO_LSBFIRST LSB first R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 492 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Table B 3 CSI Phase Types SuoSetSerialParameterCSI Function Value of Phase SI input timing LILI UL LI LE LI Ld n 07 X De XC DEX D4 XK DB X DZ X D1 X DO SI input timing SUO_PRECEDEDATA SUO_REVERSECLOCK JSOU L C07 XK D6 XK D5 XC D4 X DB X D2 X DIX DO SI input timing SUO_PRECEDEDATA SUO_REVERSECLOCK 07 XC D8 X25 XK D4 XK DB X D2 X DIX DO SI input timing Return v
371. he setting of breakpoints cannot be done Note that the setting of events can be done only for those lines where the background color is shown in white See 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on how to set the breakpoint Changes event status Event status can be changed from the following menu displayed by right clicking the event mark Enable Event Changes the selected event state to a Valid state Event occurs when the specified condition is met When the event mark FS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are enabled Disable Event Changes the selected event state to an Invalid state Event does not occur when the specified condition is met When the event mark FS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are disabled Delete Event Deletes the selected event When the event mark FS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are deleted View Event Detailed Setup Opens the Events panel to display the detailed information of the selected event Pop up display By superimposing the mouse cursor on the Event mark the name of the event the detailed information for the event and the comments added to the event are pop up displayed When multiple events have been set in the applicable place information for each eve
372. hen CubeSuite is started up In this window you can control the program execution and open panels for the debugging process Figure A 1 Main Window VEG50E5_JJ3 CubeSuite Project Tree TER M File Edit wiew Project Build Debug Flash Tool Window Help opm T stet gh 4 9 og at RENAME lad z Device Pin List gf Device Top View F Property Ef main c 5 D kr co V850 Simulator Property o A VSS0ES JJ3 Project E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM K Bytes a4 ME UPDTOFST43 Mi troller or Meee Size of internal RAM Bytes 32768 E A Pin Configurator Design Tool E Clod ita Device Fin List Main clock frequency MHz 400 Device Top View sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 A CASO Build Toot Select Timer Trace clock frequency GPU clock frequency t S050 Simulator Debue Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 6 fay ae es a4 QB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Use simulator configuration file E Ei File Programmabke O Startup h sub h Main clock frequency MHz 7 zub0 c For clock simulation input the frequency of the main clock of the device to be used To input i a alue other than the available choices input the value directly from the keyboard h sub0Zh amp main c Connect Settin Debug Tool Setti Download File Se Hook Transactio main Output 1 X sub01 c EOF All Messages Program Analyzer FE F Fa Fig DISCONNECT This section describes the follo
373. hown R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 293 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This area is provided with the following functions a Display mode It is possible to select the following three display modes by selection of a button on the toolbar or the context menu Display Mode Display Contents Mixed display mode Displays the instruction disassemble results labels source text corresponding source line point trace results and break causes default Disassemble display mode Displays the instruction disassemble results labels point trace results and break causes Source display mode Displays the source text corresponding source line and break causes However when a place where no debugging information is present is executed lt No Debug Information gt is displayed b Jumping to source line or disassemble By selecting Jump to Source from the context menu the Editor panel opens with moving the caret to the source line corresponding to the line at the current caret position if the Editor panel is already opened jump to the panel In addition similarly by selecting Jump to Disassemble the Disassemble panel Disasemmble1 is opened with moving the caret to the address corresponding to the fetch address of the line at the current caret position if the Disassemble panel is already opened jump to the panel Disassemble1 c Linking with other panels By cli
374. iable name can be determined freely b Connection of the wire and main clock notification pin Connect one end of the wire to Simulator GUI s main clock notification pin Specify debugger_pseudo_pin_main_clkout for the argument c Connection of the wire and user model Connect the other end of the wire to a pin of the user model Specify gui_pseudo_pin_clock_notice for the argument d Generation of a wire Generate a wire line that connects pins by using the Wire function Be sure to specify 1 for the argument of the Wire function reset1 is a variable that indicates the generated wire The variable name can be determined freely e Connection of the wire and reset notification pin Connect one end of the wire to Simulator GUI s reset notification pin Specify debugger_pseudo_pin_reset_notice for the argument f Connection of the wire and user model Connect the other end of the wire to a pin of the user model Specify gui_pseudo_pin_reset_notice for the argument B 3 2 Example of simulator configuration file An example of the simulator configuration file is shown below In this example the following connection processing is performed Type of Connection CPU User Model SampleModel dil Pin POO INTPO POO pin POT Pin manipulating POO P30 TXD1 Serial output pin Serial input pin P31 RXD1 Serial input pin Serial output pin External bus EXTBUS External bus master EXTBUS1 External bus slave 1 EXTBUS Extern
375. ialog box This dialog box is used to select a saved data file Figure A 76 Select Data Save File Dialog Box Select Data Save File My Recent Documents File name L Dn Files of type Text files Ohtxt ww Cancel e Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the File Name area in the Data Save dialog box click the button Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder in which the file is located from the drop down list 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in the Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of the file to save R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 357 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file from the following drop down list The available file formats will differ as follows depending on the type of data being saved a Saving the data displayed in a panel Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formatNote Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting b Saving upload data See Table 2 5 Type of Files That Can
376. ication Pin input External bus access Other Time setting Pin output Other Notes 1 Configuration means simulator configuration processing that is executed when Simulator GUI is started 2 An initialization notification is reported only once immediately after Simulator GUI is started when simulator configuration processing has been completed 1 File name Indicates the file name of the user model to be created The file name can be determined freely the suffix for a C language file is Wk c 2 Include file Indicates a include file To use the user open interface the system header file suo h must be included 3 MakeUserModel function Indicates the MakeUserModel function that is called from the system during configuration of Simulator GUI Note that the name of this function must be MakeUserModel Syntax SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 447 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE The following two types of processing are described in this function a Interface generation Because Simulator GUI connects pins and buses during configuration processing when it is started resources such as pins and buses that are to be connected during configuration must be generated To do this call a function that generates an interface in the MakeUserModel function and generate an interface see B 4 Supplied Interfa
377. id state R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 299 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Event mark The event mark shows the type of event and in addition shows the current setting state The meanings of the marks displayed are as follows Table A 13 Event Mark Event Type Valid State Invalid State Suspended State Hawe S v ST Software Break AF Nii IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Unconditional Trace None IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Trace iF Used only in the Events panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Start Tracing ee A Used only in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Timer Result flECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Pras Used ony in the Editor panel Stop Timer ae Disassemble panel 1 Point Trace flIECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator H Setting of two or more MEF fg Note 1 fre Note 2 events Notes 1 There is one or more event with valid state ex m ah Used only in the Evenis panel cs E DG Used only in the Editor a Disassemble panel 2 There is no event with valid state and at least one event with invalid state 3 All the set events are suspended state R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 300 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Event name The event type and ID number are displayed as the event name A number from 0001 is automatically provided as the
378. ignal by default The HIGH and LOW signals of the pins R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 378 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remarks 1 When the buffer is full the data will be overwritten by the latest data starting from the oldest data because the buffer storing the pin data is in a ring buffer format The upper limit of the buffer size is one of the following The number of pin change points 4 096 The number of clocks 2 147 483 631 Horizontal draw width 134 217 711 pixels 2 The colors and fonts can be changed via the Customize dialog box opened by selecting the Option menu gt gt Customize Dedicated menu Timing Chart window 1 Edit menu Deletes all the waveform data Opens the Search Data dialog box Waveform data search is performed in this dialog box Search backward Searches for the change point of the selected pin in the backward direction toward the left Search forward Searches for the change point of the selected pin in the forward direction toward the right Select Pin Opens the Select Pin dialog box The pin for which the waveform data is to be displayed is selected in this dialog box Time unit Selects the time unit msec Millisecond 2 View menu Switches on off display of the Maker area and Waveform area Information Bar Switches on off display of the information bar Zoom Selects the waveform data display magnificatio
379. ile txt CSV file csv see b Saving the contents of the I O register Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save IOR Data As Save IOR Data As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt CSV file csv see b Saving the contents of the I O register Edit menu IOR panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the IOR panel other items are all invalid Cut Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard it is not possible to cut I O registers categories Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If the I O register s category s are selected copies them to the clipboard The copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Paste If texts are in editing pastes the contents of the clipboard to the caret position it is not possible to paste I O registers categories Delete Deletes the selected character string s If an empty category is in a select state its category is deleted it is not possible to delete I O registers Select All If texts are in editing selects all the character strings If texts are not in editing selects all the I O registers categories Edits the name of the selected category Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting
380. ily Specify whether to forcibly pause the execution for events that cannot be set while executing a program or operating the tracer timer For details on the event types that are affected by this property see Table 2 25 Event Types That Can be Set and Deleted during Execution V850E1 V850ES Select Yes to set events above while execution No is selected by default d Break You can configure the break function in this category Figure 2 54 Break Category MINICUBE El Break First using type of breakpoint Software break stop emulation of peripherals when stopping No Use open break function NotCutput signal Figure 2 55 Break Category MINICUBE2 El Break First using type of breakpoint Software break lt 1 gt First using type of breakpoint Specify from the following drop down list a breakpoint type to use with priority when setting it with a one click operation of the mouse in the Editor panel Disassemble panel See 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on breakpoints Software break Sets software breakpoint with priority default Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint with priority lt 2 gt Stop emulation of peripherals when stopping MINICUBE Specify from the drop down list whether to terminate the peripheral emulation while stopping the program execution Select Yes to terminate No is selected by default lt 3 gt Use open break function MINICUBE
381. ime gt Total of Start End lt Total number of Start IECUBE timer Stop timer gt Ne 2 IECUBE2 lt Total execution time gt lt Pass Count gt lt Average gt lt Max gt lt Min gt Simulator lt Start End gt lt Detailed information of Start timer Stop timer gt Condition execution Example Total 10ms Total of Start End 4 Total 10ms Pass Count 5 Average 2ms Max 4ms Min ims Start After Execution main c 1000x300 Start After Execution funcA 0x300x100 End After Execution main c 1000x300 End After Execution funcA 0x500x100 Point Trace lt Condition to occur gt lt Variable name gt lt Address range gt IECUBE Read variablet 0x100 0x101 IECUBE2 Simulator lt Condition to occur gt lt File name Variable name gt lt Address range gt Condition access Write sub c variable2 0x200 0x200 Format3 lt Condition to occur gt lt File name Function name Variable name gt lt Address range gt Read Write sub c funcl variabl3 0x300 0x303 Printf Format lt Condition to occur gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt lt Setting of Action event Printf event gt Example Before Execution main c 39 0x100 aaa bbb ccc After Execution sub c 100 0x200 Result of aaa aaa Notes 1 Following are the details on the display format lt Condition to Display one of the following conditions occur gt IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Execution Before Execution or After Executi
382. imit the accessed value The following types can be specified with the access Table 2 8 Types of Accesses to Variables The program is stopped with the read access to after reading the specified variable I O register Write The program is stopped with the write access to after writing the specified variable Il O register Read Write The program is stopped with the read access write access to after reading or writing the specified variable I O register Caution The program is not stopped with the access via DMA Dynamic Memory Access This section describes the following 1 Seta break event to a variable l O register 2 Delete a break event 1 Set a break event to a variable I O register Follow the steps below to set a break event to stop programs with the access to a variable I O register Caution Also see 2 15 6 Notes for setting events for details on breakpoints e g limits on the number of enabled events a Seta break event to a variable l O register in the source text disassembled text Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembly text is displayed Follow the operation listed below from the context menu after selecting an arbitrary variable or I O register in the source text disassembled text Note however that only global variables static variables inside functions and file internal static variables can be used By performing the following operation it i
383. imulator configuration file Yes Simulator configuration file lt 1 gt Use simulator configuration file Specify from the drop down list whether to use the simulator configuration file to perform user customization adding of user models of the simulator Select Yes to use the simulator configuration file No is selected by default lt 2 gt Simulator configuration file This property appears only when the Use simulator configuration file property is set to Yes Specify the simulator configuration file to use Directly enter the file name or select the file with the Select Simulator Configuration File dialog box Simulator opened by clicking on the button that appears on the right end of the setting field Caution This property cannot be changed while connecting to Simulator d Programmable I O V850E1 V850ES You can configure the programmable I O area in this category Note that this category is only valid when the selected microcontroller supports the programmable I O area Remark Change this setting to temporarily change variables while debugging To set a common value for the project in the Property panel of the build tool on the Common Options tab in the Device category set the value in Programmable I O area start address property Figure 2 93 Programmable I O Category E Programmabk FO Use Programmable L O area Yes Programmable LO area start address 0 lt 1 gt Use Programmable I O area S
384. in use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics
385. ination rule priority order below and determines the target of the real time display update within the above limitation the panel displayed in front right before the program execution is the only target 1 Ascending order of watch expressions listed in the Watch panel if more than one panel is opened the smallest in number is configured first 2 Ascending order of the addresses listed in the Memory panel if more than one memory panel is opened the smallest in number is configured first Note that when a read protected area is included in this target range the display contents of the area are not updated Table 2 11 Target Range for Real Time Display Update Function Reading V850E2M Area IECUBE MINICUBE Simulator E1 JTAG Internal ROM ROM Entire range Entire rangeNe Entire range RAM a shared HBUS shared memory BackupRAM BackupRAM RAM Emulation memory a Target memory memory CPU register CPU register VO register VO register Data flash S R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 107 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note When the selected microcontroller version supports multi core the target range is limited to the internal RAM area and the HBUS shared memory area b Modifying Table 2 12 Target Range for Real Time Display Update Function Modifying V850E1 V850ES IECUBE MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Simulator 1 JTAG Serial Internal ROM Impossib
386. ing module User open interface UserModel dll internal peripheral blocks External bus connection Simulation interface To expand a system a user model must be created first Because the user model operates in conjunction with the simulation system it interfaces with the user open interface processing module This interface is the user open interface The user model generates resources such as pins and external bus slaves via the user open interface during configu ration processing to configure the simulator that is performed when Simulator GUI is started By connecting the pins and external bus slaves to the pins and external bus masters of the CPU simulation block signals can be input to or out put from the pins of the CPU simulation block and the external bus can be accessed from the CPU simulation block The generated pins and external bus slaves can also be connected to the expansion simulation block other user mod els as well as to the CPU simulation block R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 446 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 2 2 Outline of programming The user model is programmed in the dynamic link library DLL format of WIN32 The template of a program file is shown below Figure B 3 Template of Program File System UserModel c include suo h During configuration 1 Initialization notificationN 2 Reset notification Time notif
387. ings tab 4 Flash Options Settings tab E1 JTAG V850E2M 5 Hook Transaction Settings tab 1 Connect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab configuration with regard to the connection to the debug tool can be done a Internal ROM RAM b DataFlash V850E1 V850ES c Clock d Connection with Target Board e Flash f Programmable I O V850E1 V850ES a Internal ROM RAM The configuration of internal ROM RAM is displayed in this category Figure 2 64 Internal ROM RAM Category E1 Serial E1 JTAG V850E1 V850ES E Internal ROM RAH R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 47 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 65 Internal ROM RAM Category E1 JTAG V850E2M E Internal ROM RAM lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Size of internal ROM KBytes The internal ROM size to emulate is displayed unit Kbytes If the selected microcontroller is the V850E1 core and incorporates VSB Flash ROM it displays the value including the size of VSB Flash ROM You cannot change the value of this property Size of internal RAM Bytes The internal RAM size to emulate is displayed unit bytes If the selected microcontroller is the V850E1 core and incorporates VSB RAM it displays the value including the size of VSB RAM If the selected microcontroller version supports multi core it displays the total size of the internal RAMs of all PE You cannot ch
388. ings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 352 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Download File dialog box This dialog box is used to select a downloaded file Figure A 74 Select Download File Dialog Box Select Download File sola OF e m My Recent Documents E Desktop My Documents hy Computer My Network Fie name Oen Files of type Load module file Gout we Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Download file property area in the Download Files dialog box click the button on the File item Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder in which the downloaded file is located from the drop down list 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in the Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of the downloaded file R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 353 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file from the following drop down list Load module file Imf CX Load module format default
389. initial data value is parsed from the end of the string with each two characters interpreted as a byte If the string has an odd number of characters then the first character is interpreted as one byte R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 328 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Example lEndianness specified by debug tool is little endian Input Character String Initialization Data How Data is Overwritten in Bytes 00 012 345 00 12 00 45 03 000 12 000345 00 00 12 45 03 00 Function buttons The memory area in the specified address range is repeatedly overwritten with the specified initial data pattern If the end address is reached in the middle of the pattern then writing ends at that point Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 329 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Search dialog box This dialog box is used to search memory see 5 Search the memory contents Search in either the Memory value area or Character string area where the caret was located in the Memory panel immediately before this dialog box opened Caution Search for memory cannot be performed for values of the ID tag for the data flash memory Figure A 62 Memory Search Dialog Box Memory Search Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area
390. interface functions are listed below Table B 2 List of Supplied Interface Functions R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 455 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Serial interface func Generates serial interface UART type SuoSendSerialFile Performs serial transmission serial transmission data file SuoSetNotifySentWaveCallback Registers signal output unit transmission end notification callback Note When using the external bus interface function the external memory area to use must be set to Target memory area with the Memory Type area of the Memory Mapping dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 456 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 4 2 Basic interface functions The basic interface functions that are supplied by Simulator GUI are as follows SuoSetinitCallback Registers initialization callback SuoSetResetCallback Registers reset callback SuoGetMainClock Acquires the cycle of the main clock for simulation R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 457 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetinitCallback Registers initialization callback Caution A callback function is not executed unless this function is called in the MakeUserModel function Syntax include suo h void SuoSetInitCallback SuoInitCallback func Argumeni s Argument Description
391. ion rCENESAS Page 206 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use open break Specify whether to use the open break function function l Default No Output signal IECUBE IECUBE2 Modifying Select from the drop down list Hi Z MINICUBE Available Yes Hi Z The open break target pin becomes the Hi Z state after the E1 JTAG values CPU is stopped No Output signal The open break target pin outputs the signal even after the CPU is stopped Execute instruction at Specify the timing to stop the program execution by breakpoints either after or before the breakpoint when break execution of the instruction at the breakpoint Simulator Default Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Breaks after executing the instruction te values l l Breaks before executing the instruction Note When Yes is selected all of the action events currently being set are handled as Hardware Break events see 2 14 Set an Action into Programs 5 Fail safe Break IECUBE The detailed information on fail safe break functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed Stop when wrote to Specify whether to stop the execution right after writing to the internal ROMN Internal ROM This property is invalid when the selected microcontroller is a ROMless product Default Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Stops right after writing values i Does not st
392. ion Caution NotifySentWaveFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void NotifySentWaveFunc SuoHandle handle Argumeni s handle Handle of the signal output unit interface Return value None Description NotifySentWaveFunc describes the processing to be performed when transmission by a signal output unit has been completed Use the SuoSetNotifySentWaveCallback function to register NotifySentWaveFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 523 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 6 Sample Program Timer Model This section describes a sample program timer model of a user model created by using the Simulator GUI s user open interface B 6 1 Overview Timer model is a Sample program using a timer interface It outputs a value to a pin at fixed time intervals B 6 2 Configuration The timer model generates the PIN pin and TIM timer The generated PIN pin is connected to the PDH pin of the CPU Figure B 5 Timer Model Configuration B 6 3 Operation The timer model calculates a predetermined time by using the timer interface and alternately outputs a low level and a high level to the PDH pin The output value and output time are as shown below Figure B 6 Timer Model Operation 1000 4000 2000 2000 40000 1000 2000 2000
393. ion Cannot be used RRM Uses the real time display update function RRM function preferentially default Trace function Only trace branch instructions internally the behavior is the same as when the Select trace data property is set to Branch PC Trace related events are also disabled invalid Coverage function Cannot be used Coverage Uses the coverage function preferentially Trace function Only trace instructions internally the behavior is the same as when the Select trace data property is set to Branch PC Trace related events are also disabled invalid Coverage function Cannot be used b Select trace data This property appears only when the Use for trace data property is set to Trace Specify a type of trace data to be collected from the following drop down list Branch PC All PC Access Data Branch PC Access Data default All PC Access Data Access PC Access Data Branch PC Access PC Access Data Remarks 1 Meaning of the type of trace data to be collected is as follows Branch PC PC values of branch origin and branch destination instructions All PC PC values of all instructions Access Data Access address and access data Access PC PC values of instructions that caused access 2 The DMA start point and end point are traced regardless of the trace condition c Trace priority This property is valid only when the Use for trace data property is set to Yes Specif
394. ion File dialog box Simulator opened by clicking the button Note that changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool 7 Programmable I O V850E1 V850ES The detailed information on the programmable I O area is displayed and its configuration can be changed Change this setting to temporarily change values while debugging To set a common value for the project in the Property panel of the build tool on the Common Options tab in the Device category set the value in Programmable I O area start address property Use Programmable I O area Programmable I O area start address R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 Specify whether to use the programmable I O area Modifying Select from the drop down list Note that changes can be made only when the selected microcontroller supports the programmable I O area Available Uses the programmable I O area values Does not use the programmable I O area The address is aligned to 16 Kbytes This property appears only when the Use Programmable O areal property is set to Yes Specify the start address of the programmable I O area Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available Address expressions within the address range of the programmable I O area values rCENESAS Page 198 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Tool Settings tab This tab is used to display the detailed infor
395. ion below lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Specify Function Name You can either type the function name to be find directly into the text box or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Searches are case insensitive and only complete matches are retrieved Specify Number Specify the range within the trace data to search via the number displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specify the starting number in the left text box and the ending number in the right text box 0 to ast number are specified by default You can either type the numbers directly into the text boxes in base 10 format or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items If the left hand text box is left blank it is treated as if 0 were specified If the right hand text box is left blank it is treated as if the last number were specified Click the Search Backward Search Forward button When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the large number to small and the search results are shown selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the small number to large and the search results are shown selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Search with specifying the global variable Select the The exec
396. ion describes the following 1 Search in the instruction level 2 Search in the source level R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 138 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Search in the instruction level Search the trace data in the instruction level Select the Instruction Level tab and then follow the steps below Figure 2 158 Search the Trace Data in the Instruction Level Trace Search search condition Fetch Address Mnemonic Aecess Address Aocess Status Data Search range Number a Specify Fetch Address b w Specify the fetch address if it is a required search parameter You can either type the address expression directly into the text boxes or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The fetch address can also be specified as a range In this case specify a range by specifying address expressions in both the left and right text boxes If the right hand text box is blank or contains the text Input when range is specified then the fixed address specified in the left hand text box will be searched Note that if an address value greater than the microcontroller address space is specified the upper address value is masked An address value greater than the value expressed within 32 bits cannot be specified Specify Mnemonic Specify the mnemonic if it is a required search parameter The specified char
397. ion file FDB file Directly enter the file name the reference point of the path is the project folder or select the file with the dialog box opened by clicking on the button that appears on the right end of the setting field The external flash memory information file can be downloaded from our website Development Tools Download webpage lt 3 gt Start address Specify the start address of the external flash memory Directly enter the address from 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF 0 is selected by default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 75 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 4 gt Data width Specify the data width access size of the external flash memory from the drop down list see Table 2 4 Parameter Set Values For External Flash Memory The drop down list displays the following data widths unit Kbytes 8 default 16 32 lt 5 gt Number of parallel Specify the number of external flash memories in parallel see Table 2 4 Parameter Set Values For External Flash Memory You can specify the number from the drop down list or by directly entering an integer number between 1and 99 The drop down list displays the following numbers 1 default 2 4 lt 6 gt Number of serial Specify the number of external flash memories in serial see Table 2 4 Parameter Set Values For External Flash Memory You can specify the number from the drop down list or by directly entering a
398. ion is checked by default 3 The highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This area is provided with the following functions a b c d e Line assembly Instructions and code displayed in this panel can be edited line assembly See 2 6 4 Perform line assembly for details on how to operate it Program execution by instruction level Execution can be controlled at the instruction level unit by step executing a program in a state where there is a focus on this panel See 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps for details on how to operate it Setting of various events Various events can be set to the addresses lines where the caret currently exists by selecting Bread Settings Trace Settings or Timer Settings from the context menu The corresponding Event mark is displayed in the Event area when an event is set In addition the detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel Note however that the setting of events can be done only for those lines where the background color is shown in white in the event area See the following for details on how to set events 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section 2 11 4 Collect execution history when the condition is met 2 12 2 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section
399. ions file internal static variables and I O register can be used By performing the following operation it is interpreted as if a Point Trace event has been set at the target watch expression and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 15 Manage Events for details Select Trace Output gt gt Record Reading Value Select Trace Output gt gt Record Writing Value Read Write Select Trace Output gt gt Record R W Value Remark A watch expression within the current scope can be specified To target a watch expression outside the current scope select a watch expression with a specified scope After the setting of the Point Trace event is complete execute the program see 2 7 Execute Programs If the conditions for a Point Trace event that you have set are met while the program is executing that information is collected as trace data See 2 11 5 Display the collected execution history for details on checking trace data To delete a Point Trace event select the event name to delete in the Events panel opened when selecting the View menu gt gt Event then press the button in the toolbar in the same panel see 2 15 Manage Events R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 135 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 154 Example of Point Trace Event Results View When Using Simulator 2 Ye SA Notation T 3 Eelke El Number Time h mins mapana 4053 4
400. ions select the one you want to delete in the Watch panel then click the button in the toolbar Change display format of values The display format of the value area can be changed using buttons below on the toolbar Notation The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed Displays the value of the selected watch expression in the default notation see Table A 12 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default according the type of variable default fe Displays the value of the selected item in binary number Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code Fla Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that this item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression value is 4 byte data Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that this item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression value is 8 byte data Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value of the selected item except the item displayed in hexadecimal number 6 Modify the contents of watch expressions The watch expressions values can be edited Double click the value of the watch expression to edit in the Value area to switch the value to edit mode press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode To write the edited value to the target memory directly enter the value from the keyboard then press the Enter key Note that only those values corresp
401. ions internally the behavior is the same as when the Select trace data property is set to Branch PC Trace related events are also disabled invalid Coverage function Cannot be used Coverage Uses the coverage function preferentially Trace function Only trace branch instructions internally the behavior is the same as when the Select trace data property is set to Branch PC Trace related events are also disabled invalid Timer function Cannot be used Timer related events except for the Run Break timer are also disabled invalid b Select trace data This property appears only when the Use for trace data property is set to Trace Specify a type of trace data to be collected from the following drop down list Branch PC Access Data R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 129 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Branch PC Access Data default Access PC Access Data Branch PC Access PC Access Data Remark Meaning of the type of trace data to be collected is as follows Branch PC PC values of branch origin and branch destination instructions Access Data Access address and access data Access PC PC values of instructions that caused access c DMA is traced Specify whether to trace the access data via DMA from the following drop down list Select Yes to perform the DMA trace No is selected by default d Select DMA trace data This property
402. is feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after editing source files R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 351 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Observe registered files changing This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like F Do not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like default Caution Files that are in the project folder and have been registered to the project can be monitored The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been registered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item and stop the rapid build 3 Enable Break Sound Beep when the execution of a program is halted due to a break event Hardware or Software break Do not beep when the execution of a program is halted due to a break event Hardware or Software break default 4 Buttons Initialize Settings Return all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restore all sett
403. is in execution by setting a Trace event Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event To use this function follow the steps below Cautions 1 Also see 2 15 6 Notes for setting events for details on Trace events e g limits on the number of enabled events 2 IECUBE IECUBE2 If the Use trace function property in the Trace category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel is set to other than Trace all of events related to trace that have currently been set become Invalid state 3 Simulator Start Tracing events and Stop Tracing events cannot be set while a tracer is running 1 Set a Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event Set a Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event that starts stops collecting the trace data in the Editor panel Disassemble panel a How to set a Start Tracing event Move the caret to the line address to start collecting trace data then select Trace Settings gt gt Start Tracing from the context menu A Start Tracing event is set to the instruction at the start address of the line address where the caret exists b How to set a Stop Tracing event Move the caret to the line address to stop collecting trace data then select Trace Settings gt gt Stop Tracing from the context menu A Stop Tracing event is set to the instruction at the start address of the line address where the caret exists Note Start Tracing events Stop Tracing events cannot be set at lines in the event ar
404. isplay modify the memory contents during program execution The Memory panel Watch panel has the real time display update function that can update modify the display contents of the memory watch expression in real time while executing the program Using the real time display update function enables to display modify the value of memory watch expression not only while the program is stopped but also in execution Caution IECUBE Some of the trace function the real time display update function RRM function and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis Therefore you need to configure the following setting in the same category in order to specify a function used preferentially before configuring the settings described in this section Trace category gt gt Use for trace data property gt gt RRM default Remark The real time display update function is implemented using the debug tool s RRM Real time RAM Monitor function pseudo RRM function DMM Dynamic Memory Modification function and pseudo DMM function The memory area is read modified by software simulation while the pseudo RRM function pseudo DMM function is executed so execution of the program momentarily breaks upon a read modification The target range where the values can be read modified using the real time display update function differs depending on the debug tool and the settings on the Property panel Based on the following settings of properties in
405. it interface handle Syntax include suo h SuoHandle SuoGetWaveHandle const char waveName Argumeni s Name of the signal output unit Return value p Macro Pp eseription a of the signal out Normal completion put unit interface NULL Exit with error abend Description This function is used to obtain the handle of the specified signal output unit interface Specify the name specified by the SuoCreateWave function as waveName if a different name is specified NULL is returned Example include suo h SuoHandle hWavel void funcl void hWavel SuoGetWaveHandle WAVEL1 Get handle of WAVE1L R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 506 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSendWaveFile Performs transmission via signal output unit Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoSendWaveFile SuoHandle handle const char waveFile Argumeni s Handle of the signal output unit interface waveFile Name of the signal data file that has been saved after being edited on the Signal Data Editor win dow Note that if waveFile is specified by a relative path it is treated as relative to the path of the user model UserModel dll Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abe
406. ith the Use timer function property in the Timer category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel 1 Set a Start Timer event Stop Timer event Set a Start Timer event Stop Timer event in the Editor panel Disassemble panel a How to set a Start Timer event Move the caret to the line address to start the timer then select Timer Settings gt gt Start Timer from the context menu A Start Timer event is set to the instruction at the start address of the line address where the caret exists b How to set a Stop Timer event Move the caret to the line address to stop the timer then select Timer Settings gt gt Stop Timer from the context menu A Stop Timer event is set to the instruction at the start address of the line address where the caret exists Note Start Timer events Stop Timer events cannot be set at lines in the event area with the background color in gray showing to the corresponding address of the line that no change Is allowed fo Settable line___ MONETS ESTI H No settable line Once a Start Timer event Stop Timer event is set the following event marks are displayed in the event area of the line address that an eventis set Start Timer events and Stop Timer events are managed as a single event Timer Result event in the Events panel details about the set Start Timer event Stop Timer event can be checked by clicking the plus mark next to the Timer Result event item Tabl
407. iting in this category Figure 2 45 Flash Category MINICUBE V850E1 V850ES E Flash Security ID Hee FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Figure 2 46 Flash Category MINICUBE V850E2M E Flash Security ID Hee FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 39 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 47 Flash Category MINICUBE2 El Flash Security ID Hee FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Chip erase when starting No lt 1 gt Security ID This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports the ROM security function on chip debug security ID for flash memory Specify a security ID for reading codes in the internal ROM or internal flash memory For details on the on chip debug security ID see MINICUBE MINICUBE2 User s Manual V850E1 V850ES Directly enter 20 digits hexadecimal number 10 bytes FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF is specified by default V850E2M Directly enter 24 digits hexadecimal number 12 bytes FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF is specified by default Caution This property cannot be changed while connecting to MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Remark V850E1 V850ES When you change the setting of the property a message appears prompting you to select whether or not to change the security ID of the build tool lt 2 gt Chip erase when starting MINICUBE2 Specify whether to erase the chip when connecting to the debug tool from the drop down list Select Yes to er
408. itions can be specified by using the scrollbar located on the right side Pin Name This area is used to specify the pin name to be searched The pins can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list Inputting noting makes an area off limit to data search and input in the corresponding Search Data is disabled R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 382 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Searches the signal data that is LOW Searches the signal data that is high impedance Direction Selects the data search direction by selecting one of the exclusive option buttons When the Next button is clicked the search is performed in the direction specified in this area Searches the data backward data older than the current location Forward Searches the data forward data newer than the current location default Function buttons Searches in the direction specified When this button is clicked again following search completion the next data is searched Stops the data search and closes the dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 383 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 1 O Panel window This window is used to configure a dummy target system and manipulate created connected parts A dummy target system can be constructed by creating and setting connected parts figure objects and part objects
409. keyboard Available 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFFE in hexadecimal number values 3 Writing Time Erasing Time The detailed information on the time for writing to and erasing the data flash memory is displayed and its configuration can be changed Writing time Select the delay time when writing to the data flash memory Default Typical number of times that is assumed by flash macro specifications Modifying Select from the drop down list Available No retry Specifies 0 as the number of times of retry values The delay time is 0 the writing speed is fastest Typical number of times Specifies the typical number of times that is assumed that is assumed by flash by flash macro specifications macro specifications Maximum number of times Specifies the maximum number of times that is that is assumed by flash assumed by flash macro specifications macro specifications Retries for the maximum Specifies the maximum number of times of retry number of times specified The delay time is maximum the writing speed is longest Erasing time Select the delay time when erasing the data flash memory Default Typical number of times that is assumed by flash macro specifications Modifying Select from the drop down list Available No retry Specifies O as the number of times of retry values The delay time is 0 the erasing speed is fastest Typical number of times Specifies the typical number of times that is assumed that is a
410. king on the Microcontroller tyoe Debug tool name Debug Tool node on the Project Tree panel Figure 2 7 Select Switch Debug Tool to Use Project Tree x A Project Project BEL ME uPDFOF3746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool cy Code Generator Design Tool A C4850 Build Tool mee YESO Simulator Debug Toor Using Debug Tool v50 IECUBE SRE QB Frogrammer Flash Proc 5 A File tl Build tool generated file im sample w650 out map ramp out hex sample _v850 hex V850 E1CITAG Y850 MINICUBE2 Serial W850 EifSeriali Caution The context menu items displayed differ depending on the microcontroller selected in the project see Table 2 1 Relationship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Remark E1 When serial communications will be performed as the communication method between E1 and the device in the target system select Microcontroller type E1 Serial when JTAG communications will be performed then select Microcontroller type E1 JTAG If the Property panel is already open click the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node again The view switches to the Property panel of the selected debug tool If the Property panel is not open double click the above mentioned node to open the corresponding Property panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 18 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTI
411. l Low G HIGH Funcion butors Figure A 104 Parts Segment LED Properties Dialog Box Style Tab Parts Segment LED Properties SegmentLED Connection Style Fill up LED Active Color Tnactive Color Frame Line of LED Color of Line DottedSolid Line Thickness of Line Function buttons R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 413 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open SegmentLED Connection tab Style tab Function buttons Operation How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a part object 7 segment LED 14 segment LED Select Properties form the context menu on a part object 7 segment LED 14 segment LED Select a part object 7 segment LED 14 segment LED and then select Properties form the View menu SegmentLED Connection tab 1 Pin connection information setting area Label This area is used to specify the part name The part name input here is also displayed in the Parts List dialog box as the label Grid type Select the grid signal allocation method from the following As a result of the selection the setting in the Digit sig
412. l Simulator If CPU status shifts to the HALT STOP IDLE mode a monitor time out error will occur 2 Local variables are not subject to the real time display update function 3 IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG The real time display update function and software breaks are exclusive of each other Therefore software breaks cannot be used when the settings above have been configured 4 lECUBE If the values of a variable expression are aligned across RRM area banks 256 byte boundaries the upper address will be an illegal value the value will be displayed in the error color Remark See 3 Modify the memory contents or 6 Modify the contents of watch expressions for details on how to modify values in the Memory panel Watch panel Values of memory watch expression for which the real time display update function is being operated are highlighted as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Figure 2 133 Example of Memory Values where the Real time Display Update Function Is Being Operated Memory E Notation size Notation Encoding _ Move when Stop Cd Hote Ha HA th Oth 48 49 ta th te td te Hf n n C C C C n eee eel b 0 3 oat w T T m 7 m m m G C iate aein an t a a a a n n n n C C C C G C o O or 2 2 2 e e ee es a ee ee E E E a a a a a a OO O ee E E E a a
413. l RAM size to emulate simulate RAM Bytes Bytes Default Internal RAM size of the selected microcontrolleN 3 Modifying IECUBE Simulator V850E1 V850ES Select from the drop down list IECUBE MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Simulator V850E2M Changes not allowed Available IECUBE values 4096 12288 28672 32768 61440 61440 VSB RAM size only when the selected microcontroller incorporates VSB RAM unit bytes Simulator V850E1 V850ES 4096 12288 28672 32768 61440 unit bytes Size of DataFlash Display the size of the data flash memory area of the selected microcontroller memory KBytes Default Data flash memory size of the selected microcontroller in Defaut Data flash memory size of the selected microcontroler Other than Simulator Modifying Changes not allowed Notes 1 V850E1 When the selected microcontroller incorporates VSB Flash ROM it displays the value including the size of VSB Flash ROM 2 When the selected microcontroller is a ROMIess product the property value cannot be changed 3 V850E1 When the selected microcontroller incorporates VSB RAM it displays the value including the size of RAM R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 192 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 DataFlash V850E1 V850ES except Simulator The detailed information on the data flash memory is displayed and its configuration can be changed Note that this cat
414. l dedicated items Edit menu Call Stack panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Call Stack Description of each area 1 Depth area The depth of the call is displayed The line at the current PC position becomes 0 and incremented numbers from 1 is added to the calling function in the order 2 Call Stack area The current source position and the call stack information pushed on the stack position of the calling function and arguments of a each function etc are displayed The display format in this area differs depending on the selection condition of the E we button on the toolbar or of Show Parameter Show Module File Name from the context menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 287 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Display arguments lt Function gt lt Argument gt lt Argument ValueN e lt Module file name gt lt File E Display module file name name gt lt Line number gt default Display arguments lt Function gt lt Argument gt lt Argument valueNote lt File Name gt lt Line numbers Do not display module file name Do not display arguments lt Function gt lt Module file name gt lt File name gt lt Line numbers Display module file name Do not display arguments lt Function gt lt File name gt lt Line numbers Do not display module file name Note When the argu
415. l down button Specifies the fill color during active display Specifies the fill color during inactive display Select this option button to display the analog button with the following specified bitmap default Selection list Select a bitmap to be used from the selection list The selectable bitmaps appear in the selection list Add button Opens the Entry Bitmap dialog box below to add a new bitmap to the selection list The bitmap file to be added can be specified either through file selection using the button or through direct input Entry Bitmap ctive Bitmap Loommon bitmap Parts_on bimp Pm Inactive Bitmap Loommon bitmap Parts_off bmp Delete button Deletes the currently selected bitmap from the selection list Note that only the bitmap that have been added by user can be deleted This area displays the style of the analog button currently being specified R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 399 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Help Displays the help for this dialog box Operation In the Simulation mode while an analog button is depressed the specified analog voltage value is input to the specified pin Clicking the depressed analog button again restores the button to its original state Figure A 93 Connected Parts Display Example Analog Button R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 400 of 538
416. lator through lit unlit display in the Simulation mode There are two types of matrix LED display styles figure and bitmap These styles can be changed on the Style tab Figure A 106 Parts Matrix Led Properties Dialog Box Matrix LED Connection Tab Parts Matrix Led Properties Matrix LED Connection Style Row Signal Column Signal Pin Name Fin Mame 0 5 2 J 4 Getive Level Active Level QO Low HIGH low HIGH Figure A 107 Parts Matrix Led Properties Dialog Box Style Tab Parts Matrix Led Properties Matrix LED Connection Style Figure Preview Shape shadow Line Fill up Thickness zz Active Active 1 Inactive Inactive Active 2 mine Inactive IE ETE R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 417 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open Matrix LED Connection tab Style tab Function buttons Operation How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a part object Matrix LED Select Properties form the context menu on a part object Matrix LED Select a part object Matrix LED and then select Properties form the View menu Matrix LED Connection tab 1 Label Label This area is used to specify the part name The part name input here is also displayed in the Parts List
417. ld menu A rapid build is enabled by default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 87 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution When an external text editor is used check the Observe registered files changing check box on the General Build Debug category in the Option dialog box to enable this function Remarks 1 After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key 2 Enabling disabling a rapid build is set for the entire project main project and subprojects 3 If you disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time 2 6 4 Perform line assembly Instructions and code displayed in the Disassemble panel can be edited line assembly This section describes the following 1 Edit instructions 2 Edit code 1 Edit instructions Follow the steps below to edit instructions a Switch to edit mode Double click the instruction to edit or select Edit Disassemble from the context menu after moving the caret to the instruction to edit b Edit instructions Use keyboard to directly edit the instructions c Write to memory Press the Enter key to line assemble the edited instructions after editing The code is automatically written to the memory If the edited instruction is invalid the instruction is shown in red and will not be written to the memory If there is a space because of overwriting the displayed result
418. le Impossible Impossible Entire range Internal RAM Entire Entire Entire range Emulation memory Target memory S a CPU register range Entire range I O register 9 Standard I O register only Data flash Impossible Impossible Impossible Impossible Table 2 13 Target Range for Real Time Display Update Function Modifying V850E2M Area IECUBE MINICUBE Simulator JTAG Internal ROM ROM Impossible Impossible Entire range Entire range Entire range HBUS shared memory shared HBUS shared memory BackupRAM BackupRAM RAM Emulation memory Emulation memory a range teens range CPU register CPU register VO register VO register Data Dataflash Impossible Impossible Impossible Cautions 1 When CPU status shifts to the standby mode during this operation IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG When the Access by release HALT mode property in the Access memory while running category has been set to Yes if CPU status shifts to the HALT mode the real time display update function will continue to operate by automatically releasing the HALT mode If CPU status shifts to the STOP IDLE mode a monitor time out error will occur When that property has been set to No if CPU status shifts to the HALT STOP IDLE mode a monitor time out error will occur R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 108 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS MINICUBE2 E1 Seria
419. le name and ID number Note A message is displayed if these items are selected when the downloaded lode module file is older than the opened source file Event area IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Hardware Break First The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a hardware breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the First using type of breakpoint property in the Break category on the Property panel Software Break First The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a software breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the First using type of breakpoint property in the Break category on the Property panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 238 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory panel This panel is used to display the contents of the memory and change the memory value see 2 9 1 Display change the memory Furthermore the contents of data flash memory including ID tag can be displayed and changed when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory Up to a maximum of four of these panels can be opened Each panel is identified by the names Memory1 Memory2 Memory3 and Memory4 on the title bar The display contents are automatically updated when the value of the memory changes after a program is executed when the execution is done in s
420. le type Specify the type of file to be downloaded Download file list area Download file property area This section describes how to configure on the Download Files dialog box above when the following cases 1 Change download condition of a load module file 2 Add download files hex bin 3 Download multiple load module files 4 Perform source level debugging with a hex or binary data format file 5 Download to external flash memory IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG O1 1 Change download condition of a load module file Follow the steps below in the Download Files dialog box to change download condition object information and symbol information of load module files to download a Select a load module file Select a load module file to download in the Download file list area b Change download condition Current download condition of the selected load module file is displayed in the Download file property area Change each items displayed in the property R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 71 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS values Does not download object information Download symbol Specify whether to download the symbol information from the specified fileN information Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Downloads symbol information values Does not download symbol information Note Ifthe symbol information have not been downloaded the sou
421. led data Edit menu Disassemble panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the Edit menu in the Disassemble panel other items are all invalid Copy When a line is selected copies the contents of the selected line to the clipboard as a character string In the case of the edit mode copies the selected character string to the clipboard Rename Changes to the edit mode to edit the instruction code at the caret position see 2 6 4 Perform line assembly This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Search tab Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Replace tab Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to the specified address Context menu Disassemble area and Address area Register to Watch1 Registers the selected character string or the word at the caret position to the Watch panel Watch1 as a watch expression the judgment of the word depends on current build tool At this time since it is registered as a variable name the symbol name that is displayed changes depending on the scope Register Action Event Opens the Action Events dialog box to set an action event to the address at the caret position Go to Here Executes the program from the address indicated by the current PC value to the address corresponding to the line at the caret position This item becomes inva
422. led when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened See the following for details on how to set events 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section 2 11 4 Collect execution history when the condition is met 2 12 2 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Remark A breakpoint can be set or deleted easily in the Event area as well see a Seitting deleting breakpoints h Registering watch expression Variable names of C language CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols can be registered in the Watch pane as watch expressions See 1 Register a watch expression for details on how to operate it This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened i File monitor The following function for monitoring is provided to manage source files A message is displayed when the downloaded lode module file is older than the source file to open If the contents of the currently displayed file are changed not with CubeSuite a message is displayed to indicate whether to save the file You can either select yes or no R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 234 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Editor panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Editor panel other i
423. les text files to be viewed and edited and is used to execute source level debug Memory panel Displays and modifies memory values Disassemble panel Displays the results of memory value disassemble and is used to execute line assemble and instruction level debug CPU Register panel Displays the contents of CPU registers and modifies register values IOR panel Displays and modifies I O register values Local Variables panel Displays and modifies local variables Watch panel Displays and modifies registered watch expression values Call Stack panel Displays call stack information on function calls Trace panel ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Displays trace data acquired from the debug tool Events panel Displays detailed information on set events switches the events between enabled and disabled or deletes them Output panel Displays messages output from the build tool debug tool plug ins or the results of batch searches carried out using the Search and Replace dialog box Memory Mapping dialog box Sets the memory mapping Download Files dialog box Selects files to be downloaded and sets the download conditions Flash Options Setting dialog box V850E2M Configure options for the flash memory Text Edit dialog box Inputs and modifies character strings Action Events dialog box Sets action events Save Settings dialog box Specifies the encoding and the new line code of the file being edited Memory Initialize di
424. licked line Once a breakpoint is set an Event mark is displayed at the line that is set In addition the detailed information about the set breakpoint is reflected in the Events panel When this operation is performed at a place where any one of the event marks is already being displayed that event is deleted and the setting of breakpoints cannot be done Note that the setting of events can be done only for those lines where the background color is shown in white See 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on how to set the breakpoint b Changes event status Event status can be changed from the following menu displayed by right clicking the event mark Enable Event Changes the selected event state to a Valid state Event occurs when the specified condition is met When the event mark FS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are enabled Disable Event Changes the selected event state to an Invalid state Event does not occur when the specified condition is met When the event mark HS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are disabled Delete Event Deletes the selected event When the event mark Fg which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are deleted View Event Detailed Setup Opens the Events panel to display the
425. lid during execution of a program Set PC to Here Sets the address of the line at the current caret position to the current PC value This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Move Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to the specified address Move to Symbol Moves the caret to the define position of the selected symbol Back to Address Moves the caret to the position address immediately before it is moved by Move to Symbol Note that this item becomes invalid when no symbol name is displayed in the address R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 253 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Break Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the break related event Note that breakpoints can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 1 Event area Set Hardware Break Sets a breakpoint Hardware Break event to the address at the caret position see 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Set Software Break Sets a breakpoint Software Break event to the address at the caret position see 2 8 2 Stop IECUBE IECUBE2 the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Set Read Break to Sets a break event with read access condition to the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register se
426. list Select a bitmap to be used from the selection list The selectable bitmaps appear in the selection list Add button Opens the Entry Bitmap dialog box below to add a new bitmap to the selection list The bitmap file to be added can be specified either through file selection using the button or through direct input Entry Bitmap ctive Bitmap Loommon bitmap Parts_on bimp Pm Inactive Bitmap Loommon bitmap Parts_off bmp Delete button Deletes the currently selected bitmap from the selection list Note that only the bitmap that have been added by user can be deleted This area displays the style of the button currently being specified R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 395 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Help Displays the help for this dialog box Operation In the Simulation mode by clicking the displayed button data can be input to the pin connected to the button The input format differs depending on the button type push toggle group Figure A 90 Connected Parts Display Example Button Push button Clicking this button causes the active value to be loaded to the connected pin The active value is held during the hold time after which it changes to the original value Toggle button Clicking this button loads the active value to the connected pin The active value is held during the hold time after which i
427. ll open with displaying source text of the reset address when if the source text has not been allocated to the reset address the contents of the reset address is displayed in the Disassemble panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 68 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 3 b Specified symbol This property appears only when the Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property is set to Yes Specify the position at which the program is stop after CPU reset Directly enter an address expression between 0 and ast address in address space _main is specified by default Note however that the program will not be executed if the specified address expression cannot be converted into an address Remark Normally specify the following For assembler source Start label corresponding to main function For C source Symbol assigned to the start of the main function name c Startup start symbol Specify the start symbol of the text area code area of the startup routine Directly enter an address expression between 0 and ast address in address space __ start is specified by default This setting is not needed if the source is assembly language d w Startup end symbol Specify the end symbol of the text area code area of the startup routine Directly enter an address expression between 0 and ast address in address space __startend is specified by default This setting is not n
428. llowing How to open Description of each area Dedicated menu toolbar I O Panel window Context menu Operation How to open Click the zal button Select I O Panel from the Simulator menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 384 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Client area This area is used to create and set connected parts figure objects and part objects in order to construct a dummy target system see Operation Dedicated menu toolbar I O Panel window The menu items and buttons on the toolbar which are used to perform operations related to this window are described below 1 Edit menu Select this menu to perform basic editing actions on created objects Undo Undoes the immediately preceding operation such as object move Undo can restore up to 5 previous changes Restores the status undone by the Undo command Cuts the selected range and saves it to the clipboard Sends the selected object one panel backward 2 View menu Groups the selected objects Select this menu to switch the toolbar status bar display status in this window or to show hide various types of information in this window Switches on and off the display of two toolbars Figure Object Switches on and off display of the status bar Parts List Opens the Parts List dialog box A list of all the figure part obj
429. lock frequency kHz 32 768 Select Timer Trace clock frequency GFU clock frequency El Gontweuration Use simulator configuration file Programmable FO Internal ROMZ RAM Connect Setti Debug Tool Sett Download File 5 Hook Transactio Figure 2 88 Property Panel Simulator V850E2M Property ee VEBOEZM Simulator Property E Internal ROM RAM El Glock Main clock frequency MHz 8 00 Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Select Timers Trace clack frequency GPU clock frequency E Configuration Use simulator configuration tile Internal ROMZ RAH Download Fi Flash Optio Hook Trans Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 1 Connect Settings tab 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 Download File Settings tab 4 Flash Options Settings tab V850E2M 5 Hook Transaction Settings tab Remark When Simulator to be used corresponds to peripheral function simulations you can use the Simulator GUI See 2 17 Use the Simulator GUI Simulator for details on the Simulator GUI R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 58 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Connect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab configuration with regard to the connection to the debug tool can be done a a Internal ROM RAM b Clock c Configuration d Programmable O V850E1 V850ES Internal ROM RAM
430. log box 341 Dataflash memory 21 37 48 193 DCU 195 DDM function 106 Debug information 226 Debug Manager panel 179 Debug toolbar 175 Debug dedicated project 67 Delete breakpoint 97 Disassemble display mode 137 294 Disassemble panel 247 Disassembled text 83 247 Display and change programs 79 Display the result of disassembling 83 Perform line assembly 88 Display format of watch expression 280 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 529 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C INDEX Display information on function call from stack 124 Display call stack information 124 Save the contents of call stack information 125 Display and change programs Display and change programs 79 Display the result of disassembling 83 Display change the memory register and variable 103 Display change global variables static variables 117 Display change local variables 117 Display change the CPU register 113 Display change the I O register 115 Display change the memory 103 Display change watch expression 119 DMA 295 Download 33 67 225 Download condition 71 316 Download Files dialog box 316 E Editor panel 230 EEPROM Library 32 Event area 232 249 Event mark 300 Event type 301 Events panel 298 Execute programs 91 Execute programs 91 Execute progr
431. log box This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened Code coverage measurement result display IECUBE Simulator When the coverage function is valid lines corresponding to the specified coverage measurement area are shown highlighted based on the code coverage measurement result that is acquired by executing the program See 2 13 Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator for details on the coverage measurement This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened f Pop up display of variables By superimposing the mouse cursor on variables variable values are pop up displayed The display format of the variable value is same as Table A 12 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default depending on the type of the variable This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened g Setting of various events Various events can be set to the addresses lines where the caret currently exists by selecting Bread Settings Trace Settings or Timer Settings from the context menu The corresponding Event mark is displayed in the Event area by setting the event In addition the detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel Note however that the setting of events can be done only for those lines where the background color is shown in white in the event area This function is only enab
432. lor by clicking the pull down button Dotted Specifies and changes line shapes dotted line solid line Solid The desired line shape can be selected from the drop down list Note that this item can be changed only when Thickness is set to 1 Thickness Specifies and changes the line thickness The desired line thickness can be specified either via direct input or through selection from the spin button A value in the range of 1 to 100 decimal can be specified Note At this time if the object that have been pasted from a bitmap file it becomes invisible R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 429 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 430 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Parts List dialog box This dialog box displays all the figure objects created in the O Panel window as well as the pin connection status of part objects The pin connection settings for each object can be changed in the property dialog box which can be opened by dou ble clicking the relevant object listed in this dialog box or selecting the relevant object listed in this dialog box and then selecting the View menu gt gt Properties Figure A 115 Parts List Dialog Box Parts List Pin Name Active Level HIGH button RESET HIGH HIGH HIGH La
433. lowing items can be customized by setting the Option dialog box Display fonts Tab interval Display hide colors of control characters control codes including a blank symbol Colors of reserved words comments a Characters editing Characters can be entered from the keyboard Various shortcut keys can be used to enhance the edit function b Tag jump If the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position selecting Tag Jump from the context menu opens the file in the Editor panel and jumps to the corresponding line and the corresponding column if the Editor panel is already opened jump to the panel See Table 2 6 Operation of Tag Jump for details on the operation of the tag jump c Current PC line display When the current PC position PC register value corresponds to the source text lines those lines are shown highlighted the highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 233 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Lines with breakpoints display e Lines where the breakpoints are set are shown highlighted the highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dia
434. lue of the CPU register that the user is changing Background color Standard color Press the Enter key to write to the target memory Character color The value of the CPU register that has been changed because of the execution of a program Background color Cream prog The highlighting is rest by executing again the program This area is provided with the following functions a Changing the CPU register value To edit the CPU register value change the value directly from the keyboard after double clicking on the value to be edited press the Enter key to cancel the edit mode After you edit the value of the CPU register it is written to the target memory of the debug tool by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region b Saving the contents of the CPU register The Save As dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save CPU Register Data As and all the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 4 Save the CPU register contents for details on the method for saving the contents of the CPU register Toolbar Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel This item becomes invalid during execution of a program aut Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in the default notation default Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in hexadecimal number
435. ly be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoOutputAnalogPin SuoHandle handle double pinValue Argumeni s Handle of the pin interface Analog output value unit V Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function outputs an analog data signal specified with pinValue to the specified pin interface Specify pinValue in V volts as floating point data To output a digital data signal use the SuoOutpuiDigitalPin function Example include suo h SuoHandle hPinP00 void funcl void SuoOutputAnalogPin hPinP0O 3 5 Output 3 5V R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 472 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoOutputHighImpedance Outputs high impedance for the pin Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoOutputHighImpedance SuoHandle handle Argumeni s Handle of the pin interface Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to output high impedance for the specified digital analog pin interface Example include suo h SuoHandle hPinP00 void funcl void SuoOutputHighI
436. m does not stop execution When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to No the trace data is not collected even if the program is executed again Stop When the trace memory is full the trace data stops writing and the program stops execution When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to No the program cannot be executed again even if it is executed d Accumulate trace time Specify from the drop down list whether to display the trace time with accumulated time in this property Specify Yew to display trace time with accumulated time Specify No to display the trace time with differential time default e Trace memory size frames Specify from the drop down list the trace memory size trace frame number in this property The trace frame is a unit of the trace data One trace frame is used for each operation in fetch write read Drop down list includes the following trace frame numbers 4K default 8K 12K 16K 20K 24K 28K 32K 36K 40K 44K 48K 52K 56K 60K 64K 128K 192K 256K 320K 384K 448K 512K 576K 640K 704K 768K 832K 896K 960K 1M 2M 3M f Rate of frequency division of trace time tag Specify from the drop down list the frequency division ratio of the counter to be used for time tag display the Time item in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator The drop down list displays the following frequency division ratio 1 1 default 1 2 1 4 1 8 1
437. m is stopped Click the Move button to manually evaluate the address expression Move button When the Move when Stop check box is not checked click this button to evaluate the address expression and move the caret to the result address of the evaluation Remark Ifthe specified address expression is the symbol and its size can be recognized everything from the start address to the end address of that symbol is displayed selected 2 Address area The address of the memory is displayed hexadecimal number notation fixing The address width corresponds to the one in memory space of the specified microcontroller in the project This area cannot be edited 3 Memory value area The value of the memory mapped to the microcontroller is displayed and changed The display starts from address 0 by default Specification of the display notation radix and size for the memory value is performed by selecting the buttons on the toolbar or Notation Size Notation from the context menu it is hexadecimal number 8 bit width in the default condition The meanings of the marks and colors displayed as memory values are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Character color Memory value that the user is changing Press the Enter key to write to the target memory Background color Standard color l ney 9 y gg Standard color Memory v
438. m the debug tool Simulator Disassemble The following cascade menus are displayed to open the Disassemble panel These items are invalid while disconnecting from the debug tool Event Opens the Events panel This item is invalid while disconnecting from the debug tool R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 173 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Show Current PC Displays the current PC position in the Editor panel Location This item is invalid while disconnecting from the debug tool Back to Last Cursor Goes back to the position before jumping see 4 Jump to functions 4 Move to the Position symbol defined location to the defined location This item is invalid while disconnecting from the debug tool Forward to Next Cursor Forwards to the position before operating Back to Last Cursor Position Position Tag Jump Jumps to the corresponding line column in the corresponding file if the information of a file name line number column number exists in the line at the caret position on the Editor panel Output panel see 5 Jump to a desired line tag jump b Debug The Debug menu provides the following items and functions default Download Downloads the specified file s into the debug tool for an active project While disconnecting from the debug tool the download is executed after connecting to the debug tool This item becomes invalid during execution of a prog
439. mark Loop Dialog Opens the Loop dialog box Sets the details of loop information Cuts the data in the selected cell and saves it to the clipboard The data in the selected cell becomes 0 Copies the data in the selected cell and copies it to the clipboard 4 Wait area Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the selected location Deletes the data in the selected cell The data in the selected cell becomes 0 5 Data area Cut Cuts the data in the selected cell and saves it to the clipboard The data in the selected cell becomes Z Hi Z Copy Copies the data in the selected cell and copies it to the clipboard Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the selected location Delete Deletes the data in the selected cell The data in the selected cell becomes Z Hi Z Start Signal Input Starts signal input Stop Signal Input Stops signal input Reset Signal Input Returns the current signal input line to the beginning Operation Pin selection Creating signal data Single line editing Signal input 3 Data copy and paste Operation at CPU reset R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 371 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 1 Pin selection To create the signal data it is first necessary to select the pin to be used Open the Select Pin dialog box by clicking the fid button on the toolbar or selecting the Edit menu gt gt Select Pin and
440. mark is changed depending on the setting state of the event Valid state Event occurs when the specified condition is met It is possible to set the event to an invalid state by removing the check Invalid state Event does not occur when the specified condition is met It is possible to set the event to a valid state by removing the check Suspended state The conditions that have been specified cannot be set with the program of the debugging target It is not possible to operate the check box Remarks 1 Both of the Timer Start event and Timer Stop event is must be set for the Timer Result event Therefore it is not possible to set a particular event to a valid state by only the setting of one of these at the same time as both events are set they are treated as grouped events as a Timer Result 2 Itis not possible to set the Run Break Timer event to an invalid suspended state 3 The setting of the Unconditional Trace event and the Trace event to valid or invalid state is exclusively controlled Therefore the Unconditional Trace event which is a built in event is valid state by default but if either a Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event is set it automatically becomes invalid state and the Trace event which is a event name that is collectively called with a Start Tracing event and a Stop Tracing event becomes valid state Conversely if the set Trace event is invalid state the Unconditional Trace event automatically becomes val
441. mation categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Memory 2 Access Memory While Running 3 Set Event While Running IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 4 Break 5 Fail safe Break IECUBE 6 Trace IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator 7 Timer IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator 8 Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator 9 Mask for Input Signal IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 10 External Flash Memory Download IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG 11 Simulator GUI Simulator Figure A 16 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab IECUBE Property em WASO IEGUBE Property Memory mappings Verity on writing to memory El Access Memory hile Runnine Access by stopping execution Update display during the execution Display update intervallme net update display during the execution El Set Event hile Runnine net event by stopping execution momentarily Break F ail cate Break Trace Timer Coverage El Mask for Inout Sienal Mask NMIO signal Mask NMI signal Mask NMI signal Mask RESET signal Mask STOP signal Memory Connect Debug Flash Self DataFlas Downloa Hook Tra R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 199 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 17 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab IECUBE2 Property em VEEOEZM IEGUBES Property Memory mappings Verity on writing to memory
442. mber with hexadecimal number The meanings of the marks and colors displayed as the values of watch expressions are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Ox0 Character color Blue The value of the watch expression that the user is changing Press the Enter key to write to the target memory Background color Standard color pny 9 x Character color The value of the watch expression that is displayed with the Real time display update function Background color Standard color a Character color The value of the watch expression that has been changed because of the execution of a program Background color Cream To reset the highlighting select the button on the toolbar or Reset Color from the context menu Character color Variable that does not exist is registered as a watch expression or the value of the watch expression cannot be retrieved variable is out of the Background color Standard color cen p l Remarks 1 The O register that cause the microcontroller to operate when it is read is read protected and therefore cannot be read To read the value of read protected I O register select Force Read Value from the context menu 2 Each watch expression acquires the value in the order it was registered As the timing to acquire a value is different the values displayed may be different if the same I O register is r
443. me Displays the name of the register by its function name default Show Absolute Name Displays the name of the register by its absolute name Mixed Display Sets to the mixed display mode and displays the correspondence between the disassembled data and the source text default Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the address at the caret position in this panel Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 and jumps to the memory value corresponding to the address at the caret position in this panel Event area IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Hardware Break First The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a hardware breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the First using type of breakpoint property in the Break category on the Property panel Software Break First The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a software breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the First using type of breakpoint property in the Break category on the Property panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 255 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CPU Register panel This panel is used to display the contents of the CPU register general purpose registers and system registers and change the CPU register values see 2 9 2 Display change the CPU register
444. me operation as the button Saves the contents of the window currently having the focus to the specified file Edit menu This menu varies depending on the window currently having the focus For details on this menu items see Dedicated menu section in the Signal Data Editor window Timing Chart win dow I O Panel window or Serial window View menu This menu varies depending on the window currently having the focus For details on this menu items see Dedicated menu section in the Signal Data Editor window Timing Chart win dow I O Panel window or Serial window Parts menu This menu is added when the O Panel window is opened For details on this menu items see the Parts menu Parts toolbar Figure menu This menu is added when the O Panel window is opened For details on this menu items see the Figure menu Figure toolbar R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 362 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Option menu 7 Simulator menu Signal Data Editor Opens the Signal Data Editor window Same operation as the Al button Timing Chart Opens the Timing Chart window Same operation as the a button I O Panel Opens the O Panel window Same operation as the zl button Serial Opens the Serial window Same operation as the H button 8 Window menu Close All Closes all windows except this window Cascade display of the window
445. memory is full the trace data stops writing and the program stops execution When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to No the program cannot be executed again even if it is executed f Rate of frequency division of trace time tag Specify from the drop down list the frequency division ratio of the counter to be used for time tag display the Time item in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator The drop down list displays the following frequency division ratios values in indicate the resolution and the maximum measurement time when using a time tag counter of 32 bit and a external clock of 50 MHz 1 1 20ns 1 4min default 1 2 40ns 2 8min 1 4 80ns 5 7min 1 8 160ns 11 4min 1 16 820ns 22 8min 1 32 640ns 45 6min 1 64 1280ns 1 5h 1 128 2560ns 3 0h 1 256 5120ns 6 0h 1 512 10240ns 12 2h 1 1024 20480ns 24 4h 1 2048 40960ns 48 8h 1 4096 81920ns 97 6h g Trace memory size frames Specify from the drop down list the trace memory size trace frame number in this property The trace frame is a unit of the trace data One trace frame is used for each operation in fetch write read The drop down list displays the following trace frame numbers 8K default 32K 64K 128K 256K h Enable trace data complement Specify whether to perform complementary display when displaying the collected trace data in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Complement display of instructions bet
446. ment result No is selected by default 3 Simulator You can configure the coverage measurement function in the Coverage category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel as follows Figure 2 170 Coverage Category Simulator El Coverage Use coverage function Yes Reuse coverage result No Coverage area of measurement MBytes HEX SFOOOOO a Use coverage function Specify whether to use the coverage function from the drop down list Select Yes to use the coverage function No is selected by default b Reuse coverage result This property appears only when the Use coverage function property is set to Yes Specify whether to restore the previous code coverage measurement result when connecting to the debug tool by automatically saving the acquired code coverage measurement result when disconnecting from the debug tool Select Yes to restore the previous code coverage measurement result No is selected by default c Coverage area of measurement 1MBytes This property appears only when the Use coverage function property is set to Yes Specify the code coverage measurement area see Table 2 19 Coverage Measurement Area Directly enter the start address of any 1 Mbyte space other than the internal ROM area in hexadecimal number the start address of the internal RAM area is specified by default 2 13 2 Display the coverage measurement result The code coverage measurement is automatic
447. ment value is character string up to 20 characters can be displayed Remark Array arguments are passed as pointers rather than arrays C language specification For this reason if the argument is an array it is displayed as a pointer This area is provided with the following functions a Jump to source line and disassemble By selecting Jump to Source from the context menu the Editor panel is opened with moving the caret to the source line corresponding to the calling function at the current caret position if the Editor panel is already Opened jump to the panel In addition similarly by selecting Jump to Disassemble the Disassemble panel Disasemmble1 is opened with moving the caret to the address corresponding to the calling function at the current caret position if the Disassemble panel is already opened jump to the panel Disassemble1 Remark _ It is possible to jump to the target source line by double clicking on that line as well b Saving the contents of call stack information By selecting the File menu gt gt Save Call Stack Data As the Save As dialog box can be opened and all the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 4 Save the contents of call stack information for details on the method for saving the contents of call stack information R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 288 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE
448. mixing the disassembled text and source text by default but it is also possible to display either one of these by selecting the Display mode After the execution of the program is stopped the display position is automatically updated such that the latest trace data is displayed This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Cautions 1 IECUBE Some of the trace function the real time display update function RRM function and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis 2 IECUBE2 Some of the trace function the timer function except for the Run Break timer and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis Remark When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 47 Trace Panel fa Ye Sf Notation imi wa Eke El Number Time mins ms psns Liner Address Source Disassemble Address Data OxQ0000G4e R 344 D03089 Moma 00h00m imn t 000 m00 ps000ne Ox000006a0 prepare lp Oxc DI Mi 00h min 000 ms00 ps500ns x00004 ctret maincH e 1 a OOhOOmint0s000ms000ue 6One OxO00009ec br 9 _sub0e Ox2 main c 205 OOhOOmint0s000msl00ue500ne OxO00009ba atw r OxOLep Ox0Stt0890 fi baa main c e06 OOhOOmintls000msl00us250ne OUx000009be idw OxO ep 13 Ox03tf0890 A 544a main c 205 OOhOOmintls000ms000ys265Ons OxO00009c stu r7 Ox4Lep
449. mouse to enter the wait status Then click the other key This releases the wait status and enables simultaneous input of both keys Multiple keys can be simultaneously input by setting the wait status for multiple keys but if input is to be performed to the same input pin the key that was input last is valid 2 Locking the key input value To enter two keys simultaneously press the key to be input and right click the mouse to enter the wait status Then click the other key This releases the wait status and enables simultaneous input of both keys Multiple keys can be simultaneously input by setting the wait status for multiple keys but if input is to be performed to the same input pin the key that was input last is valid R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 404 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 96 Connected Parts Display Example Key Matrix R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 405 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Parts Level Gauge Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of level gauge which are one of the connection parts in the O Panel window Input to the simulator can be done from pin connected level gauge in the Simulation mode Note that the connection pin must be an analog input pin There are two types of level gauge display styles slide and dial These style
450. move the caret to the address where the symbol is defined Click the button on the toolbar after moving the caret to the instruction which refers to the symbol Furthermore click the button on the toolbar following the previous operation returns the caret to the instruction which refers to the symbol at previous caret is defined 5 Save the disassembled text contents Contents of the disassembled text can be saved in text files txt CSV files csv When saving to the file the latest information is acquired from the debug tool and it is saved according with the display format on this panel The Data Save dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Disassemble Data As when this operation is taken place with range selection on the panel the disassemble data only in the selected range is saved In this dialog box follow the steps below Figure 2 119 Save the Disassembled Text Contents Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Disassemble Data Ed File Name C CubeSuite w85lesjx3 Disassemblel w J File Type Text files txt a Save Range Address Symbal OxO0000 ae w OxDO0007cO yt a Specify File Name Specify the name of the file to save You can either type a filename directly into the text box up to 259 characters or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items You can also specify the file by clicking the button and selecting a file via the Select
451. mpedance hPinP0O0O Output High Impedance R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 473 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetinputDigitalPinCallback Registers digital pin value input callback Syntax include suo h int SuoSetInputDigitalPinCallback SuoHandle handle SuoInputDigitalPinCallback func Argumeni s Handle of the pin interface Pointer to a user defined function that performs digital pin input processing see InputDigitalPin Func Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to register a user defined function that performs digital pin input processing The registered function is called when a signal is input to the specified pin If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include suo h void InputDigitalPinFunc SuoHandle handle int pinValue SuoHandle hPinP00 void funci void SuoSetInputDigitalPinCallback hPinP00 InputDigitalPinFunc Set input digital pin function Input digital pin function void InputDigitalPinFunc SuoHandle handle int pinValue R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 474 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetinputAnalogPinCallback Registers analog pin value input callback Syntax include suo
452. n c Specify the variable expression for the Printf event to take place Type a variable expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters You can specify up to 10 variable expressions for a single Printf event by separating them with commas If this dialog box is opens with a variable expression selected in the Editor panel Disassemble panel the selected variable expression appears as the default For the basic input format that can be specified as variable expressions and the values output by Printf event see Table A 17 Relationship between Variable Expressions and Output Value Printf Event Click the OK button Set the Printf event to the line address at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When the Printf event is set the a mark is displayed in the event area on the Editor panel Disassemble panel and the set Printf event is managed in the Events panel see 2 15 Manage Events Execute the program Execute the program see 2 7 Execute Programs By executing the program the program momentarily stops immediately before executing the instruction at the location where this event is set and the value of the variable expression specified in this dialog box is output to the Output panel Check the output result The output result format from the Printf event in the Debug Tool tab of the Output panel are as follows Figure 2 174 Example of Output Result of Printf Event Output
453. n integer number between 1and 99 The drop down list displays the following numbers 1 default 2 Table 2 4 Parameter Set Values For External Flash Memory Connection of Flash Memory Data Width Number of Number of Parallel Serial Data bus Flash Memor Microcontroller y 8 8 bit mode Flash Memory l e 8 bit mode Flash Memory 8 bit mode Microcontroller Data bus Microcontroller Flash amory 16 16 bit mode Flash Memory Data bus 8 bit mode Microcontroller Flash Memory 8 bit mode Flash Memory Data bus 16 bit mode Microcontroller Flash Memory 16 bit mode R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 76 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Connection of Flash Memory Data Width Number of Number of Parallel Serial Flash eee Data bus 8 8 eee mode Microcontroller ae Flash fe 8 8 fe mode Flash Memory 8 8 bit mode Flash Pee 8 8 Pee mode b Setting of external bus Change the peripheral I O register setting so as to use external buses which enables accessing from the microcontroller to flash memory This setting can be changed via the IOR panel but the specification of the batch processing to proceed right before downloading by using the hook function is recommended because the setting must be changed for individual registers See 2 16 Use Hook Function c Execute download Execute download see 3 Execute download 2 5 3 Execute uploading The contents of th
454. n list Select Yes to erase the chip No is selected by default Caution This property cannot be changed while connecting to E1 Serial f Programmable I O V850E1 V850ES You can configure the programmable I O area in this category Note that this category is only valid when the selected microcontroller supports the programmable I O area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 51 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark Change this setting to temporarily change variables while debugging To set a common value for the project in the Property panel of the build tool on the Common Options tab in the Device category set the value in Programmable I O area start address property Figure 2 74 Programmable I O Category EA Programmabk I O lt 1 gt lt 2 gt Use Programmable LO area Tes Programmable LO area start address 0 Use Programmable I O area Specify whether to use the programmable I O area Select Yes to use the programmable I O are No is selected by default Programmable I O area start address This property appears only when the Use Programmable O area property is set to Yes Specify the start address of the programmable I O area Specify the address expression within the programmable I O area 0 is specified by default The address is aligned to 16 Kbytes 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Too Settings tab general configurations
455. n of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Step In in the Debug menu Executes the program step by step from the current PC position Step over execution In the case of a function call by the jarl instruction all the source lines instructions in the function are treated as one step and executed until the position where execution returns from the function step by step execution will continue until the same nest is formed as when the jarl instruction has been executed In the case of an instruction other than jarl operation is the same as when the button is clicked This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Step Over in the Debug menu Executes the program until execution returns from the current function or returns to the calling function Return out execution This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Return Out in the Debug menu Disconnects from the currently connected debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Disconnect from Debug Tool in the Debug menu Note Step execution can be carried out either in units of source lines or in units of instructions For details see 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps 3 Pan
456. n of each area Function buttons How to open On the Serial window with the UART serial interface any one of the following Click the Format button Select Format from the Edit menu Description of each area 1 Serial format setting area Data bit length Select the bit length of the transmission data from the drop down list or specify it through direct input default 7 Stop bit length Select the stop bit length from the drop down list default 1 Select the parity information none parity default odd parity even parity O parity R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 437 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select this item to repeat data transfer when the Auto Send button in the Serial window has been clicked Following transmission of the last data during automatic transmission returns to the beginning of the data and performs automatic transmission Following transmission of the last data during automatic transmission stops transmission default Remark For the selectable range see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used Function buttons Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 438 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Format CSI dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the seri
457. n ratio from a cascade menu If a part of waveform data may be lost as a result of changing the display magnification ratio the confirmation dialog box is displayed x 1 32 Sets the magnification ratio to 1 32 x 1 16 Sets the magnification ratio to 1 16 Sets the magnification ratio to 1 8 Sets the magnification ratio to 1 4 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 379 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Option menu Opens the Customize dialog box Timing Chart toolbar Deletes all the waveform data Searches for the change point of the selected pin in the backward direction toward the left Searches for the change point of the selected pin in the forward direction toward the right Opens the Select Pin dialog box The pin for which the waveform data is to be displayed is selected in this dialog box Selects the waveform data display magnification ratio from the drop down list If a part of waveform data may be lost as a result of changing the display magnification ratio the confirmation dialog box is displayed Context menu The following context menus are available in the Client area Clear Deletes all the waveform data Opens the Search Data dialog box Waveform data search is performed in this dialog box Search backward Searches for the change point of the selected pin in the backward direction toward the left Search forward Searches f
458. n the event area with the background color in gray Showing to the corresponding address of the line that no change is allowed Set the break event to a variable I O register on the line in the event area with background color in white Figure 2 127 Example of Setting a Break Event on a Variable in the Source Text 155 15 157 158 164 static _ 160 static 16 1 static _ lb 163 for i 1b 4 165 16 lh 168 163 170 17 itz 1a elobal a r From the context menu above the variable global_a Register to Watch g E l enter a value in Break Settings gt gt Set Writ Break Register Action Event to then press the Enter key Go to Here oet PO to Here Here the program will break when the value Oxb is written to the variable global_a Move To Jump to Function Back to Last Cursor Position ef Tae Jump Shift F12 Trace Settines ih Set Read Break to A mea foo a Lat Set R M Break to Timer Settings 3 Clear Coverage Information Fa Jump to Disassemble dM Break Option a Sut Ctrl By Copy Ctr GS Paste Gtr Pa Open m Mew Fanel b Set a break event to a registered watch expression You can set break events in the Watch panel Follow the operation listed below from the context menu after selecting the registered watch expression Note however that only global variables static variables inside functions file internal static variables and I O re
459. n the program execution is stopped 2 8 5 Other break causes The cause of the break other than the described above is as follows Moreover you can confirm the break cause on the Statusbar in the Main window Table 2 9 Break Cause Other Than the Above Debug Tool to Use Break Cause IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Simulator JTAG Serial Full of the trace Full of the trace memory t81 rerne e o o o a e Oe 2 a r a S a a a a S R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 101 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Debug Tool to Use Break Cause IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE panies Simulator JTAG Serial An occurrence An occurrence of the illegal instruction exception the An occurrence of the illegal instruction exception instruction exception Notes 1 The operation depends on the setting of the Operation after trace memory is full property in the Trace category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel 2 See 2 12 3 Measurable time ranges 3 Only V850E2M core R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 102 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Display Change the Memory Register and Variable This section describes how to display change the memory register and variable 2 9 1 Display change the memory The contents of the memory can be displayed and its values can be changed in the Memory pane below Select the View menu gt gt
460. nal setting area changes Digit Connects each segment LED to 1 grid pin Digit signal settings are per formed in the Digit signal setting area default 16 digits can be specified for the digit signal A segment LED of up to 16 digits can be created with 1 segment LED part Cannot be selected 2 Segment signal setting area Segment Signal This area is used to specify the pins output pins to be connected to the segment signals of the 7 segment LED 14 segment LED as well as their active level Figure This area displays the bitmap of the 7 segment LED 14 segment LED at the top left When Pin Name is input the corresponding location is indicated Pin Name The connection pins can be specified either via direct input or through selec tion from the drop down list The number of segment pins to be connected is 8 in the case of a 7 segment LED and 15 in the case of a 14 segment LED Connection to all the segment pins is possible by using the scroll bar on the right side Active Level The active status can be selected with a option button as follows Sets the active level to LOW HIGH Sets the active level to HIGH default Remark For the pin names that can be specified see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 414 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Digit signal setting area Digit Signal This area is used to specify 7 s
461. nd see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to start transmitting a signal value whose timing is described in a signal data file wvi that has been saved after being edited on the Signal Data Editor window It takes time to complete transmitting the signal data file If you want to know the timing of transmission completion set the transmission end notification function by using the SuoSeitNotifySentWaveCallback function If this function is called for a signal output unit interface that is currently transmitting data the data being transmit ted is canceled and the newly specified data is transmitted Example include suo h SuoHandle hWavel void funcl void SuoSendWaveFile hSeriall foo wvi Send pin data on foo wvi R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 507 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetNotifySentWaveCallback Registers signal output unit transmission end notification callback Syntax include suo h int SuoSetNotifySentWaveCallback SuoHandle handle SuoNotifySentWaveCallback func Argumeni s Handle of the signal output unit interface func Pointer to a user defined function that performs processing when transmission by the signal output unit is completed see NotifySentWaveFunc Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error number
462. nd Replace Dialog Box search and Replace Quick Search Whole Search Quick Replace Whole Replace Search text sub02 sub01 Ww Search location Current paneldmain c s Option search Backward search Forward a Specify Search text Enter characters to search A word variable function at the caret position in the Editor panel is specified by default If you want to change it directly enter the characters into the text box up to 1024 characters or select from the input history in the drop down list up to 10 items b Specify Search location Select Current panel file name from the drop down list If you want to search in the selected range in the Editor panel select Selection area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 80 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 4 c Click the Search Backward Search Forward button When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the large address number to small and the search results are displayed selected in the Editor panel When the Search Forward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the small address number to small and the search results are displayed selected in the Editor panel Remarks 1 Click the Option button to specify to use wild card case sensitivity word by word search and so on 2 Inthe Search and Replace dialog box various search r
463. nd by the search is selected in the Memory panel Note that if an illegal value is specified or while the program is being executed a message will be appear and the memory search will not be performed If focus moves to this dialog box while the memory panel is hidden or another panel has focus then this button will be disabled Cancels the memory search and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 331 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Search dialog box IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator This dialog box is used to search trace data see 2 11 7 Search the trace data The search can be performed at the instruction or source level Figure A 63 Trace Search Dialog Box Trace Search 1 A Source Level Search condition Fetch Address Mne monic Gecess Address 2 Gocess Status Data search range Number Function buttons J Search Backward Search Forward This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator select button on the toolbar On the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator select Find from the context menu Description of each area 1 Tab selection area Select a tab to switch the level of the search This dialog box has the following two tabs
464. ne Start End 2 Total Pass Count Averaze Max Min 1500 na 1500 ne 1500 ne 1500 ns Detail Information Start Execution mamci Og Oxet End Execution mainc 13 0x30 Detail Information Comment 3 Delete the Start Timer event Stop Timer event To delete the set Start Timer event Stop Timer event select Delete Event from the context menu that appears by right clicking on the event mark in the event area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 147 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 3 Measurable time ranges The scope of time that can be measured via timers using Run Break Timer events See 2 12 1 Measure execution time until stop of the execution for details or Timer Result events see 2 12 2 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator for details is shown below If the maximum measurable length of time is exceeded a timer over break is generated and program execution stops Table 2 17 Measurable Time Ranges V850E1 V850ES Debug Tool Debug Tool Run Break Timer Event Break Timer Event Timer Result Event eo ee Approx 195 hours 12 min time for 4K Approx 195 hours 12 min time for 4K cycles cycles Overflow detection included Maximum elapsed cycles 65535 times E Overflow detection included 1 JTAG Approx 7 min time for TCK DCK 10 MHz Overflow detection included MINICUBE2 1 Serial Approx 119 hours 18 min
465. nect Set Debug To Download F Flash Optio Hook Trans Figure A 24 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab Simulator V850E1 V850ES Property ce WEBO Simulator Property Memory mappings El Access Memory hile Runnne Update display during the execution Display update intervallme Break Trace Timer Coverage El Simulator GUI Display Simulator GUI Display Simulator GUI on top of other windows Yes Memory Connect Settings Debug Tool 5 Download File Hook Transactio R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 203 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 25 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab Simulator V850E2M Property ee VEEOE2ZM Simulator Property Memory mappings El Access Memory While Runnine Update display during the execution Display update intervallme Break Trace Timer Coverage El Simulator GUI Display Simulator GUI Display Simulator GUI on top of other windows Memory Connect Set Debug To Download F Flash Optic Description of each category 1 Memory A Hook Trans The detailed information on memories is displayed and its configuration can be changed For details on memory types that are displayed see the Memory Mapping dialog box Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed by the types of memory aregNote Default Total number of the memory mapping
466. nection parts of the O Panel window The setting method for these connection parts differs from those for other parts The connection information of all the pins is managed as a group in this dialog box Figure A 112 Pull up Pull down Dialog Box Pull up Pull down Pin name FIKED Lowy FIAED_HIGH RESET POL MMI PO3 INTPOYADTRG PO4 INTP1 1 POS INTPZ POBYINTPS PIO ANOO PIANC P30 TROAGYSOB4 P31 RADAOSINTP PS2 ASCK AOS SC P337 TIPO TOROS P34 TIP 0 TOP10 P1250007 T0 Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Pull Up Pull Gown F Pull Down Pull Up Pull Up Pull Up Pull Up Pull Gown Cancel With the O Panel window in focus click the H button or select Pull up Pull down from the Parts menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 425 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Connection information display area Pull Up Pull Down Displays the connected status of the pins ines re patapbaidowesercomesod Buttons Changes the pin connection information of the pull up pull down resistors Pull Up Connects the pins selected to pull up resistors When connection is completed Pull Up is displayed Pull Down Connects the pins selected to pull down resistors When connection is completed Pull Do
467. nection to a host machine Connect the debug tool IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 or Simulator to be used to a host machine Select the debug tool to use Select the debug tool to use in a project Remark The selectable debug tool differs depending on the microcontroller type to be used in a project Configure operating environment of the debug tool Configure the operating environment of the debug tool selected in steps 5 IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 aal Simulator Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite to start communication Execute downloading Download the load module created in steps 3 to the debug tool Display source files Display the contents of the downloaded load module source files on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 12 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 10 Execute programs Execute the program by using the operation method corresponding to a purpose If you wish to stop the program at the arbitrary position set a breakpoint break event before executing the program see 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers Note These functions are implemented by setting events to the debug tool used See 2 15 6 Notes for setting events when you use events Remark V850E2M When the sel
468. ng Jump to Memory the Memory panel Memory1 is opened with moving the caret to the memory value corresponding to the address at the current caret position if the Memory panel Memory1 is already opened jump to the panel g Code coverage measurement result display IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator When the coverage function is valid lines corresponding to the specified coverage measurement area are shown highlighted based on the code coverage measurement result that is acquired by executing the program See 2 13 Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator for details on the coverage measurement h Saving the contents of disassembled data The Data Save dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Disassemble Data As and the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 5 Save the disassembled text contents for details on the method for saving the contents of disassembled data t Toolbar Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Sets to the mixed display mode and displays the correspondence between the disassembled data and the source text default Specifies the caret position so that it follows the current PC value HE Moves the caret to the define position of the selected symbol Moves the caret to the position address immediately before
469. nge corresponding to the disassembled text line Table 2 21 View of Code Coverage Measurement Result Default Remarks 1 The code coverage measurement result is automatically updated at a break in each panel 2 Background colors above depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box 3 Background colors above are not shown outside the coverage measurement area see Table 2 19 Coverage Measurement Area 4 When the downloaded lode module file is older than the source file currently being open the displaying of the code coverage measurement result is not performed in the Editor panel Figure 2 171 View of the Code Coverage Measurement Result Editor Panel oe Comment oe Comment oe Comment Code on this line has been executed by 0 2k Comment Comment not yet executed Comment F U Pa Os R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 152 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 0000 406 OOO00 410 OOOU0412 OOO0041 4 UOOU0416 000004 c 000004 e OO0U0 420 OOOO 422 OOOU0 426 OOO00 42 a OOO00 42 c NNE SAN Figure 2 172 View of the Code Coverage Measurement Result Disassemble Panel Usd sub sublittx 2 Code on this line has been executed by 100 Code on this line has been executed by 0 4an7o2 4 not yet executed BOO SORT 4 3 rU Pa OO60 ro rile f4hede 1 Oxfect p rll Seeli Oxi00 r
470. ning status Displays the current state of the program with the following icons and character strings State of Program Display Contents Stopped BREAK In step execution bh STEP b Core status Displays the current core statuses of the debug tool When there is the possibility that the core is in two or more statuses the corresponding display contents are displayed separated by amp MINICUBE In HALT mode ELIAS Stpldle Hardware STOP Software STOP IDLE mode c Current PC Displays the current PC position with a hexadecimal value When this button is clicked the caret moves to the current PC position on the Editor panel Toolbar The function of this toolbar is the same as that of the Debug toolbar on the Main window For details on the function of each button see 2 Debug toolbar R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 180 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel is used to display the project components microcontroller build tool debug tool etc in a tree structure On this panel You can select or change the debug tool to use Figure A 4 Project Tree Panel Tree eisample 850 Project JE uPDOFS746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool eS Code Generator Design Tool A CASO Build Tool che VESO Simulator Debug Tool J OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Bs File TI Build to
471. nput input continues from the beginning Remark The signal data input to the selected pin can be controlled by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Pin Status gt gt Valid Invalid 6 Operation at CPU reset When CPU reset occurs the current signal input line returns to the beginning If a CPU reset occurs during signal input input continues from the beginning same operation as the iz button R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 373 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Loop dialog box This dialog box is used to perform detailed settings loop start stop and loop count related to the loop information in the Signal Data Editor window Figure A 82 Loop Dialog Box v Start of Loop z Endless loop _ End of Loop Function buttons J This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Signal Data Editor window any one of the following Double click the Mark area Select the Mark area then select Mark gt gt Loop Dialog from the Edit menu Description of each area 1 Loop information setting area Start of Loop Select this check box to set the Start of Loop this check box to set the Start of Select this check box to set the Start of Loop Endless loop Endless loop Select this option button to set the Endless Loop Loop count Select this option butt
472. nt up to a maximum of three events is listed and displayed 2 Address area The address per line to start disassembling is displayed hexadecimal number notation fixing In addition the current PC mark E that corresponds to the current PC position PC register value is displayed The address width corresponds to the one in memory space of the specified microcontroller in the project R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 249 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE For the source text line in the mixed display mode line numbers xxx in the source file correspond to the start address are displayed This area is provided with the following functions a Pop up display By superimposing the mouse cursor on a address or line number the following information is pop up displayed Address Format lt Label name gt lt Offset value gt Example1 main 0x10 Example2 sub function 0x20 Source line number Format lt Load module name gt lt File name gt lt Line numbers Example1 test1 out6main c 40 Example2 main c 100 Note lt Load module name gt is displayed only when multiple load modules have been downloaded to the debug tool 3 Disassemble area The labels that have been defined at the start address the code data disassembled mnemonics and the corresponding source text etc are displayed as follows Figure A 41 Display Contents of the Disassemble Area In the C
473. nt SuoCreatePin const char pinName SuoHandle handle Argumeni s Location where the handle of the pin interface is to be stored Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function generates a pin interface The generated pin interface is associated with the name specified for pinName Also the pin specified as pin Name is generated If this function is successful the handle of the generated pin interface can be obtained The pin interface can then be controlled by specifying this handle The handle can also be obtained by using the SuoGeiPinHandle function Example include suo h SuoHandle hPinP00 SuoHandle hPinABC SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option SuoCreatePin P00 amp hbPinP00 Create POO SuoCreatePin ABC amp hPinABC Create ABC R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 469 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoGetPinHandle Acquires pin interface handle Syntax include suo h SuoHandle SuoGetPinHandle const char pinName Argumeni s Return value p Macro o Beseription a of the specified Normal completion pin interface NULL Exit with error abend Description This function is used to obtain the handle of the specified pin interface Specify the name of a function specified by th
474. nto Programs A Printf event momentarily stops the execution of the program at a specified location and executes the printf command via software processing When a Printf event is set the program momentarily stops immediately before executing the command at the location where this event is set and the value of the variable expression specified in this dialog box is output to the Output panel This dialog box appears only when connected to the debug tool Cautions 1 Also see 2 15 6 Notes for setting events for details on Printf events e g limits on the number of enabled events Once a Printf event has been set its variable expression cannot be edited If you need to edit a variable expression first delete the Printf event and then create a new one Figure A 58 Action Events Dialog Box fiction Events Variable expression Example aaa bbb coc 4 Output str ire Example Sample aoe O Example for Output panel sample aaa 10 bbb 20 ccc 30 Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Editor panel move the caret to the line where you wish to set a Printf event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Disassemble panel move the caret to the address where you wish to set a Printf event then select Register Action Event from the context menu Description
475. nual evaluation of the address expression The timing to change the display start position can be determined by specifying in the Move when Stop check box and the Move button Move when The caret is moved to the address which is automatically calculated from the address Stop expression after the program is stopped The address expression is not automatically evaluated after the program is stopped Click the Move button to manually evaluate the address expression Move When the Move when Stop check box is not checked click this button to evaluate the address expression and move the caret to the result address of the evaluation Remark Ifthe specified address expression is the symbol and its size can be recognized everything from the start address to the end address of that symbol is displayed selected Change display format of values The display format of the memory value area character string area can be changed using buttons below on the toolbar Note that the button is invalid while program is executed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 104 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Modify the memory contents The memory values can be edited T Directly edit from the keyboard after moving the caret to the line to modify in memory value area characters area The color of the memory value changes when it is in editing Press the Enter key to write the edited value to the tar
476. nvalid execution is detected IECUBE The Other break causes have occurred b Execution ignoring break related events Click the g button on the debug toolbar When this operation is performed the program continues executing until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 8 1 Stop the program manually A fail safe break has occurred see 2 8 4 Stop the program when an invalid execution is detected IECUBE The Other break causes have occurred Remark The action event that is currently set does not occur while the program with this operation is in execution c Execution to the caret position To start this operation move the caret to the line instruction to stop the program in the Editor panel Disassemble panel then select Go to Here from the context menu When this operation is performed the program continues executing until either of the following occurs R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 92 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The PC has reached the address of the caret position The button has been clicked see 2 8 1 Stop the program manually A fail safe break has occurred see 2 8 4 Stop the program when an invalid execution is detected IECUBE The Other break causes have occurred Caution When the corresponding address of the line at the caret position does not exist the program is executed to the corresponding address
477. o be downloaded Directly enter from the keyboard or specify with the Select Download File dialog box opened by clicking the button that appears at right by selecting this property File type Select Load module file default Download object Specify No Download symbol Select Yes default information c Click the OK button Enable all the configuration in this dialog box and add the specified load module file Only the symbol information included in the load module file will be downloaded 5 Download to external flash memory IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG CubeSuite can download the file specified with the Download Files dialog box to a flash memory connected to the external bus of the target microcontroller To do so follow the steps below a Configuration of the Property panel Configure the following settings with the External Flash Memory Download category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel Figure 2 108 External Flash Memory Download Category E External Flash Memory Download External flash memory download Information file tart address Data width Number of parallel Number of serial E g yi lt 1 gt External flash memory download Specify from the drop down list whether to download load module files or hex files to an external flash memory Select Yes No is selected by default lt 2 gt Information file Specify the external flash memory informat
478. oard The copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 262 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following cascade menus to specify the notation of a data value are displayed ASCII Include Hexadecimal Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value Value Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in the default notation default Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in hexadecimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in signed decimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in unsigned decimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in octal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in binary number Displays the character string of the selected item including sub items in ASCII code If the character size is 2 bytes and above it is displayed with the characters for each 1 byte arranged side by side Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data displays it in the default notation Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that when the value is not 8 byte data displays it in the default notation R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 263 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver
479. ocessor Element to be debugged and display the core status This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Caution This panel cannot be opened when the selected microcontroller is the single core product Remarks 1 Synchronous executions and synchronous breaks are performed in all PE in principle Note however that step executions are performed only within a PE currently being selected 2 Breakpoints are automatically set to be valid in all PE Figure A 3 Debug Manager Panel Debug Manager Toolbar fa Cy DDL l selects debug target core 1 BET PE Debue target core status Running status m Core status Current PO Co 00000086 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar How to open From the View menu select Debug Manager Description of each area 1 Selects debug target core area Select a core PEn to be debugged with a option button Note that this area becomes invalid during execution of a program Remark You can also select a core to be debugged on the statusbar in the Main window 2 Debug target core status area This area displays the status of the core currently being selected Remark You can also confirm the information displayed in this area on the statusbar in the Main window R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 179 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Run
480. ode Change the operation mode of this window to edit mode to create objects The edit mode can be set by any one of the following methods Select the Figure menu gt gt Select Click the button on the toolbar Select the Edit menu gt gt Select All 2 Creating figure objects a Line Select the Figure menu gt gt Line or click the N button on the toolbar gt The mouse cursor changes to a cross shape and line drawing becomes possible Drag the cursor from the line start position to the end position gt The line start position and the line end position are connected by a straight line The line thickness and shape are the default settings R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 389 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Rectangle Rounded rectangle Fan shape Select the Figure menu gt gt Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Ellipse Fan shaped or click the L OI E S button on the toolbar gt The mouse cursor changes to a cross shape and each drawings becomes possible Drag the mouse cursor from the top left corner to the bottom right corner of the drawing area rectangular area gt The corresponding figure is displayed in the drawing area with the mouse position forming the lower right corner Drop the figure to fix its size gt Rectangles are drawn in the same size as the rectangular area and other figure shapes are drawn ina size tha
481. of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 6 Clear the trace memory To clear the collected trace data contents click the button on the toolbar Note that this button becomes invalid during trace operation Remark When Yes is specified in the Clear trace memory before running property in the Trace category in the Debug Too Settings tab of the Property panel the trace memory is cleared every time the program executes 2 11 7 Search the trace data To search the collected trace data click the button to open the Trace Search dialog box IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator note that the search is disabled during the program is executing In this dialog box follow the steps below When the tab on the tab selection area is selected the trace data can be searched in instruction level source level Note however that if you search the trace data at the instruction level the display mode must be set in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator to the Mixed display mode or Disassemble display mode When searching at the source level the mode must be set to the Mixed display mode or Source display mode Figure 2 157 Search the Trace Data Trace Search Dialog Box Trace Search Tab selection area Search condition Fetch Address Mnemonic Geoess Address Gocess Statue Data search range Number search Backward Search Forward This sect
482. of the part bitmap is hidden when the window size is reduced however the selected part cannot be moved by using the arrow keys 10 Panell EBS Here the part 14 segment LED in this Here the part 14 segment LED in this case case can be moved using the arrow keys cannot be moved using the arrow keys d Changing object size After selecting the object whose size is to be changed then drag the tracker displayed e Cut Copy Paste Delete Group UnGroup an object After selecting the object select the corresponding item from the Edit menu f Changing object sequence Bring to Front Send to Back Bring Forward Send Backward After selecting the object select the corresponding item from the Edit menu 5 Inputting text Select Figure menu gt gt Text or click the A button on the toolbar gt The mouse cursor changes to a cross shape Drag the mouse cursor from the top left corner of the character drawing area rectangular area to the lower right corner R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 391 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE gt This rectangular area serves as the character drawing area Click in the character drawing area gt The cursor is displayed and character input becomes possible 6 List display of objects Fugure objects and part objects created in this window can be displayed as a list by selecting the View menu gt gt Parts List in ad
483. ol etc provided by CubeSuite in order of output Debug Tool Displays messages output from the debug tool Display only operation logs for the debug tool out of those for various components debug tool design tool build tool etc provided by CubeSuite Search And Replace Displays the batch search results from the Search and Replace dialog box Caution Even if a new message is output on a deselected tab tab selection will not automatically switch In this case mark will be added in front of the tab name indicating that a new message has been output File menu Output panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Output tab name Overwrites the contents that are displayed on the currently selected tab to the preciously saved text file see c Saving a log Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Output tab name As This item becomes invalid while building Save Output file name Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents that are displayed on the currently selected As tab to the specified text file txt see c Saving a log R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 308 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW
484. ol generated Files out sample 650 0ut out romp out hex sample v8S0 hex B Startup s start c_ main c E sample lib Subproject JPE UPD70F3746 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool H Cade Generator Design Tool amp Cas50 Build Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool a f File The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Toolbar Context menu How to open From the View menu select Project Tree R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 181 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project tree area Project components are displayed in tree view with the following given node Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug tool Microcontroller type The selected microcontroller type V850 or V850E2M is dis played Debug tool name The debug tool IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Serial E1 Serial E1 JTAG or Simulator used in the project is displayed Simulator is selected by default Select the debug tool node to configure with the Property panel If the Property panel is not being opened double click the node to open the corresponding Property panel Toolbar Sorts the category nodes and the file names into their name character code order Clicking repeatedly toggles the sort order between ascending and descending Indicates th
485. on Access Read Write Read Write Simulator Execution Execution Access Read Write Read Write R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 303 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE lt File name Line Shows the line number of the source Display format is the same as the watch type number gt scope specification expression When multiple load module files are downloaded lt Load module file name File name Line numbers is displayed For those events set in the Disassemble panel display lt Line numbers in the format lt Symbol offset gt in the condition below Line information exists and the specified position that the event is set not the top of the line information Line information does not exist and symbol information exists Show lt Line numbers in in the following condition Line information and symbol information does not exist lt Variable name gt Shows the variable name in the source file Display format is the same as the watch type scope specification expression lt Comparison Condition to compare is shown If the comparison value is not specified conaition gt comparison condition is not shown lt Comparison value gt Comparison value is shown If the comparison value is not specified comparison condition is not shown Address in the memory area is shown only in hex number lt Start End gt Shows whether the contents of the detailed information is
486. on Handler Switch Function Bank 1 EH CFG EH RESET EH BASE Processor Protection Function Group Processor Protection Violation Bank VSECR VSTID VSADR VMECR VMTID VMADR MCA CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE some feo a e This area is provided with the following functions a Registering watch expression CPU registers categories can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions See 1 Register a watch expression for details on how to operate it Remarks 1 When you have registered a watch expression with a category as the object all of the CPU registers belonging to that category are registered as watch expressions 2 A scope specification is automatically added to a registered watch expression R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 260 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Value area The values of each CPU register are displayed and changed The radix of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item In addition a display format adding the value in hexadecimal number constantly can also be selected as well The meanings of the colors of the CPU register values are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Character color The va
487. on is acquired from the debug tool and it is saved according with the display format on this panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 111 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The Data Save dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Memory Data As when this operation is taken place with range selection on the panel the memory data only in the selected range is saved In this dialog box follow the steps below Figure 2 136 Save the Memory Data Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Memory Data ES rie None File Type Text files txt Ww Save Range ddress Sy mbal O 00000000 v Ox000000ef w a Specify File Name Specify the name of the file to save You can either type a filename directly into the text box up to 259 characters or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items You can also specify the file by clicking the button and selecting a file via the Select Data Save File dialog box b Specify File Type Select the format in which to save the file from the following drop down list The following file formats can be selected List Item Format Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formatNote Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal
488. on the debug tool can be done a b c d e f Memory Access Memory While Running Set Event While Running Break Mask for Input Signal External Flash Memory Download E1 JTAG a Memory You lt 1 gt can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 75 Memory Category O Memory E Memory mappings 4 0 Internal ROM area Hi Non map area 2 Internal RAM area 3 VO Register area Verity on writing to memory Ves Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed for each type of memory area The memory mapping status cannot be changed on this panel If it is necessary to add a memory mapping click on the Memory Mapping property and click on the button that appears on the right end of the setting field The Memory Mapping dialog box opens perform the setting from there See the section for the Memory Mapping dialog box for details on how to configure the parameters R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 52 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 76 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box O Memory Bj Memory mappings 4 0 Internal ROM area H Non map area Caution If you are not connected to a debug tool then only memory mapping areas added by user is displayed Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type lt 2 gt Veri
489. on to set the Loop Count Sets the count value by spin button 1 to 99 Perform loop the specified count End of Loop Select this check box to set the End of Loop this check box to set the End of Select this check box to set the End of Loop Function buttons Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 374 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Pin dialog box This dialog box is used when selecting pins displayed in the Signal Data Editor window and the Timing Chart window The pin information set in this dialog box can be saved as a pin information file pin by clicking the Save button Moreover the saved file contents can be restored by clicking the Load button Figure A 83 Select Pin Dialog Box Select Fin Analoe Function Name F ANGL y 11ANG w 1 P40 S5IB0 50 401 w Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Signal Data Editor window Timing Chart window any one of the following Click the fr button Select Select Pin from the Edit menu Description of each area 1 Connection pins setting area Up to 256 pins can be selected by using the scrollbar located on the right side of the pin name setting area Pin Name This area
490. ond one by one to variables of C language CPU registers I O register or assembler symbols can be edited In addition read only I O register values cannot be edited Remark This operation can be taken place while the program is in execution See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on how to operate it R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 122 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 7 8 You can use ASCII characters also to the values of the watch expression Examples 1 Entering via an ASCII character In the Value area for the variable ch enter A gt gt 0x41 will be written to the memory area allocated to ch 2 Entering via a numeric value In the Value area for the variable ch enter 0x41 gt gt 0x41 will be written to the memory area allocated to ch 3 Entering via an ASCII string Set the display format of character array str to ASCII and in the Value area enter ABC gt gt 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x00 will be written to the memory area allocated to str Remarks 1 If a number with fewer digits than the size of the variable is entered the higher order digits will be padded with zeroes 2 lf anumber with more digits than the size of the variable is entered the higher order digits will be masked 3 Ifthe display format of a character array type char or unsigned char is set to ASCII then the value can also be entere
491. only when connected to the debug tool Caution CPU reset may be generated automatically depending on the selected microcontroller when you click the Write button after changing the configuration of this dialog box Figure A 55 Flash Options Setting Dialog Box IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG Flash Options Setting Flash option property 1 gt E Option Bytes Setting OPBTU ex FFFFFFES OPETI FFFFFFFF OFBT2 ee FFFFFFFF OPET FFFFFFFF OPBT4 ea FFFFFFFF OPBTE e FFFFFFFF OPBTE em FFFFFFFF OPET e FFFFFFFF OPBTS FFFFFFFF 2 gt On chip Debug Security ID Setting security ID Hee FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 3 gt Security Setting Disable read No Disable program No Disable chip erase Ho Disable block erase Ho Disable program boot block No 4 gt Boot Block Gluster Setting Boot block last number HEX 0 5 gt Flash Shield Window Function Setting Start black number HEX O End block number HEX 2FF Option bytes setting 6 gt C Chip erase when writing uncton buon R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 319 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 56 Flash Options Setting Dialog Box Simulator Flash Options Setting Flash option property 1 gt O Option Bytes Setting OPBTO FFFFFFES OPETI FFFFFFFF OPET FFFFFFFF OPBTS FFFFFFFF OPBTA FFFFFFFF OPETE FFFFFFFF OPBTE FFFFFFFF OPET FFFFFFFF OPBTE FFF
492. onnect to Disconnect from the Debug Tool 66 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite 66 2 4 2 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite 66 2 5 Download Upload Programs 67 2 5 1 Execute downloading 67 2 5 2 Advanced downloading 70 2 5 3 Execute uploading 77 2 6 Display Change Programs 79 2 6 1 Display source files 79 2 6 2 Display the result of disassembling 83 2 6 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations 87 2 6 4 Perform line assembly 88 2 Execute Programs 91 2 7 1 Reset microcontroller CPU 91 2 2 Execute programs 91 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps 93 2 8 Stop Programs Break 95 2 8 1 Stop the program manually 95 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint 95 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 97 2 8 4 Stop the program when an invalid execution is detected IECUBE 100 2 8 5 Other break causes 101 2 9 Display Change the Memory Register and Variable 103 2 9 1 Display change the memory 103 2 9 2 Display change the CPU register 113 2 9 3 Display change the I O register 115 2 9 4 Display change global variables static variables 117 2 9 5 Display change local variables 117 2 9 6 Display change watch expressions 119 2 10 Display Information on Function Call from Stack 124 2 10 1 Display call stack information 124 2 11 Collect Execution History of Programs IECUBE
493. ontents of memory values The Data Save dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Memory Data As and the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 7 Save the memory contents for details on the method for saving the contents of memory values 4 Character string area Character codes that are converted from memory values are displayed Specification of the character code can be specified by clicking the button on the toolbar or selecting Encoding from the context menu item This area is provided with the following functions a Changing the character string A character string can be changed only when ASCII has been selected as the character code Directly edit from the keyboard after moving the caret to the character string to be edited The color of the character string changes when itis in editing Press the Enter key to write the edited value to the target memory if the Esc key is pressed before the Enter key is pressed the editing is cancelled b Copying and pasting By selecting a range of character strings with the mouse the contents of the range can be copied to the clipboard as a character string and these contents can be pasted to the caret position These operations are performed by the selecting from the context menu or selecting from the Edit menu However the paste operation is possible only when ASCII has been selected as the character code
494. ontroller 78KOR microcontroller and V850 microcontroller CubeSuite can run all the operations needed for developing the programs such as designing cording building debug ging and flash programing In this manual the debugging is explained out of those operations needed for the program development In this chapter an overview of debugging products that CubeSuite provides is explained 1 1 Summary You can effectively debug simulate the program developed for the V850 microcontroller using the debugger which Cube Suite provides 1 2 Features The following are the features of the debugger provided by CubeSuite Connecting to the various debug tools A pleasant debugging environment for target systems is provided by connecting to Full spec Emulators IECUBE IECUBE2 On chip Debugging Emulators MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 and Simulator C source text and disassembled text are shown mixed The C source text and the disassembled text are shown mixed on the same panel Source level debugging and instruction level debugging The source level debugging and the instruction level debugging for a C source program can be done Support of flash self programming emulation V850E1 V850ES Flash self programming emulation can be performed with IECUBE V850E2M Flash self programming emulation including settings of option bytes can be performed with all of the connectable debug tools Data flash memory writing function When the sel
495. op down list Note that it is fixed to Simulator Configuration File cfg R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 359 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Uses the specified simulator configuration file Cancel Closes the dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 360 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Simulator GUI window This window appears automatically by default after connecting to the debug tool when a microcontroller whose Simulator supports peripheral function simulations is selected and Simulator is selected as the debug tool to use see 2 17 Use the Simulator GUI Simulator In Simulator GUI other windows Signal Data Editor window Timing Chart window I O Panel window and Serial win dow are manipulated from this window Cautions 1 When a microcontroller whose Simulator does not support peripheral function simulations instruction simulation version is selected this window cannot be opened 2 This window and windows opened from it cannot be docked to the CubeSuite Main window 3 The help for this window will not be displayed even if the F1 key on the keyboard is pressed when no window opened from this window is opened To open the help for this window select the Help menu gt gt Main Window on this window 4 The x button on this window s titlebar is invalid it is invalid even if using
496. op even after writing Stop when accessed to Specify whether to stop the execution right after accessing to the non mapping area of the internal non mapping Internal ROMN te ROM This property is invalid when the selected microcontroller is a ROMless product Default values Does not stop even after accessing Stop when accessed to Specify whether to stop the execution right after accessing to the non mapping area of the internal non mapping Internal RAMN te RAM Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Stops right after accessing values Does not stop even after accessing R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 207 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Verify when wrote to Specify whether to perform a verify check that detects a write operation to the write protected Read only Internal area in the internal RAM when the program execution is stoppedNe RAM Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Outputs messages when write operations have been detected values l l Does not check a write operation Stop when read from Specify whether to stop the execution right after reading from the read protected area in the I O read protected I O register area Stop when wrote to Specify whether to stop the execution right after writing to the write protected area in the I O write protected I O register area Register Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Stops right after writing
497. or the change point of the selected pin in the forward direction toward the right Select Pin Opens the Select Pin dialog box The pin for which the waveform data is to be displayed is selected in this dialog box Switches on off display of the Maker area and Waveform area Selects the waveform data display magnification ratio If a part of waveform data may be lost as a result of changing the display magnification ratio the confirmation dialog box is displayed Move MakerA Moves marker A to the cursor location The same action can be accomplished by pressing the Shift key left clicking Move MakerB Moves market B to the cursor location The same action can be accomplished by pressing the Ctrl key left clicking Operation Pin selection Display of timing chart Timing measurement for timing chart 3 Clearing of timing chart Data search function Operation at reset R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 380 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 1 Pin selection To display the timing chart it is first necessary to select the pin to be displayed Open the Select Pin dialog box by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Select Pin and select the pin to be edited Once a pin is selected its name is displayed in the Pin Name area 2 Display of timing chart The waveforms of the selected pins are displayed in timing chart form through execution of the prog
498. or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Trace Data As Save Trace Data As Opens the Data Save dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt CSV file csv see e Saving trace data Edit menu Trace panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Trace panel other items are all invalid Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Copies the contents of the selected line to the clipboard multiple line selections impossible Opens the Trace Search dialog box IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Context menu Clear Trace Clears the trace memory and the display of this panel initialized This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Opens the Trace Search dialog box IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Copy Copies the contents of the selected line to the clipboard multiple line selections impossible This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Mixed Display Sets to the Mixed display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Disassemble View Sets to the Disassemble display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Source View Sets to the Source display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during exe
499. or values in FlashFLMDCheck functions to emulate FlashFLMDCheck error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values 3 Security Flag Emulation The detailed information on the security flag emulation function is displayed and its configuration can be changed Disable chip erase Specify whether to emulate to disable chip erase Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Emulates to disable chip erase values Does not emulate to disable chip erase Disable block erase Specify whether to emulate to disable block erase Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Emulates to disable block erase values Does not emulate to disable block erase Disable read Specify whether to emulate to disable reading This property does not appear when the flash memory process is Type1 Note and the specification type of the flash self programming is Ver 2 00 or earlier Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Emulates to disable reading values l Does not emulate to disable reading Disable program Specify whether to emulate to disable writing values i Does not emulate to disable writing Disable boot block Specify whether to emulate to disable rewrite boot area cluster reprogram This property appears only when the flash memory process is Type2 or Type3 values Does not emulate to disable rewrite boot area N
500. ory The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt Figure 2 19 Access Memory While Running Category IECUBE El Access Memory hile Runnine Access by stopping execution Yes Update display during the execution Yes Display update intervallme B00 oet update display during the execution automatically Yes Hocess by release HALT mode Yes Figure 2 20 Access Memory While Running Category IECUBE2 El Access Memory hile Runnine Access by stopping execution Tes Update display during the execution Yes Display update intervallme FOO Access by release HALT mode Yes Access by stopping execution Specify whether to allow access to the memory area where cannot be accessed while executing a program target memory area I O register area from the drop down list Select Yes to allow access No is selected by default Update display during the execution Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel during a program execution Select Yes to update the display default Caution IECUBE This property becomes invalid when the Use for trace data property in the Trace category is set to Trace see 2 11 1 Configure the trace operation Display update interval ms This proper
501. ory cannot be changed while connecting to E1 Figure 2 69 Connection with Target Board Category E1 Serial O Connection with Target Board Communication method UART AO Power target from the emulator MAX 200ma Yes Supply voltage ad it Figure 2 70 Connection with Target Board Category E1 JTAG O Gonnection with Target Board Power target fram the emulator MG 200ma Wes Supply voltage cao lt 1 gt Communication method E1 Serial Specify the port from the drop down list to which to connect E1 Serial when performing serial communication between E1 Serial and the device in the target system The type of the port in the drop down list differs depending on the selected microcontroller Note however that if the port that can be used for serial communication is limited by the currently selected microcontroller it is not possible to change the communication method displayed by default the default communication method depends on the currently selected microcontroller lt 2 gt Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA Specify whether to supply power to the target system from E1 Select Yes to supply power to the target system No is selected by default lt 3 gt Supply voltage This property appears only when the Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA property is set to Yes R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 50 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Specify the p
502. ot Swap Cluster and Boot Block Cluster R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 220 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE DataFlash Emulation Settings tab IECUBE This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab appears only when the selected microcontroller incorporates the data flash memory 1 DataFlash Emulation 2 EEPROM Library Error 3 Writing Time Erasing Time Figure A 27 Property Panel DataFlash Emulation Settings Tab Property ee WASO JECUBE Property DataF lash emulation Mo 2 gt E EEPROM Library Error Generate Wordvrite error Mo Address generated Word rite error U Generate Block Erase error Mo Gddress generated Block Erase error 0 Generate Block Verity error Ho Address generated Block Verity error U Generate Block BlankGheck error Mo Address generated Block BlankGheck error 0 3 gt E Writing Time Erasing Time Wk tine time Typical number of times that i assumed by Erasing time Typical number of times that is assumed by DataF lash Emulation Connect 4 Debug T 4 Flash Self y DataFla Downloa Hook Tra Description of each category 1 DataFlash Emulation The detailed information on the data flash emulation functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed DataFlash emulation Specify whether to use the data fla
503. ote The determination of the flash memory process is made when connected to the debug tool R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 219 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Reset Vector Boot Swap The detailed information on reset vector and boot swap functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed Reset vector address Specify the reset vector address This property appears only when the flash memory process is Type1 and the specification type of the flash self programming is Ver 3 00 or later Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFFE in hexadecimal number values Note 1 Boot swap cluster Specify the target area of boot swap clusters The value set in this property is reflected to the target area in a boot block clusterNote 2 This property appears only when the flash memory process is Type4Note r Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 0 to 127 in decimal number values Notes 1 The determination of the flash memory process is made when connected to the debug tool Consequently this will not be hidden when disconnected from the debug tool 2 Prohibition of boot area rewriting can be set to the target area of boot swap clusters by using the microcontroller s security function For the relationship between the value set in this property and the target are of boot block clusters see Table 2 2 Relationship between Bo
504. ower voltage supplied to the target system from the following drop down list 3 3V default 5 0V e Flash You can configure the flash memory rewriting in this category Figure 2 71 Flash Category E1 Serial V850E1 V850ES E Flash Security ID ee FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Chip erase when starting No Figure 2 72 Flash Category E1 JTAG V850E1 V850ES El Flash security ID Hee FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Figure 2 73 Flash Category E1 JTAG V850E2M El Flash security ID Hee FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF lt 1 gt Security ID This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports the ROM security function on chip debug security ID for flash memory Specify a security ID for reading codes in the internal ROM or internal flash memory For details on the on chip debug security ID see E1 User s Manual V850E1 V850ES Directly enter 20 digits hexadecimal number 10 bytes FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF is specified by default V850E2M Directly enter 24 digits hexadecimal number 12 bytes FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF is specified by default Caution This property cannot be changed while connecting to E1 Remark V850E1 V850ES When you change the setting of the property a message appears prompting you to select whether or not to change the security ID of the build tool lt 2 gt Chip erase when starting E1 Serial Specify whether to erase the chip when connecting to the debug tool from the drop dow
505. own list up to 10 items Searches are case insensitive and only complete matches are retrieved Variable Name This item is only enabled if The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected You can either type the variable name to be find directly into the text box or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Searches are case insensitive and only complete matches are retrieved Kind This item is only enabled if The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected Select the access type Reference Substitution Reference or Substitution from the drop down list Value This item is only enabled if The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected Specify the accessed variable value in hexadecimal number You can either type a variable value directly into the text box or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 338 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The variable value can also be specified as a range In this case specify a range by specifying variable values in both the left and right text boxes If the right hand text box is blank then access locations with the fixed variable values specified in the left hand text box will be searched for 3 Search range area a Number Specify the
506. panel Find Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Search tab Replace Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Replace tab R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 289 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu All the items from the context menu become invalid during execution of a program Copies the contents of the selected line to the clipboard Displays the call stack information with the module file name default Displays the call stack information with the parameters arguments of the function call default Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 and jumps to the address corresponding to the calling function of the selected line in this panel Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the calling function of the selected line in this panel Jump to Local Variable at Opens the Local Variables panel to display the local variable corresponding to the selected line This Time R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 290 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator This panel is used to display trace data recording the execution history of the program see 2 11 Collect Execution History of Programs IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator The trace data displays by
507. panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 8 Save the contents of watch expressions for details on the method for saving the contents of watch expressions 3 Type Byte Size area The type information of watch expressions with the following format is displayed Watch Expression Display Format Single CPU register lt Types of CPU register gt lt SizeN 1 gt Single I O register lt I O register type gt lt Access attribute gt lt Access type gt lt Size 1 gt Access attribute Read only Write only Read Write only Access type Bit accessible Byte accessible Half word accessible Word accessible Unknown 2 Others lt Watch expression type that follow the C compiler s determinationN gt lt SizeN 1 gt Notes 1 The size of the watch expression is displayed in bytes However for bit I O register or C language bit field the size is displayed in bits and bits is added to the end of the number 2 Types to be treated are displayed when compiling the watch expression 4 Address area The address that each watch expression is mapped is displayed hexadecimal number notation fixing If the watch expression is single CPU register or is unknown or is displayed instead Remark When the watch expression is the bit I O register the bit offset value is also displayed Example When the bit register is allocated to bit 4 of the address OxFF40 Display example 0xFF40 4
508. parameter CSI type Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoGetSerialParameterCSI SuoHandle handle SuoSerialParameterCSI param Argumeni s Handle of the serial interface param Location where the parameters of the serial interface UART type are to be stored Specify a pointer to SuoSerialParameterCSI structureNe Note For details on SuoSerialParameterCSI structure see the SuoSetSerialParameterCS function Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to obtain the parameters CSI type related to serial operation of the specified serial interface Example include suo h SuoHandle hCsil void funcl void SuoSerialParameterCSI param SuoGetSerialParameterCSI hCsil amp param Get parameter of CSI1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 496 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSendSerialData Performs serial transmission 1 data Cautions 1 Be sure to use the SuoSendSerialDataList function for serial transmission of multiple data units when executing continuous UART transmission 2 If this function is called using NotifySentSerialFunc function serial transmission completion report callback function transmi
509. pecification type of the flash self programming is Ver 3 00 or laterN Specify the reset vector address Directly enter the value in hexadecimal number from 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF 0 is specified by default Note The determination of the flash memory process is made when connected to the debug tool Consequently this will not be hidden when disconnected from the debug tool lt 2 gt Boot swap cluster This property appears only when the flash memory process is Type4 Specify the target area of boot swap clusters Directly enter the value in decimal number from 0 to 127 0 is specified by default The value set in this property is reflected to the target area in a boot block cluster Prohibition of boot area rewriting can be set to the target area of boot swap clusters by using the microcontroller s security function Table 2 2 below shows the relationship between the value set in this property and the target area of boot block clusters Note The determination of the flash memory process is made when connected to the debug tool Consequently this will not be hidden when disconnected from the debug tool Table 2 2 Relationship between Boot Swap Cluster and Boot Block Cluster Value When The Product s Flash Memory Size Is When The Product s Flash Memory Size Is to Be 256 KBytes or Smaller 384 KBytets or Larger Boot Block Boot Swap Boot Block Boot Swap Clusters Clusters Clusters Clusters 0 00000H 007FFH OOOOOH 01 FFFH 00000H 007F
510. pecify Search Range Select the range to search from the following drop down list Specify address range Searches in the address range specified in the Address area Memory mapping Searches within the selected memory mapping range This list item displays individual memory mapping configured in the Memory Mapping dialog box except the non mapped area Display format lt memory type gt lt address range gt lt size gt Specify Address This item is only enabled if Specify address range is selected in the b Specify Search Range Specify the range of memory address to search via the start and end addresses You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes up to 1024 characters or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The results of calculating the address expressions you have entered are treated as start and end addresses respectively Note however that the largest address that can be searched is the maximum address of the program space OxO3FFFFFF the mirror area cannot be searched An address value greater than the value expressed within 32 bits cannot be specified Remarks 1 Ifthe start address field is left blank it is treated as if 0x0 were specified 2 Ifthe end address field is left blank then it is treated as if the maximum value in the microcontroller s address space were specified Click the Search Backward Search Forward button When t
511. pecify whether to use the programmable I O area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 61 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt Select Yes to use the programmable I O area No is selected by default Programmable I O area start address This property appears only when the Use Programmable O area property is set to Yes Specify the start address of the programmable I O area Specify the address expression within the programmable I O area 0 is specified by default The address is aligned to 16 Kbytes 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Too Settings tab general configurations on the debug tool can be done a b c d e f 9 Memory Access Memory While Running Break Trace Timer Coverage Simulator GUI a Memory You can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 94 Memory Category E Memory E Memory mappings 4 0 Internal ROM area H Non map area 2 Internal RAM area 3 LO Register area lt 1 gt Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed for each type of memory area The memory mapping status cannot be changed on this panel If it is necessary to add a memory mapping click on the Memory Mapping property and click on the button that appears on the right end of the setting field The Memory Mapping dialog box opens perform the setting from there See the section for the Memo
512. pens the Entry Bitmap dialog box below to add a new bitmap to the selection list The bitmap file to be added can be specified either through file selection using the button or through direct input Entry Bitmap Active Bitmap Loammon bitmap iParts_on bmp cael Inactive Bitmap Loammon lbitmap iParts_off bmp r K Delete but Deletes the currently selected bitmap from the selection list ton Note that only the bitmap that have been added by user can be deleted 2 Preview area This area displays the style of the level gauge currently being specified Function buttons Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Apply Cannot be selected Help Displays the help for this dialog box Operation In the Simulation mode analog input from the level gauge is performed through manipulation of the displayed slider or dial The value specified in Maximum input is the maximum value that can be input Input is enabled by selecting the Figure menu gt gt Simulation Mode Figure A 99 Connected Parts Display Example Level Gauge R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 408 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Dial type level gauge The displayed analog value changes as the operating point red circle on the dial is moved by dragging it with the mouse When this analog value has become the value that is
513. perty R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 48 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Clock You can configure the clock in this category Figure 2 67 Clock Category E1 Serial El Glock Main clock frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock System Figure 2 68 Clock Category E1 JTAG E Glock Main clack frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock freguency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock oy stem TORK DGK clack MHz 1OMHz lt 1 gt Main clock frequency MHz lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Specify the main clock frequency before multiplier You can specify the frequency from the drop down list or by directly entering a frequency value between 0 001 and 999 999 unit MHz The drop down list displays the following frequencies unit MHz V850E1 V850ES 2 50 4 00 default 5 00 6 00 8 00 13 50 18 00 V850E2M 4 00 5 00 7 20 8 00 default 9 60 10 00 13 50 16 00 Main clock multiply rate Specify the main clock frequency multiplier Select a value from the drop down list or directly enter a value from 1 to 99 The drop down list displays the following multiplier values V850E1 V850ES 1 default 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 V850E2M 1 default 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 Sub clock frequency kHz This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports a sub clock Specify the
514. perty 2 3 Main clock frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz J2 768 Monitor clock oy Ste tt 4 gt 8 Connection with Target Board Communication method UART AU 5 gt 2 Flash security ID FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF CHIp erase when starting MHo 7 gt Programmable I O Internal ROMZ RAH A Download File Hook Transactio Figure A 11 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E1 Serial Property ce W850 E1 Serial Property 1 E Internal ROM RAM 2 DataFlash 3 E Glock Main clock frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock system 4 GE Connection with Target Board Communication method UART AO Power target fram the emulator MAX 200mA Mo 5 El Flash security ID Hex FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Chip erase when starting Mio 7 Programmable O Internal ROK RAM A Download File Hook Transactio R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 189 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 12 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E1 JTAG V850E1 V850ES Property em WASO ELCITAG Property DataF lash E Glock Main clock frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock System TCK DGEK clock MHz TOUMHz El Connection with Taget Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200mAa No El Flash security ID
515. pes of buzzer display styles figure and bitmap These styles can be changed on the Style tab Figure A 109 Parts Buzzer Properties Dialog Box Buzzer Connection Tab Parts Buezer Properties Buzzer Gonnection Style Active Level O Low HIGH Output Form Figure A 110 Parts Buzzer Properties Dialog Box Style Tab Parts Buzzer Properties Buzzer Connection Style Figure Preview Shape Line Fill up Thickness Active Active 1 hactive Tnactive Active 2 ma hactive Function buttons zl R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 421 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open Buzzer Connection tab Style tab Function buttons Operation How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a part object Buzzer Select Properties form the context menu on a part object Buzzer Select a part object Buzzer and then select Properties form the View menu Buzzer Connection tab 1 Pin connection information setting area Label This area is used to specify the part name The part name input here is also displayed in the Parts List dialog box as the label Pin Name This area is used to specify t
516. pment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certa
517. point when break property in the Break category on the Debug Tool Settings tab in the Property panel all of Printf events currently being set are handled as Hardware Break events printf commands will not be executed 1 Set a Printf event Set a Printf event to the position where you want to execute the printf command in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Select Register Action Event from the context menu after moving the caret to the line address to set a Printf event in the Editor panel Disassemble panel to open the following the Action Events dialog box In this dialog box follow the steps below Note Printf events cannot be set at lines in the event area with the background color in gray showing to the corresponding address of the line that no change is allowed iQ PFRCWD psval Settable line p00000g4c 10 Af 29s ae No settable line___ PCC psval Figure 2 173 Set Printf Event Action Events Dialog Box fiction Events Output str ire Example Sample pO Variable expression Example aaa bbb coc a a es Example for Output panel sample aaa 10 bbb 20 ccc 30 a Specify Output string Directly enter from the keyboard the characters to add when output to the Output panel Characters must be in one line spaces allowed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 154 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 b Specify Variable expressio
518. pressions for details on the watch expression 4 Save the CPU register contents The Save As dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save CPU Register Data As and all the contents in the CPU register can be saved to a text file txt or CSV file csv When saving to files retrieve the latest information from the debug tool Figure 2 139 Output Example of CPU Register Data Register name Category name Register name R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 114 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 3 Display change the I O register Contents of the I O register can be displayed and its values can be changed in the IOR panel below Select the View menu gt gt IOR For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the IOR panel Figure 2 140 Display the Contents of the I O register IOR Panel IORCRSW 1 Qxlafrroo4 IOR LR W 1 Ox03ft ft O05 IOR CRSW 1 Ox0aft tf O06 IORCR W 1 Ox0aft t O08 IOR CRSW 1 Oxlaft tla IOR RSW 1 Ox0aft tlc IOR LR W 1 Ox0aft te Oxf fff IORLRSW te ca Oxlattto24 Qxff IOR RAW 1 8 013 Oxlafrro24 IORLRSW 1 8 01 Ox0aft tes IOR area Value area Type Byte Size area Address area This section describes the following 1 Organize I O registers 2 Change display format of values 3 Modify the I O register contents 4 Display modify the I O register contents during program execution
519. pressions can be registered in one watch panel Adds a new category folder Directly input the category name in the text box Note that up to 64 categories can be created in one watch panel categories cannot be created in categories Deletes the selected character string s If the watch expression s category s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Notation The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed Displays the value of the selected watch expression in the default notation see Table A 12 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default according the type of variable default Fio Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that this item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression value is 4 byte data Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that this item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression value is 8 byte data m Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value of the selected item except the item displayed in hexadecimal number File menu Watch panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Watch panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Watch Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the
520. pressions in both the left and right text boxes If the right hand text box is blank or contains the text Input value when range is specified then the fixed address specified in the left hand text box will be searched Note that if an address value greater than the microcontroller address space is specified the upper address value is masked In addition an address value greater than the value expressed within 32 bits cannot be specified Access Status This item is only enabled if a value for Access Address is specified Select the access type from the following drop down list Select No Specification if you do not wish to limit access types No Specification Read Write Vector Read R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 335 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE e Data This item is only enabled if a value for Access Address Is specified Specify the access data You can either type the data directly into the text boxes in hexadecimal number or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The data can also be specified as a range In this case specify a range by specifying data in both the left and right text boxes If the right hand text box is blank or contains the text Input value when range is specified then the fixed data specified in the left hand text box will be searched 2 Search range area a Number Specify the range
521. ption Bytes Setting OPBTO OPBT1I OPBT2 OPBT3 OPBT4 OPBTS OPBT6 FFFFFFES FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF OPBT FFFFFFFF JFETS FFFFFFFF On chip Debug Security ID Setting security ID Hex FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Security Setting Disable read Mo Disable program No Disable chip erase Ho Disable block erase Ho Disable program boot block No Boot Block Cluster Setting Boot block last number HEX 0 Flash Shield Window Function Setting start block number HEX O End block number HEX 2FF HEREC Option bytes setting Chip erase when writing 5 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab configuration on the hook transaction can be done See 2 16 Use Hook Function for details on each category configuration and the function of the hook transaction R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 45 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 4 Et Configure the operating environment on the Property panel below when using E1 Note that the contents of the Property panel differ depending on the communication method serial communications E1 Serial or JTAG communications E1 JTAG between E1 and the target system Figure 2 61 Property Panel E1 Serial Property ee WASO E1tSerial Property E Internal ROM RAM DataF lash El Glock Main clock frequency MHz Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz Monitor cl
522. r Wait Caution The help for this window will not be displayed even if the F1 key on the keyboard is pressed while the cursor is placed in this area Remark When the CSI selected in this window is set to master mode the clock must be supplied for reception To perform reception transmission of dummy data is therefore required R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 435 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Dedicated menu Serial window 1 Edit menu Inserts a new line immediately before the selected line C Format Opens the Format UART dialog box or Format CSI dialog box 2 View menu 3 Option menu Customize Opens the Customize dialog box Context menu The following context menus are available in the Serial editor area Inserts a new line immediately before the selected line Cuts the selected range and saves it to the clipboard R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 436 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Format UART dialog box This dialog box is used to set the serial format for the asynchronous serial interface UART Figure A 117 Format UART Dialog Box Format WART Baudr ate Transter Direction C MSE first LSB first Data bit length Stop bit leneth Cancel Function buttons Repeat This section describes the following How to open Descriptio
523. r in the Memory panel and Watch panel Default y P p color Background color R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 347 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Read or Aabbte Font color Default Locations that have been read or fetched are displayed in fetch color this color in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Background Palegreen color Font color Default Locations that have been written are displayed in this color color in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Background Orange color Read and Aghbter Font color Default Locations that have been read and written are displayed in write color this color in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Background Paletur color quoise Coverage AaBbbGr Font color Default The line for which code coverage is at 100 is displayed 100 color in this color in the Editor panel and Disassemble panel Background Lightgreen color Coverage 1 AaBb c Font color Default The line for which code coverage is at 1 to 99 is 99 color displayed in this color in the Editor panel and Disassemble panel Background Lightpink Coverage AaAbCe Font color Default The line for which code coverage is at 0 not yet 0 color executed is displayed in this color in the Editor panel and Disassemble panel Background Lightgray Invalid Font color Non mapped areas in the Memory panel and filenames in the Project Tree panel that
524. r part of this area Toolbar Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel Note that the values of read protected I O register are not re read This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Resets highlighting of the selected I O register whose value has been changed by executing a program Note that this item becomes invalid during execution of a program Adds anew category folder Directly input the category name in the text box There are no restrictions on the number of categories that can be created anew however it is not possible to create a category inside a category Note that this item becomes invalid during execution of a program R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 267 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Deletes the selected character string s If an empty category is in a select state its category is deleted it is not possible to delete I O registers ES __ parte iit nt nie ih Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value of the selected item Ca File menu IOR panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the IOR panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save IOR Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text f
525. r timing Syntax include suo h int SuoCreateTimer const char timerName SuoHandle handle Argumeni s Location where the handle of the timer interface is to be stored Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function generates a timer interface The generated timer interface is associated with the name specified for timerName If this function is successful the handle of the generated timer interface can be obtained The timer interface can then be controlled by specifying this handle The handle can also be obtained by using the SuoGetlimerHandle function Example include suo h SuoHandle hTim1 SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option SuoCreateTimer TIM1 amp hTim1 Create TIM1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 462 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoGetTimerHandle Acquires timer handle Syntax include suo h SuoHandle SuoGetTimerHandle const char timerName Argumeni s Return value p Macro o Beseription Handle of the a Normal completion timer interface NULL Exit with error abend Description This function is used to obtain the handle of the specified timer interface Specify the name specified by the SuoCreate Timer function as timerName if a different name is specifie
526. ram Build amp Download Executes the build of a project and downloads the file into the debug tool for an active project While disconnecting from the debug tool the download is executed after connecting to the debug tool However when the build has failed download will not be executed Connect to Debug Tool Connects to the debug tool for an active project Upload Opens the Data Save dialog box to save the memory contents This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool Disconnect from Debug Disconnects from the currently connected debug tool Tool Forcibly stops the program currently being executed This item becomes invalid during non execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool Executes the program from the current PC position Execution of the program will be stopped when the condition of a set break event is met This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool Ignore break and go Executes the program from the current PC position Execution of the program continues ignoring set beak events and action events This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool Executes the program step by stepNote from the current PC position Step in execution However in the case of a function call the program is stopped at the beginning of the function
527. ram Remark The simulation speed can be increased by hiding the timing chart To hide the timing chart select the View menu gt gt Waveform deselect this item When the timing chart is hidden the Maker area and Waveform area appear dimmed and Display OFF is displayed in the center 3 Clearing of timing chart Timing chart display is cleared by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Clear 4 Timing measurement for timing chart The timing between two points can be measured by marking 2 locations using markers A and B The time of each marker and the time between markers are displayed in the information bar Each marker can be placed at the target position by dragging the marker head Moreover it can also be placed at the position of the current mouse cursor by selecting Move MarkerA Move MarkerB from the context menu The marker that is clicked last becomes the selected marker and can be subjected to the Data search function Figure A 85 Maker A And Maker B A B A B Selected markers Unselected makers 5 Data search function There are two data search functions for timing charts a Simple search Simple search is a function used to search change points for one pin Select the name of the pin for which the search is to be performed in the Pin area and then select the Edit menu gt gt Search backward or Search forward As a result the selected marker moves to the data position at which the change point was detected b Detailed s
528. ram command writing Select Yes to prohibit program command Disable chip erase Specify whether to prohibit chip erase command Select Yes to prohibit chip erase command Disable block erase Specify whether to prohibit block erase command Select Yes to prohibit block erase command Disable program boot block Specify whether to prohibit rewrite boot area Select Yes to prohibit to rewrite boot area Boot Block Cluster Setting ECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG a Boot block last number Specify the last block number of boot areas Directly enter the value in hexadecimal number 0 is specified by default Flash Shield Window Function Setting IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG a b Start block number Specify the first block number of the flash shield window Directly enter the value in hexadecimal number from 0x0 to 0x7FF 0 is specified by default End block number Specify the end block number of the flash shield window Directly enter the value in hexadecimal number from 0x0 to Ox7FF End block number is specified by default 6 Chip erase when writing Executes the chip erase when clicking the Write button an Does not execute the chip erase when clicking the Write button default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 321 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Write Writes the currently set values to
529. rce level debugging cannot be performed c Click the OK button Enable all the configuration in this dialog box and change download condition 2 Add download files hex bin Follow the steps below to add download files in hex format hex in binary data format bin in the Download Files dialog box a Click the Add button When the Add button is clicked a blank list item is displayed in the last line of the Download file list area b Property configuration of the download files to add Configure the download condition of the download file to add in the Download file property area Configure each item displayed with the following condition When the configuration is completed the file name specified in this property is displayed in the blank list of the Download file list area Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard or specify with the Select Download File dialog box opened by clicking the button Available See Table 2 3 Type of Files That Can be Downloaded values File type Specify the type of the file to download Specify the file hex bin to download up to 259 characters Select Hex file or Binary data file Load module file Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Either one of the following values Load module file Hex file Binary data file R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 72 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTI
530. rea Displays line number This area is used when performing editing in line units Note that up to 1 048 576 1M lines can be specified as the signal data Mark area Displays the loop information for the specified input value The loop information is specified by selecting from the context menu or the Edit menu gt gt Mark in the relevant field The following marks are displayed after the loop information has been specified Loop start location endless loop Loop start location with loop count Loop end location Wait area Displays as wait time the timing at which the specified input value is input to the pins The wait time is specified by directly writing numeric values in the relevant field Note that numeric values decimal code from 0 to 4 294 967 295 can be specified values that exceed 4 294 967 295 can be set by using one more line The wait time unit can be changed by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Time unit Data area Displays the input value input to the pins The input value is specified by directly writing numeric value in the relevant field Note that the input rules differ as follows according to the pin type Digital pins Any one of the following one character LOW signal HIGH signal Hi Z signal case insensitive Analog pins A decimal value from 0 to 5000 unit mV Dedicated menu Signal Data Editor window 1 Edit menu C Cuts the selected range and saves it to the clipboard
531. rea displays the current state of connection with the debug tool using the following icons and character strings Connection State Display Contents Disconnected sig DISCONNECTED h Run Break Timer measurement result This area displays the result of measurement by the Run Break Timer event the unit of value used differs depending on the measurement amount See 2 12 1 Measure execution time until stop of the execution Note that nothing is displayed here when the debug tool is not connected When a timer measurement overflow has OVERFLOW occurred i Debug tool state IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator This area displays the current state of debug tool s functions using the following icons and character strings When a function is stopped clicking the appropriate icon enables the state to be switched between Use and Not use Note Note that nothing is displayed here when the debug tool is not connected Note Simulator The result of switching will be reflected in the setting of Yes No for the Use trace function Use timer function Use coverage function property of the Trace Timer Coverage category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 178 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Manager panel V850E2M When the selected microcontroller is the V850E2M multi core product this panel is used to select a core PE Pr
532. reating an environment where a target system as well as a CPU CPU core internal peripherals can be simulated One is the O Panel window via which a user friendly simulation environment can be organized through GUI manipu lation by supplying standard components for connection and their manipulation environment The other is to create the simulation environment of the target system that uses the user open interface to be explained in this appendix In this environment functions that cannot be realized on the O Panel window can be used if the user programs an external user model Figure B 1 Programming Image of User Model Programing R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 443 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 1 1 Types of interface functions Simulator GUI s user open interface supplies the following types of interface functions see B 4 Supplied Interface Functions Table B 1 Types of Functions Supplied by User Open Interface Basic interface functions Basic function of simulation Initialization notification Reset notification etc Time interface functions Cyclic timer function for time series processing of the user model Setting of timer Clearing of timer Notification of timer time etc Pin interface functions Pin I O function Signal output to pin Notification of signal input to pin Note Slave function of external bus External bus inte
533. red watch expression in the created category each category is displayed in the categorized tree view Also the display order of the categories and the watch expressions upper or lower position can be changed easily by drag and drop operation Cautions 1 Categories cannot be created within categories 2 Up to 64 categories can be created in one watch panel if this restriction is violated a message appears Remark Drag and drop the watch expressions categories in other watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 to copy them R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 276 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Expand shrink display At the top of the watch expression represents arrays pointer type variables structures unions and registers with the name of the part mark is displayed Click the mark to expand the contents mark is changed to Watch Expression Contents When Expanded Array All elements in the array after the expansion Select Encoding gt gt ASCII from the context menu to display the value as a string up to 256 characters Note however that any characters that cannot be displayed in the encoding will be shown as periods Pointer type variable Variables that the pointer designates Structure Union All the member of structure union Register Name of the bit bit string that constructs register Example ECR register FECC register EICC register c
534. rently being executed This item becomes invalid during non execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Stop in the Debug menu Executes the program from the current PC position Execution of the program will be stopped when the condition of a set break event is met This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Go in the Debug menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 175 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Executes the program from the current PC position Execution of the program continues ignoring set beak events and action events This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Ignore break and go in the Debug menu Resets the CPU and then executes the program from the reset address This item becomes invalid during execution of a program or while disconnecting from the debug tool The function of this item is the same as that of Restart in the Debug menu Executes the program step by step Note from the current PC position Step in execution However in the case of a function call the program is stopped at the beginning of the function having been called This item becomes invalid during executio
535. rface functions External bus read access notification External bus write access notification etc Serial interface functions Serial transmission reception function Transmission of serial data Notification of reception of serial data etc Signal output unit interface functions Function to output signals in accordance with signal data file Signal output in accordance with signal data file etc Note When using the external bus interface function the external memory area to use must be set to Target memory area with the Memory Type area of the Memory Mapping dialog box B 1 2 Interface methods Simulator GUI s user open interface has the following interface methods 1 C language interface The user open interface consists of a C language API Application Program Interface function set Therefore program the user model in C language 2 Callback function method The user open interface uses the callback function method as a means to call a program from the system The callback function method is that a program user model is called by the system CPU when it is necessary This method uses the pointer to the function which is defined on the program user model The system CPU calls the user program user model by using this pointer While the provided API functions call the system from the program the callback function is used to call the program from the system such as when inputting a signal to a pin R
536. rm The parts displayed differ depending on the target window The currently set color of the part is displayed when that part is selected from the list Change button The color currently set for the relevant part of each listed item can be changed Font tab 1 Font setting area Set and change the text font of each part in the window Function buttons Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Apply Cannot be selected Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 366 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Signal Data Editor window This window is used to create and edit the signal data that is input to input pins The created signal data can be input to the input pin during simulation by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Signal Input This data can also be saved to the signal data file wvi by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Save As or by saving the project file The saved file contents can be restored by selecting the File menu gt gt Open or by loading the project file Cautions 1 If the saved signal data file is opened or the project file is opened while Simulator GUI is run ning with a microcontroller different from the one used when the signal data file was created the settings of pins that are not provided in the microcontroller will not be re
537. rn execution and program execution by selecting Go to Here from the context menu If the location set for an existing event changes to midway in an instruction because the program to debug has been downloaded again re set the event using the following method If debugging information is available The location setting of events is always moved to the beginning of the source text line If debugging information is not available Depends on the Automatic change method of event setting position property in the Download category in the Download File Settings tab of the Property panel Ifa change to internal ROM RAM changes the location the event is set to a non mapped area then set events will not occur they will also not change to Invalid state Suspended State on the Events panel R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 161 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 Use Hook Function This section describes how to set hooks in the debug tool using the hook function Be setting a hook transaction you can automatically change the values of the I O register CPU register before and after downloading a load module or after resetting the CPU Configure the hook transaction in the Hook Transaction Settings category in the Hook Transaction Settings tab of the Property panel Remark By setting a I O register by using the Before download property for example downloading can be executed at high spe
538. roller supports a sub clock Default lECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 The minimum usable sub clock frequency Simulator 32 768 Modifying Select from the drop down list or directly enter from the keyboard Available Either one of the following from the drop down list values f lECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Sub clock frequency values that can be used by the selected microcontroller Note Simulator 32 768 Directly enter the numbers ranged below 0 001 to 999 999 unit KHz R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 194 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Monitor clock IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 TCK DCK clock MHz IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG Trace clock frequency MHz IECUBE2 Select Timer Trace clock frequency Simulator Unit of Timer Trace clock frequency Simulator R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This property appears only when the selected microcontroller supports a sub clock Specify a clock supplied to the on chip debug unit DCU th the clock that the program specified DCU Usually however 10MHz must be selected When 20MHZ is specified it may not be possible to connect to the debug tool Default 10MHz Modifying Select from the drop down list Note that changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool Available 10MHz 20MH
539. roller that is used Style tab 1 Style information setting area Figure Select this option button to display the LED with the following specified figure Select the figure shape Two shapes can be selected rectangle and ellipse shadow Cannot be selected Line Specify and change the figure line as follows You can change the color of figure line by clicking the pull down button Thickness Specifies the line thickness Specification is made either using a spin button or through direct input A value from 1 to 100 can be specified Specifies the color of the line during active display Specifies the color of the line during inactive display Fill up Specify and change the figure filling as follows You can change the color of figure filling by clicking the pull down button Specifies the fill color during active display Specifies the fill color during inactive display R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 411 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Bitmap Select this option button to display the LED with the following specified bitmap default Selection list Select a bitmap to be used from the selection list The selectable bitmaps appear in the selection list Add button Opens the Entry Bitmap dialog box below to add a new bitmap to the selection list The bitmap file to be added can be specified either through file selection using the button or through direct input
540. rom the keyboard Available Address without the address range of the internal ROM area symbols cannot be values used 9 Mask for Input Signal IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 The detailed information on the masking input signal is displayed and its configuration can be changed Mask NMIn signal Specify whether to mask NMIn signal to prevent the signal input to emulators MINICUBE Modifyin Select from the drop down list Available Masks NMIn signal values Does not Mask NMIn signal Mask HLDRQ signal Specify whether to mask HLDRQ signal to prevent the signal input to emulators oe Defaut IECUBE2 Modifying Select from the drop down list MINICUBE E1 JTAG Available Masks HLDRQ signal values R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 214 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Mask STOP signal Specify whether to mask STOP signal to prevent the signal input to emulators IECUBE2 Modifying Select from the drop down list MINICUBE E1 JTAG Available Masks STOP signal Does not Mask STOP signal Mask WAIT signal Specify whether to mask WAIT signal to prevent the signal input to emulators IECUBE2 values Modifyin Select from the drop down list MINICUBE E1 JTAG Available Masks WAIT signal values Does not mask WAIT signal Mask DBINT signal Specify whether to mask DBINT signal to prevent the signal input to emulators MINICUBE V850E1 Thi
541. rop down list displays the following frequency values 10MHz default 2OMHz R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 22 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Cautions 1 Normally do not change the setting from 10MHz When 20MHZ is specified it may not be possible to connect to the debug tool 2 This property cannot be changed while connecting to IECUBE2 lt 6 gt Trace clock frequency MHz IECUBE2 Specify the clock frequency for using trace function Directly enter the value between 1 and 999 999 unit MHz 80 00 is specified by default d Connection with Target Board You can configure the connection to the target board in this category Figure 2 15 Connection with Target Board Category IECUBE IECUBE2 El Connection with Target Board Connecting with target board Mo lt 1 gt Connecting with target board Specify if the target board is connected to IECUBE IECUBE2 or not from the drop down list Select Yes when the target board is connected to IECUBE No is selected by default Caution This property cannot be changed while connecting to IECUBE e Programmable I O IECUBE You can configure the programmable I O area in this category Note that this category appears only when the selected microcontroller supports the programmable I O area Remark Change this setting to temporarily change variables while debugging To set a common value for the project in the Property p
542. rror abend Description This function is used to obtain the handle of the specified serial interface Specify the name specified by the SuoCreateSerialUART or SuoCreateSerialCS function as seria Name if a dif ferent name is specified NULL is returned Example include suo h SuoHandle hSeriall void funcl void hSeriall SuoGetSerialHandle SERIAL1 Get handle of SERIAL1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 489 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetSerialParameterUART Sets serial parameter UART type Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include eno int SuoSetSerialParameterUART SuoHandle handle const SuoSerialParameterUART param Argumeni s Handle of the serial interface param Location where the parameters of the serial interface UART type are to be stored Note Specify a pointer to SuoSerialParameterUART structure Note The configuration of SuoSerialParameterUART structure is as follows typedef struct unsigned long baudrate Baud rate int direction Transfer direction int dataLength Data bit length int stopLength Stop bit length int parity Parity SuoSerialParameterUART e swem he S Parity SUO_NONEPARITY No parity SUO_ZEROPARITY 0 parity During transmission parity
543. rror U Generate Block Blank Check error Yes Address generated Block BlankCheck error 0 With the properties shown below specify whether to return error values in the corresponding functions to emulate from the drop down list the error values in the functions will not be generated during normal emulation All properties below are set to No by default Select Yes to return the error values forcibly then specify an address within the data flash memory at which the corresponding function error is to be generated in the Address generated XXX error property which is listed newly in the lower area Directly enter the address in hexadecimal number from 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF 0 is specified by default Generate WordWrite error Generate BlockErase error Generate BlocklVerify error Generate BlockBlankCheck error R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 32 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Writing Time Erasing Time You can configure the delay time for writing to and erasing the data flash memory in this category Figure 2 33 Writing Time Erasing Time Category O Writing Time Erasing Time Writing time Typical number of times that is assumed by flash macro specifications Erasing time Typical number of times that is assumed by flash macro specifications lt 1 gt Writing time Specify the delay time when writing to the data flash memory from the following drop down list
544. rties form the context menu on a part object Button Select a part object Button and then select Properties form the View menu Button Connection tab 1 Pin connection information setting area Label This area is used to specify the part name The part name input here is displayed on the but ton Moreover it is also displayed in the Parts List dialog box as the label Pin Name This area is used to specify the pin name to be connected The connection pins can be spec ified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list Active Level The active state is selected with a option button as follows Sets the active level to LOW HIGH Sets the active level to HIGH default Type Button types are selected using option buttons as follows Button types are selected using option buttons as follows are selected using option buttons as follows Push Makes the button a Push button default The Hold Time item must be specified Toggle Makes the button a Toggle button Group Makes the button a Group bution The Group Name item must be specified Group Name This area is used to input the button s group name Input to this area is possible only when Group has been selected in Type Hold Time Specify the time hold time for which the input value is to be held default 0 5msec The settable range is from 0 001 to 999 msec Input to this area is possible only when Push has been selected in
545. ry Mapping dialog box for details on how to configure the parameters Figure 2 95 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box O Memory Memory mappings 4 0 Internal ROM area H Non map area Caution If you are not connected to a debug tool then only memory mapping areas added by user is displayed Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 62 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b c d e Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function Figure 2 96 Access Memory While Running Category Simulator EO Access Memory hile Annne Update display during the execution Yes Display update intervallms B00 lt 1 gt Update display during the execution Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel during a program execution Select Yes to update the display default lt 2 gt Display update interval ms This property is valid only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watc
546. s Description This function is used to register a user function that performs processing when transmission by the signal output unit is completed The registered function is called when all signal data specified to be transmitted have been completely transmitted If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include suo h void NotifySentWaveFunc SuoHandle handle SuoHandle hWavel void funcl void SuoSetNotifySentWaveCallback hWavel NotifySentWaveFunc Set notify sent wave function Notify sent wave function void NotifySentWaveFunc SuoHandle handle R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 508 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE B 4 8 Error numbers The meanings of error numbers macro names that are returned from the supplied interface function as return values are as follows Note that an error number is indicated by a macro name defined by the supplied header file Suo h Table B 4 List of Error Numbers Macro Names SUO_NOERROR Normal completion SUO_CANTALLOC Memory cannot be allocated SUO_ILLIFNAME SUOQ_ILLHANDLE SUO_ILLPARAM SUO_CANTCALL SUO_CONFLICTRES SUO_ILLFILENAME SUO_CANTOPENFILE SUO_ILLFILEFMT SUO_ILLFILECONT SUO_ILLPINNAME SUO_ILLADDRRANGE SUO_UNDERSENDING The interface name is not correct NULL or is specified for the interface name Or an interface name that ha
547. s Name of the signal output unit Number of pins used by the signal output unit pinNameList Names of the pins used by the signal output unit Specify names in an array equivalent to the number of pins handle Location where the handle of the signal output unit interface is to be stored Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to generate a signal output unit interface The generated signal output unit interface is associated with the name specified for waveName In addition the pins specified by count and pinNameList are also generated If this function is successful the handle of the generated signal output unit interface can be obtained The signal output unit interface can then be controlled by specifying this handle The handle can also be obtained by using the SuoGetWaveHandle function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 504 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Example include suo h SuoHandle hWavel SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option char pinNameList 4 PoOo MPO 2 P0O2 PO3 SuoCreateWave WAVE1 4 pinNameList amp hWavel Create WAVE1 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 505 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoGetWaveHandle Acquires signal output un
548. s Maximum number of process 128 Before running Specify the process to proceed right before execution Automatically rewrite the I O register CPU register specified in this field right before the execution of the program to the specified numbers Default Before running 0 is the current number of specified processes Modifying Specify with the Text Edit dialog box The Text Edit dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting this property you cannot specify the process on this panel Available Format values O register name CPU register name space specified value Maximum characters 64 for one process Maximum number of process 128 After breaking Specify the process to proceed right after the break Automatically rewrite the I O register CPU register specified in this field right after the program break to the specified numbers Default After breaking 0 is the current number of specified processes Modifying Specify with the Text Edit dialog box The Text Edit dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting this property you cannot specify the process on this panel Available Format values O register name CPU register name space specified value Maximum characters 64 for one process Maximum number of process 128 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 229 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPEND
549. s Data main c z0g tmp sub0 sub l fare_a arge b argc main c 210 result tmp global_b main c 210 result tmp global _b mainc 212 return result mainc e ls main cHel 3 No Debue hfor mation mainc 75 result sub02tstatic globala static glob 2 Change display format of values The display format of the Line Number Address Address Data area can be changed using buttons below on the toolbar Note that the button is invalid while program is executed Notation The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal number default Displays values on this panel in decimal number Displays values on this panel in octal number Displays values on this panel in binary number 3 Link with other panels ltems in the trace panel can be linked to other panels using the currently selected line address as a pointer window focus will not move Click the button on the toolbar to start linking to the Editor panel Click the linking to the Disassemble panel If the button is clicked again the link is disconnected button on the toolbar to start Remark The Editor panel Disassemble panel opens when selecting the Jump to Source Jump to Disassemble from the context menu with moving the caret to the source line address corresponding to the address of the currently selected line focus is moved R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 137
550. s can be changed on the Style tab Figure A 97 Parts Level Gauge Properties Dialog Box Level Gauge Connection Tab Parts Level Gauge Properties Level Gauge Connection Style Maximum input AOOO Ni When PU reset beforer CPU Reset Set default voltage w Pausatu Parts Level Gauge Properties Level Gauge Connection Style O Slide Form Color PY 2 Function buttons R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 406 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open Level Gauge Connection tab Style tab Function buttons Operation How to open On the O Panel window any one of the following Double click a part object Level Gauge Select Properties form the context menu on a part object Level Gauge Select a part object Level Gauge and then select Properties form the View menu Level Gauge Connection tab 1 Pin connection information setting area Label This area is used to specify the part name The part name input here is also displayed in the Parts List dialog box as the label Pin Name This area is used to specify the pin name to be connected The connection pins can be spec ified either via direct input or through selection from the drop down list Maximum input This area is used to set the maximum level gauge input value default 5 000mV
551. s displayed and changed The radix of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item In addition a display format adding the value in hexadecimal number constantly can also be selected as well The meanings of the marks and colors displayed as I O register values are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Character color The value of the I O register that the user is changing press the Enter key to write to the target memory Background color Standard color Character color The value of the I O register that has been changed because of the execution of a program Background color Cream To reset the highlighting select the button on the toolbar or Reset Color from the context menu Character color The value of the I O register that is a read protected object Background color Standard color Note An I O register for which the microcontroller ends up being activated by a read operation is shown To read the value of read protected I O register select Force Read Value from the context menu Caution The timing for acquiring the values differs in the case of a 1 byte 2 bytes I O register and that of 1 bit I O registers that have been allocated to a 1 byte 2 bytes I O register Owing to this there are also cases where the values differ even if the value of the same I O register is displayed
552. s in this window Cascade display of the windows in this window Arrange Icons Rearranges the icons in this window 9 Help menu Displays the help for this window Current Window Displays the help for the current window Toolbar 1 Simulator Standard toolbar 2 Simulator Tool toolbar 3 Signal Data Editor toolbar 4 Timing Chart toolbar 5 Parts toolbar 6 Figure toolbar R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 363 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 1 Simulator Standard toolbar Opens a new window for the Simulator GUI window 4 Opens the files handled in the Simulator GUI window e MC M W B o B e Displays the contents of the help Ba Overwrites the contents of the window currently having the focus to the file handled in the Simulator GUI win dow 2 Simulator Tool toolbar Opens the Signal Data Editor window Opens the Timing Chart window H Opens the Serial window EN Opens the I O Panel window 3 Signal Data Editor toolbar This toolbar can be used when the Signal Data Editor window has the focus For details on this toolbar see the Signal Data Editor toolbar 4 Timing Chart toolbar This toolbar can be used when the Timing Chart window has the focus For details on this toolbar see the Timing Chart toolbar 5 Parts toolbar This toolbar can be used when the O Panel window has the focus For details on this
553. s interpreted as if a Hardware Break event access has been set at the target variable I O register and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 15 Manage Events for details Read Select Break Settings gt gt Set Read Break to and then press the Enter key Break occurs when the variable I O register is read with the specified value while a value is specified in the text box in the menu If values are not specified break occurs when the selected variable l O register is read regardless of its value Write Select Break Settings gt gt Set Writ Break to and then press the Enter key Break occurs when the variable I O register is written with the specified value while a value is specified in the text box in the menu If values are not specified break occurs when the selected variable Il O register is written regardless of its value Read Write Select Break Settings gt gt Set R W Break to and then press the Enter key Break occurs when the variable I O register is read written with the specified value while a value is specified in the text box in the menu If values are not specified break occurs when the selected variable I O register is read written regardless of its value Cautions 1 Variables within the current scope can be specified R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 98 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Break events cannot be set to variables I O register on lines i
554. s item becomes invalid during execution of a program Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Search tab Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting the Whole Replace tab Context menu All the items from the context menu become invalid during execution of a program Decimal Notation for Displays array indexes on this panel in decimal number default Array Index Hexadecimal Notation Displays array indexes on this panel in hexadecimal number for Array Index Float Displays values on this panel in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation Double Displays values on this panel in Double Note that when the value is not 4 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation Include Hexadecimal Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value Value The following cascade menus to specify the encoding of character variables are displayed ASCII Displays character variables in ASCII code default EUC JP Displays character variables in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays character variables in UTF 8 code Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 and jumps to the memory value corresponding to the address of the selected line in this panel Shift_JIS Displays character variables in Shift_JIS code R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 274 of 538 Oct 01 20
555. s not been gener ated is specified for a handle acquisition function The handle is not correct A handle other than that of the generated interface is specified The argument parameter is not correct A value other than those that can be specified is specified as a argument parameter The function cannot be called A function that can be called only by the MakeUserModel function is called by another func tion Or a function that can be called by a function other than the MakeUserModel function is called by the MakeUserModel function The resources to be generated conflict Two or more names that are the same as an interface name or pin name generated in the MakeUserModell function exist The file name is not correct NULL or a name including an invalid character is specified for a file name The signal data file cannot be opened The signal data file does not exist or is not permitted to be read Serial transmission data file The file cannot be opened The file does not exist is not permitted to be read or the file name is not correct Signal data file The file format is not correct NULL or a name including an invalid character is specified for a file name The file contents are not correct The contents of data described in the file include a contradiction or no data exists in the file The pin name is not correct NULL or is specified for the pin name The address range is not correct
556. s property appears only when the selected microcontroller is other than the V850E2M core V850ES i E1 JTAG V850E1 V850 Modifying Select from the drop down list ES Available Masks DBINT signal values Does not Mask DBINT signal Note IECUBE IECUBE2 When the Connecting with target board property in the Connection with Target Board IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE2 E1 category on the Connect Settings tab is set to No this property is fixed to Yes automatically after connecting to the debug tool changes not allowed 10 External Flash Memory Download IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG The detailed information on downloading to an external flash memory is displayed and its configuration can be changed External flash memory Specify whether to download load module files or hex files to an external flash memory download Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Downloads to an external flash memory values Does not download to an external flash memory Information file Specify the information file for the external flash memory This property appears only when the External flash memory download property is set to Yes Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard or specify with the dialog box opened by clicking the button Start address Specify the start address of the external flash memory This property appears only when the External flash memory download property is set to Yes
557. s to control the execution of programs are included Caution Items of the debug toolbar and the Debug menu are valid only while connecting to the debug tool Figure 2 121 Debug Toolbar a Oy T oe ca y Gz C Ss ES Figure 2 122 Debug Menu Download Build amp Download Upload Disconnect from Debue Tool hift Fe Go FE lenore break and go Fa otep h F11 otep Over FIO Return Out oh itt F 11 GPU Reset Gtrl F5 Restart 2 7 1 Reset microcontroller CPU To reset CPU click the button on the debug toolbar When CPU is reset the current PC value is set to the reset address Remark You can automatically overwrite the value of I O register CPU register with the specified values after CPU reset see 2 16 Use Hook Function for details 2 7 2 Execute programs The following types of CubeSuite execution functions are provided Select any of the following operations according to the purpose of debugging See 2 8 Stop Programs Break for details on how to stop the program in execution 1 Execute after resetting microcontroller CPU 2 Execute from the current address 3 Execute after changing PC value R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7 tENESAS Page 91 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can automatically overwrite the value of I O register CPU register with the specified values before executing the program see 2 16 Use Hook Function for details 1 Execut
558. s where the selected eventN is being set Opens the Memory panel and jumps to the memory corresponding to the address where the selected event te is being set Note Events other than Trace events Timer Result events and built in events Unconditional Trace events Run Break Timer events can be objects of this button Edit menu Events panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Events panel other items are all invalid Delete Deletes the selected event Note that it is not possible to delete the built in events Unconditional Trace event and Run Break Timer event Select All Selects all the events displayed on the panel Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting Whole Search tab Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with selecting Whole Replace tab R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 305 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Enables the selected event valid state Disables the selected event invalid state Deletes the selected event Note that it is not possible to delete the built in events Unconditional Trace event and Run Break Timer event Select All Selects all the events of this panel View Select The following cascade menus are displayed to limit the event type to be displayed All of the items have been selected by default Built in Event Displays events related to the
559. sas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office equi
560. sassemble panel 4 The setting of the Unconditional Trace event and the Trace event to valid or invalid state is exclusively controlled Therefore the Unconditional Trace event which is a built in event is valid state by default but if either a Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event is set it automatically becomes invalid state and the Trace event which is a event name that is collectively called with a Start Tracing event and a Stop Tracing event becomes valid state Conversely if the set Trace event is invalid state the Unconditional Trace event automatically becomes valid state 2 15 2 Display only particular event types Click on the toolbar button to display only the particular event type Displays events related to the Hardware Break Displays events related to the Software Break IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Displays events related to the trace IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Displays events related to the timer ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Displays events related to the action event Printf event a Displays the built in events Unconditional Trace event and Run Break Timer event 2 15 3 Jump to the event address Clicking the following buttons jumps to each panel which selected events address exist Note however that when a Trace event Timer Result event Unconditional Trace event Run Break Timer event is selected these button becomes invalid Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the
561. sed to register a user defined function that performs read access processing of an external bus The registered function is called if a read request is issued to the specified external bus in the registered address range If NULL is specified for func registration is canceled Example include su0 h void ReadExtbusFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr int accessSize unsigned char datal SuoHandle hExtbus1 void funci void SuoSetReadExtbusCallback hExtbus1 ReadExtbusFunc Set read external bus function Read external bus function void ReadExtbusFunc SuoHandle handle unsigned long addr int accessSize unsigned char data R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 481 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSetWriteExtbusCallback Registers external bus write access callback Syntax include suo h int SuoSetWriteExtbusCallback SuoHandle handle SuoWriteExtbusCallback func Argument s hande Handle of the external bus interface CR Pointer to a user defined function that performs write access processing of an external bus see WriteExtbusFunc Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Error number Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to register a user defined function that performs write access processing of an external bus The registered function is called wh
562. see 2 16 Use Hook Function for details R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 69 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 2 Advanced downloading You can change the download files and the condition to download With CubeSuite the following file tyoes can be downloaded Table 2 3 Type of Files That Can be Downloaded extension extension GHS Only for a debug dedicated project extension GHS Only for a debug dedicated project for a debug dedicated project Intel Hex format Standard Except for the format with ID tag for the data flash memory Intel Hex format Extension Hex format Extension hex Canbeupto 1 Mbyte be E to 1 Can be up to 1 Mbyte em aaoo Hex format Extension linear Motorola a type Hex format SO S3 S7 32 bit address Note Notes on using GHS compiler Green Hills Software Inc USA Supported version MULTI Ver 5 x or later Supported options Debug option G dual_ debug recommended Optimization option Ospace O Ospeed Onone Other than above prepare_dispose call C language and GNU C expanded specifications are not supported Notes on debugging Debugging of assembler sources is not possible No breakpoints can be set to functions defined in include The value of a watch expression of variable may be displayed incorrectly because debug information does not include valid period in
563. select Delete from the context menu However the categories that can be deleted are only the empty categories To rename the created category select the category then do either one of the following Click the name again then directly rename the category name Select the Edit menu gt gt Rename then directly rename the category name Press the F2 key then directly rename the category name By directly dragging and dropping the I O register in the created category each I O register is displayed in the categorized tree view Also the display order of the categories and the I O register names upper or lower position can be changed easily by drag and drop operation Cautions 1 Categories cannot be created within categories 2 TO registers cannot be added or deleted Registering a watch expression Variable names of C language CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols can be registered in the Watch pane as watch expressions See 1 Register a watch expression for details on how to operate it Remarks 1 When you have registered a watch expression with a category as the object all of I O registers belonging to that category are registered as watch expressions 2 A scope specification is automatically added to a registered watch expression R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 265 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Value area The value of I O register i
564. select the pin to be used Once a pin is selected its name is displayed in Pin area 2 Creating signal data Create the signal data input to each pin a Setting of input value In the Data area specify the value that is input to each pin see Data area b Setting of input timing In the Wait area specify the timing at which the input value is input to each pin as wait time see Wait area c Setting of the loop information When loop processing for the signal data specified in step a and b is needed specify the loop information To specify the loop information select Loop Start from the context menu on the loop start position in the Mark area and select Loop End on the loop stop position At this time the loop count can be specified In this case specify the loop count via the Loop dialog box opened by selecting Loop Dialog from the context menu The corresponding loop information marks are displayed if the setting of the loop information is completed see Mark area 3 Data copy and paste The setting values in Mark area Wait area Data area can be copied and pasted However copied data can be pasted only in the same area Copy When one or more a range of cells are selected these cells can be copied by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Copy or pressing the Ctrl C key Paste When one or more a range of cells are selected these cells can be pasted by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Pas
565. selected by default Size of DataFlash memory KBytes This property appears only when the Use DataFlash memory area property is set to Yes The size of the data flash memory area of the selected microcontroller is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property Chip select This property appears only when the Use DataFlash memory area property is set to Yes Select the chip select used for mapping of the data flash memory from the drop dawn list The selectable chip select values differ depending on the selected microcontroller Note that when the selected microcontroller is other than the V850ES core you cannot change the value of the property R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 37 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Clock You can configure the clock in this category Figure 2 42 Clock Category MINICUBE El Glock Main clack frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock freguency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock oy stem TORA DGK clack MHz 1OMHz Figure 2 43 Clock Category MINICUBE2 El Glock Main clock frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock System lt 1 gt Main clock frequency MHz lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Specify the main clock frequency before multiplier You can specify the frequency from the drop down list or by directly entering a frequency value between 0 001 and
566. set the debug tool operation environment that is selected in the Project Tree panel Figure A 5 Property Panel When IECUBE Is Selected Property es WASO IECUBE Property E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM K Bytes 256 Size of internal RAM Bytes 16384 DataF lash El Glock Main clock frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock System El Connection with Target Board Connecting with target board No Frogrammable I O Connecting with target board Set No if no target board is connected to IECUBE and set Yes if a target board is connected A Flash Self DataFlas Downloa Hook Tra This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Context menu How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node to use and then select Property from the View menu or the context menu On the Project Tree panel double click the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node to use Remark _ If this panel has been opened the detailed information on the debug tool is displayed by selecting the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 Selected node area In this area the name of the selected debug tool on the Project Tree
567. sfer direction Data bit length Select the bit length of the transmission data from the drop down list or specify it through direct input default 8 Data Phase Select the transmission reception timing to set the data phase The data clock phase is set in combination with Clock Phase as shown in Table A 18 Data Clock Phase Settings Normal Transmits receives data at the normal 3 wire serial transmission reception timing default Precede Transmits receives data at a timing half a clock of the operation clock earlier than the normal 3 wire serial transmission reception timing Clock Phase Select the transmission reception clock waveform to set the clock phase The data clock phase is set in combination with Data Phase as shown in Table A 18 Data Clock Phase Settings Normal Operates on the normal 3 wire serial clock Transfer starts at the falling edge of the clock default Reverse Operates on the reverse clock of the normal 3 wire serial clock Transfer starts at the rising edge of the clock Repeat Select this item to repeat data transfer when the Auto Send button in the Serial window has been clicked Following transmission of the last data during automatic transmission returns to the beginning of the data and performs automatic transmission Following transmission of the last data during automatic transmission stops transmission Remark For the selectable range see the user s manual of the microcontroller that is used
568. sh emulation function Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Yes Uses data flash emulation functions values Does not use data flash emulation functions 2 EEPROM Library Error The detailed information on EEPROM library error is displayed and its configuration can be changed The error values that are not returned in normal emulation can forcibly be returned by setting the properties of this category R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 221 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Generate WordWrite Specify whether to return error values in WordWrite functions to emulate error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values Specify an address in the data flash memory at which a WordWrite function error is to be generated Address generated WordWrite error This property appears only when the Generate WordWrite error property is set to Yes Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFFE in hexadecimal number values Generate BlockErase Specify whether to return error values in BlockErase functions to emulate error Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Forcibly returns error values values Does not return error values Specify an address in the data flash memory at which a BlockErase function error is to be generated Ad
569. simulation start until marker B location TF 1496 00 Clock time count between markers A and B Displayed as absolute value cD MainCik Select from the drop down list the time unit for the location information of markers A and B This item can also be set by using Time unit in the Edit menu or Time unit from the context menu Selects the waveform data display magnification ratio from the drop down list If a part of waveform data may be lost as a result of changing the display magnification ratio the confirmation dialog box is displayed Remarks 1 Up to 4 294 967 262 clocks can be counted from the simulation start up to the marker position When the count reaches the maximum value the counter is cleared to 0 and starts counting again 2 The menu for setting the magnify ratio appears dimmed during program execution so changing the ratio is unavailable 2 Client area Marker area a T Pin Name area Waveform area Pin Name area Displays the names of the pins for which timing chart display is performed Pin selection is performed by selecting the Edit menu gt gt Select Pin to open the Select Pin dialog box Marker area Displays the 2 marker headers These markers can be moved by dragging them with the mouse over this area To pe To e Waveform area Performs timing chart display for the data of the pins specified in the Pin area The following color distinctions are used according to the s
570. sion data file 433 Serial window 433 Set action into the program 154 Inset printf 154 Set PC to Here 93 Settable mapping attribute 312 Setting state of the event 156 Signal Data Editor window 367 Signal data file 367 Signal output unit interface functions 503 SuoCreateWave 504 SuoGetWaveHandle 506 SuoSendWaveFile 507 SuoSetNotifySentWaveCallback 508 Simulator GUI window 361 Software Break 95 300 301 Source display mode 137 294 Start Timer 300 Start Timer event 146 301 Start Tracing 300 Start Tracing event 133 301 Statusbar 176 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 532 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Step execution 93 Step in execution 94 174 176 Step over execution 94 175 176 Stop program 95 Access to variables 97 Manually stop the execution 95 Stop at the arbitrary position 95 Stop Timer 300 Stop Timer event 146 301 Stop Tracing 300 Stop Tracing event 133 301 Structure 271 277 Summary 11 SuoCreateExtbus 478 SuoCreatePin 469 SuoCreateSerialCSI 487 SuoCreateSerialUART 485 SuoCreateTimer 462 SuoCreateWave 504 SuoGetExtbusHandle 480 SuoGetMainClock 460 SuoGetPinHandle 470 SuoGetSerialHandle 489 SuoGetSerialParameterCSI 496 SuoGetSerialParameterUART 495 SuoGetTimerHandle 463 SuoGetWaveHandl
571. source line corresponding to the address where the selected event is being set Opens the Disassemble panel and jumps to the disassemble results corresponding to the address where the selected event is being set Opens the Memory panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the address where the selected event is being set 2 15 4 Delete events To delete the set event select the event and click the x button in the toolbar Note that it is not possible to delete the built in events Unconditional Trace event and Run Break Timer event R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 157 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 For the Break event of execution type it is possible to delete the set event to click the event mark displayed in the Editor panel Disassemble panel 2 To delete all of the set event select Select All from the context menu then click the button note however that it is not possible to delete the built in events 2 15 5 Write comment to events The user can write comments for each event that has been set To input comments click the Comment area after selecting the event to input comments then input directly the desired text from the keyboard the edit mode is cancelled by pressing the Esc key After editing the comments complete the editing by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region Up to 256 characters can be inputted for the
572. specified format Figure 2 161 Output Example of the Trace Data Source Disassemble Address Data Source Disassemble Address Data R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 144 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Measure Execution Time of Programs This section describes how to measure the execution time of the program 2 12 1 Measure execution time until stop of the execution In the debug tool there is a function to measure the program execution time Run Break time from the start to the stop Therefore when the program starts its execution the execution time is automatically measured You can check the result of the measurement by either one of the following Caution Simulator To use this function Yes must be specified with the Use timer function property in the Timer category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel Remark This function is operated by the Run Break Timer event which is one of the built in events set by default in the debug tool The Run Break Timer event is always set to Valid state changes not allowed 1 Check in the status bar After the program is stopped the result of the measurement is displayed in the status bar on the Main window when measurements have not been performed yet Unmeasurement is displayed Figure 2 162 Example of the Result of the Run Break Timer Event Status Bar a Menu about debug _main 0x20 H BRE
573. splay mode default This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Caution A step execution is performed in instruction level units when the focus is in this panel see 2 7 3 Execute programs in steps Figure A 38 Disassemble Panel When Mixed Display Mode Is Selected Disassemble iE Start user code Do not edit comment generated F bttf4bf f jarl _TMPU Start If THRO Starti UR KiU oooaoogg S505 a Roe t End user code Do not edit comment generated her OOO0006S 4 QOOU008S6 O00 callt ixi AIER bhfd _m intix Nog00088a R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 247 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 39 Disassemble Panel When Mixed Display Mode Is Not Selected Disasse mbke l Toolbar FE E Hr View QOO000 G2 a efed main QUOO00062c QOO000d e btTtf4bff QOO0008S onig OOO0008S 4 QOOU008S6 O00 QOO0008S6 bhfd QOO0008S 4 OO00 CLOCK Init QOO000bS chig 400 7d0f 6 cUefects OO0U0083e INLINE F OOO000846 015a ALINEE iy OO00084e OOO000850 HOU 4 40ottct 40orzota cH icf char bifa 000000 E a OOO00082c OO0000d2e bffT4ett OOO000SS oa lo OOO0008s4 OOQU0083 6 000z OOO000S3 8 bifd OOO0008sa OOO CLOCK Init 0000c UO000083e OO00084 ALLIE E n ALINEE iy OO000084c OOO00085 0 NEE This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar
574. ssembled text line is highlighted It is interpreted as if a break event Software or Hardware Break event has been set at the target address and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 15 Manage Events for details Table 2 7 Event Marks of the Breakpoint Event Type Event Mark Software Break flECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 O oly Hardware Break Hi R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 96 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 126 Breakpoint Setting Example Event area ft Set PLL st OOUU00e42 e eel ed fies ia FLLON 0U fh Set TH an Paval O00 0 OOQU00846 ia 5 ON O000846 c 405 f ct Cautions 1 Since a breakpoint is set as a break event and managed as a event restrictions apply to the number of breakpoints that can be simultaneously set Also see 2 15 6 Notes for setting events for details on breakpoints e g limits on the number of enabled events 2 IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG The real time display update function and software break function are exclusive of each other Therefore software breaks cannot be used when the real time display update function is enabled see 4 Display modify the memory contents during program execution 3 No software breaks can be set to the data flash memory area 4 Breakpoints cannot be set at lines in the event area with the background color in gray showing to the corresponding address of the lin
575. ssion start is delayed for half the baud rate cycle of UART 3 This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a call back function Syntax include suo h int SuoSendSerialData SuoHandle handle unsigned long data Argument s Handle of the serial interface data Transmit data 1 data Return value SUO_NOERROR Normal completion Exit with error abend see B 4 8 Error numbers Description This function is used to start transmitting one serial data It takes time to complete transmitting the serial data If you want to know the timing of transmission completion set the transmission end notification function by using the SuoSetNotifySentSerialCallback function If this function is called for a serial interface that is currently transmitting data an error occurs Example include suo h SuoHandle hSeriall void funcl void SuoSendSerialData hSeriall 0x80 Send 0x80 R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 497 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE SuoSendSerialDataList Performs serial transmission more than one data Caution This function cannot be called in the MakeUserModel function It can only be called in a callback function Syntax include suo h int SuoSendSerialDataList SuoHandle handle long count unsigned long dataList Argumeni s Handle of the serial int
576. ssumed by flash by flash macro specifications macro specifications Maximum number of times Specifies the maximum number of times that is that is assumed by flash assumed by flash macro specifications macro specifications Retries for the maximum Specifies the maximum number of times of retry number of times specified The delay time is maximum the erasing speed is longest R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 223 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download File Settings tab This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed For details on the download function see 2 5 Download Upload Programs 1 Download 2 Debug Information Figure A 28 Property Panel Download File Settings Tab Other than MINICUBE2 E1 Serial Property ee VESO AGA Property Download files i CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM betore download io Gutomatic change method of event setting position Suspend event 2 gt E Debug Infor mation Execute to the specified symbol after GPU Reset Yes Specified symbol main Startup start symbol _ start Startup end symbol _startend Download Flash Self DataFlas Downlo Hook Tra Figure A 29 Property Panel Download File Settings Tab MINICUBE2 Property ee WASO MINICUBE Property 1 E Download Download files i C
577. start event or the stop event lt Pass Count gt Shows the measurement result of the pass count of the timer If a timer overflow occurs see 2 12 3 Measurable time ranges or if the illegal value was acquired OVERFLOW is displayed lt Total Shows the measurement result of the timer total execution time The unit is either of ns us ms s min if however the unit is in min a value in s unit also appears If a timer overflow occurs see 2 12 3 Measurable time ranges or if the illegal value was acquired OVERFLOW is displayed lt Average gt Shows the measurement result of average execution of the timer The unit is either of ns us ms s min if however the unit is in min a value in s unit also appears lt Max gt Shows the measurement result of the maximum execution time of the timer The unit is either of ns us ms s min if however the unit is in min a value in s unit also appears lt Min gt Shows the measurement result of the minimum execution time of the timer The unit is either of ns us ms s min if however the unit is in min a value in s unit also appears lt Set print event gt Shows the variable expression and the character strings specified in the Action Events dialog box 2 Click this line to display the detailed information of the lower lines 3 Comment area The user can write comments for each event that has been set To input comments click on this area or select Edi
578. ster 3 Type Byte Size area The type information of each I O register is displayed in the following formats lt Type of I O register gt lt Access attribute gt lt All accessible sizes gt lt Size gt All accessible sizes All accessible sizes are demarcated by a comma and listed in order of the smallest size in bit units Size The size of the I O register is displayed It is displayed by supplying the unit in byte units in the event that it can be displayed in byte units and in bit units in the event that it can be displayed on in bit units Examples 1 The case of IOR R W 1 8 1 byte An I O register that is readable writable and 1 bit accessible 8 bit accessible and whose size is 1 byte 2 The case of IOR R W 1 1 bit An I O register that is readable writable and 1 bit accessible and whose size is 1 byte Remark The type information is sorted in the character code order by clicking on the header part of this area 4 Address area The address that each I O register is mapped is displayed hexadecimal number notation fixing However in the case of the bit register it is displayed by providing a bit offset value like the following examples Examples 1 The case of OxFF40 This is allocated to the address OxFF40 2 The case of OxFF40 4 This is allocated to bit 4 of the address OxFF40 4 bit register Remark The addresses are sorted in ascending order of numerical values by clicking on the heade
579. stored 2 The main clock and sub clock cannot be input from this window Set the main clock sub clock oscillation frequency on the Connect Settings tab in the Property panel 3 If inputting of signals is started during program break the signals will actually be input when the program is resumed from the break Remarks 1 The following data can be displayed or edited in this window Newly created signal data Previously created signal data files File of signal data previously obtained by performing simulation and saving the results as output sig nal data 2 On the titlebar of this window Project file name Serial number from 0 wvi is displayed when the project file has been loaded However after having loaded a project file of PM then if you save a file as the project file of CubeSuite Project file name CS Serial number from 0 wvi is displayed on the titlebar Figure A 81 Signal Data Editor Window Signal Data Editor SEE co ee Co Co er Co ooo eR O S 0 I l l 0 I I l R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 367 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Dedicated menu Signal Data Editor window Signal Data Editor toolbar Context menu Operation How to open Click the button Select Signal Data Editor from the Simulator menu Description o
580. t Comment form the context menu after selecting the event in which you want to input comments and then input directly the desired text from the keyboard the edit mode is cancelled by pressing down the Esc key After editing the comments complete the editing by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region Up to a maximum of 256 characters can be inputted for the comments and this is saved as the settings of the user during use R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 304 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Deletes the selected event Note that it is not possible to delete the built in events Unconditional Trace event and Run Break Timer event Displays events related to the Hardware Break default Displays events related to the Software Break default IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 Displays events related to the trace default IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Displays events related to the timer default IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Displays events related to the action event Printf event default Displays events related to the built in event Unconditional Trace event Run Break Timer event default Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the address where the selected event is being set Opens the Disassemble panel and jumps to the disassemble results corresponding to the addres
581. t PC to Here Sets the address of the line at the current caret position to the current PC valueNote Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret or during execution of a program Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to the specified line Jump to Function Jumps to the function that is selected or at the caret position regarding the selected characters and the words at the caret position as functions see 4 Jump to functions Back To Last Cursor Goes back to the position before operating Jump to Function Position Forward To Next Cursor Forwards to the position before operating Back To Last Cursor Position Position Tag Jump Jumps to the corresponding line and column in the corresponding file if the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position see b Tag jump R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 236 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Break Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the break related event Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 2 Event area Set Hardware Break Sets a breakpoint Hardware Break event to the line at the caret position see 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint N Set Software Break Sets a breakpoint Software Break event to the line at th
582. t Signal Category IECUBE2 O Mask for Input Sienal Mask HLDRG signal Ho Mask RESET signal Ho Mask STOP signal Ho Mask WAIT signal Ho With the properties shown below select Yes to mask the signal from the drop down list all properties below are set to No by default Mask NMIn signal IECUBE Mask HLDRQ signal Ne Mask RESET signal Mask STOP signal Mask WAIT signal Note Note When No is specified with the Connection with Target Board property in the Connect Setting tab these properties are fixed to Yes after connecting to the debug tool changes not allowed j External Flash Memory Download IECUBE2 You can configure downloading to an external flash memory in this category See 5 Download to external flash memory IECUBE2 MINICUBE E1 JTAG for details on how to download to an external flash memory and this category configuration 3 Flash Self Emulation Settings tab IECUBE In the Flash Self Emulation Settings tab IECUBE tab general configurations on flash self programing emulation Code flash can be done a Flash Self Emulation b Macro Service Error c Security Flag Emulation d Reset Vector Boot Swap R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 28 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Flash Self Emulation You can configure the flash self programing emulation function in this category Figure 2 27 Flash Self Emulation
583. t are either overlapped or non supported by the OS currently being used do not appear Acurrent encoding of the file default A regulation encoding of the OS currently being used Unicode UTF 8 Japanese Shift JIS Japanese JIS Allow 1 byte Kana SO SI Japanese EUC 2 New line code area Specify the new line code to be set from the drop down list Either of the following can be selected Keep current new line code Windows CR LF Macintosh CR Unix LF R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 326 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Reload the file Reloads the file with the specified encoding and new line code when the OK button is clicked an Does not reload the file when the OK button is clicked default Function buttons Sets the specified encoding and new line code to the file and closes this dialog box When the Reload the file check box is selected reloads the file with the specified encoding and new line code and closes this dialog box Cancels the setting and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 327 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Initialize dialog box This dialog box is used to initialize memory see 6 Modify the memory contents in batch initialize The memory area in the specified address range is repe
584. t be registered by this function because the initialization timing has passed even if a function is registered by a function other than this function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 511 of 538 Oct 01 2010 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Example include suo h SuoHandle hTim1 SuoHandle hPinP0OO SuoHandle hExtbus1 void InitFunc void void ResetFunc void SuoUserEntry void MakeUserModel const char option Create source SuoCreateTimer TIM1 amp hTim1l Create TIMI SuoCreatePin P00 amp hPinPOO Create POO SuoCreateExtbus EXTBUS1 0x200000 Ox1000 amp hExtbusl Create EXTBUS1 Set callbacks SuoSetInitCallback InitFunc Set initialize function SuoSetResetCallback ResetFunc Set reset function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 512 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B USER OPEN INTERFACE Performs the initialization processing as a callback function Caution InitFunc is a place holder for a user defined function name so this function name does not have to be used Syntax include suo h void InitFunc void Argumeni s None Return value None Description InitFunc describes initialization processing Use the SuoSetInitCalloack function to register InitFunc as a callback function R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 513 of 538 Oct 0
585. t changes to the original value Group button Clicking this button loads the active value to the connected pin The value of the Group button having the same group name returns to the original value R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 396 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Analog Button Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the pin connection information of analog buttons which are one of the connection parts in the O Panel window Input to the simulator can be done from pin connected analog buttons in the Simulation mode There are two types of analog button display styles figure and bitmap These styles can be changed on the Style tab Figure A 91 Analog Button Properties Dialog Box Analog Button Connection Tab Analog Button Properties Analoge Button Connection Style Active Arrange Label Voltagem A Row OColumn ee 2 dut o o O oi oa 4s Figure A 92 Analog Button Properties Dialog Box Style Tab Analoge Button Properties nalog Button Connection Style Figure Preview Shape Rectanele rary Line Fill up Thickness Active 1 7 Inactive bd Active 2 t Tnactive Delete Function buttons Gop ly R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 397 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section
586. t fits in the rectangular area The line thickness and shape are the default settings c Polygon Select the Figure menu gt gt Polygon or click the button on the toolbar gt The mouse cursor changes to a cross shape and polygon drawing becomes possible Click at each position marking an apex of the polygon gt The apexes are linked by a straight line in the order in which they were clicked Drawing of the polygon is completed by double clicking gt The line thickness and shape are the default settings d Pasting a bitmap You can use an arbitrary bitmap file as a figure object Select the Figure menu gt gt Paste Bitmap and then select the bitmap file bmp to be pasted gt The corresponding bitmap file is pasted in the default position in this window e Changing the figure object style The color or line style of the created figure object can be changed by any one of the following methods Specify with the Style tab of the Object Properties dialog box opened by double clicking the figure object Select the Figure menu gt gt Color of Line Color of Fill Style of Line Dotted Line Style or click the EA E button on the toolbar 3 Creating part objects You can create part objects by using connected parts provided by Simulator GUI a Selecting a part object Select the part object to be created from the Parts menu or the toolbar gt The mouse cursor changes to a cross
587. t item is displayed in the last line of the Download file list area b Property configuration of the download files to add Configure the download condition of the download file to add in the Download file property area Configure each item displayed with the following condition When the configuration is completed the file name specified in this property is displayed in the blank list of the Download file list area Specify the name of the file in the load module format to be added up to 259 characters Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard or specify with the Select Download File dialog box opened by clicking the button Available See Table 2 3 Type of Files That Can be Downloaded values R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 73 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS File type Specify the type of the file to download Here select Load module file Binary data file Download object Specify whether to download the object information from the specified file values Does not download object information Download symbol Specify whether to download the symbol information from the specified fileN values Does not download symbol information Note If the symbol information have not been downloaded the source level debugging cannot be performed Remark You can decrease the memory usage by selecting No for the Download symbol information item if the symbol inform
588. t to the selected watch expression by selecting Access Break or Trace Output from the context menu If an access event is set the mark of the watch expression is changed the event mark of a break event is displayed under the icon of the watch expression in layers When an event is set the detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel Note that events are only set to the watch expressions that are global variables static variables inside functions or file internal static variables See the following for details on how to set events 2 8 3 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 11 4 Collect execution history when the condition is met g Jump to the address with memory definition By selecting Jump to Memory from the context menu the Memory pane Memory1 opens with moving the caret to the address in which the selected watch expression is defined if the Memory panel Memory1 is already opened jump to the panel Note that this operation is disabled when more than one watch expression is selected at the same time or the CPU register I O register is selected 2 Value area The value of the registered watch expression is displayed and changed if the watch expression is a function pointer the function name is displayed in this area Notations and encodes can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item In addition a display format adding the value in hexa
589. tart address of any 1 MByte space of addresses 0x100000 to OxSFFFFFF in hexadecimal number the start address of the internal RAM area is specified by default 2 IECUBE2 Some of the trace function the timer function except for the Run Break timer and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis Therefore first specify Coverage with the Use for trace data property in the Trace category in the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel to use the coverage function with priority Note that settings described below are invalid when this property is set to other than Coverage Figure 2 168 Trace Category Setting for the Coverage Function El Trace Use for trace data Coverage clear trace memory before Unning TES Operation _at Mon stop and overwrite to trace memory Then configure the code coverage measurement function in the Coverage category in the Debug Too Settings tab of the Property pane as follows R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 150 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 169 Coverage Category IECUBE2 O Coverage Reuze coverage result Mo a Reuse coverage result Specify whether to restore the previous code coverage measurement result when connecting to the debug tool by automatically saving the acquired code coverage measurement result when disconnecting from the debug tool Select Yes to restore the previous code coverage measure
590. te or pressing the Ctrl V key When multiple a range of cells are selected the copied data is pasted to the cells repeatedly 4 Single line editing Single lines can be edited by selecting Line number area The method is the same as that described in 3 Data copy and paste Data pasted during line paste insertion is inserted immediately before the selected line 5 Signal input Input the created signal data to the input pins of the simulator while simulation is executed At this time the line whose signal is currently being input current line is highlighted in yellow during program breaks this can be changed via Inputted current line item in the Customize dialog box in order to display signal input progress There are the following types of signal data input operations Signal input start Click the 4 button or select the Edit menu gt gt Signal Input gt gt Start As a result signal input starts from the current signal input line highlighted line Signal input stop Click the button or select the Edit menu gt gt Signal Input gt gt Stop This stops signal input R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 372 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Signal reset Click the Ed button or select the Edit menu gt gt Signal Input gt gt Reset This returns the current signal input line to the beginning If signal reset was performed during signal i
591. ted 2 11 1 Configure the trace operation When tracing starts the trace data that the execution process of the program currently in execution is recorded is collected when the program is stopped tracing automatically stops You need to configure the trace operation before using the trace function The setting method differs depending on the debug tool used 1 IECUBE 2 IECUBE2 3 Simulator 1 IECUBE This trace operation can be configured in the Trace category in the Debug Tool Settings tab in the Property panel Figure 2 150 Trace Category IECUBE El Trace Use for trace data Trace select trace data Branch Pl Access Data Trace priority speed priority Clear trace memory before running YES Operation after trace memory Ig full Hon stop and overwrite to trace memory Rate of frequency division of trace time tag 1 1 20ns 14mint Trace memory zizel frames ok Enable trace data complement Yes a Use for trace data Some of the trace function the real time display update function RRM function and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis Accordingly you need to specify a function used preferentially Select Trace from the following drop down list R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 126 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Trace Uses the trace function preferentially Real time display update function RRM function Cannot be used Coverage funct
592. tems are common to all the panels Close file name Closes the currently editing Editor panel When the contents of the panel have not been saved a confirmation message is displayed Save file name Overwrites the contents of the currently editing Editor panel Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save file name As Save file name As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of the currently editing Editor panel File name Save Option Opens the Save Settings dialog box to change the encoding and new line code of the file being opened in the currently editing Editor panel Page Setup Opens the Windows dialog box to set the page layout Print Opens the Windows dialog box for printing the contents of the currently editing Editor panel Edit menu Editor panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Editor panel other items are all invalid Cancels the previous operation and restores the characters and the caret position up to 100 times Cancels the previous Undo operation and restores the characters and the caret position Cut Cuts the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Paste Inserts insert mode or overwrites overwrite mode the characters that are copied on th
593. teps the display is updated after each step In addition by enabling the Real time display update function it is also possible to update the display contents in real time even while a program is being executed This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Caution V850E2M CPU reset may be generated depending on the selected microcontroller if you change the memory value in the data flash area Memory ee Notation Size Notation Encoding OOO 00000 OOO 00010 OOO 00020 OOO 00030 OOO 00040 OOO 00050 OOO O0060 OOO 00070 OOO 00080 OOO 00030 OOO 00080 O00 00060 3 4 5 6 7 8 49 ta Figure A 35 Memory Panel When the Microcontroller without Data Flash Memory Aa a TTT L saes nater cee ere a a ET Ww R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 239 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 36 Memory Panel CPU Memory Tab When the Microcontroller with Data Flash Memory Memory FE ER Notations size Notation Encoding OOO O00 oaoot oooi oooi OOO 000 40 oaoot OOOU0060 OOOO 70 QOO 000s PEPPE Ta Toad ET ATA E E 2 3 4 h th 7 5 9 a D a d e f qo1feoog Of J01 i O01 tsoi O01 teo20 O01 fada O01 faig O01 fs050 O01 ts060 O01 teoro O01 te0e 101 101 01 01 01 01 01 01 This section describes the following
594. ter Setting Boot block last number HEX O El Flash Shield Window Function Setting Start black number Hex 0 End block number HEX 2FF Option bytes setting Chip erase when writing 7 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab configuration on the hook transaction can be done See 2 16 Use Hook Function for details on each category configuration and the function of the hook transaction R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 34 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 3 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Configure the operating environment on the Property pane below when using MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Figure 2 36 Property Panel MINICUBE V850E1 V850ES Property es WASO MINISUBE Property Main clack frequency MHz 400 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock System DGK clack MHz 1OMHz El Flash security ID FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Programmabke I O Internal ROK RAM Connect Setti Debug ToolSett Download File 5 Hook Transactio Figure 2 37 Property Panel MINICUBE V850E2M Property es VEROESM MINISUBE Property E Internal ROM RAM E Glock Main clock frequency MHz 6 00 Main clock multiply rate Sub clock frequency kHz 32 768 Monitor clock oy ste tt DGK clock MHz 1OMHz El Flash Security ID FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Internal ROM RAM N Flash Option 4 Hook Trans R20UT0264E
595. text line R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 225 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Debug Information The detailed information on debugging is displayed and its configuration can be changed Execute to the Specify whether to execute the program to the specified symbol position after CPU reset Default Yes CPU Reset Modifying Select from the drop down list Available Executes the program to the specified symbol position after CPU reset values Does not execute the program after CPU reset Specified symbol Specify the position at which the program is stop after CPU reset This property appears only when the Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property is set to Yes Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available Address expression from 0 to the end address of the address space values Startup start symbol Specify the start symbol of the text area of the startup routine Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available Address expression from 0 to the end address of the address space values Startup end symbol Specify the end symbol of the text area of the startup routine Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available Address expression from 0 to the end address of the address space values R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 226 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Flash
596. the Access memory while running category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel configure Table 2 10 Table 2 11 Table 2 12 Table 2 13 in accordance with the debugging purpose Mark Properties in Access memory while Setting Value Note running Category Update display during the execution display during Update display during the execution execution Yes default Yes default Enables the RRM DMM function Display update interval ms Integer number between 100 and 65500 Access by stopping execution Enables the pseudo RRM DMM function Except for Simulator and the microcontroller that supports multi core Set update display during the execution Yes default IECUBE automatically R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 106 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Reading Table 2 10 Target Range for Real Time Display Update Function Reading V850E1 V850ES Area IECUBE MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Simulator E1 JTAG Serial Internal Internal ROM Automatically A B Entire Impossible Entire Crk R RAM te i FE ia range Emulation memory Emulation memory Impossible Target memory Entire A B Entire range range I O register Data flash A B Entire Impossible range Note IECUBE The target range for the RRM function is limited to up to 8 locations within 2048 bytes except ID tag Therefore in CubeSuite it follows the determ
597. the Editor panel Background Default pray P color Comment Aagnbtec Comments in the case of a C source file are displayed in this color in the Editor panel Background Default pay p color String literal Aahbher String literals are displayed in this color in the Editor panel Background Default color Control code AaHhbttr Control characters are displayed in this color in the Editor panel Background Default color Highlighted areas in plug in products and the like are displayed in this color Background Mediumviol Pay Changed AaBbtec Values changed via the execution of a program are Highlight value displayed in this color in the Memory panel CPU Register Background Lightyellow l panel Local Variables panel IOR panel and Watch panel Edit value AaBbce Values forcibly modified by user are displayed in this color in the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables Background Default color panel IOR panel and Watch panel Current PC The line with the current PC position is displayed in this color in the Editor panel and Disassemble panel Background Gold color Font color Black Breakpoint The line at which a breakpoint is set is displayed in this color in the Editor panel and Disassemble panel Background P color Lightsalmon Update AgAbter Font color periodic Deeppink Areas configured for real time display updates are shown in this colo
598. the Start Tracing event that has been set is met 2 A Stop Tracing event is not indispensable for A Trace event 3 Event marks differ depending on the event state see 2 15 1 Change the state of set events valid invalid When an event is set at the point which other event is already set the event mark FS S displayed meaning more than one event is set at the point 4 Simulator When either of the Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event is set to Valid state the Use trace function property in the Trace category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel is automatically set to Yes and the trace function will be enabled 2 Execute the program Execute the program see 2 7 Execute Programs If the instruction with the Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event executes the trace data collection starts stops See 2 11 5 Display the collected execution history for how to check the collected trace data 3 Delete the Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event To delete the set Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event select Delete Event from the context menu that appears by right clicking on the event mark in the event area 2 11 4 Collect execution history when the condition is met The program execution history is collected when a condition is met 1 When an access to variables I O registers occurs Set the Point Trace event to collect information about accesses to specified variables or I O register as trace data
599. the function step execution will continue until the same nest is formed as when the jarl instruction has been executed Click the button on the debug toolbar to perform Step over execution In the case of an instruction other than jarl operation is the same as when the button is clicked Caution If Step over execution is performed for the longjmp function execution processing may not complete and may wait for a time out Execute until return is completed Return out execution Execute the current function until the program returns to the original function The program returns to the original function without executing the rest of the instructions in the current function when the step execution with this instruction is taken place at the termination of the source lines instructions execution that need to check in a function Click the button on the debug toolbar to perform Return out execution Cautions 1 Return out execution cannot be performed within main function the state of the program becomes RUN 2 Return out execution cannot be performed immediately after stepping in a function 3 Return out execution cannot be performed while processing a function prologue or epilogue 4 If Return out execution is performed in a function that called the longjmp function breaks may not occur 5 If Return out execution is performed in a recursive function the program will be executed in free run mode 6 If Return out execution is per
600. time display update function is limited to the internal RAM area and the HBUS shared memory area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 53 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c d lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt Update display during the execution Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel while executing a program Select Yes to update the display default Display update interval ms This property is valid only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms 500 is specified by default Access by release HALT mode E1 JTAG This property appears only when the Access by stopping execution property is set to Yes Specify whether to allow access to the memory area CPU registers I O registers by releasing the HALT mode from the drop down list Select Yes to allow access to the memory area CPU registers I O registers by releasing the HALT mode default Set Event While Running You can configure the setting of events while executing a program in this category lt 1 gt Figure 2 79 Set Event While Running Category O Set Event hile Running net event by stopping execution momentarily Mo
601. tion accords with the description of C language For an array an element number is displayed in For a function its size number of bytes is displayed in This area cannot be edited 5 Address area The address of the local variable is displayed When a variable is assigned to the register the name of the register is displayed This area cannot be edited R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 272 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar The buttons below become invalid during execution of a program fz Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel Notation Displays values on this panel in the default notation according to the type of variable default Displays values on this panel in Float The following buttons to specify the notation of values are displayed EE Note that when the value is not 4 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation Tep a a Displays values on this panel in Double Note that when the value is not 4 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value Encoding The following buttons to specify the encoding of character variables are displayed Displays character variables in ASCII code default nae H F iz Displays character variables
602. toolbar see the Parts menu Parts toolbar 6 Figure toolbar This toolbar can be used when the O Pane window has the focus For details on this toolbar see the Figure menu Figure toolbar Window display area This area is used to display various windows Signal Data Editor window Timing Chart window I O Panel window or Serial window The displayed window can be changed in size or an icon can be created in this area R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 364 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Customize dialog box This dialog box is used to set or change the color and fonts for the Signal Data Editor window Timing Chart window or Serial window Figure A 79 Customize Dialog Box Color Tab For The Timing Chart Window Customize Un sampline Grid Text Backeround Function buttons Courier Hew This section describes the following How to open Color tab Font tab Function buttons R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 365 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open With the Signal Data Editor window Timing Chart window or Serial window in focus select Customize from the Option menu Color tab 1 Color setting area Set and change the color of each part in the window List The parts for which color change is possible are displayed in list fo
603. ts 50 MHz IECUBE 32 bits 200 MHz IECUBE2 used for timer measurement from the drop down list In the drop down list following frequency division ratios are shown resolution maximum measurement time are shown in IECUBE 1 1 20ns 1 4min default 1 2 40ns 2 8min 1 4 80ns 5 7min 1 8 160ns 11 4min 1 16 320ns 22 8min 1 32 640ns 45 6min 1 64 1280ns 1 5h 1 128 2560ns 3 0h 1 256 5120ns 6 0h 1 512 10240ns 12 2h 1 1024 20480ns 24 4h 1 2048 40960ns 48 8h 1 4096 81920ns 97 6h IECUBE2 1 1 5ns 21 4s default 1 2 10ns 42 9s 1 4 20ns 1 4min 1 8 40ns 2 8min 1 16 80ns 5 71 min 1 32 160ns 11 42min 1 64 320ns 22 8min 1 128 640ns 45 6min 1 256 1280ns 1 5h 1 512 2560ns 3 0 h 1 1024 5120ns 6 0h 1 2048 10240ns 12 2h 1 4096 20480ns 24 4h R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 27 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS h Coverage You can configure the coverage function in this category See 2 13 Measure Coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator for details on the coverage function and this category configuration i Mask for Input Signal You can configure the input signal masking in this category Figure 2 25 Mask for Input Signal Category IECUBE El Mask for Input Sienal Mask NMIO sternal Ho Mask NMO signal MHo Mask NMI signal MHo Mask HLDRG signal MHo Mask RESET signal MHo Mask STOP signal Ho Mask WAIT signal Mo Figure 2 26 Mask for Inpu
604. tton is clicked while the program is stopped signal input starts automatically the next time the program execution is started If this button is clicked while the program is running signal input is stopped If this button is clicked while the program is stopped signal input does not start automatically even if the program execution is started The current signal input line line highlighted with yellow is returned to the beginning Context menu The following context menus are available at each area in the Client area 1 Pin area Enables data input to the pin default Disables data input to the pin Select Pin Opens the Select Pin dialog box The pin s for which input signal data is to be created or edited is are selected in this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 370 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Line number Cut Cuts the selected range and saves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected range and copies it to the clipboard Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the selected location Delete Deletes the selected range 3 Mark area Cut Cuts the selected cell and saves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected cell and copies it to the clipboard Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the selected location Delete Deletes the selected cell Loop Start Sets the loop start mark Loop End Sets the loop end
605. tton will be disabled Cancels the trace data search and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 336 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Source Level tab Use this tab to search the acquired trace data at the source level Caution Ifthe Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator is set to Disassemble display mode then performing an source level search via this tab will not perform the target search correctly In order to perform an source level search set the mode to Mixed display mode or Source display mode Figure A 65 Trace Search Dialog Box Source Level Tab Trace Search earch object The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line The execution part is retrieved specifying the function The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable search condition Search range Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator select button on the toolbar On the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator select Find from the context menu R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 337 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Search object area Select the searc
606. ttp www renesas com 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Colophon 1 0 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT0264EJ0100
607. ty appears only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100 ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly specify the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms 500 is selected by default Set update display during the execution automatically IECUBE This property appears only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Select Yes when letting the IECUBE set the area displayed in the Watch panel Memory panel as automatically as possible as an area to be updated by the real time display update function and updating the displayed content during execution of the program default R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 25 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 5 gt Access by release HALT mode This property appears only when the Access by stopping execution property is set to Yes Specify whether to allow access to the memory area CPU registers I O registers by releasing the HALT mode from the drop down list Select Yes to allow access to the memory area CPU registers I O registers by releasing the HALT mode default c Set Event While Running You can configure the setting of events while executing a program in this category Figure 2 21 Set Event While Running Category El Set Event While Runnine oet e
608. u Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder in which the file is saved from the drop down list 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in the Save in and Save as type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of the file to save R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 355 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area a Editor panel The following file types are displayed depending on the file being edited Section fle sf CA8S0 Symbol information file sfg CX b CPU Register panel Watch panel IOR panel Call Stack panel Local Variables panel The following file types are displayed Select the format in which to save the file from the drop down list Text file txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV format ote Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting c Output panel The following file types are displayed The contents can be saved only in text format Text file txt Text format default Function buttons Saves the file with the specified name R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 356 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Data Save File d
609. umber Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in octal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in binary number Buta eS 5 HA ABC Displays the character string of the selected item including sub items in ASCII code If the character size is 2 bytes and above it is displayed with the characters for each 1 byte arranged side by side Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data displays it in the default notation Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that when the value is not 8 byte data displays it in the default notation Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value 2 Modify the CPU register contents The CPU register values can be edited Double click the value of the CPU register to edit in the Value area to switch the value to edit mode press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode To write the edited value to the target memory directly enter the value from the keyboard then press the Enter key Caution This operation cannot be performed during program execution 3 Display modify the CPU register contents during program execution By registering a CPU register to the Watch panel as a watch expression the value of the CPU register can be displayed modified not only while the program is stopped but in execution See 2 9 6 Display change watch ex
610. umbers directly into the text boxes in base 10 format or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items If the left hand text box is left blank it is treated as if 0 were specified If the right hand text box is left blank it is treated as if the last number were specified lt 5 gt Click the Search Backward Search Forward button When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the large number to small and the search results are shown selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the small number to large and the search results are shown selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator 2 11 8 Save the contents of execution history Contents of the collected trace data can be saved with range selection in text files txt CSV files csv When saving to the file the latest information is acquired from the debug tool and it is saved according with the display format on this panel The following Data Save dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Trace Data As In this dialog box follow the steps below Figure 2 160 Save Execution History Data Save Dialog Box Data Saye Trace Data File Name WGubeSurtelTrace Data s A File Type Text files O txt2 s nave Range Number mS 1 Specify File Name Speci
611. ution part is retrieved specifying the global variable item in the Search object area and then follow the operation below lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Specify Variable Name You can either type the variable name to be find directly into the text box or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Searches are case insensitive and only complete matches are retrieved Specify Kind Select the access type Reference Substitution Reference or Substitution from the drop down list Specify Value You can either type the accessed variable value directly into the text box or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 142 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The variable value can also be specified as a range In this case specify a range by specifying variable values in both the left and right text boxes If the right hand text box is blank then access locations with the fixed variable values specified in the left hand text box will be searched for lt 4 gt Specify Number Specify the range within the trace data to search via the number displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specify the starting number in the left text box and the ending number in the right text box 0 to last number are specified by default You can either type the n
612. vent by stopping execution momentarily No lt 1 gt Set event by stopping execution momentarily Specify whether to forcibly pause the execution for events that cannot be set while executing a program or operating the tracer timer For details on the event types that are affected by this property see Table 2 25 Event Types That Can be Set and Deleted during Execution V850E1 V850ES Select Yes to set events above while execution No is selected by default d Break You can configure the break function in this category Figure 2 22 Break Category IECUBE IECUBE2 El Break First using type of breakpoint software break stop emulation of peripherals when stopping Mo Use open break function NotOutput signal lt 1 gt First using type of breakpoint Specify from the following drop down list a breakpoint type to use with priority when setting it with a one click operation of the mouse in the Editor panel Disassemble panel See 2 8 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on breakpoints Software break Sets software breakpoint with priority default Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint with priority lt 2 gt Stop emulation of peripherals when stopping Specify from the drop down list whether the peripheral emulation function of emulator is stopped while stopping the program execution Select Yes to terminate No is selected by default lt 3 gt Use open break function Sp
613. wed Examples 1 main c 40 2 main c 3 main lt 2 gt Specify Number Specify the range within the trace data to search via the number displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specify the starting number in the left text box and the ending number in the right text box 0 to last number are specified by default You can either type the numbers directly into the text boxes in base 10 format or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 141 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b c lt 3 gt If the left hand text box is left blank it is treated as if 0 were specified If the right hand text box is left blank it is treated as if the last number were specified Click the Search Backward Search Forward button When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the large number to small and the search results are shown selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator When the Search Backward button is clicked search is taken place in the order from the small number to large and the search results are shown selected in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Search with specifying the function name Select the The execution part is retrieved specifying the function item in the Search object area and then follow the operat
614. ween branch instructions that cannot be traced by hardware can be performed Select Yes to perform complementary display default Note that the trace memory is cleared automatically if you change the setting of this property R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 128 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 IECUBE2 This trace operation can be configured in the Trace category in the Debug Tool Settings tab in the Property panel Figure 2 151 Trace Category IECUBE2 El Trace Use for trace data Trace select trace data Branch PG Access Data DMA is traced Yes Select OMA trace data Gocess ype Access Address Data 5i Trace priority speed priority Clear trace memory before running Yes Operation after trace memory is Tull Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Trace memory zizel frames ok Enable trace data complement Yes a Use for trace data Some of the trace function the timer function except for the Run Break timer and the coverage function are used on a mutually exclusive basis Accordingly you need to specify a function used preferentially Select Trace from the following drop down list Trace Uses the trace function preferentially Timer function Cannot be used Timer related events except for the Run Break timer are also disabled invalid Coverage function Cannot be used Timer Uses the timer function preferentially Trace function Only trace branch instruct
615. when the flash memory is damaged the error returned when the flash memory is damaged will not be generated during normal emulation Select Yes to return the error value all the properties are set to Yes by default Generate FlashBlockErase error Generate FlashBlockVerify error Generate FlashWordWrite error Generate FlashBlockBlankCheck error Generate FlashSetInfo error Generate FlashFLMDCheck error R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 29 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Security Flag Emulation You can configure the function on the security flag emulation in this category The initial value of the security flag is emulated when the security has been set to the flash memory Figure 2 29 Security Flag Emulation Category El Security Flag Emulation Disable chip erase Mo Digable block erase Ho Disable read No Disable program No Disable boot block cluster reprogram No lt 1 gt Disable chip erase Specify whether to emulate to disable chip erase from the drop down list Select Yes to emulate to disable chip erase No is selected by default lt 2 gt Disable block erase Specify whether to emulate to disable block erase from the drop down list Select Yes to emulate to disable block erase No is selected by default lt 3 gt Disable read This property does not appear when the flash memory process is Type1 and the specification type of the fl
616. wing How to open Description of each area How to open From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 172 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menubar Menu items related to the debugging are as follows Remark The items that can be selected in each menu can be customized using the User Setting dialog box a View The View menu provides the following items and functions default Debug Manager Opens the Debug Manager panel V850E2M This item is invalid when the selected microcontroller version does not support multi core or while disconnecting from the debug tool V850E2M Watch The following cascade menus are displayed to open the Watch panel laa These items are invalid while disconnecting from the debug tool Memory The following cascade menus are displayed to open the Memory panel These items are invalid while disconnecting from the debug tool Opens the Memory panel Memory3 Opens the Memory panel Memory4 Opens the IOR panel This item is invalid while disconnecting from the debug tool CPU Register Opens the CPU Register panel This item is invalid while disconnecting from the debug tool Trace Opens the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator IECUBE IECUBE2 This item is invalid while disconnecting fro
617. wn is displayed Disconnect Cancels the connected status of the pins selected When connection is completed is displayed Function buttons Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 426 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Object Properties dialog box This property dialog box is used to set or change the connection information fed to the pins of figure object including text and bitmap of the I O Panel window Show hide can be switched for each pin connected object by the output status of the connected pins in the Simulation mode The default status of each signal is active HIGH Display styles can be changed on the Style tab Figure A 113 Object Properties Dialog Box Object Connection Tab Object Properties Style Object Connection APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Pin Connect Static Connection Pin Name Dynamic Connection Pin Hame 1 Fin Name 2 Active Level L w HIGH Function butors Funoton butions Figure A 114 Object Properties Dialog Box Style Tab Object Properties Style Object Connection Fill Up olor Line Cokr E Thickness T R20UT0264
618. x Hexadecimal Notation Displays array indexes on this panel in hexadecimal number for Array Index 4 Bytes Displays the value of the selected item as 32 bit data Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 and jumps to the address which the selected watch expression is defined see g Jump to the address with memory definition Reset Color Resets highlighting of the selected watch expression whose value has been changed by executing a program This item becomes invalid during execution of a program R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 286 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Call Stack panel This panel is used to display the call stack information for the function call see 2 10 1 Display call stack information This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Caution Nothing is displayed on this panel during execution of a program When the execution of a program is stopped items in each area are displayed Remark When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 46 Call Stack Panel Call Stack Toolbar a Notation Encoding ha f t Depth Gall stack 0 maint voo0est lt 3 outh mainc 71 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Call Stack pane
619. x Ignore the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Apply all setting does not close this dialog box Help Display the help of this dialog box R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 350 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building and debugging Figure A 73 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category Option General Build Debug Startup and E xi Display Text Editor Enable Rapid Build Font and Color External Tools When preserving an edited source file when the rapid 1 Build Debug build wae made effective a build begins a build and ty Update Is performed concurrently with edit a When domg a rapid build Tl recommend to preserve 5 Others It briskly by Gtr after edit of one file User Information Observe registered files changing 2 Enable Break Sound 3 nitialize Settings 4 hitialize All Settings Cancel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enable the rapid build N te feature default oOo Do not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling th
620. y measures the execution time of a program with start of the program execution and stops the measurement with stop of the program execution This event cannot be deleted because of the built in event 2 this event is set to a Valid state by default gt See 2 12 1 Measure execution time until stop of the execution Starts stops collecting the trace data when the condition specified with Start Tracing and Stop Tracing is met this event is displayed when a Start Tracing event or a Stop Tracing event is set gt See 2 11 3 Collect execution history in the arbitrary section Starts stops measuring the execution time of a program when the condition specified with Start Timer and Stop Timer is met this event is displayed when a Start Timer event or a Stop Timer event is set gt See 2 12 2 Measure execution time in the arbitrary section IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Records the information as the trace data when accessing the specified variable or I O register during execution of a program gt See 2 11 4 Collect execution history when the condition is met Executes printf command in software processing after temporary stopping a program in execution at an arbitrary position action event gt See 2 14 1 Inset printf Set a 2 This is set in the debug tool by default Remark The following event types are also displayed when an event breakpoint or break event is set on the Function panel or the Variabl
621. y which item should be given priority when using the trace function from the following drop down list Speed priority Traces giving priority to the real time performance default Data priority Traces after stopping the execution pipeline of the CPU temporarily so that no data is missed R20UT0264EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 127 of 538 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d e Clear trace memory before running Specify from the drop down list whether to clear initialize the trace memory before tracing starts in this property Select Yes to clear the memory default Remark You can forcibly clear the trace memory when clicking the button in the toolbar in the Trace panel ECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation after the trace memory is full with the collected trace data from the following drop down list Non stop and overwrite to Continues overwriting the older trace data after the trace memory is full default trace memory When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to Yes at the time of a resumption the trace data is collected after clearing the trace memory Stop trace When the trace memory is full the trace data stops writing the program does not stop execution When the Clear trace memory before running property is set to No the trace data is not collected even if the program is executed again When the trace
622. z values Specify the clock frequency for using trace function Default 80 00 Modifying Directly enter from the keyboard Available 1 to 999 999 unit MHz values Specify the clock frequency for using timer trace function Default CPU clock frequency Modifying Select from the drop down list Available CPU clock frequency Uses the CPU clock frequency Specify clock Specifies an arbitrary frequency property items to specify values frequency become valid in the lower area Specify the unit of the clock frequency for timer trace This property appears only when the Select Timer Trace clock frequency property is set to Specify clock frequency Default values rCENESAS Modifying Select from the drop down list Available The unit of the frequency is in MHz The unit of the frequency is in kHz Page 195 of 538 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Trace clock The operation of this property differs depending on the specification with the Select Timer Trace frequency clock frequency property Simulator When Specify clock frequency is specified Specify the clock frequency for timer trace When CPU clock frequency is specified displays the following changes not allowed While disconnecting from the debug tool While connecting to the debug tool CPU clock frequency Default V850E1 V850ES 4 00 V850E2M 8 00 Modifying Directly enter from

CubeSuite Ver.1.40 Integrated Development Environment User`s

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents